TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

1678MCC

Rel. 4.3

OPTICAL MULTIBAND PLATFORM

VOL. 1/1

3AG24163BEAA – Ed. 03
3AG24163BEAA – Ed. 03
 DESIGN SPECIFICATION
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

- 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

- 1.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- 1.2 Handbook Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- 1.3 Customer Documentation 1678 Metro Core Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- 1.3.1 Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- 1.3.2 Service Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- 1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- 1.5 Target Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- 1.6 Handbook Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

- 2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

- 2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- 2.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

- 3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

- 4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

- 4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- 4.1.1 General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- 4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–up & Commissioning, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- 4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- 4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- 4.3 Suggestions, Notes and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
- 4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

- 5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

- 6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL–LUCENT CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

- 6.1 Products, Product-releases, Versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
- 6.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
- 6.3 Aims of Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
- 6.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

03 080325 R4.3.1 B. WILKE B. HANNEMANN

02 080304 R4.3.1 B. WILKE B. HANNEMANN

01 071207 R4.3 B. WILKE B. HANNEMANN

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

1678MCC REL. 4.3

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 1 / 531

531
 - 6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same Product Release (same Handbook Part Number) . . 45
- 6.4.2 Notes for Handbooks relevant to Software Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- 6.4.3 Changes due to new Product Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- 6.5 Documentation supply on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- 6.5.1 Contents, Creation and Production of a CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

not permitted without written authorization.

- 6.5.3 CD–ROM Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

- 7 REGISTERED TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

- 8 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
- 8.1 Introduction to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
- 8.2 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
- 8.3 1678MCC Main Shelf Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- 8.4 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
- 8.4.1 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
- 8.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
- 8.4.3 Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
- 8.5 1678MCC Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
- 8.5.1 Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
- 8.5.2 TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

- 9 RACK CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
- 9.1 Configuration Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
- 9.2 Rack Configuration for SONET markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
- 9.3 LAN Switches (LSX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
- 9.4 Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
- 9.5 Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

- 10 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE MAIN SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

- 10.1 1678MCC Main Shelf (SR78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- 10.1.1 Equipment Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
- 10.1.2 Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
- 10.2 Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
- 10.3 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

- 11 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE LO EXTENSION SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

- 11.1 Lower Order Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- 11.1.1 Equipment Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
- 11.1.2 Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
- 11.1.3 Connection to the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
- 11.2 Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
- 11.3 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

- 12 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE OED SHELVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

- 12.1 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
- 12.1.1 Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
- 12.1.2 Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
- 12.1.3 Basic Function of the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
- 12.1.4 I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

- 12.1.5 System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

- 12.1.6 Connection to the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
- 12.1.7 Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 2 / 531

531
 - 12.1.8 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
- 12.2 1662SMC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
- 12.2.1 Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
- 12.2.2 1662SMC: Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
- 12.2.3 Basic Function of the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 12.2.4 System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

not permitted without written authorization.

- 12.2.5 Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

- 12.2.6 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

- 13 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

- 13.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
- 13.1.1 Centralized Common Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
- 13.1.2 Equipment Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
- 13.1.3 Traffic Ports boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
- 13.1.4 Lower Order Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
- 13.2 Subsystems and involved Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
- 13.3 Connections Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
- 13.3.1 High Order SDH/SONET/OTN Cross Connect Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
- 13.3.2 20/40G Lower Order Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
- 13.3.3 160G Lower Order Partsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
- 13.3.4 Transmission Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
- 13.3.5 Connection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
- 13.4 Signal Management Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
- 13.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
- 13.4.2 SDH functional Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
- 13.4.3 ITU–T/ETSI SDH Functional Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
- 13.4.4 Matrix Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
- 13.5 Controller Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
- 13.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
- 13.5.2 FLC and SLC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
- 13.5.3 External Communication and Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
- 13.6 Synchronization Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
- 13.7 Protection Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
- 13.7.1 EPS Protection Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
- 13.7.2 EPS Protection 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
- 13.7.3 EPS Protection 1662SMC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
- 13.7.4 Network Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
- 13.7.5 Restoration – Support of the GMPLS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
- 13.8 Performance Monitoring Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
- 13.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
- 13.8.2 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
- 13.9 External Interfaces Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
- 13.10 Power Supply Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
- 13.10.1 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
- 13.10.2 OEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
- 13.11 Equipment Alarms and Tests Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
- 13.11.1 Battery Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
- 13.11.2 RUM, RUTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
- 13.11.3 RUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
- 13.11.4 Fuse Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
- 13.11.5 Test Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

- 13.12 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

- 13.12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
- 13.12.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 3 / 531

531
 - 13.12.3 Architectural Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
- 13.12.4 Control of the (NG)TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
- 13.12.5 NGTRU Alarm Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
- 13.12.6 Hardware Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
- 13.12.7 Supported Customer individual Housekeeping contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 13.12.8 Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

not permitted without written authorization.

- 13.13 Remote Inventory Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

- 13.14 OED Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
- 13.14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
- 13.14.2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
- 13.14.3 Mechanical OED Integration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
- 13.14.4 SW OED Integration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
- 13.14.5 Kinds of OEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
- 13.14.6 OED Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
- 13.15 1678MCC Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
- 13.16 Data Application and Layer 2 Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
- 13.16.1 4/8/16xGigabit Ethernet Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
- 13.16.2 4x10 Gigabit Ethernet Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
- 13.16.3 ISA–ES64 Data Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

- 14 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS MAIN SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

- 14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
- 14.2 First Level Controller and Control & General Interface (FLCCONGI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
- 14.2.1 First Level Controller Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
- 14.2.2 Control and General Interface Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
- 14.2.3 DCC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
- 14.2.4 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
- 14.2.5 Reset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
- 14.3 First Level Controller and Service Interface (FLCSERV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
- 14.3.1 Equipment Controller Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
- 14.3.2 Service and General Interface Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
- 14.3.3 DCC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
- 14.3.4 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
- 14.3.5 Reset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
- 14.4 Power Supply and Filter Board (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
- 14.4.1 Main Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
- 14.4.2 Electrical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
- 14.5 Bus Termination Board (BUSTERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
- 14.5.1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
- 14.5.2 Power Supply Control and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
- 14.6 Matrix 640 Gbit/s Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
- 14.6.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
- 14.6.2 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
- 14.7 Matrix 320/160 Gbit/s Enhanced Board (MX320 / MX160) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
- 14.8 Lower Order Adaptation and Matrix 40G and 20G (LAX40 and LAX20) . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
- 14.8.1 Lower Order Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
- 14.8.2 Lower Order Adaption Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
- 14.9 STM–64 traffic Port Boards with not pluggable MSA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
- 14.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
- 14.9.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
- 14.9.3 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

- 14.10 STM–64 traffic Port Boards with pluggable XFP MSA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
- 14.10.1 4xSTM–64 XFP Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
- 14.10.2 2xSTM–64 XFP Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 4 / 531

531
 - 14.10.3 Timing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
- 14.11 STM–16 traffic Port Board (P16S16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
- 14.11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
- 14.11.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
- 14.11.3 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 14.12 STM–16 Traffic Port Board (P4S16, P8S16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

not permitted without written authorization.

- 14.13 16xSTM–1/4 Traffic Port Board (P16S1–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

- 14.13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
- 14.13.2 Functional and Physical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
- 14.14 16xSTM–1 Traffic Port Board (P16S1S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
- 14.14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
- 14.14.2 Functional and Physical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
- 14.15 4/8/16xGigabit Ethernet Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
- 14.15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
- 14.15.2 HW Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
- 14.15.3 Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
- 14.15.4 Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
- 14.16 2x/4x10 Gigabit Ethernet Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
- 14.16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
- 14.16.2 HW Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
- 14.16.3 Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
- 14.16.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
- 14.16.5 Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
- 14.17 ES64 Server Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
- 14.17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
- 14.17.2 HW Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
- 14.17.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
- 14.17.4 Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
- 14.18 FAN Unit (FAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
- 14.18.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
- 14.18.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
- 14.18.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
- 14.18.4 FAN Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
- 14.18.5 FAN Unit in SONET Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

- 15 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS LOWER ORDER EXTENSION SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

- 15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
- 15.2 Lower Order Adaptation Board 20G (LA20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
- 15.2.1 Lower Order Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
- 15.2.2 Lower Order Adaption Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
- 15.3 Lower Order Matrix 160 Gbit/s Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
- 15.3.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
- 15.3.2 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
- 15.4 Alarm Board (ALM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
- 15.4.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
- 15.5 Power Supply and Filter Board (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
- 15.6 Bus Termination Board (BUSTERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

- 16 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS OED SHELF 1670SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

- 16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
- 16.2 STM-1 Electrical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

- 16.2.1 4xSTM-1Electrical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

- 16.2.2 16xSTM-1Electrical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
- 16.3 STM-1 Optical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 5 / 531

531
 - 16.3.1 4xSTM-1Optical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
- 16.3.2 16xSTM-1 Optical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
- 16.4 I/O Port Board STM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
- 16.5 I/O Port Board 4xSTM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
- 16.5.2 STM-4 Optical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 16.6 4x140 Mbit/s Port Board (P4E4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

not permitted without written authorization.

- 16.6.1 2x140 Mbit/s Access Board (A2S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

- 16.6.2 140 Mbit/s Electrical Module (ICMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
- 16.7 High Speed Port Protection Using HPROT and HPROT16 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
- 16.8 Optical Link Enhanced (HCLINKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
- 16.9 Bus Termination (BTERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
- 16.10 Control and General Interface Board (CONGIHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
- 16.11 Matrix Board (HCMATRIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
- 16.12 FANs Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

- 17 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS OED SHELF 1662SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

- 17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
- 17.2 63x2 Mbit/s Access Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
- 17.3 Low Speed Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
- 17.4 63x2 Mbit/s Port Board (P63E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
- 17.5 63x2 Mbit/s / G703 / ISDN–PRA Port Board (P63E1N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
- 17.6 CONGI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
- 17.7 SYNTH16 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
- 17.7.1 FAN Unit for FAN Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

- 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

- 18.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
- 18.2 Electrical Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
- 18.2.1 Electrical Transmission Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
- 18.2.2 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
- 18.3 Optical Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
- 18.3.1 STM–N Optical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
- 18.3.2 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
- 18.4 Power Supply Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
- 18.5 Alarm Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
- 18.5.1 Units Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
- 18.5.2 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
- 18.5.3 Trouble–shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
- 18.6 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
- 18.6.1 1678MCC Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
- 18.6.2 OED Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
- 18.6.3 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
- 18.6.4 1678MCC Main Shelf (SONET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
- 18.6.5 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
- 18.6.6 1662SMC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
- 18.7 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
- 18.7.1 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
- 18.7.2 Acoustical noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
- 18.7.3 Climatic for Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
- 18.7.4 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
- 18.7.5 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

- 18.7.6 EMI/EMC Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 6 / 531

531
 - 19 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
- 19.1 WEEE general Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
- 19.2 How to disassembly equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
- 19.2.1 Tools necessary for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
- 19.2.2 Shelf Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

- 19.2.3 Unit Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

not permitted without written authorization.

- 19.2.4 Hazardous Materials and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

- 19.3 ECO Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 7 / 531

531
 LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

Table 1. Handbook related to the specific product hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . 18
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel–Lucent Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . 19
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Table 4. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

not permitted without written authorization.

Table 5. Customer Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Table 6. Handbooks related to Service activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 7. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 1. Subrack label (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 2. Subrack label (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 3. Subrack label (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 5. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 7. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 12. CE Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 13. WEEE Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 8. List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 14. 1678MCC scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 15. 1678MCC SDH/SONET Multiplexing Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 16. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 17. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 18. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 19. Terminal multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 20. Add/Drop Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 21. ”HUB” STM–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 22. Point–to–point links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 23. Linear drop–insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 24. Ring structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 25. Meshed topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 26. Management Interfaces of 1678MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 27. Example of network management architecture via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 28. Example of network management architecture via TL1 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 29. Schematic 1678MCC Main Rack Configurations with Main and OED Shelves . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 30. Schematic 1678MCC Rack Configurations with LO Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 31. Schematic OED Rack Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 32. Schematic SONET Rack Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 33. General LAN Cabling for multirack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 9. Main Rack Configurations with DCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Table 10. OED Rack Configurations with DCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 34. Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 35. Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 36. 1678MCC Main Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 37. 1678MCC Equipment front view (slot position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 11. 1678MCC Equipment: slot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Table 12. Pluggable Optical and Electrical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Table 13. 1678MCC Equipment: slot configuration explanation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 38. Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards – Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 39. Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards – Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 8 / 531

531
 Figure 40. Basic configuration of 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 41. Allowed Equipment Configuration (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 14. Main parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 15. Accessories list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 16. Parts list: explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 42. 4xGE, 4xSTM–16 optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 43. 8xGE, 8xSTM–16 optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 44. LAC40, 16xGE,16xSTM–16,16xSTM–4/1, 16xSTM–1E port board – front view . . . . . . 106
Figure 45. 1xSTM–64 (S64M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 46. 2xSTM–64 (P2S64M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 47. 4xSTM–64 (P4S64M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 48. 1xSTM–64 (L–642M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 49. 1xSTM–64 (V–642M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 50. 1xSTM–64 (U–642M) optical port board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 51. Connector assignment of L–642M, V–642M an U–642M boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 52. 2xSTM–64 XFP/XFP–E – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 53. 4xSTM–64 XFP/XFP–E – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 54. 2x10GE LAN – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 55. 4x10GE LAN – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 56. ES64SC – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 57. First Level Controller and Service Interfaces board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 58. First Level Controller and Control&General Interfaces board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 59. Matrix board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 60. Lower Order Matrix board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 61. Power Supply and Filter board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 62. FANs unit – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 63. Optical SFP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 64. Electrical SFP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 65. Optical XFP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 66. Optical XFP–E Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 67. Lower Order Extension Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 68. Lower Order Extension Shelf Equipment front view (slot position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 17. 1678MCC LO Shelf Equipment: slot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 18. Pluggable Optical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 19. 1678MCC LO Shelf Equipment: slot configuration explanation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 69. Lower Order Extension Shelf: Supported Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 70. Basic configuration of LO Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 71. Configuration of the 160G LO extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 72. Connection of 160G LO Extension Shelf with the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 73. VC–4 mapping on LA20 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 20. Main parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 21. Accessories list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 22. Parts list: explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 74. Lower Order Adaptation 20G board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 75. Alarm board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 76. LO Centerstage Matrix Board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 77. Power Supply and Filter board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 78. FANs unit – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 79. 1670SM Shelf Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Table 23. Basic Equipment of the 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 80. 1670SM: Relation Port/Access Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Table 24. 1670SM: General Configuration Rules for the I/O Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Table 25. 1670SM: Slot relation Port/Access Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Table 26. 1670SM: Position of the Port Boards in the Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 9 / 531

531
 Table 27. 1670SM: Interface specific Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 81. 1670SM: Flexible Shelf equipped with 16xSTM–1e EPS protected and other I/O Boards . .
153
Table 28. 1670SM: Allowed mix of I/O Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 82. Assignment of I/O Boards to the Link Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 83. Example for a Connection Main Shelf /1670SM (4 links, 1+1 MSP full protected) . . . . . 156
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 84. Example for a Connection Main Shelf /1670SM (4 links, unprotected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 29. Main part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 30. Accessories list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 31. Parts list: explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 85. 4x140/STM-1 Switchable E/O Port Board or 4xSTM-4 Port Board – Front View . . . . . . 164
Figure 86. 4xSTM-1 E/16xSTM-1 E/O Port Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 87. 16xSTM–1 COMPACT optical Port Board – front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 88. 2x140Mbit/s/STM-1/STM-4 Access Board Optical – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 89. 4xSTM–1 Electrical 75 Ohm Access Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 90. 16xSTM-1 Electrical 75 Ohm Access Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 91. 12xSTM-1 COMPACT optical Access Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 92. High-Speed Protection Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 93. Bus Termination Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 94. HiCap Matrix Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 95. Optical Link Enhanced Board – Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 96. Control and Generic Interface Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 97. FANs Subrack Cover – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 98. Shelf ID Connector for 1670SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 99. Electrical pluggable module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 100. STM–4 Optical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 101. Optical SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 102. 1662SMC Shelf: Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table 32. 1662SMC: Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 103. 1662SMC: I/O Boards. Relation Access/Port Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Table 33. 1662SMC: Relation Access / Port Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Table 34. 1662SMC: Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 104. 1662SMC Equipment: Unprotected Configuration with 2Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 105. 1662SMC Equipment: Protected Configuration with 2Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 106. Connection Main Shelf/1662SMC (1+1MSP protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 107. Connection Main Shelf/1662SMC (unprotected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 35. Main part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Table 36. Accessories list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Table 37. Parts list: explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 108. 63 x 2 Mbit/s Port Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 109. Control and General Interface – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 110. SYNTH16 Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 111. 63 x 2 Mbit/s Access Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 112. Low Speed Protection Board – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 113. FANs Subrack Cover – Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 114. STM-16 optical SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 115. Shelf ID Connector for 1662SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 116. 1678MCC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 38. Subsystems and involved boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 117. Low Order Matrix Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 118. Physical Matrix View with MX640 and LAX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 119. Logical Matrix View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 120. 1678MCC Main Shelf with 160G Lower Order Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Table 39. Point–to–point connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 10 / 531

531
 Figure 121. Types of connections managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 122. SDH payload subsystem functional model: physical position of functional blocks . . . . 217
Figure 123. Port board implementation and corresponding ITU–T G.783 functional model . . . . . . 218
Figure 124. Matrix board implementation: payload processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 125. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf only configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 126. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single 1670SM OED configuration . . . . . . . 227
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 127. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single 1662SMC OED configuration . . . . . . 228
Figure 128. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single LO extension shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 129. Physical LAN Topology of Multi Rack Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 130. Example of a routing domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 131. OSI protocol stack (layer 1 - 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 132. Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Transit NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 133. Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Gateway NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 134. SETS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Table 40. EPS Protection Scheme parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 135. MSP Linear 1+1 single and dual ended protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 136. MSP Linear 1:N Dual–Ended protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Table 41. SNCP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 137. Typical ring network with SNCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 138. Failure examples in SNCP ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 139. Drop and Continue D/C A INS A and D/C A INS B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 140. Drop and Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 141. Drop and Continue – 1st and 2nd failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 142. 2F MS SPRING Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 143. Effect of a BRIDGE “B side” operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 144. Effect of a BRIDGE “A side” operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 145. Effect of SWITCH “B side” operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 146. Effect of SWITCH “A side” operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 147. Line break recovering operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 148. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 149. Squelching on isolated Node connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 150. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 151. Collapsed dual node interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 152. Collapsed dual node interconnection – 1st and 2nd failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 153. Collapsed single node ring interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 154. Collapsed single node ring interconnection –1st failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 155. Collapsed single node ring interconnection –2nd failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 156. Network Interfaces UNI /NNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 157. G.ASTN architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 158. TNE reference model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 159. GMRE: SW Top level architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 160. DCC Protection Mechanism In–Fibre / In–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 161. DCC Protection Mechanism In–Band / Out of–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 162. SNCP Ring Closure in a GMRE Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 163. Multicast connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Table 42. External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 164. Step–up Converter – Location of Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 165. 1678MCC Power Supply with 3-wire FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 166. 1678MCC Power Supply with 2-wire FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 167. Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 168. OED Shelf Power Supply with 3-wire FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 169. OED Shelf Power Supply with 2-wire FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 170. Station Alarm System Architecture – Physical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 171. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1678MCC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 11 / 531

531
 Figure 172. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of LO Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 173. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Figure 174. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1662SMC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Table 43. Rack Lamp Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 175. Schematic Drawing of HMU Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 176. Remote Inventory Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 177. Schematic drawing of OED Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Figure 178. Layout of the 1670SM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 179. 1662SMC Shelf: Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 180. OED Synchronization for ETSI application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 44. Units involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 45. Electrical Modules involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Table 46. Optical Modules involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 181. Block Diagram and external Interfaces of FLCCONGI enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 182. Block Diagram and external Interfaces of FLCSERV(A) enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 183. PSF Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 184. BUSTERM Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 185. Matrix Board Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 186. Payload Subsystem Logical Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 187. Payload Subsystem Physical Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 188. Power Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Table 47. Power characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 189. CRU, On– and Off– Board Connections in SDH Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 190. CRU, On– and Off– Board Connections in SONET Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 191. PQ2/SCM Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 192. LAX40 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 193. LAX40 (LAX20) Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 194. Equipping Options of STM–64 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 195. STM–64 Board Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 196. STM–64 Board Payload Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 197. STM–64 Board Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 198. STM–64 Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 199. Functional Blocks of the 4xSTM–64 Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 200. Functional Blocks of the 2xSTM–64 Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 201. STM–64 XFP Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 202. STM–16 board Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 203. STM–16 Board Payload Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 204. STM–16 Board Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 205. STM–16 Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 206. GE Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 207. Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 208. 10GE LAN Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 209. Power Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 210. ISA ES64 Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 211. Block Diagram of the ES64 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Figure 212. Power Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 213. FAN Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Table 48. Units involved in 1678MCC LO Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Table 49. Optical Modules involved in 1678MCC LO Extension Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 214. LA20 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 215. LA20 Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Figure 216. LO Centerstage Matrix Board Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 217. ALM Board Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 50. Units involved in 1670SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 12 / 531

531
 Table 51. Pluggable Modules involved in 1670SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Figure 218. Block Diagram 4xSTM-1 Electrical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Figure 219. Block Diagram Access Board 4xSTM-1 Electrical (A4ES1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 220. Relation between Port Boards/Access Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Figure 221. Block Diagram 16xSTM-1 Electrical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 222. Block Diagram 4xSTM-1 Optical I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 223. Block Diagram Access Board 2xSTM-1 Optical (A2S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Figure 224. Block Diagram STM-1 Optical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Figure 225. Relation between Port Boards/Access Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 226. Block Diagram Optical STM-4 I/O Port Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Figure 227. Block Diagram Access Board 2xSTM-4 Optical (A2S4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 228. Block Diagram STM-4 Optical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Figure 229. P4E4N Port Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Figure 230. A2S1 Access Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Figure 231. ICMI Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Figure 232. Block Diagram HPROT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Figure 233. BTERM Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Table 52. Interfaces on the Boards CONGIHC A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Figure 234. CONGIHC Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Figure 235. HCMATRIX Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Figure 236. FANs Unit Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Table 53. Units involved in 1662SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Figure 237. 63x2 Access Board – Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 238. LSPROT Board – Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Figure 239. 63x2 Mbit/s Board – Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Figure 240. 63x2 Mbit/s G.703/ISDN–PRA, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Figure 241. Functional Diagram of the NT ISDN–PRA Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Table 54. CONGI A and CONGI B interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Table 55. Rack lamps signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Figure 242. CONGI – Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Figure 243. SYNTH16 – Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Figure 244. FANs Shelf 19” General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 245. FANs Unit for FAN Shelf 19” Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Table 56. Parameters specified for STM–1 optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Table 57. Parameters specified for STM–4 optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Table 58. Parameters specified for STM–16 optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Table 59. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Table 60. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interface – P1L1–2D2 long–haul application . 480
Figure 246. Long Haul Application (L–64.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Figure 247. Very Long Haul Application (V–64.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Figure 248. Ultra Long Haul Application (U–64.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Table 61. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Table 62. Parameters specified for 1000B–SX Optical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Table 63. Parameters specified for 1000B–LX Optical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Table 64. Parameters specified for 10GE–SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Table 65. Parameters specified for 10GE–LR,–ER,–ZR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Table 66. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Table 67. Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Table 68. Relation between Alarm severity terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Figure 249. Climatogram for Class 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Table 69. Climate parameters for environmental class 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Figure 250. Climatogram for Class 1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Table 70. Climate parameters for environmental class 1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Table 71. Climatic conditions for environmental classes 2.1/2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 13 / 531

531
 Figure 251. Shelf Front and Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 252. Handle Removal and Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Figure 253. Rear Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Figure 254. Back Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 255. Upper and Lower Guides Plane Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 256. Side Wall Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 257. Optical Fiber Duct, Guides and Contact Spring Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 258. Side Coverplate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 259. Levers Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Figure 260. Optical Connectors Support Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Figure 261. Side Coverplate and Contact Spring Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Figure 262. Internal Connectors Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Figure 263. Dissipator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Figure 264. Modules Removal from Dissipator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Figure 265. Daughter Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Figure 266. Gold Connector Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 267. Internal Cables Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Figure 268. Connector metal Support Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Table 72. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Table 73. Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 14 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
HANDBOOK GUIDE

15 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
16 / 531
 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General Information

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NOTICE

Strict compliance with the instructions and procedures specified in the product documentation (refer
to product release note for the complete list of applicable manuals) is the precondition of the
enforceability of such warranty claims against Alcatel–Lucent.
Warranty claims which result from non-compliance with the defined procedures, cannot be enforced
against Alcatel–Lucent.

NOTICE

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice.
They do not represent any obligation on the part of Alcatel–Lucent.

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION

The technical information of this manual is the property of Alcatel–Lucent and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

1.2 Handbook Applicability

This handbook refers to the Multiband Multiservice Connect 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Release 4.2
which belongs to the Alcatel–Lucent Intelligent Optical Networks (ION) product family.
In general the system is referred to as MCC only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 17 / 531

531
 1.3 Customer Documentation 1678 Metro Core Connect

The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL–LUCENT to update it in this
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Handbook.
not permitted without written authorization.

Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.

The Documentation is splitted in:

– Customer Documentation
– Service Documentation.

1.3.1 Customer Documentation

The standard Customer Documentation is available in English and consists of the following handbooks:

Table 1. Handbook related to the specific product hardware

PART THIS
REF. HANDBOOK
NUMBER HDBK

1678MCC Rel.4.3 Technical Handbook 3AG 24163 BEAA

[1]
Provides information regarding Equipment Description.

Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control

PART
REF. HANDBOOK
NUMBER

1678MCC Rel. 4.3 CT Basic Operator’s Handbook 3AG 24164 BEAA

[2]
Provides general information, installation and operational procedures for the 1678MCC Craft
Terminal

1678MCC Rel.4.3 CT Operator’s Handbook 3AG 24165 BEAA

[3]
Provides 1678MCC screens and operational procedures.

1678MCC Rel. 4.3 Operator’s Troubleshooting and Maintenance

3AG 24197 BEAA
Handbook
[4]
Provides trouble shooting in case of alarms coming from the 1678MCC and contains
maintenance procedures for operators.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 18 / 531

531
 Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel–Lucent Network Elements using 1320CT platform

PART
REF. HANDBOOK
NUMBER
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1330AS Rel. 6.5 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88876 AAAA

[5]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

ELB Rel. 2.X Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA

[6]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

CLI User Guide GMRE 3AG 24193 BEAA

[7]
Describes the usage of the Command Line Interface.

Table 4. Safety Instructions

PART
REF. CD–ROM TITLE
NUMBER

Safety Instructions 1678MCC 3AG 24198 AAAA

[8]
Contains all common Safety Instructions.

Table 5. Customer Documentation on CD–ROM

Note: refer to para. 6.5 on page 46.

PART
REF. CD–ROM TITLE
NUMBER

1678MCC Rel. 4.3 CD–ROM–Customer Documentation 3AG 24399 BDAA

[9]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to REF. [8] .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 19 / 531

531
 1.3.2 Service Documentation

The standard Service Documentation is available in English and consists of the following handbooks:

Table 6. Handbooks related to Service activities

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

PART
REF. HANDBOOK
NUMBER

Commissioning Procedure 3AG 24167 BAAA

[10]
Describes the tests to be performed in the commissioning phase for the 1678MCC.

Commissioning Protocol 3AG 24168 BAAA

[11]
Form to fill out after commissioning procedure.

Installation & Start–Up Manual FLC Software 3AG 24169 BEAA

[12]
Defines the installation procedure of FLC software.

Maintenance Handbook 3AG 24323 BEAA

[13] Provides information regarding ISUs, routine and corrective maintenance, replacement of
boards, matrix upgrade etc.

Network Configuration Guide GMRE 3AG 24194 BEAA

[14] This document covers the configuration of homogeneous GMRE networks consisting of
1678MCC.

Installation Handbook 3AG 24191 AAAA

[15] Provides information regarding Equipment Installation, according to A–Installation

Engineering Dept. rules.

1678MCC Installation Guide Rel 2.0 3AL 89572 CAAA

[16]
Defines the installation modality for the 1678MCC equipment.

1678MCC Rack Rel 4.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 81824 AAAA

[17] Provides information on description, composition, installation, turn–on and maintenance of the
MCC rack.

System Installation Handbook Optinex Rack 3AL 38270 AAAA

[18] Provides information on description, composition, installation, turn–on and maintenance of the
Optinex rack.

1670SM Installation Guide Rel.4.3 3AL 89790 CAAA

[19]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Defines the installation modality for the 1670SM equipment.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 20 / 531

531
 1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type of labels
not permitted without written authorization.

that might be affixed to the equipment.

Furthermore, it describes the handbook structure and the customer
documentation. The abbreviation list is supplied too.

DESCRIPTION: It contains all the equipment’s general and detailed system features
including its application in the telecommunication network.
Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications
(i.e., system, mechanical, electrical and/or optical).

DISMANTLING & It contains information for shelves/units dismantling and recycling and
RECYCLING: list of hazardous materials.

APPENDICES: Section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describe possible

alternative unit.

ANNEXES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing additional

documentation or general information on other topics not inherent to
the chapters making up the handbook.

MAINTENANCE: Maintenance related information are described separately in the

’Maintenance Handbook’. (*)

(*) If the equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PC, Work Station
or other external processing/displaying system) the operation and maintenance carried out WITH
SUCH SYSTEM is detailed in the Operator’s Handbooks (refer to para. 1.3 on page 18).

1.5 Target Audience

This handbook is intended to provide a system overview as well as more detailed information on single
sub–systems and equipment. Therefore, this is the handbook to start with.

Especially, before reading any of the other handbooks it is recommended to read at least the following
chapters of the Description part for gaining a system overview:

– General

– Physical Configuration of the Main Shelf

– Physical Configuration of the LO extension Shelf

– Physical Configuration of the OED Shelves

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 21 / 531

531
 1.6 Handbook Change History
Ed.03:

Created in March, 2008. This is the third released issue of this handbook for product release 4.3. The main
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

updates since Ed. 02 are:

not permitted without written authorization.

– SLSks51271: need TH update for support of new FLC AB variant

Added FLCCONGI (max DCC–M) and FLCSERVICE (max DCC–M) to Main part list (see
Table 14. on page 96).

Ed.02:

Created in March, 2008. This is the second released issue of this handbook for product release 4.3. The
main updates since Ed. 01 are:

– SLSks49776: DTAG: L–64.2M Path penalty out of spec:

Added attenuator to figures on page 113 and 481, and to legend of table on page 479.

– SLSks50678: Remove R2 feature descriptions not supported in R3 and R4

Removed EOW and AUX sections from chapter 18.2.1 on page 473.
Removed PM on AU–PJE from chapter 13.8.1 on page 301.

– SLSks50944: Need Handbook update for HOT and WTR w/ 1:N MSP:
Corrected text on page 249.

– Added/ corrected support of Jumbo Frames for GbE (page 376), 10GbE (page 382) and ES64 boards
(page 387)
– Corrected “DWA” values of modules
– Added SGEZX module for GbE (to SGELX/ SFP–LX.)

Ed. 01:

Ed.01 created in December, 2007 is the first officially released edition of this handbook, associated to
product release 4.3. This edition based on 3AG 24163 BDAA PCZZA Ed.01.

Changes to 3AG 24163 BDAA PCZZA Ed.01:

– ES64
– Update of GMRE chapter and new features
– MSP 1:N for STM–1 electrical
– DCC enhancements
– GE Services
– Added Compound Links into GMRE glossary
– Multicast connections
– SLSks50382: EOW und AOX in TH und FL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 22 / 531

531
 2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following directives:
not permitted without written authorization.

• 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:

– by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992

– by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993

Compliancy to above Directives is declared, when the equipment is installed as for the manufacturer
handbooks, according to the following European Norm:

• EN 300 386 (V1.3.1) environment ”Telecommunication center”

WARNING

This is a class A product of EN 55022. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

2.2 Safety

Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized norms:

• IEC 60950–1 ed. 2001 for electrical safety

• EN 60950–1 ed. 2001 for electrical safety

• EN 60825–1 ed. 1994 + A11 ed. 1996 + A2 ed. 2001 for optical safety

• IEC 60825–1 ed. 1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999) for optical safety

• EN 60825–2 ed. 2000 for optical safety

• IEC 60825–2 ed. 2000 for optical safety

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 23 / 531

531
 3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS

Refer to the Safety Instructions, 3AG 24198 AAAA, to obtain the following information:

– General Safety Rules

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Labels

– Several Dangerous Conditions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 24 / 531

531
 4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
not permitted without written authorization.

grounding, etc.) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

• Before starting any installation, turn–up & commissioning, operation & maintenance work refer
to the relevant Handbooks and chapters.
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:

ATTENTION EMC NORMS.

4.1.1 General Norms – Installation

• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s ”Installation Norms” (or similar
documents).
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated.
• Install filters outside the equipment as required.
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper diameter and impedance.
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decreased it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.).
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–up & Commissioning, Operation

• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility.

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.).
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given.

4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance

• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.).
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 25 / 531

531
 4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic dischargers, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.

Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:

ELASTICIZED BAND

COILED CORD

• an elasticized band worn around the wrist;

• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 26 / 531

531
 4.3 Suggestions, Notes and Cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Suggestion or note....
not permitted without written authorization.

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:

TITLE...

(caution to avoid equipment damage)

statement....

4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This chapter indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels
affixed to the equipment.

Figure 1. on page 28 through Figure 7. on page 33 illustrate the most common positions of the labels on
the units, modules and subracks.

Figure 8. on page 33 through Figure 11. on page 34 illustrate the information (e.g., identification and
serial No.) printed on the labels.

The table below relates the reference numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.

Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.

Table 7. Label references

Ref. No. Name of Label

1 label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N and serial number)

Refer to Figure 8. on page 33.

2 label specifying item on catalogue (P/N and serial number)

Refer to Figure 9. on page 34.

3 item identification label – item on catalog

Refer to Figure 10. on page 34.

4 label identifying the equipment

Refer to Figure 11. on page 34.

5 label identifying compliancy with CE and WEEE Directives.

Refer to Figure 12. on page 35 and Figure 13. on page 35.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 27 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
4

03
Figure 1. Subrack label (1)
2

ABCD

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

531
5

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

28 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
ABC

Figure 2. Subrack label (2)

2

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
29 / 531
 2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NB.1

ABC

NB.1: the label is present on the support side.

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

Figure 3. Subrack label (3)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 30 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
ABC

xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
2

Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

531
3

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

31 / 531
 2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ABC

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

Figure 5. Modules label

NB.1
ABC

NB.1: the label is present on the PCB component side.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 32 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NB.1
ABC

NB. 1: the label is present on PCB components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
Note: the above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 27.

Figure 7. Back panels internal label

FACTORY P/N + CS

FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER

SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N and serial number)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 33 / 531

531
 ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS
ALCATEL FACTORY PART
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

NUMBER + SPACE + CS
document, use and communication of its contents

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE

(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
not permitted without written authorization.

ACRONYM

SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

SERIAL NUMBER (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)

Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N and serial number)

FREQUENCY ACRONYM
(Optional)

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER

Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog

EQUIPMENT NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 34 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
equipment.
Figure 12. CE Label

Figure 13. WEEE Label

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
Warning: CE and WEEE symbols can be in the same label or in different position of the

35 / 531
 5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Table 8. List of Abbreviations

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ABBREVIATION MEANING

ABIL Enabling
ABN Abnormal condition
AC Alternate Current
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALM Alarm Board
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AND Alarm on both station batteries
ANSI American National Standards International
APD Avalanche Photodiode
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ASTN Automatically Switched Transport Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATTD Attended (alarm storing)
AU Administrative Unit
AU4 Administrative Unit – level 4
AUG Administrative Unit Group
AUOH AU Pointer
AUX Auxiliary
BATT Battery
BER Bit Error Rate
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
BNC Bayonet Not Coupling
BTERM Bus Termination Board (1670SM)
BUSTERM Bus Termination Board (Main Shelf)
CE European Conformity
CLNP ConnectionLess Network Protocol
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

CMI Code Mark Inversion

CO Central Office
COAX Coaxial

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 36 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

CONGIHC Control and General Interface Board (High Capacity) in 1670SM

COPS Common Open Policy Server
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture

CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
CPI Incoming Parallel Contacts
CPO Outgoing Parallel Contacts
CPU Central Processing Unit
CT Craft Terminal
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCCM DCC on Multiplex Section (D4–D12)
DCCP DCC on Path Overhead
DCCR DCC on Regenerator Section (D1–D3)
D&C Drop and Continue
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DCR DCC Router
DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DXC Digital Cross Connect
EBU European Broadcasting Union
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Control Channel
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EIDEC Enhanced IDE Controller
EM Embedded Module (FLC)
EMI/EMC Electromagnetic interference / Electromagnetic compatibility
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
EQUICO Equipment Controller
ES End System
ESD Electrostatic Discharges
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse

FC/PC Type of optical connector
FCS Frame Check Sequence

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 37 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

FEBE Far End Block Error

FEC Forward Error Correction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

FEPROM Flesh Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

FERF Far End Receive Failure
FLC First Level Controller
FLCCONGI First Level Controller+Control and General Interface Board
FLCSERV FLCSERVICE (First Level Controller + SERVICE Board)
FPE Functional Protection Earth
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GA Gate Array
G.ASTN GMPLS Automatically Switched Transport Network
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GBOS Generic Basic Operating System
GFP Generic Frame Procedure
gGOS Performance improved version of GBOS
GMPLS Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching
GMRE GMPLS Routing Engine
GND Ground
GNE Gateway Network Element
GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation
GUI Graphical User Interface
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code Order
HDBK Handbook
HK Housekeeping
HMU Housekeeping Monitoring Unit
HO High Order
HOA High Order Adaptation
HOI High Order Interface
HPC High Order Path Connection
HPOM High Order Path Overhead Monitoring
HPROT High Speed Protection Board
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
HSUT High order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
HW Hardware
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

I Intra-Office
ICS Item Change Status
ID Identification signals

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 38 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

ILM Integrated Laser Modulator
IN Input
I–NNI Internal Network–to–Network Interface
IND Indicative alarm
INT Internal Local Alarms
ION Intelligent Optical Network
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IPCC IP Control Channel
IS Intermediate System
ISA Integrated Service Adapter
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISPB Intra Shelf Processor Bus
ISU In Service Upgrade
ITU–T Information Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication Sector
JE1 – JE2 – JE3 Joint Engineering
L– Long Haul
L1 Level 1 IS
L2 Level 2 IS
LA20 LO Adaptation Board 20G
LAC40 Lower Order Matrix Link 40G
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link access Procedure on D channel
LAX40 LO Adaption and Matrix Board 40G
LAX20 LO Adaption and Matrix Board 20G
LC Type of optical connector
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LDSSHUT Command for ALS
LED Light Emission Diode
LIU Line Interface Unit
LMP Link Management Protocol
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

LO Low Order
LOF Loss Of Alignment
LOI Low Order Interface

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 39 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

LOP Loss Of Pointer
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LOPP Low Order Pointer Processing

LOS Loss Of Signal
LPA Lower Order Path Adaption
LPC Lower Order Path Connection
LPM Loop–back Line Side (remote)
LPOM Lower Order Path Monitoring
LPT Lower order Path Termination or Loopback equipment side
LPT Link Path Through (Gigabit Ethernet service)
LSUT Lower order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
LSX LAN Switch
LX160 LO Centerstage Matrix 160GBIT/S
MAC Media Access Controller
MCC Metro Core Connect
MCF Message Communication Function
MHDLC Multi High–Level Data Link Controller
MLM Multi Longitudinal Mode
MMF Multimode Fiber
MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH Multiplex Section OverHead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MS–SPRING Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MTU Maximum Transfer Unit
MX640 Matrix Board 640GBIT/S
MX320 Matrix Board 320GBIT/S
MX160 Matrix Board 160GBIT/S
NAD Network Access Domain
NCA Network Control Adapter
NCI NE Control Interface
NE Network Element
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

NGTRU New Generation Top Rack Unit

NM Network Management
NMI Network Management Interface

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 40 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network to Network Interface
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NP Network Processor (Restoration Manager 1354NP)

NPE Network Protection Element
NPOS Network Protection Operating System
NRZ No Return to Zero
NURG Not Urgent Alarm
OBPS On Board Power Supply
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OED Optical Edge Device
OFA Optical Fiber Amplifier
OH OverHead
OH–BUS Dedicated housekeeping stream
OIF Optical Internetworking Forum
OMSG Optical Multiservice Gateway and Cross–Connect
OMSN Optical Multiservice Node
OOF Out Of Frame
ORALIM OR’ing of station power supply alarm
OS Operation System
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OTH Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTN Optical Transport Network
O–UNI Optical User–Network Interface
OUT Output
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PFAIL Power Supply Failure
PI Physical Interface
PJE Pointer Justification Event
P/N Part Number
POH Path Overhead
PPI Plesiochronous Physical interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ppm parts per million

PPS Path Protection Switching
PWALM Power Supply Alarm

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 41 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

PWANDOR ANDOR/3 failure

Q2/QB2 TMN interface with B2 protocol; interface towards PDH equip.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Q3/QB3 TMN Interface with B3 protocol; interface towards TMN

RA Rack Alarm
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RAM Random Access Memory
RCK Received Clock
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RECC Recommendation
REI Remote Error Indication
REL Release
RL Rack Lamp
RMS Root Mean Square
RNURG Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section OverHead
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RURG Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
Rx Reception
S Short Haul
S–LAG Static Link Aggregation Group
SBR Source Based Restoration
SC Shelf Controller
SC Type of optical connector
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SFF Small Form Factor (not pluggable)
SFP Small Form Pluggable
SGI Service and General Interface
SLC Second Level Controller
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

SM Single Mode/Synchronous Multiplex

SNC–P Subnetwork Connection Protection
SOH Section OverHead

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 42 / 531

531
 ABBREVIATION MEANING

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

S/P Serial/Parallel Converter
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

SPC Soft Permanent Connection

SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SQ Squelch
SSF Server Signal Fail
SSM Synchronization Status Message
SSU System Startup and Supervision
STM–N Synchronous Transport Module
SW Software
TANC Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units
TD Layout drawing
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TOR Remote alarm indicating loss of one of the station batteries
TORC Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit
TRIB Tributary
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TSF Trail Signal Fail
TTF Transport Terminal Function
TX Transmission
U– Ultra Long Haul
UNI User to Network Interface
URG Urgent
V– Very Long Haul
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCXO/VCO Voltage controlled oscillator
VC–x Virtual Container
VECE Virtual Equipment Control Element
VLAN Virtual LAN
VMMF Virtual Machine Management Function
WAN Wide Access Network
WEEE Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment
XFP 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable Module
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

XFP–E XFP Extended

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 43 / 531

531
 6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL–LUCENT CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

6.1 Products, Product-releases, Versions and Customer Documentation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A Product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
not permitted without written authorization.

performance and services for which it is meant.

A Product evolves through successive Product Releases. A Product Release is a version of a Product
with a defined set of features at a given time.

A Product Release can have further development steps, named Versions, that are defined to improve or
add some features (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing purposes.
Versions are defined by adding Change Levels (CL) to a Product Release or even more detailed by
adding Patch Levels (P) to a Change Level.

A Product Release has its own standard Customer Documentation consisting of a set of handbooks and
the related CD–ROM.

A new Version of a Product Release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para. 6.4 on page 45.

6.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

6.3 Aims of Standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.

Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).

Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel–Lucent Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.

Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.

The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the
”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration changes
(e.g., replacing a unit with one having different part number but the same function).
On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which does
not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 44 / 531

531
 6.4 Handbook Updating

The Customer handbooks associated to the Product Release are listed in para. 1.3 on page 18.

Each handbook is identified by:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– the name of the Product Release;

– the handbook name;
– the handbook part number;
– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01);

6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same Product Release (same Handbook Part Number)
Changes of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Version character
can be used for draft or proposal editions (e.g. Ed. 01A).

6.4.1.1 Supplying updated Handbooks to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook’s new issue .

6.4.2 Notes for Handbooks relevant to Software Applications

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are usually only
modified, if the new software Version distributed to Customers implies man–machine interface changes.
Particularly, screen prints are not updated just because they contain a name of a former Product Release.
They are updated only, if the screen content has changed.

6.4.3 Changes due to new Product Version

A new product version changes the handbook part number and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 45 / 531

531
 6.5 Documentation supply on CD–ROM

In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

6.5.1 Contents, Creation and Production of a CD–ROM

not permitted without written authorization.

In most cases, a CD–ROM contains the documentation of one Product Release and for a certain language.

A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and
hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.

The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD–ROM
is recorded.

Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.

6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM

The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.

The CD–ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened Index document permit
to visualize the handbooks.

In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been
installed on the platform.
The CD–ROM does not contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting
and installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CD–ROM to this purpose.

Then the Customer is able to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming
tools included, and to print selected parts of the documentation on a local printer.

6.5.3 CD–ROM Identification

Each CD–ROM is identified:

1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed on the CD–ROM upper surface:
– the name of the Product Release
– a writing indicating the language(s)
– the CD–ROM part number
– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)

2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (part numbers and editions)
by whose collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 46 / 531

531
 7 REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

– HP is a registered trademark of the Hewlett–Packard Corporation

– UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, AT&T
– Sun, SunOS, SPARC, NeWSprint and Solaris are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– All other names, products and services mentioned are trademarks of their respective holders.
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 47 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
48 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
DESCRIPTIONS

49 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
50 / 531
 8 GENERAL

8.1 Introduction to the Equipment

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) is a new generation Optical Multiband Platform for Broadband
not permitted without written authorization.

(SDH/Sonet), Wideband (SDH/Sonet), OTN and L2 (Ethernet) functionalities, each portion flexibly
configurable in size. Starting with a switching capacity of 640 Gbit/s in one single shelf, the architecture
allows scaling to bigger capacities in each direction thanks to its modular design and advanced technology.

The system has been designed to address all the variety of applications from metro to backbone networks
supporting ring–based functionalities as well as advanced mesh topologies based on GMPLS/ASON
dynamic control plane (refer to Figure 14. on page 52).

Telecom Operators and Service Providers look for prompt solutions to face the challenges of today’s
telecommunication market. New revenue opportunities from broadband services can be supported by
limited budgets for new network infrastructures. By leveraging an SDH/SONET infrastructure capable to
evolve, carriers can reach the objective of enabling broadband services while keeping network and
operation costs to a minimum level.

An ideal transport solution for metro–core and core networks has to satisfy the following requirements:

• Simplify and optimize the network: less network elements capable of better aggregating and
consolidating huge multi–protocol traffic streams towards the core.

• Minimize costs: compact equipment with high switching capacity and high density interfaces
to lower CAPEX and OPEX with respect to more complex multi–node architectures.

• Enable broadband services: support Gigabit Ethernet and data layer management features
to enable Packet–based services cost–effectively.

• Future proof: easy to support Optical Transport Network (OTN) architectures, lambda
switching and GMPLS control plane.

The 1678 Metro Core Connect of the Intelligent Optical Multi–Service Nodes (OMSN) family was designed
to meet all those challenges.

The 1678 MCC is an Intelligent Optical Multi–Band Node with an outstanding broadband density of
640 Gbit/s or 4096 x 4096 STM–1 equivalents in a single shelf, with a wideband (VC12/VT1.5) matrix up
to 40 Gbit/s, Gigabit Ethernet, ASON/GMPLS and OTN extension features.

The system is highly scalable both in broadband and wideband direction: the architecture is ready for
possible future evolution up to 160 Gbit/s for the wideband switching and up to 5 Tbit/s for the broadband
one.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 51 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Metro Core

Metro Access
Optical Core

STM 1/4/16
10G/2.5G
10G

1678 MCC
Submarine

G.709

10GE

Figure 14. 1678MCC scenario

–
1GE

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
IP Backbone

52 / 531
 The 1678MCC equipment allows for a seamless evolution of the existing SDH/SONET infrastructure
towards OTN and packet base services, offering a single–shelf solution with unsurpassed compactness
and capacity, providing telecom operators with both near–term and long–term benefits:

• Compact and Capable

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

640 Gbit/s worth traffic capacity in one single shelf. Minimum footprint with up to 3.8 Tbit/s
not permitted without written authorization.

switching in one 600x600 rack. High density interfaces, such as 16 x STM–16 or 4 x STM–64
in one slot.

• Wideband Grooming Point

Fully flexible, non–blocking 256 x 256 STM–1 equivalents, 20G or 40G LO single board matrix
(VC/11/12/3), 1+1 EPS protected. Each copy of the LO matrix is plugged into one 40G slot of
the main shelf.
From R4.1 on a 160 Gbit/s (1024 x 1024 STM–1 equivalents) LO matrix is introduced. This LO
matrix is located in an own shelf named LO Extension Shelf.

• Multiservice Broadband enabler

Standardized Gigabit Ethernet transport and aggregation for packet–based services.

• Family I/O edge devices

Full range of wideband interfaces (E1, E3, E/FE/GE, STM1–el., STM1–opt., STM–4/16/64) are
supported in Optical Edge Devices (OEDs), as 1662SMC and 1670SM. Multi–shelf
configurations are managed as single network element.

• Grow as you want

Next generation plug–in optical interfaces. Scalable wideband LO fully non blocking extension.

• Cost–effective
Reduced CAPEX and OPEX thanks to network and office simplification. Pay–as–you–grow
service capacity increments up to 4096 STM–1 equivalents, including Lower Order
aggregation. Support of both SDH and SONET transport technologies.

• Future–proof
Hardware platform ready for VC–4/ODU–k switching and GMPLS/ASON control plane
management to support OTN and meshed architectures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 53 / 531

531
 8.2 General Description

All kind of broadband (STM–1/4/16/64, 1GE, 10GE), wideband (E1, E3, STM1) and Optical G.709 (OTM1,
OTM2, colored) interfaces are integrated with a family concept to support traditional TDM, data aware,
long haul SAN and transparent services.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC can operate in any mesh, ring, restoration or hub and spoke topology, because of its
not permitted without written authorization.

superior blocking free cross–connect architecture and its fast–speed control plane. It can be used as a
Multi–Terminal, Multi–Ring closure node, Restoration–Crossconnect or as a Gateway between different
layers.

The HO switching functionalities are implemented in a 640 Gbit/s Matrix board that can be extended in
future. The matrix supports any mixture of AU–4 and AU–3 cross connections. In future the available signal
rates are extended to ODU1 and ODU2 (ITU–T G.709).
Moreover a LO matrix is available with a capacity of 40 Gbit/s for cross connecting at VC–3/VC–12 level.
In future it will also support VC11. This function allows the perfect control of VC–4 and VC–3 pipes filling
in the SDH frame, maximizing flexibility.
When the LO matrix is used in conjunction with an I/O shelf containing the LO interfaces, the 1678MCC
becomes a next generation wideband cross–connect. The architecture is prepared to scale the LO
capacity beyond 40G in service operation.
From R4.1 on a LO matrix with a capacity up to 160 Gbit/s is available.

The same LO matrix board implements the AU3–TU3 conversion function: this enables the usage of
1678MCC in a mixed SDH/SONET traffic environment.
Figure 15. on page 49 shows the SDH/SONET multiplexing schemes of the 1678MCC.

The plug–in boards can be of the following types:

– STM–64 port (1x/2x/4x):

Intraoffice, Short, Long, Very Long and Ultra Long Haul interfaces
– STM–16 port (4x/8x/16x):
Short and Long Haul interfaces
– STM–4 port (16x):
Short and Long Haul interfaces
– STM–1 port (16x):
Short and Long Haul interfaces; electrical interfaces
– Gigabit Ethernet (4x/8x/16x):
SX and LX interfaces
– 10 Gigabit Ethernet
10G–SR, 10G–LR and 10G–ER interfaces

Additional plug–in boards are supported in OED shelves 1670SM and 1662SMX:

– STM–4 port (4x):

Short and Long Haul interfaces
– STM–1e port (4x/16x)
– 140Mbit/s port
– 2Mbit/s port

For future applications the following OTH interfaces will be supported:

– OTM–0.1
– OTM–0.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– 2.5 Gbit/s UNI (STM–16/CBR 2.5 Gbit/s)

– 9.95 Gbit/s UNI (STM–64/CBR 9.95 Gbit/s)

These interfaces are not shown in Figure 15. (SDH/SONET multiplexing schemes).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 54 / 531

531
 x1
STM–256 AUG256 AU3–768c VC4–256c C4–256c
STS–768c SPE
x4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

x1
STM–64 AUG64 AU3–192c VC4–64c C4–64
not permitted without written authorization.

OC192 STS–192c SPE 10GE

x4

x1
STM–16 AUG16 AU3–48c VC4–16c C4–16c
OC48 STS–48c SPE
x4

x1
STM–4 AUG4 AU3–12c VC4–4c C4–4c
OC12 STS–12c SPE
x4
x1 x1 x1
x1
STM–1 AUG1 AU3–3c VC–4 C4
x3
OC3 STS–3c SPE x1 GE
EC3 x3 TUG–3 TU–3 VC–3 140Mbit/s

x1 C3
STM–0 AU3 VC–3
x7 (DS3) GE
STS1–SPE x7
x1
OC1 (optical)
EC1 (electrical) TUG–2 TU–2 VC–2 C2
VT–Group x3 VT6 DS2

TU–12 VC–12 C12

VT2 2Mbit/s
1678MCC matrix connectivity supported for this signal rate x4

supported (monitoring or payload mapping or interface type) TU–11 VC–11 C11

VT1.5 DS1
planned

GE Gigabit Ethernet
OTH capability not shown. SPE Synchronous Payload Envelope
1GE with configurable virtual concatenation and LCAS. STS Synchronous Transport Signal
10GE with configurable virtual concatenation, LCAS, EPL and EVPL. VT Virtual Tributary

Figure 15. 1678MCC SDH/SONET Multiplexing Schemes

Some additional units are devoted to central functions:

– Equipment Controller units

– HO SDH/SONET/OTN Matrix + Clock Reference units
• MX640, MX320 and MX160 for ETSI applications
• MX640GA and MX320GA for ANSI applications
– LO Matrix
– Power supply filter boards
– FAN cooling units
– Service and Control&General interfaces boards

According to the network topology, single ended and dual ended MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) 1+1
and 1:N can be implemented between any STM–n interfaces.
SNCP (Sub Network Connection Protection) inherent (SNCP/I) as well as non–intrusive (SNCP/N) is also
provided at all VC–4, VC–3 and VC–12 levels (future: VC11 as well).
The SDH ports belonging to a protection group (MSP or SNCP) can be flexibly selected by craft terminal
or management system, regardless of their position in the shelf.
MS–SPRing protection is supported in a 2F or 4F schema, at STM–16 or STM–64 level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The 1678 MCC supports non–intrusive Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) of the Higher Order and Lower
Order VCs. For LO VCs only Monitoring before matrix is supported.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 55 / 531

531
 Supervisory Unequipped Trail (SUT) functions on 100% is only supported for Higher Order VCs. Tandem
Connection Monitoring and Termination capabilities can be supported in future.

All STM–1, STM–4 and STM–16 optical interfaces are realized with SFP plug–in technology, giving small
size, cheapness and huge flexibility. XFP modules can be used for STM–64 and 10GE interfaces.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

For Very Long Haul (VLH) and Ultra Long Haul (ULH) at STM–64 boards the optical amplifiers and
not permitted without written authorization.

pre–amplifiers are integrated on the relevant boards.

The synchronization function, located on the SDH/SONET matrix board, synchronizes the 1678 MCC and
provides generation and distribution of a reference clock. The clock can be locked to an external 2 MHz,
2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s source, to any STM–N traffic port or to the internal oscillator. The SSM
(Synchronization Status Message) quality and priority algorithms are also supported (not for 1.5 Mbit/s).

The Equipment Controller and Service Controller boards provide configuration, alarm status and
performance monitoring data. A software download facility (Local and Remote) is available in order to
update the complete software of the control subsystem. The system can be managed either by a CMISE
Craft Terminal running on a Personal Computer attached to the F–interface, by the Network Management
System through the Q–interface or by a TL1 command line interface.

A DC/DC converter, located on each board, guarantees power supply throughout the system. The
distribution of the DC/DC converters guarantees inherently power supply hardware protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 56 / 531

531
 8.3 1678MCC Main Shelf Equipment View

In the following figures are shown the 1678MCC Main Shelf Equipment photos:

• Figure 16. on page 57 shows a view of equipment with cover;

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• Figure 17. on page 58 shows a lateral view of equipment with cover;

• Figure 18. on page 59 shows a view of the 1678MCC main shelf with relevant units (common
and traffic ports board).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 16. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 57 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Figure 17. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Side View

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
58 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Figure 18. 1678MCC Main Shelf – Board View

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
59 / 531
 8.4 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network

The 1678MCC equipment belongs to the Alcatel–Lucent OMSN family product, compliant with the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) defined by the ITU–T Recs. and compliant with SONET defined by
the ANSI Recs.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC can be used for transmission over any type of fiber.
not permitted without written authorization.

The equipment 1678MCC can be utilized in interurban, regional and metropolitan networks configured for
standard plesiochronous or synchronous systems.
The product can be suitably employed on linear, ring and hub networks and on protected or unprotected
line links.

The equipment applications depends on the different types of networks available.

The main applications are described in the following paragraph.

8.4.1 Applications

The 1678MCC is designed with enough flexibility to find application in many segments of a carrier’s
network. Because the system can be minimally configured with a matrix, common control and interface
boards, yet also be fully populated with a mix of interface types, the same system can be used either near
the network edge or even in core applications.

A number of the most important network applications are listed below:

• Metro–Core Cross–Connect (VC–4/3/12/11)

• Core Cross–Connect (VC–4nc/VC–4; AU–3nc/AU–3)
• Optical Gateway Cross–Connect (SDH/SONET/OTH)
• Gateway in Trans–National networks
• Gateway in Submarine Landing station
• Gateway for Carrier – Carrier stations
• Hub and Spoke node in Core Data networks
• Service Connect for Mobile Core Networks
• ASON / GMPLS node for Core ISP networks

Optimized Site Architectures

All kind of network topologies like hub and spoke, ring or mesh networks are supported by 1678MCC,
converging the different layers of transmission.
Most carriers’ networks contain points of presence or central offices in physical locations dictated by traffic
demand or collocation with other carriers. Typically, these offices form interconnection points between:

• ring or hub based access and metro structures that collect and aggregate traffic coming from
the network edge, often carrying as well LO as HO traffic parts;
• ring or mesh based transport structures, interconnecting different metro areas directly or via a
metro core / core network (mostly HO structured).

Historically, sites therefore required a number of network elements (LO/HO OMSNs, LO/HO DXCs) in
order to satisfy the different applications. Today only one 1678MCC is necessary to perform this task, such
ensuring a very cost–effective node solution.

In addition to this office modernization effect, there are other possibilities to reduce the required node
functionality and size (and with that the node cost) by choosing appropriate layered network topologies.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

This should be done in such a way that transit traffic is avoided in client layers and switched or
cross–connected in server layers instead.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 60 / 531

531
 One example for such an network concept is the change from hierarchical IP/MPLS over DWDM networks
to a flat (fully meshed on the MPLS layer) architecture, with an intermediate SDH layer which provides an
1:1 mapping of MPLS LSPs into SDH VCs. These than can be groomed and cross–connected throughout
their way in the network at lower cost as it would be if they had to be handled in real IP/MPLS nodes at
each location.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC with its data functionalities is best suited and prepared for these applications.
not permitted without written authorization.

Aggregation

Whether there is a need for traffic aggregation or cross–connecting – the 1678MCC provides the optimized
solution. Usually in the metro area many customers create low bit–rate access traffic using various
services to reach their partners and service providers somewhere else.

The 1678MCC fits in ideally as an advanced wideband multi–service cross–connect which bridges the
required distances and concentrates the required capacities in one single network element by using
SDH/SONET and OTH technology. Comprising the wide range of interfaces from 2 Mbit/s to 10 Gbit/s by
using extension shelves, even the OTH boundary transition in core networks is effectively possible.
Thus, thanks to its flexible architecture and SW build–up it is possible not only to converge SDH and
SONET but also OTH on a common platform taking the benefits of aggregation over all layers.

Data Interfaces

The growth of data applications adds the requirement for associated interfaces like 1 Gigabit Ethernet
(1GE) or 10GE.
The 1678MCC supports optical 1/10 Gbit/s Ethernet data interfaces that enable easy to handle and cost
effective connectivity towards data aware networks with Routers and Servers.

Following applications are supported:

• Point to Point EoS (Ethernet over SDH/Sonet)

• Point to Multi–Point EoS (with L2 extension)
• LSR (Label Switch Router) in core data networks

GASON / GMPLS Support

The overall forecasted growth of data applications adds requirements for dynamics and interoperability,
not only for the service but also for the management of the transport entity. Automatic Switched Optical
Networks (ASON) as the concept and Generalized Multi Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) as the
protocol are today’s buzzwords in this aspect.

The traditional trend of centralized management of transmission networks is enhanced with the
introduction of a dynamic, decentralized control plane paying tribute to the new demand. By introducing
such a concept to the optical transmission, a new era arises.

This era will lead to:

• Restorable mesh networks.

Those are either already implemented or under implementation. Automation is used here to
achieve a kind of ’automatic redialing’ performed by the network in case of failures. Based on
this technology a much finer service differentiation can be provided compared to today’s
protected networks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Interoperability on control level.

Actually each vendor has a different manager for his equipment and in a multi vendor domain
there is always an issue to provide end–to–end connectivity and supervision.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 61 / 531

531
 By using standard protocols between devices of different vendors, a end–to–end provisioning
can be achieved by actually performing only one provisioning action at the source of a
connection.
• New services with close protocol interaction (ASON) between Data and Transmission
equipment. Here the service node (e.g. a router) can derive according to bandwidth and QoS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

requirements whether additional transport capacity is needed or if sufficient capacity is readily

not permitted without written authorization.

available.
• Automatic switching from user side may be introduced concurrently to above steps depending
on prosperous business models. Ethernet over SDH may push for a control plane
interoperability between data and transmission to actually control and maintain the overall
network. Bandwidth on Demand (BonD) can become a service once interoperability between
nodes and technologies are resolved.

Alcatel–Lucent is also tackling one of the key issues operators see when dealing with GMPLS, that is its
operational manageability. Yet, this seems to be one of the key factors that have so far prevented
widespread adoption of the technology.

Here comes Alcatel–Lucent distinctive story: thanks to huge and unparalleled experience accumulated
in transport network management, including the intricacies of large backbone real time restoration
systems, Alcatel–Lucent is in a position to design, implement and deploy a managed GMPLS solution that
allows tracking in real time the circuit and bandwidth allocation within the network keeping continuous
control of network resource usage.

Also, to ease deployment and customization with the new technology, Alcatel–Lucent solution allows
partitioning of each NE between different control planes, allowing a smooth transition from the current
technology paradigm to the next.

”Lambda” aware Networking

The 1678MCC has built in networking capabilities according to the new Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH)
which allows effective and cost efficient networking on a coarser granularity than traditional SDH/SONET
+networks. Even if OTH signals are digital signals and as such independent from the physical medium they
currently are transported or processed, often it is referred to as ”Lambda” networking, as DWDM
technology is part of the OTH concept and as the transport entities are in the order of magnitude of a
complete wavelength (today 2.5 & 10 Gbit/s, in future also 40 Gbit/s).

Three major network applications can be fulfilled by the 1678MCC on the OTH layers:

• a gateway functionality between SDH and OTH networks with the appropriate mapping
functionalities (e.g. STM–16 in ODU1, or STM–64 in ODU2);
• a pure ODU cross–connect functionality between OTH interfaces;
• a ”modem” functionality which allows both, complete STM–N signals and already ODU
structured OTH signals, to be transported over non–OTH–aware SDH networks (using virtual
concatenated SDH VCs as transport entity).

Optical Edge Device (OED) Integration

Optical Edge Devices (OEDs) will be used in 1678 Metro Core Connect to provide additional I/O ports,
which are not supported in the 1678MCC main shelf at all, or where implementation in the OED allows
a better usage of the HO matrix capacity in the 1678MCC main shelf.

The OED integration feature covers the complete integration of OEDs, consisting of the mechanical OED
integration and the SW OED integration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 62 / 531

531
 8.4.2 Configuration

• Terminal multiplexer (refer to Figure 19. on page 63)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The multiplexer is provided with an STM–1 / STM–4 / STM–16 / STM–64 station interface
not permitted without written authorization.

(possibly stand–by too) to be connected to a Digital Electronic Cross–Connect or to a higher

hierarchical line system.

SDH PORT
SDH
PDH PORTS NE
SDH PORT
(SPARE)

Figure 19. Terminal multiplexer

• Add/Drop Multiplexer (refer to Figure 20. on page 63)

The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) signals from (into) the STM–1 / STM–4 /
STM–16 / STM–64 stream.
Part of the signal pass–through between the line sides, defined A and B in Figure 20. on page
63.

SDH PORT SDH PORT

Side A NE Side B
SDH PORT SDH PORT
(SPARE) (SPARE)

SDH, PDH PORTS

Figure 20. Add/Drop Multiplexer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 63 / 531

531
 • ”HUB” STM–N (refer to Figure 21. on page 64)

The multiplexer permits to drop/insert STM–N tributaries into a multiple stream and then branch
them off in HUB structures.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

SDH PORT SDH PORT

NE
SDH PORT SDH PORT
(SPARE) (SPARE)

SDH PORT

Figure 21. ”HUB” STM–1

• Mixed Configuration

The NE can handle in the same node all the previously configuration thus performing a mixed
configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 64 / 531

531
 8.4.3 Network Topologies

For each of the above network applications different network topologies may be used.
The most important network topologies are:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Point to Point
not permitted without written authorization.

• Linear
• Ring and multiring topology
• Meshed topology

– Point–to–point link (refer to Figure 22. on page 65)

In this case the NE can be connected to another NE through the line.

SDH PORT SDH PORT

SDH SDH
PDH PORTS NE NE PDH PORTS

SDH PORT SDH PORT

SPARE SPARE

Figure 22. Point–to–point links

– Linear Drop–insert (refer to Figure 23. on page 65)

The NE can be programmed to drop (insert) PDH and SDH ports from (into) the STM–1, STM–4,
STM–16, STM–64 stream or terminate PDH ports.

SDH PORT SDH PORT SDH PORT

NE NE NE NE
SPARE SPARE SPARE
PDH PORTS PDH PORTS

SDH AND PDH SDH AND PDH

PORTS PORTS

Figure 23. Linear drop–insert

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 65 / 531

531
 – Ring structure (refer to Figure 24. on page 66)

The drop–insert function permits to realize ring structures.

The VC can be automatically rerouted if the optical splice breaks down or one of the equipment nodes
fails.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

SDH AND PDH

PORTS

NE
STM–64 STM–64

RING1

SDH AND PDH SDH AND PDH

NE NE
PORTS SDH AND PDH PORTS
PORTS

STM–64 STM–64

NE

STM–1 STM–1

PDH
PORTS
SDH AND PDH SDH AND PDH
NE NE
PORTS PORTS
RING2

STM–1 STM–1
NE

SDH AND PDH

PORTS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 24. Ring structure

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 66 / 531

531
 – Meshed Topology (refer to Figure 25. on page 67)

The Meshed topology may be used in case of collection of traffic in peripheral nodes or customer
premises sites. The 1+1 line protection may be used to protect against line failure and, in some
cases, node failure could be protected using dual hub topology too. For this type of network
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

topologies the mini digital cross connect system is very useful and SNCP/I is used.
not permitted without written authorization.

PDH PORT

NE

SDH AND PDH

STM–N STM–N PORTS PDH PORT
PDH PORT
STM–1 STM–1
NE NE NE
RING1 NE

STM–N STM–N

PDH PORT
NE

STM–N

SDH AND PDH

PORTS

NE
STM–N STM–N

PDH PORT
STM–N

NE STM–N
NE RING2
NE PDH PORT

SDH AND PDH

PORTS

NE STM–N
STM–N

PDH PORT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 25. Meshed topology

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 67 / 531

531
 8.5 1678MCC Management Interfaces

With the extensive introduction of SDH and WDM in the transport network, centralized and integrated
network management is mandatory for Network Operators to realize the potential cost saving and required
Quality of service.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 26. shows the 1678MCC Management Interfaces. A CMISE Interface, based on Q3 or
RFC 1006, for communication with the Craft Terminal (CT) and other Network Managers, like 1353SH
(Element Management System) or 1354RM/1354NP (Domain Management) is existing.

Furthermore the 1678MCC can be managed over a TL1 interface.

TL1 CT

TL1 CMISE–IF

TL1 Adapter

CMISE–IF

1678MCC

Figure 26. Management Interfaces of 1678MCC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 68 / 531

531
 8.5.1 Craft Terminal

The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements.
Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible, obtaining a remote Craft Terminal
application. This number is defined in order not to overload the network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The Craft Terminal uses a state–of–the–art platform for providing an advanced and integrated
Management. It is ALMAP, the Alcatel Management Platform.

The Craft Terminal is based on EML core, a project that extends ALMAP in order to provide a common
set of functions for projects which realize an Alcatel–Lucent network management system. This project
is common with the 1353SH (Element Management Level ), permitting the same approach for the NE
management (commonality of views and commands).

Examples of network management architecture are reported in Figure 27. on page 70.

The SDH/SONET Equipment provides two types of physical interfaces for management functions: the F
interface and the QB3 interface. To these interfaces can be connected the manager computer, that can
be:

• a CRAFT TERMINAL (CT). It is generally a personal computer (PC), connected through the F
interface for local management.

• OPERATION SYSTEM (OS). Workstations utilized for the TMN (Telecommunications

Management Network). They are connected through the QB3 interface, for network
management.

The management can be realized in local or remote mode:

• in the local mode the managed equipment are directly connected to the computer via F
interface

• in the remote mode the managed equipment are indirectly connected via the OSI Networking
which can include both DCCM / DCCR protocol or Ethernet LAN (Local Area Network)

• in the remote mode the managed equipment are indirectly connected via an IP network using
a tunnel over IP.

For more detailed information refer to CT Basic Operator’s handbook.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 69 / 531

531
 LAN
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

OPERATIONS NE OPERATIONS
SYSTEM GATEWAY SYSTEM
not permitted without written authorization.

LAN LAN LAN LAN

BRIDGES / DCN BRIDGES /
ROUTERS ROUTERS

QB3 QB3

N.E F CRAFT N.E F N.E F

GATEWAY TERMINAL GATEWAY GATEWAY

DCC/LAN DCC/LAN DCC/LAN

DCC/LAN

NE NE NE
F Craft NE
F

Terminal

DCC/LAN
DCC/LAN DCC/LAN
F F
N.E N.E
N.E

DCN : Data Communication Network

N.E. : Network Element (MSN, ADM, CROSS CONNECT; etc)

Figure 27. Example of network management architecture via Craft Terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 70 / 531

531
 8.5.2 TL1 Interface

For ANSI market application the 1678 provides a TL1 NE management interface. The basic characteristics
of the TL1 interface are compliant to applicable Bellcore standards.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The TL1 interface is implemented by a new software layer TL1.

not permitted without written authorization.

The TL1 interface will be used by operator personnel for daily work from remote locations and network
element (NE) local maintenance. The TL1 interface will further be used by Network Management for Alarm
Supervision and Path Provisioning.

The TL1 interface is a command line interface. The operator starts a Telnet session via LAN and can
control the system using TL1 commands.

LAN

TL1
NE OPERATIONS
interface GATEWAY SYSTEM

LAN LAN LAN LAN

BRIDGES / DCN BRIDGES /
ROUTERS ROUTERS

QB3 QB3

N.E F CRAFT N.E F N.E F

GATEWAY TERMINAL GATEWAY GATEWAY

DCC/LAN DCC/LAN DCC/LAN

DCC/LAN

F F
NE NE NE NE

DCC/LAN
DCC/LAN DCC/LAN
F F
N.E N.E
N.E

DCN : Data Communication Network

N.E. : Network Element (MSN, ADM, CROSS CONNECT; etc)

Figure 28. Example of network management architecture via TL1 interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 71 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
72 / 531
 9 RACK CONFIGURATIONS

9.1 Configuration Possibilities

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC cross connect consists of one or more racks. The minimum configuration is one main rack
not permitted without written authorization.

equipped with the main shelf. This configuration can be extended with additional shelves an racks.

There are four kinds of shelves:

– Main shelf
– Lower Order extension shelf
– 1670SM OED
– 1662SMC OED

These shelves can be mounted in two different racks. The main shelf and the LO extension shelf can only
be mounted in a main rack. The OED shelves can be mounted inside the main rack in combination with
the main shelf or in a separate rack, named OED rack.

The several rack configurations are shown from Figure 29. to Figure 31.

Figure 29. shows the combination possibilities of main shelf and OED shelves inside the main rack.
Figure 30. shows the combination possibilities with the LO extension shelf.
Figure 31. shows the configuration possibilities of the OED shelves inside the OED rack.

For more details about the shelves installation in the racks refer to the “Installation Handbook”.

NGTRU NGTRU NGTRU NGTRU NGTRU NGTRU

HMU HMU HMU HMU HMU HMU
Cable Space Cable Space DCU DCU

1662SMC Main
Main Shelf Main Main
Shelf Shelf Shelf
1670SM FAN
Cable Space
FAN Cable Space

Main Main
Shelf Main Shelf 1662SMC
Main Shelf 1670SM
Shelf FAN
DCU DCU DCU FAN

Top access Bottom access

Figure 29. Schematic 1678MCC Main Rack Configurations with Main and OED Shelves
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 73 / 531

531
 Configuration inside the main rack Rack for system extension *
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NGTRU NGTRU
HMU HMU

Main LO
Shelf Shelf

Storage Box

LO
Shelf
LAN

* The extension rack can be mounted at right, left or back side of an existing main rack.

Figure 30. Schematic 1678MCC Rack Configurations with LO Extension Shelf

TRU TRU TRU TRU TRU TRU

HMU HMU HMU HMU HMU HMU/DCU
DCU
1662SMC 1662SMC 1662SMC
1670SM 1670SM
FAN FAN FAN
FAN 1670SM FAN
1662SMC FAN
1662SMC 1662SMC
1670SM FAN 1662SMC 1670SM
FAN LAN FAN FAN
DCU FAN FAN
LAN LAN LAN

Top access Top/Bottom

Bottom access
access

Figure 31. Schematic OED Rack Configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 74 / 531

531
 9.2 Rack Configuration for SONET markets

The following special features exits:

– One main shelf or,

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Main shelf plus LO extension shelf (customer specific racks are used)
not permitted without written authorization.

– Lower FAN unit with dust filter,

– Special shelf with support for dust filter,

– Modified NGTRU to provide ANSI complaint battery inputs,

– No HMU is used.
This is possible in case of single shelf per rack only. In this case a dedicated alarm cable is needed
to interface NGTRU with main shelf.

Figure 32. shows a schematic SONET rack configurations.

NGTRU NGTRU

Main Main
Shelf Shelf

LO
Shelf

Top/Bottom access

Figure 32. Schematic SONET Rack Configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 75 / 531

531
 9.3 LAN Switches (LSX)

For multirack configurations consisting of a 1678MCC main rack and several OED racks a pair of Ethernet
LAN switches are needed to interconnect the internal control plane.
The two LAN switches will be mounted at the bottom of one OED rack (refer to Figure 33. ). For more de-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

tails refer to the “Installation Handbook”.

not permitted without written authorization.

OED Rack Main Rack OED Rack

LAN A
LAN B
TRU NGTRU TRU

1678 MMC
1662SMC 1670 SM

1670 SM
1670 SM
LO Shelf
LAN A
LAN B

Q3B to LAN A Q3B to LAN B

Figure 33. General LAN Cabling for multirack configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 76 / 531

531
 9.4 Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU)

This chapter describes the mechanical integration of up to four Dispersion Compensation Units (DCUs)
into both rack types (Main–/OED–Rack). In consequence of using V/U–64.2 boards the insertion of one
or two Dispersions Compensation Modules (DCMs) is required. Up to two DCMs can be housed per DCU
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

shelf (refer to Figure 34. ). The DCM is a pure passive component without any control functions. The Dis-
not permitted without written authorization.

persion Compensation Module is designed for SMF operating in extended C–band. It is capable of com-
pensating the dispersion of standard single mode fiber (SMF) over a wide wavelength range, from 1529nm
to 1569nm. For more details please refer to chapter 18.3.1.2 and 18.3.1.3.

The following tables show the several configuration possibilities in the Main and in the OED rack.
For more details about the concrete rack configurations with DCUs refer to the “Installation Handbook”.

Table 9. Main Rack Configurations with DCU

HMU 1678MCC 1670SM 1662SMC # of DCU

1 1 1 0 1*
Main Rack 1 1 0 1 2
1 2 0 0 4
* Only by bottom access. No DCU is possible by top access .

Table 10. OED Rack Configurations with DCU

HMU 1670SM 1662SMX LANs # of DCU

1 1 1 0 2
OED Rack 1 0 2 2 4
1* 2 0 0 1*
* Only one HMU or one DCU is possible.

DCM

DCM

Front cover
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 34. Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 77 / 531

531
 9.5 Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU)

The HMU (refer to Figure 35. on page 78) is meant to be a collector and distributor for system internal and
housekeeping signals. The HMU can be used in all racks being equipped with a 1678MCC, a 1670SM or
a 1662SMC shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All supported combinations of HMUs with other equipment inside main rack and OED rack are shown in
Figure 29. and Figure 31.

Regarding the 1678MCC, main purpose of the HMU is to make the converter alarms of the up to six step–
up converters located inside the NGTRU available to the system(s). Also the “Push Button” to reset system
alarm lamps and the customer access via a D–SUB connector to the GPI and GPO interfaces will be sup-
ported.

Regarding the 1670SM, only the “Push Button” will be used.

For the 1662SMC, beside the “Push Button” also the FAN alarms of the 1662SMC will be supported.

Reset push button

Figure 35. Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 78 / 531

531
 10 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE MAIN SHELF

This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the main
shelf equipment.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated in Figure 36. on page 80 and Figure 37. on page 84.
not permitted without written authorization.

The Main part codes and partition are listed in Table 14. on page 96.

The Accessory codes and partition are listed in Table 15. on page 100.

The Explanatory notes of part list are reported in Table 16. on page 101.

For the units front view refer to para. 10.3 on page 103.

These paragraphs illustrate the interconnection points that can be accessed on the units front panel and
the alarm/status LEDs together with the relevant legend and meaning.

Notes:
The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turn-on and Maintenance operations is
not listed as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by Alcatel–Lucent.
Refer to Operator’s Handbook for PC hardware configuration.

Table 14. on page 96 contains the units of current equipment release. Units belonging to previous
equipment releases/versions (e.g. for configuration updating) are not here listed but still supported,
if compatible with the current one (for eventual units belonging to previous equipment
releases/versions refer to the relevant Technical Handbook).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 79 / 531

531
 10.1 1678MCC Main Shelf (SR78)

The mechanical design of the 1678MCC is based on a 21” ETSI compatible shelf, consistent with the
1678MCC Rack equipment practice. This rack can house one 1678MCC shelf, or one 1678MCC shelf plus
an additional OED shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The mechanical dimensions of the shelf (named SR78) is the following:

– 533 mm (Wide)
– 674 mm (High) or 684 mm (with dust filter)
– 294 mm (Deep)
The deep with cover is max. 300 mm.

The mechanical design provides EMI/EMC performances, in compliance with ETSI standard 300 386–1
“Telecommunication Center”.

The 1678MCC main shelf is a single row shelf (refer to Figure 36. ):

FAN Unit Subrack n

PSF

PSF
MATRIX* (Copy A)
MATRIX* (Copy B)

FLCCONGI

Subrack n+1
FLCSERV

Traffic Ports Traffic Ports

FAN Unit Subrack n+2

21"−96TE
Matrix*: MX160
MX320
MX640

Figure 36. 1678MCC Main Shelf Layout

The 1678MCC main shelf (SR78) has a symmetrical layout. There are no dedicated slots for expansions
towards other shelves.

The 1678MCC has got 16 port slots, each supporting up to 40 Gbit/s (256 STM–1 equivalent) throughput.
So the maximum throughput supportable by 1678MCC is 640 Gbit/s (4096 STM–1 equivalent).
The 16 port slots are provided by a 2.5 Gbit/s backpanel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 80 / 531

531
 Three types of slots are distinguished:

• Port slot (16 slots, each 4.5TE wide), containing any type of the following Traffic Port boards:

– 16 x STM–1/4 optical board (P16S1–4)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– 16 x STM–1 board (P16S1S)

not permitted without written authorization.

– 16 x STM–16 optical board (P16S16)

– 8 x STM–16 optical board (P8S16)
– 4 x STM–16 optical board (P4S16)
– 1 x STM–64 optical board (S64M)
– 2 x STM–64 optical board (P2S64M)
– 4 x STM–64 optical board (P4S64M)
– 2 x STM–64 optical board (P2S64X)
– 4 x STM–64 optical board (P4S64X)
– 16 x GE Port board (P16GE)
– 8 x GE Port board (P8GE)
– 4 x GE Port board (P4GE)
– 2 x 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port (P2XGE)
– 4 x 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port (P4XGE)
– Lower Order Matrix board 40G (LAX40)
– Lower Order Matrix board 20G (LAX20)
– Lower Order Matrix Link 40G (LAC40)
– ISA–ES64 Server Board (ES64SC)

The maximum quantity of each interface per shelf is:

• 256 x STM–1 optical interfaces

• 256 x STM–4 optical interfaces
• 256 x STM–16 optical interfaces
• 64 x STM–64 optical interfaces
• 256 x GE optical interfaces
• 64 x 10GE optical interfaces

• Higher Order Matrix slot (2 slots, each 8TE wide), containing the following boards (1+1):

– 640 Gbit/s Matrix board (MX640)

– 640 Gbit/s Matrix board ANSI (MX640GA)
– 320 Gbit/s Matrix board (MX320)
– 320 Gbit/s Matrix board ANSI (MX320GA)
– 160 Gbit/s Matrix board (MX160)

• Control and Common parts slot (2 slots, each 4TE wide), containing the following boards:

– First Level Controller and

Service Interfaces (FLCSERV)

– First Level Controller and

Service Interfaces ANSI (FLCSERVA)

– First Level Controller and

Control&General Interfaces (FLCCONGI)

– Power Supply Filter (1+1) (PSF)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Bus Termination (two boards) (BUSTERM)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 81 / 531

531
 Note:
FLC, PSF and BUSTERM are located in the same slot. This slot is divided into three subslots (refer
to Figure 37. on page 84). The BUSTERM board is not visible on the shelf front panel. It is positioned
behind the FLC board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The FAN Subsystem consists of two subracks and contains the following boards:
not permitted without written authorization.

– FANs unit (FAN)

The FLCSERVICE supports the following functionalities:

• Flash Memory device

• First Level Controller spare
• connectors for Auxiliary AUX/EOW Channels (not supported by the software)
• External Synchronization Interface
• Q3 and F interfaces
• phone jack and phone expansion
• DCC

The FLCCONGI supports the following functionalities:

• Flash Memory device

• First Level Controller main
• External connectors for Housekeeping, Remote Alarms, Rack Alarms
• Q3 and F interfaces
• DCC

The Matrix boards supports the following functionalities:

• Cross–connection
• Synchronization (CRU)
• Shelf Controller
• 1+1 EPS protection scheme, when two Matrix boards are present

The Power Supply Filter board (PSF) supports the following functionality:

• distribution of Power Supply after filtering process

The Bus Termination board (BUSTERM) supports the following functionality:

• electrical termination to the buses routed on the backplane

These two boards are not visible on shelf front–panel. They are two small board included in the shelf
and one BUSTERM is placed behind the FLCSERV board and the other BUSTERM is placed behind
the FLCCONGI board.

The FAN unit (FAN) supports the following functionality:

• cooling of the equipment

Due to the high level of integration reached with this equipment, the two FAN units located at the top
and at the bottom of the shelf have always to be equipped.
The two FAN units are physically integrated in the 1678MCC shelf, without the need of external
connection cables.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note:
The slots which are not equipped have to be closed by a dummy plate for EMC reasons.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 82 / 531

531
 10.1.1 Equipment Front View

The 1678MCC equipment has a symmetrical layout (refer to Figure 37. on page 84).

The following types of slots are distinguished:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• slot 1 : First Level Controller “spare” + Service Interfaces board

(FLCSERV, FLCSERVA)

• slots 2 ÷ 9 and
slots 12 ÷ 19 : Traffic Port boards, ES64 data board, Lower Order Adaptation/Matrix and
Lower Order Matrix Link 40G

• slot 10 and 11 : High Order Matrix (A and B) boards

(MX640, MX640GA, MX320, MX320GA, MX160)

• slot 20 : First Level Controller “main” + Control&General Interfaces board

(FLCCONGI)

• slot 21 and 22 : Bus Termination boards

(BUSTERM)

• slot 24 and 25 : Power Supply and Filter boards

(PSF)

Note:
Slot 21 and slot 22 are positioned behind slot 1 and slot 20 respectively, so the BUSTERM
boards are not visible on the shelf front panel.

The two FANs have no slot number, because they are modelled as separate subracks (subrack n and n+2).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 83 / 531

531
 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FAN (Subrack n)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
24 25

ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
1 20

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
10 11

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
21
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
22

ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FAN (Subrack n+2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 37. 1678MCC Equipment front view (slot position)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 84 / 531

531
 10.1.2 Configuration Rules

10.1.2.1 Capacity Count in HO Matrix

From R3.2 (SKY20–01G) onwards the following handling on I/O boards with pluggable modules is
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

implemented:
not permitted without written authorization.

The HO matrix capacity is counted on configured port level (not on board level), while cards without
direct interfaces (e.g. LAX20/40) are not counted. But all LO shelf LAC40 ports are taken in account!

10.1.2.2 Restrictions

There are the following two restrictions in term of matrix size and power consumption:

Please note, that the number of configurable modules (e.g. on 16xSTM–16 boards)
depends on your matrix size! The matrix size defines the max. number of modules. There
are restrictions in case of smaller matrix size:

– MX320 = 2048 STM–1 equ.

– MX160 = 1024 STM–1 equ.

Note:
Refer to the CT Operator’s Handbook chapter ’Create, modify or delete modules of an I/O board’ for
the detailed procedure.

The max. number of boards is limited because of the power consumption of around
140 W per board. The maximum shelf load (of around 1.5 kW for the sum of all 16 I/O slots)
mustn’t be violated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 85 / 531

531
 10.1.2.3 Allowed or basic Equipment Configuration

Table 11. on page 86 presents for each slot, the allowed equipment types and the basic equipment type
(the acronyms of the units are shown).
Table 11. describes the configuration for allowed and basic boards in the 1678MCC main shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Table 12. describes the configuration of the Pluggable Modules in the STM–64, STM–16, STM–1/4 and
not permitted without written authorization.

the GE boards front panels allowed for 1678MCC main shelf.

Table 11. 1678MCC Equipment: slot configuration

1678MCC shelf
Slots Basic Configuration Allowed Equipment note
1 FLCSERV/FLCSERVA –– 1
SDH High Speed ports:
P4S64M
P2S64M
P4S64X
P2S64X
S64M
P16S16
P8S16 2
P4S16
P16S1S4
2÷9 P16S1S
and no basic configuration P16GE
12 ÷ 19 P8GE
P4GE
P2XGE
P4XGE
Layer 2 Switch 20G board:
ES64SC 14
LO Matrix boards:
LAX40 3
LAX20
LO Matrix Link 40G boards:
LAC40 13
10 MX640, MX640GA, –– 4
MX320, MX320GA, MX160
(main)
11 MX640, MX640GA, –– 4
MX320, MX320GA, MX160
(spare)
20 FLCCONGI –– 5
21, 22 BUSTERM –– 6
24, 25 PSF –– 7
subrack n, n+2 FAN –– 8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Refer to explanatory notes on Table 13. on page 88.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 86 / 531

531
 Figure 38. on page 90 and Figure 39. on page 91 shows the supported basic boards and allowed I/O and
LO matrix boards and the STM–N optical/electrical modules managed in the 1678MCC main shelf.

Table 12. Pluggable Optical and Electrical Modules

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Slot Allowed Equipment note

P16S1S board
J1 ÷ J16 STM–1 electrical module: SES1 9
STM–N optical modules: SS11
J1 ÷ J16 SL11 9
SL12
P16S1S4 board
J1 ÷ J16 STM–1 electrical module: SES1 9
STM–N optical modules: SS11
SL11
SL12
9
J1 ÷ J16 SS41
SL41
SL42
P4S16, P8S16, P16S16
J1 ÷ J4 STM–N optical modules: SI161
J1 ÷ J8 SS161
J1 ÷ J16 SL161
SL162 10
STM–N colored modules: CWP (1470 – 1610 nm)
CWA (1470 – 1610 nm)
DWA (CH 620 – CH 170)
LAC40 boards
J1 ÷ J16 STM–N optical modules: SI161 10
P4GE, P8GE, P16GE boards
J1 ÷ J4...16 Optical modules: SGESX
SGELX 10
SGEZX
P2S64X, P4S64X boards
J1 ÷ J2 STM–N optical modules: XS642E
J1 ÷ J4 XS642B
11
XI641
XP1L12D2
P2XGE, P4XGE boards
J1 ÷ J16 STM–N optical modules: XGES
XS642B 12
XI641
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Refer to explanatory notes on Table 13. on page 88.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 87 / 531

531
 Table 13. 1678MCC Equipment: slot configuration explanation notes

Note Explanation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

It is 4TE.
not permitted without written authorization.

It is dedicated to First Level Controller ”spare” function and Service interfaces.

1
Equipment Controller 1+1 EPS protection scheme is supported. When this board is “active”
manages the F interface.
All these boards are 4.5TE.
For S64M: This port board can combine with different non exchangeable MSA modules.
The following board types result from this:
– 1 x S–64.2 Port (S–64.2M)
– 1 x L–64.2 Port (L–64.2M)
– 1 x I–64.1 Port (I–64.1M)
– 1 x V–64.2 Port (V–64.2M)
– 1 x U–64.2 Port (U–64.2M)
For P2S64M: This port board can combine with different non exchangeable MSA modules.
The following board types result from this:
– 2 x S64.2 Port (P2S64M)
– 2 x I64.1 Port (P2I64M)
For P4S64M: This port board can combine with different non exchangeable MSA modules.
The following board types result from this:
– 4 x S64.2 Port (P4S64)
– 4 x I64.1 Port (P4I64)
For P2S64X/P4S64X: This port boards can combine with different pluggable XFP/XFP–E
modules. The following XFP/XFP–E modules are supported:
2 – OPTO TRX XFP S–64.2B Ext.
– OPTO TRX S–64.2B XFP
– OPTO TRX I–64.1 XFP –5/70C
– OPTO TRX XFP P1L1–2D2 (80 km)
For P16S16: up to sixteen Short, Long Haul and colored STM–16 standard ITU–T optical
interfaces are provided.
For P8S16: up to eight Short, Long Haul and colored STM–16 standard ITU–T optical in-
terfaces are provided.
For P4S16: up to four Short, Long Haul and colored STM–16 standard ITU–T optical inter-
faces are provided.
For P16S1S4: up to sixteen electrical STM–1 and/or optical STM–1 and/or STM–4 stan-
dard ITU–T interfaces are provided.
For P16S1S: up to sixteen optical STM–1 and/or electrical STM–1 standard ITU–T inter-
faces are provided.
For P4/8/16GE: up to four/eight/sixteen Gb Ethernet SFP modules are provided.
For P2XGE/P4XGE: up to four of the following modules are provided per board:
– OPTO TRX 10G BASE–S
– OPTO TRX S–64.2B XFP
– OPTO TRX I–64.1 XFP –5/70C
It is 4.5TE. Both boards provide to 1+1 EPS protection scheme (mandatory).
3 LAX A and LAX B have to be located as pair in the following slot numbers:
slot#2 and #3 or slot#4 and#5 and so on until slot#18 and #19.
4 It is 8TE. Both boards provide to 1+1 EPS protection scheme (mandatory).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

It is 4TE.
It is dedicated to First Level Controller “main” function and Control&General interfaces.
5
First Level Controller 1+1 EPS protection scheme is supported. When this board is “active”
manages the F interface.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 88 / 531

531
 Note Explanation
These two small boards are located behind FLCSERV and FLCCONGI boards.
6
They are not visible on the front view.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

7 They are both mandatory.

not permitted without written authorization.

8 They are both mandatory, one under and one above the shelf.
Up to sixteen optical/electrical SFP modules can be plugged in the P16S1S4 and P16S1S
9 port board. A mix of different modules is allowed. In case of P16S1S4 a mix of STM–1e/o
and STM–4 is only allowed in groups of four.
Each optical SFP module can be plugged in anyone of the up to sixteen front panel slots of
10
the relevant port boards.
Each optical XFP/XFP–E module can be plugged in anyone of the up to four front panel
11
slots of the relevant port boards. A mix of different modules is allowed.
Each optical XFP module can be plugged in anyone of the up to four front panel slots of the
12
relevant port boards. A mix of different modules is allowed.
This board is used to connect the 1678MCC main shelf with the LO extension shelf.
13 Max. 5 (4+1) LAC40 boards are necessary to connect a fully equipped 160G LO extension
shelf. The board can be equipped with up to sixteen SI161 SFP modules.
14 This board is used to support Layer 2 switch functionality.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 89 / 531

531
 Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards

I/O Interfaces Port boards Connectors

1 slot
1 4xSTM–64
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

4xSTM–64 MSA PORT 2

not permitted without written authorization.

S64.2b SC/PC
3
I–64.1 (FC/PC)
no mix possible, . P4S64
4
modules not pluggable
P4I64
1 slot

2xSTM–64 MSA PORT 2xSTM–64

1
S–64.2b
I–64.1
SC/PC
no mix possible, 2 P2S64M (FC/PC)
modules not pluggable .
P2I64M

1 slot
1 4xSTM–64
XFP(–E)
4xSTM–64 XFP PORT
2
S64.2b
XFP(–E)
I–64.1 3 LC
XFP(–E)
P1L1–2D2
any mix of XFP/XFP–E modules 4
XFP(–E) P4S64X
possible; modules are pluggable
1 slot
2xSTM–64
2xSTM–64
2xSTM–64 XFP PORT
1
S–64.2b XFP(–E)
I–64.1 LC
P1L1–2D2 2
any mix of XFP/XFP–E modules XFP(–E)
possible; modules are pluggable P2S64X

1 slot
1xSTM–64
1xSTM–64
S–64.2b SC/PC
1 (FC/PC)
L–64.2b S–64.2M
I–64.1 L–64.2M
I–64.1M

1 slot
1xSTM–64
1xSTM–64 external part refere to
V–64.2 1 Figure 51.
DCU
U–64.2 on page 113
V–64.2M
U–64.2M

1 slot
(4/8)16xSTM–16
1
I–16.1 SFP
S–16.1 2
SFP
L–16.1 . . (4/8)16xSTM–16
L–16.2 LC
CWP . . (P4S16)
(4/8)16 (P8S16)
CWA SFP
P16S16
DWA
any mix of SFP modules allowed

1 slot
1
LAC40 SFP
I–16.1 2
SFP
. . LC
16xSTM–16
. .
16
SFP
LAC40
* only on customer request
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 38. Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards – Part 1

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 90 / 531

531
 Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards (continuation)

I/O Interfaces Port boards Connectors

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1 slot
16xSTM–1/4 1
not permitted without written authorization.

SFP
S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2 2
SFP
S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2, SES1
. . LC
16xSTM–1/4
a mix of SFP modules allowed,
. .
16
but only in groups of four
SFP P16S1S4

1 slot
1
SFP
16xSTM–1 2
SFP
S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2, SES1 . .
a mix of SFP modules allowed,
. 16xSTM–1 LC
but only in groups of four .
16
SFP P16S1S

1 slot
1
(4/8)16xGE SFP
2
SGELX SFP
SGESX
. .
(4/8)16xGE LC
SGEZX . . (P4GE)
any mix of SFP modules allowed
(4/8)16 (P8GE)
SFP P16GE

1 slot
1
2x10GE XFP PORT XFP
10G BASE–S 2 XFP
S–64.2b (10G BASE–E) 2x10GE LC
I–64.1 (10G BASE–L)

P2XGE

1 slot
1
XFP
4x10GE XFP PORT
10G BASE–S 2 XFP
S–64.2b (10G BASE–E)
3
4x10GE LC
XFP
I–64.1 (10G BASE–L)
4
XFP
P4XGE

Figure 39. Main Shelf: Supported I/O boards – Part 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 91 / 531

531
 10.1.2.4 Examples of Equipment Configuration

The figures on next pages show some examples of allowed equipment configuration.

Figure 40. on page 93 shows the typical basic configuration of 1678MCC main shelf (without Traffic Port
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

boards):
not permitted without written authorization.

• slot 1 : FLCSERV / FLCSERVA board

• slot 2 ÷ 9 : reserved to traffic port boards, ES64 and LO matrix
• slot 10 and slot 11 : two MX(160/320/320GA/640/640GA) boards
• slot 12 ÷ 19 : reserved to traffic port boards, ES64 and LO matrix
• slot 20 : FLCCONGI board (CT interface)
• slot 21 and slot 22 : two BUSTERM boards (small board)
• slot 24 and slot 25 : two PSF boards
• two FAN units (subrack n, n+2)
• dummy plates for all other slots unequipped

Figure 41. on page 94 shows an example of the following configuration:

• basic configuration
• slot 2 ÷ 5 : four 16 x STM–16 boards
• slot 7 and slot 8 : two 1 x STM–64 boards (short haul)
• slot 9 : a 4 x STM–64 board (short haul)
• slot 12 and slot 13 : two 16 x STM–1/4 boards
• slot 14 : a 4 x STM–64 board (short haul)
• slot 15 and slot 16 : two 2 x STM–64 boards (short haul)
• slot 18 : a 4 x STM–64 board (intraoffice)
• dummy plates for all other slots unequipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 92 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
1

21
BUSTERM FLCSERVICE PSF
24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Matrix Copy A
10
11

Matrix Copy B
FAN (subrack n)

FAN (subrack n+2)

531
Figure 40. Basic configuration of 1678MCC Main Shelf

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

22
BUSTERM FLCCONGI PSF
20
25

93 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
1

21
BUSTERM FLCSERVICE PSF

24
2
P16S16

3
P16S16
4
P16S16 5

P16S16
dummy plate
6 7

S642M
8

S642M
9

P4S64
Matrix Copy A
10
11

Matrix Copy B
P16S1–4
FAN (subrack n)

FAN (subrack n+2)

P16S1–4
P4S64
P2S64
P2S64

531
Figure 41. Allowed Equipment Configuration (Example)
dummy plate
P4I64

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

dummy plate
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

22
BUSTERM FLCCONGI PSF
20
25

94 / 531
 10.2 Part List

The Part List is subdivided in three tables, specifically:

• in Table 14. on page 96 is shown the Main part list

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• in Table 15. on page 100 is shown the Accessory list

• in Table 16. on page 101 is shown the Explanatory notes of previous lists

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the
equipment are indicated too.

Such tables report the following information:

• Description: name of items

• Acronym: it is used to identified units and modules on the Craft Terminal applications

• ANV Part/Number

• Max Q.ty: maximum quantity of items in the 1678MCC equipment

• Slot: position of the units inside the 1678MCC equipment (refer to Figure 37. on page 84)

• Notes: are listed a set of explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 95 / 531

531
 Table 14. Main parts list

Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
not permitted without written authorization.

3AL 81673 AA––

MCC RACK WITH NGTRU –– 1 –– 1
3AL 81673 AB––
3AL 81224 AA–– 2
1678MCC SHELF SR78 1 ––
3AL 81224 AB–– 29
HOUSEKEEPING MONITORING UNIT HMU 3AG 24234 AA–– 1 –– 28
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY AND FILTERS PSF 3AL 81502 AA–– 2 24, 25 3
COMMON PARTS (CONTROLLER)
FLCCONGI ENH. FLCCONGI 3AG 24102 AA––
20
FLCCONGI ENH. (max DCC–M) FLCCONGI 3AG 24102 AB––
FLCSERVICE ENH. FLCSERV 3AG 24103 AA–– 1 4
FLCSERVICE ENH. (max DCC–M) FLCSERV 3AG 24103 AB–– 1
FLCSERVICE ENH. ANSI FLCSERVA 3AG 24332 AB––
SWITCHING MATRIX
MATRIX 640 GBIT/S MX640 3AL 81429 AA––
MATRIX 640 GBIT/S ANSI MX640GA 3AG24334 AA––
MATRIX 320 GBIT/S MX320 3AG 24173 AA–– 10, 11 5
MATRIX 320 GBIT/S ANSI MX320GA 3AG 24336 AA––
MATRIX 160 GBIT/S MX160 3AG 24174 AA–– 2
LOWER ORDER ADAPTATION/MATRIX
LAX40 3AG 24104 AA––
40G 2÷9 6
LOWER ORDER ADAPTATION/MATRIX 3AG 24186 AA–– and
LAX20
20G 3AG 24186 AB–– 12 ÷ 19
Lower Order Matrix Link 40G LAC40 3AG 24327 AA–– 5 35
SPARE PARTS
3AL 81209 AA––
TERMINATION BUS BUSTERM 2 7
3AL 81209 AB–– ––
SFP EXTRACTOR –– 3AL 81728 AA–– 1 8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 96 / 531

531
 Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
TRAFFIC PORTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

16xSTM–1 PORT /SFP (OC–3) P16S1S 3AG 24183 AA–– 9

not permitted without written authorization.

16xSTM–1/4 PORT /SFP (OC–3/OC–12) P16S1S4 3AL 89540 AA–– 10

16xSTM–16 PORT /SFP (OC–48) P16S16 3AL 81295 AA––
8xSTM–16 PORT /SFP (OC–48) P8S16 3AG 24175 AA–– 11
4xSTM–16 PORT /SFP (OC–48) P4S16 3AG 24176 AA––
3AL 81292 AA–– 2÷9
4xSTM–64 I–64.1 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) P4I64 16 and
3AL 81292 AB––
3AL 81692 AE–– 12 ÷ 19
4xSTM–64 S–64.2 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) P4S64
3AL 81692 AF––
––
3AG 24161 AA––
4xSTM–64 XFP PORT (OC–192) P4S64X
3AG 24161 AB––
3AG 24177 AA––
2xSTM–64 I–64.1 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) P2I64M
3AG 24177 AB––
3AL 81692 AC––
2xSTM–64 S–64.2 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) P2S64M
3AL 81692 AD––
3AL 24214 AA––
2xSTM–64 XFP PORT (OC–192) P2S64X
3AL 24214 BA––
1xSTM–64 V–64.2 PORT FC/MU (OC–192) V–642M 3AL 89997 AA––
3AL 89996 AA––
1xSTM–64 U–64.2 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) U–642M
3AL 89996 AB––
3AG 24179 AA––
1xSTM–64 I–64.1 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) I–641M 2÷9
3AG 24179 AB–– 16
3AL 81692 AA–– and ––
1xSTM–64 S–64.2 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) S–642M
3AL 81692 AB–– 12 ÷ 19
3AL 89995 AA––
1xSTM–64 L–64.2 PORT FC/PC (OC–192) L–642M
3AL 89995 AB––
16xGE/FC PORT P16GEFC 3AL 81904 AA––
8xGE/FC PORT P8GEFC 3AG 24181 AB––
4xGE/FC PORT P4GEFC 3AG 24182 AB––
2x10GE XFP PORT P2XGE 3AG 24476 AA––
4x10GE XFP PORT P4XGE 3AG 24339 AA–– ––
DATA APPLICATION
2÷9
ISA–ES PACKET AGGREGATOR 20G
ES64SC 3AG 24371 AA–– 2 and 40
(SERVER CARD)
12 ÷ 19
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 97 / 531

531
 Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
STM–N ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL MODULES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

OPTO TRX SFP STM–1EL PLUG–IN SES1 1AB 21017 0001 12, 27
not permitted without written authorization.

OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0001

SS–1.1
OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0002
SL–1.1
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0005
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.2 PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0003
SL–1.2
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.2 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19467 0006
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0001
SS–4.1
OPTO TRX SFP S–4.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0003
SL–4.1 256 ––
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0006 12
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.2 PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0002
SL–4.2
OPTO TRX SFP L–4.2 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19636 0007
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 PLUG–IN SI–16.1 1AB 19637 0013
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0001
SS–16.1
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0006
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.1 PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0004
SL–16.1
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.1 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0008
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.2 PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0003
SL–16.2
OPTO TRX SFP L–16.2 DDM PLUG–IN 1AB 19637 0009
Opto Transc. Module 1470nm CWP 1AB 19634 0001
Opto Transc. Module 1490nm CWP 1AB 19634 0002
Opto Transc. Module 1510nm CWP 1AB 19634 0003
Opto Transc. Module 1530nm CWP 1AB 19634 0004
Opto Transc. Module 1550nm CWP 1AB 19634 0005
Opto Transc. Module 1570nm CWP 1AB 19634 0006
Opto Transc. Module 1590nm CWP 1AB 19634 0007
Opto Transc. Module 1610nm CWP 1AB 19634 0008
256 –– 12
Opto Tr. Module 1470nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0001
Opto Tr. Module 1490nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0002
Opto Tr. Module 1510nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0003
Opto Tr. Module 1530nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0004
Opto Tr. Module 1550nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0005
Opto Tr. Module 1570nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0006
Opto Tr. Module 1590nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0007
Opto Tr. Module 1610nm APD CWA 1AB 19635 0008
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 98 / 531

531
 Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
1AB 23141 0001
Opto TRX SFP DWDM CH620...CH170 DWA to 37
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1AB 23141 0046

not permitted without written authorization.

OPTO TRX 1.25 GBE SFP–LX 1AB 18728 0001

SGELX 256 ––
OPTO TRX 1.25 GBE SFP–LX DDM 1AB 18728 0031
OPTO TRX 1.25 GBE SFP–SX 1AB 18728 0002 12
SGESX
OPTO TRX 1.25 GBE SFP–SX DDM 1AB 18728 0033
OPTO TRX 1.25 GBE SFP–ZX DDM SGEZX 1AB 18728 0042
OPTO TRX XFP 10GBASE–S XGES 1AB 21454 0002 24 36
3AG 24273 AA––
OPTO TRX I–64.1 XFP XI641
1AB 21454 0001
3AG 24274 AA––
OPTO TRX S–64.2B XFP XS642B ––
1AB 21728 0001 64 26
OPTO TRX XFP S–64.2B EXT XS642E 3AL 81887 AA––
3AG 24488 AA––
OPTO TRX XFP P1L1–2D2 XP1L12D2
1AB 21728 0002
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 99 / 531

531
 Table 15. Accessories list

Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SOFTWARE 13
not permitted without written authorization.

EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
3AL 81205 AA–– 14
1678MCC FAN UNIT FAN 2
3AL 81205 AB–– 34
1678MCC DUST FILTER UNIT –– 3AG 24350 AA–– 1 31
1678MCC DUST FILTER –– 3AG 24354 AA–– 1 32
1678MCC INSTALLATION KIT –– 3AL 89584 AA–– 1 15
1678MCC INSTALLATION KIT –– 3AG 24367 AA–– 1 30
DUMMY PLATE W=22.5 mm –– 3AN 52174 AA–– 16 16
2 MB/S AUX CHANNEL 75 Ω KIT –– 3AL 38432 AA–– 1 ––
2 MB/S AUX CHANNEL 120 Ω KIT –– 3AL 38433 AA–– 1 –– ––
SDH SYNC ADAPTER 75 Ω UNBAL KIT –– 3AL 89586 AA–– 1 ––
SDH SYNC ADAPTER 120 Ω BAL KIT –– 3AL 89587 AA–– 1 ––
CRAFT TERMINAL CABLE KIT –– 3AL 89585 AA–– 1 17
NGTRU NGTRU 3AL 81656 AA–– 1 33
NGTRU DUMMY COVER –– 3AN 51536 AA–– 4 18
DC/DC CONVERTER STEP–UP 2000 W STPUP 3AL 89590 AA–– 6 19
NGTRU BYPASS NGBYP 3AL 38414 AA–– 6 21
FAN UNIT PROTECTION –– 3AL94613 AA–– 1 14
SFP DUMMY PLUG KIT –– 3AL89857 AA–– 16 20
INSTALLATION KIT NGTRU –– 3AL 38423 AA–– 1 ––
ESD KIT –– 3AL 37973 AA–– 1 22
EARTHQUAKE KIT –– 3AL 91637 AA–– 1 23
ACCESSORY KIT 1678MCC –– 3AG 24268 AA–– 1 ––
XFPE DUMMY PLUG –– 3AL 24271 AA–– –– 24
LOW LOSS SMF C + BAND DCM 40 km –
–– 1AB 21083 0008
MU
25
LOW LOSS SMF C + BAND DCM 80 km –
–– 1AB 21083 0012
MU
KIT DCU TRAY 1678MCC RACK –– 3AL 91853 AA–– ––
3AL 74705 AA––
LAN SWITCH LS–DC LS–DC 2 –– 38
3AL 74705 AB––
INSTALLATION KIT LAN SWITCH –– 3AG 24223 AA–– 2 –– 39
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 100 / 531

531
 Table 16. Parts list: explanatory notes

Note Explanation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This item contains the NGTRU equipment (without converters and dummy covers) and the
1
not permitted without written authorization.

complete set of parts of the rack to host 1678MCC equipment.

2 It is the equipment shelf.
These items are mandatory and they are provisioned in 1+1 configuration: the boards perform
3
the filtering and the distribution of the power supply for the 1678MCC equipment.
The two boards are used in an 1+1 protected FLC configuration (master and slave): one is the
4 FLC active and the other is the FLC in stand–by to perform the equipment controller function-
alities.
Two MX boards are used in an 1+1 protected EPS configuration: the boards perform connec-
5
tion and cross–connection functionalities and moreover synchronization functionalities.
The both LAX boards have to be located as pair in the following slot numbers:
6
slot#2 and #3 or slot#4 and#5 and so on until slot#18 and #19.
7 This is a spare part item; the 1678MCC shelf (SR78) already included it.
This is a spare part item; the 1678MCC shelf (SR78) already included it. It is necessary for
8
STM–N Optical Module extraction.
It provides to process up to sixteen STM–1 electrical and optical SFP modules: Any mix of
9
different SFP modules is possible.
It provides to process up to sixteen STM–1e/o and/or STM–4 SFP modules: a mix of different
10
SFP modules is possible, but only in groups of four.
It provides to process up to sixteen STM–16 SFP modules: Any mix of different SFP modules
11
is possible.
12 Up to 16 of these modules are hosted in PORT board.
13 Details concerning the software P/N are given in the Operator’s Handbook.
These items are mandatory. Maintenance intervals are described in the ’Maintenance Hand-
14
book’.
It contains the cables and all the accessories (connectors, caps, screws, etc.) concerning
15
Power Supply and Auxiliary systems (except Sync. and 2 Mbit/s Aux. systems).
It is essential to insert the relevant dummy plates on the space left by all Traffic Port boards
16
NOT supplied, in order to obtain the EMI/EMC performances.
It contains the cable to connect the Craft Terminal to the “Active” Equipment Controller
17
(FLCCONGI or FLCSERV boards). Its length is 3 m.
It is essential to insert the relevant dummy covers on the space left by all DC/DC Step–up
18 Converters (or NGTRU Bypass) NOT supplied in the NGTRU equipment, in order to obtain
the EMI/EMC performances.
These items are hosted in the NGTRU equipment in 1+1 configuration to supply the
19
1678MCC equipment.
It contains the SFP dummy plugs to insert into the free cavities of P16S16 and P16S1–4
20
boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

When this item is used in alternative to the DC/DC Step–up Converter, only 8 Traffic Ports are
21
provisional in the 1678MCC equipment (four into slots 2 ÷ 9 and four into slots 12 ÷ 19).
22 Part of MCC rack

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 101 / 531

531
 Note Explanation
23 If earthquake proof is required.
24 One per unplugged XFP–E module necessary.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Dispersion Compensation Module for STM–64 (U–64.2 and V–64.2); refer also Figure 51.
not permitted without written authorization.

25
Two DCMs can be mounted in one Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU).
Up to 4 of these modules are hosted in PORT board. Any mix of different XFP modules is pos-
26
sible.
Electrical SFP modules have to be inserted in the leftmost and rightmost board of the shelf
27
(slot 2 or slot 19)!
28 Only necessary in case of supported feature: Station Alarms
29 Shelf supports FANs with dust filter.
30 Installation Kit 1678MCC for ANSI market.
31 Dust filter support.
32 The Kit includes three dust filter.
33 This is a spare part item; the 1678MCC rack already included it.
34 Version for ANSI market.
Link board for the connection of the LO extension shelf. In case of a full equipped 160G LO
35
extension shelf 5 (4+1) LAC40 are necessary.
36 Number of modules depends on number of used boards.
Up to 16 of these modules are hosted in PORT board.
37 1AB 23141 0003 is CH600, 1AB 23141 0004 is CH590 and so on up to 1AB 23141 0043 is
CH200

38 LAN switches are necessary for multirack configurations.

39 One Kit per LAN switch.

40 Always 1:1 protected. One working and one protecting board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 102 / 531

531
 10.3 Units Front View

This paragraph shows the access points (LEDs, switches etc.) present on each units together with legend
and meaning.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 44. on page 106 through Figure 62. on page 123 illustrate units front view available in the 1678MCC
not permitted without written authorization.

Equipment.

Figure 63. on page 124 to Figure 66. on page 125 show the pluggable modules available in the 1678MCC
Equipment.

Note: The unit dimensions in all figures are not the real ones.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 103 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P4S16 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

P4GE 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

LEGENDA:

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2)to (5) STM–16 optical channel
(from ch. #1 to ch. #4)
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note: the cavities must be equipped with up to four STM–16 or GE optical SFP module plug–in (refer to
Figure 63. on page 124); in the free cavities must be inserted the relevant SFP dummy plugs.

Figure 42. 4xGE, 4xSTM–16 optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 104 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P8S16 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

P8GE 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
(2)

(3)

(8)

(9)

LEGENDA:

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2)to (9) STM–16 optical channel
(from ch. #1 to ch. #8)
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note: the cavities must be equipped with up to eight STM–16 or GE optical SFP module plug–in (refer to
Figure 63. on page 124); in the free cavities must be inserted the relevant SFP dummy plugs.

Figure 43. 8xGE, 8xSTM–16 optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 105 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P16S16 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

P16S1S4 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
(2)
P16S1S 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
(3)
P16GE 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

LAC40 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

(16)
LEGENDA:
(17)
(1) Bicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2)to (17) STM–16 optical channel
(from ch. #1 to ch. #16)
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note: the cavities must be equipped with up to sixteen STM–1e, STM–1, STM–4, STM–16 or GE SFP module
plug–in (refer to Figure 63. on page 124); in the free cavities must be inserted the relevant SFP dummy plugs.

Figure 44. LAC40, 16xGE,16xSTM–16,16xSTM–4/1, 16xSTM–1E port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 106 / 531

531
 SC/PC
ACRONYM SLOTS
I–64.1M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

S–64.2M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

(1)

It is also available with following connector: FC/PC

OUTPUT
INPUT

LEGENDA:

(1) Channel #1
(2) Bicolor LED
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

(2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 45. 1xSTM–64 (S64M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 107 / 531

531
 SC/PC
ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

P2I64M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

P2S64M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

It is also available with following connector: FC/PC

(1)

(2)

OUTPUT
INPUT

LEGENDA:

(1) Channel #1

(2) Channel #2

(3) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

(3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 46. 2xSTM–64 (P2S64M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 108 / 531

531
 SC/PC
ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

P4I64 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

P4S64 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

It is also available with following connector: FC/PC

(1)

(2)

OUTPUT
INPUT

(3)

LEGENDA:

(1) Channel #1 (4)

(2) Channel #2
(3) Channel #3
(4) Channel #4
(5) Bicolor LED
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

(5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 47. 4xSTM–64 (P4S64M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 109 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

L–642M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)

(2)

LEGENDA:

(1) Output Booster, Input L64 *

(2) Input Booster, Output L64 *

(3) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

* Connector assignment refere to Figure 51. on page 113.

(3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 48. 1xSTM–64 (L–642M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 110 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

V–642M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)

LEGENDA: (2)

(1) Input Preamplifier, Output Preamplifier *

(2) Input Laser Module, Output Laser Module *

(3) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

* Connector assignment refere to Figure 51. on page 113. (3)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 49. 1xSTM–64 (V–642M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 111 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

U–642M 2 to 9 and 12 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)

(2)

LEGENDA:

(1) Output Booster, Input Preamplifier * (3)

(2) Input Booster, Output Preamplifier *
(3) Input Laser Module, Output Laser Module *
(4) Bicolor LED
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit

(4)
* Connector assignment refere to Figure 51. on page 113.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 50. 1xSTM–64 (U–642M) optical port board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 112 / 531

531
 Connector
on Board variant: IN L–64 OUT Booster 80 KM
ABxx AAxx
SC FC
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

IN Booster OUT L–64

SC FC
Attenuator

L–64 10dB

Connector
on Board variant: IN Preamp OUT Preamp 120 KM
AAxx
FC
MU in
DCM
Connectors out 80 km

IN ILM OUT ILM

LC V–64

Connector
on Board variant: IN Preamp 160 KM
OUT Booster
ABxx AAxx
SC FC
IN Booster OUT Preamp MU in
Connectors out
DCM
SC FC 80 km

MU out DCM
IN ILM OUT ILM Connectors in 40 km
LC LC
U–64

Note: This connector assignment is valid for all realization variants xxAB of this boards.

Figure 51. Connector assignment of L–642M, V–642M an U–642M boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 113 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P2S64X 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

(2)

(3)

LEGENDA:

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) Slot with XFP module
(3) Slot with XFP–E module
any mix of XFP and XFP–E modules is possible

(1)
Note: For XFP module refere to Figure 65. on page 125 and for
XFP–E module refere to Figure 66. on page 125.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 52. 2xSTM–64 XFP/XFP–E – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 114 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P4S64X 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

(2)

(3)

(4)

LEGENDA: (5)

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) to (3) Slot with XFP modules + adapter
(4) to (5) Slot with XFP–E modules
any mix of XFP and XFP–E modules is possible

(1)
Note: For XFP module refere to Figure 65. on page 125 and for
XFP–E module refere to Figure 66. on page 125.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 53. 4xSTM–64 XFP/XFP–E – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 115 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P2XGE 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

XFP1 (4)
XFP2
(5)

(2)

(3)

LEGENDA:

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) to (3) Slots for XFP modules
(4) LED for XFP module (2)
(5) LED for XFP module (3)

(1)
Note: For XFP module refere to Figure 65. on page 125.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 54. 2x10GE LAN – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 116 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P4XGE 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

XFP1 (6)
XFP2
(7)
XFP3 (8)
XFP4
(9)

(2)

(3)

(4)

LEGENDA:

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm (5)
Green – in service unit
(2) to (5) Slots for XFP modules
(6) LED for XFP module (2)
(7) LED for XFP module (3)
(8) LED for XFP module (4)
(9) LED for XFP module (5)

(1)
Note: For XFP module refere to Figure 65. on page 125.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 55. 4x10GE LAN – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 117 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ES64SC 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

LEGENDA:
(3)
(1) Reset command key
(2) Debug Interface
(2)
(3) LAN Interface
(4) Multicolor LED:
(1)
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit (4)
Yellow – in stand–by unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 56. ES64SC – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 118 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOT
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

(12)
FLCSERV 1
not permitted without written authorization.

(11)
FLCSERVA
(18)
First Level Controler SPARE (19)
(9)
(20)

(21)

(13)

LEGENDA:
IN
(1) Reset command key
(2) Personal Computer Connector (F interface) 2 1 (22)
(3) Synchronization Interface
OUT
(4) Red LED – Urgent alarm (Critical or Major) (1)
(5) Red LED – Not Urgent alarm (Minor) (10)
(6) Yellow LED – Alarm storing (Attended)
(7) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition
(8) Yellow LED – Indicative alarm (Warning) (3)
(9) Line Seizure Key
(10) Alarm storing push–botton (Attended)
(11) Green LED – When on it means active unit
(15)
(12) Multicolor LED
Red – local unit alarm (16)
Green – in service unit
Yellow – in stand–by unit
(13) Auxiliary Channels (not supported) (2)

(14) EC and OAM Debug (internal use only)

(14)
(15) LAN Interface for ext. LAN switch
(multi rack configuration) (17)
(4)
(16) LAN Interface for internal LAN cabling to OED/LO shelf (5)
(single rack configuration) (6)
(7)
(17) Future CT Interface (not used) (8)
(18) Yellow LED
(19) Green LED EOW Line Status (not supported)

(20) Telephone Jack

(21) 4 Wire Telephone Extension
(22) 2 Mbit/s Auxiliary Channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

adhesive silk–screen printingfront–plate

Figure 57. First Level Controller and Service Interfaces board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 119 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOT
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

FLCCONGI 20 (12)
not permitted without written authorization.

(11)
First Level Controller MAIN

(9)

(13)

LEGENDA: (1)
(10)
(1) Reset command key
(2) Personal Computer Connector (F interface)
(3) Synchronization Interface (3)
(4) Red LED – Urgent alarm (Critical or Major)
(5) Red LED – Not Urgent alarm (Minor)
(6) Yellow LED – Alarm storing (Attended)
(7) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition (15)
(8) Yellow LED – Indicative alarm (Warning)
(9) Rack Lamps (16)
(10) Alarm storing push–botton (Attended)
(11) Green LED – When on it means active unit (2)
(12) Multicolor LED (14)
Red – local unit alarm (17)
Green – in service unit (4)
Yellow – in stand–by unit
(5)
(13) Housekeeping and Remote Alarms (6)
(7)
(14) EC and OAM Debug (internal use only)
(8)
(15) LAN Interface for ext. LAN switch
(multi rack configuration)
(16) LAN Interface for internal LAN cabling to OED/LO shelf
(single rack configuration)
(17) Future CT Interface (not used)
adhesive silk–screen printing front–plate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 58. First Level Controller and Control&General Interfaces board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 120 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

MX640 10, 11
not permitted without written authorization.

MX640GA 10, 11

MX320 10, 11
MX320GA 10, 11

MX160 10, 11

slot 10: MATRIX /A – main

slot 11: MATRIX /B – spare

(4)

(3)

(1)
LEGENDA: (5)

(1) Debug Interface – for internal use only

(2) Multicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
Yellow – in stand–by unit (spare–EPS schema)
(3) LAN Interface
(4) LAN Interface
(5) Reset command key (2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

adhesive silk–screen printing front–plate

Figure 59. Matrix board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 121 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LAX40 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

LAX20 2 to 9 and 12 to 19

slot 2 and 3; 4 and 5 ...18 and 19

(1)

LEGENDA: (2)

(1) Reset command key

(3)
(2) Debug Interface
(3) LAN Interface – not used
(4) Multicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit (4)
Yellow – in stand–by unit (spare–EPS schema)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 60. Lower Order Matrix board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 122 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS

PSF
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

24, 25
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LEGENDA: (3)

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) Equipment and boards Lamp Test key (2) (1)
(3) Input Power Supply

Figure 61. Power Supply and Filter board – front view

ACRONYM SUBRACKs

FAN n, n+2

(2) (3)
(1)

LEGENDA:
(1) Bicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) WARNING label: moving mechanical parts
(3) WARNING label: windage (air suction)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 62. FANs unit – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 123 / 531

531
 MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS
SI161 LAC40
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SI161
not permitted without written authorization.

SS161
SL161 P4S16
SL162 P8S16 TRX STM–16 SFP module
CWP P16S16 TRX STM–1/4 SFP module
CWA Gigabit Ethernet optical module
DWA
SS41
SL41
SL42 Output
P16S1S4
SS11
SL11
SL12
SGELX P4GE
SGESX P8GE
SGEZX P16GE
Input

Optical cables

Figure 63. Optical SFP Module

MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS

SES1 P16S1S
P16S1S4

Figure 64. Electrical SFP Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 124 / 531

531
 TRX S–64.2B XFP module
MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS TRX I–64.1 XFP module
TRX P1L1–2D2 XFP module
XS642B P4S64X / P2XGE / P4XGE TRX 10G BASE–S XFP module
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

XI641 P4S64X / P2XGE / P4XGE

not permitted without written authorization.

XP1L12D2 P4S64X
XGES P2XGE / P4XGE

Input
Output

Figure 65. Optical XFP Module

MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS
TRX XFP S–64.2B Ext.
XS642E P2S64X
P4S64X

Output Input

Figure 66. Optical XFP–E Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 125 / 531

531
 11 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE LO EXTENSION SHELF

This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the lower
order extension shelf equipment.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated in Figure 67. on page 127 and on page 129.
not permitted without written authorization.

The Main part codes and partition are listed in Table 20. on page 137.

The Accessory codes and partition are listed in Table 21. on page 138.

The Explanatory notes of part list are reported in Table 22. on page 139.

For the units front view refer to para. 11.3 on page 140.

These paragraphs illustrate the interconnection points that can be accessed on the units front panel and
the alarm/status LEDs together with the relevant legend and meaning.

Notes:
The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turn-on and Maintenance operations is
not listed as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by Alcatel–Lucent.
Refer to Operator’s Handbook for PC hardware configuration.

Table 20. on page 137 contains the units of current equipment release. Units belonging to previous
equipment releases/versions (e.g. for configuration updating) are not here listed but still supported,
if compatible with the current one (for eventual units belonging to previous equipment
releases/versions refer to the relevant Technical Handbook).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 126 / 531

531
 11.1 Lower Order Extension Shelf

The lower order extension shelf is from mechanical point of view the same as the 1678MCC main shelf
(refer to chapter 10.1 on page 80).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The lower order extension shelf is a single row shelf (refer to Figure 67. ). It has got 16 slots for the Lower
not permitted without written authorization.

order Adaptation 20G boards.

FAN Unit Subrack n

PSF

PSF
LO CS MATRIX* (Copy A)
LO CS MATRIX* (Copy B)
Dummy Plate

Subrack n+1

ALM
LO ES Slots LO ES Slots

FAN Unit Subrack n+2

Matrix*: LX160

Figure 67. Lower Order Extension Shelf Layout

Three types of slots are distinguished:

• LO ES Slot (16 slots, each 4.5TE wide), containing the Lower Order Adaptation 20G boards
(LA20).

• Centerstage Matrix slot (2 slots, each 8TE wide), containing the LO Centerstage Matrix
160GBIT/S boards (LX160; 1+1):

• Control and Common parts slot (2 slots, each 4TE wide), containing the following boards:

– Alarm Board (ALM)

– Power Supply Filter (1+1) (PSF)
– Bus Termination (two boards) (BUSTERM)

Note: ALM, PSF and BUSTERM are located in the same slot. This slot is divided into three subslots (refer
to Figure 37. on page 84). The BUSTERM board is not visible on the shelf front panel. It is positioned
behind the dummy plate (slot 1) and the ALM board (slot 20).

The ALM board provides housekeeping, remote alarm and rack lamp interfaces. The ALM board
functionality is a subset of the FLCCONGI board.

The FAN Subsystem consists of two subracks and contains the following boards:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– FANs unit (FAN)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 127 / 531

531
 The Matrix board (LX160) supports the following functionalities:

• Cross–connection
• Synchronization
• Shelf Controller
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• 1+1 EPS protection scheme, when two Matrix boards are present (default)
not permitted without written authorization.

The Power Supply Filter board (PSF) supports the following functionality:

• distribution of Power Supply after filtering process

The Bus Termination board (BUSTERM) supports the following functionality:

• electrical termination to the buses routed on the backplane

These two boards are not visible on shelf front–panel. They are two small boards included in the shelf
and are placed behind the dummy plate (slot 1) and the ALM board (slot 20).

The FAN unit (FAN) supports the following functionality:

• cooling of the equipment

Due to the high level of integration reached with this equipment, the two FAN units located at the top
and at the bottom of the shelf have always to be equipped.
The two FAN units are physically integrated in the lower order extension shelf, without the need of
external connection cables.

Note: The slots which are not equipped have to be closed by a dummy plate for EMC reasons.

11.1.1 Equipment Front View

The lower order extension shelf equipment has a symmetrical layout (refer to Figure 68. on page 129).
The following types of slots are distinguished:

• slot 1 : empty (closed with dummy plate)

• slots 2 ÷ 9 and
12 ÷ 19 : Lower Order Adaptation 20G boards
slot 2 and 19 are reserved for LA20 protection boards

• slot 10 and 11 : LO Centerstage Matrix 160GBIT/S boards

(LX160)

• slot 20 : Alarm board

(ALM)

• slot 21 and 22 : Bus Termination boards

(BUSTERM)

• slot 24 and 25 : Power Supply and Filter boards

(PSF)

Note:
Slot 21 and slot 22 are positioned behind slot 1 and slot 20 respectively, so the BUSTERM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

boards are not visible on the shelf front panel.

The two FANs have no slot number, because they are modelled as separate subracks (subrack n and n+2).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 128 / 531

531
 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ FAN (Subrack n)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ
24
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ 25

ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÁÁ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
1
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 20

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 10 11

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
21 22

ÇÇ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÇÇ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ FAN (Subrack n+2)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 68. Lower Order Extension Shelf Equipment front view (slot position)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 129 / 531

531
 11.1.2 Configuration Rules

11.1.2.1 Allowed or basic Equipment Configuration

Table 17. presents for each slot, the allowed equipment types and the basic equipment type (the acronyms
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

of the units are shown).

not permitted without written authorization.

Note: Up to now a switching matrix capacity of max. 160G is supported.

That means, max. eight LA20 working boards can be equipped.

Table 17. 1678MCC LO Shelf Equipment: slot configuration

1678MCC shelf
Slots Basic Configuration Allowed Equipment note
1 Empty (dummy plate) –– 1
3÷5 Spare (dummy plate) –– 9
6÷9
and LA20 –– 2
12 ÷ 15
2, 19 Protection LA20 –– 3
16 ÷ 18 Spare (dummy plate) –– 9
10 LX160 (main) ––
4
11 LX160 (spare) ––
20 ALM –– 5
21, 22 BUSTERM –– 6
24, 25 PSF –– 7
subrack n, n+2 FAN –– 8

Refer to explanatory notes on Table 19.

Table 18. Pluggable Optical Modules

LA20 boards Note

J1 ÷ J8 STM–N optical modules: SI161 10

Table 19. 1678MCC LO Shelf Equipment: slot configuration explanation notes

Note Explanation
1 It is 4TE.
All these boards are 4.5TE.
2 Up to eight LA20 boards can be equipped. Working LA20 boards are always inserted in the
inner slots of their half (starting from slot 9 and 12).
3 These slots are mandatory for protection LA20 boards.
4 It is 8TE. Both boards provide to 1+1 EPS protection scheme (mandatory).
It is 4TE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

5
This slot is dedicated to ALM board. The ALM board is always unprotected.
BUSTERM#1 is located behind the dummy plate of slot1 and BUSTERM#2 behind the
6
ALM board. They are not visible on the front view.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 130 / 531

531
 Note Explanation
7 They are both mandatory.
8 They are both mandatory, one under and one above the shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

9 It is 4.5TE. These slots are reserved for future applications (LO matrix > 160G)
not permitted without written authorization.

10 Up to eight optical SFP modules (I–16.1) can be plugged in the LA20 board.

Lower Order Extension Shelf: Supported Lower Order Adaptation Board

Interfaces Board Connectors

1 slot

Lower Order Adaptation 20G 1

SFP
I–16.1 2
SFP
. .
LA20 LC
. .
8
SFP

Figure 69. Lower Order Extension Shelf: Supported Adaptation Board

11.1.2.2 Examples of Equipment Configuration

The figures on next pages show some examples of allowed equipment configuration.

Figure 70. on page 132 shows the typical basic configuration of LO extension shelf (without LO adaptation
20G boards):

• slot 1 : empty
• slot 2 ÷ 9 : reserved to LO adaptation 20G boards
• slot 10 and slot 11 : two LX160 boards
• slot 12 ÷ 19 : reserved to LO adaptation 20G boards
• slot 20 : ALM board
• slot 21 and slot 22 : two BUSTERM boards (small board)
• slot 24 and slot 25 : two PSF boards
• two FAN units (subrack n, n+2)
• dummy plates for all other slots unequipped

Figure 71. on page 133 shows the configuration of the 160G LO extension shelf:

• basic configuration
• slot 6 ÷ 9 : four LA20 boards
• slot 2 : LA20 protection board
• slot 12 ÷ 15 : four LA20 boards
• slot 19 : LA20 protection board
• dummy plates for all other slots unequipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 131 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
1

21
BUSTERM PSF
24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

160G LO Matrix Copy A

10

160G LO Matrix Copy B

11
FAN (subrack n)

FAN (subrack n+2)

Figure 70. Basic configuration of LO Extension Shelf

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

22
BUSTERM ALM PSF
20
25

132 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
1

21
BUSTERM dummy plate PSF

24
2
LA20 protection

3
dummy plate
4
dummy plate
5

dummy plate
LA20
6 7

LA20
8

LA20
9

LA20
10

160G LO Matrix Copy A

11

160G LO Matrix Copy B

LA20
FAN (subrack n)

FAN (subrack n+2)

LA20
LA20
LA20
dummy plate

531
Figure 71. Configuration of the 160G LO extension Shelf
dummy plate
dummy plate

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

LA20 protection
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

22
BUSTERM ALM PSF
20
25

133 / 531
 11.1.3 Connection to the Main Shelf

To connect the LO extension shelf with the 1678MCC main shelf STM–16 interfaces are used in the main
shelf. The board which supports this functionality is the Link Board LAC40. This is a special 16xSTM–16
board used only for connection to LO extension shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The configuration of the Main shelf is flexible (refer to Figure 72. ):

The position of the boards in the main shelf is flexible and allows an upgrade which is independent from
the starting configuration.
A LAC40 board can be linked to a symmetric pair of LA20 boards only. The lower ports of the LAC40 (9..16)
are linked with the ports of the left half and the upper ports (1..8) are linked with the ports of the right half.

For the connection to a 160G LO extension shelf the 1678MCC main shelf contains:

– Four LAC40 working boards

– One LAC40 protection board
The LAC40 boards are equipped with I16.1 SFP modules.

The LO extension have to be connected to the main shelf as shown in Figure 72.

Higher Order Shelf Lower Order Shelf

FAN FAN

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
P P l P P l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
S o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o S o S o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o S o
F t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t F t F t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t F t
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 1718 19 24 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 25

F L M M L L
L L L L D S S S S S S
L I I I I I A I I X X I I I A L L L L L X X L L L L
A A A I F U P P P P P P L A
C / / / / / C / / 6 6 / / / C A A A A A 1 1 A A A A
C C C / L M A A A A A A A L
S O O O O O 4 OO 4 4 OOO 4 2 2 2 2 2 6 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 O C M R R R 6 R R R 2 M
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 C Y E E E 0 0 E E E 0
R O
V P N P P
C C C C
I R G S R R S
C O
O O I B O O O O B l
l
E T P P o T T P P T T o
Y Y t E Y Y E t
A B # R A B
R #
21 M M 22

FAN FAN

8 8 8 8
16
16
16
16
16

Figure 72. Connection of 160G LO Extension Shelf with the Main Shelf

The configuration of the LO extension shelf is fixed (refer to Figure 72. ):

– A LA20 has to host either 8 protection or 8 working ports per board (no mixture is allowed).
For this reason 8 working boards and 2 protecting boards are used.
– Working LA20 boards are configured in the inner slots of their half (starting from slot 9 and 12).
– The protection boards are configured always in the outer slots of their half (slot 2 and 19).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 134 / 531

531
 The connection main shelf/LO extension shelf is done via the following ’connection items’:

– Optical cables.
• On the Main Shelf side, the cables are plugged at the front of LAC40 boards.
• On the LO extension shelf side, the cables are plugged at the front of the LA20 boards.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The connection is always 1:N MSP protected.

Note: The same modules (I16.1) have to be used in LA20 and in LAC40 boards.

The location scheme of the VC–4s on LA20 boards and the connection scheme LA20/LAC 40 is shown
in the following Figure 73. Refer also to Figure 72. for understanding this scenario. The LAC40 boards
are configured as shown in Figure 72.

Higher Order Shelf Lower Order Extension Shelf

LAC40 Board LA20 Board

Port Slot Slot Port ModVc4

Protecting 1–8 7
9–16 7 2 1–8 Protecting

1–8 15 6 1–8 751–875

9–16 15 7 1–8 501–625
1–8 16 8 1–8 251–375
9–16 16 9 1–8 1–125

Matrix

1–8 17 12 1–8 126–250

9–16 17 13 1–8 376–500
1–8 18 14 1–8 626–750
9–16 18 15 1–8 876–1000

19 1–8 Protecting

The position of the LAC40 boards is flexible. The position of the LA20 boards is fixed.

Figure 73. VC–4 mapping on LA20 Boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 135 / 531

531
 11.2 Part List

The Part List is subdivided in three tables, specifically:

• in Table 20. on page 137 is shown the Main part list

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• in Table 21. on page 138 is shown the Accessory list

• in Table 22. on page 139 is shown the Explanatory notes of previous lists

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the
equipment are indicated too.

Such tables report the following information:

• Description: name of items

• Acronym: it is used to identified units and modules on the Craft Terminal applications

• ANV Part/Number

• Max Q.ty: maximum quantity of items in the 1678MCC equipment

• Slot: position of the units inside the 1678MCC equipment (refer to Figure 68. on page 129)

• Notes: are listed a set of explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 136 / 531

531
 Table 20. Main parts list

Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTE
Q.ty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
not permitted without written authorization.

3AL 81673 AA––

MCC RACK WITH NGTRU –– 1
3AL 81673 AB––
3AL 81224 AA–– 1 ––
1678MCC SHELF SR78 2
3AL 81224 AB––
HOUSEKEEPING MONITORING UNIT HMU 3AG 24234 AA–– 4
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY AND FILTERS PSF 3AL 81502 AA–– 2 24, 25 5
COMMON PARTS
ALARM ALM 3AG 24262 AA–– 1 20 6
SWITCHING MATRIX
LO CENTERSTAGE MATRIX 160 GBIT/S LX160 3AG24328 AA–– 2 10, 11 7
2÷9
LOWER ORDER ADAPTATION 20G LA20 3AG 24150 AA–– 10 and 8
12 ÷ 19
SPARE PARTS
3AL 81209 AA––
TERMINATION BUS BUSTERM 2 –– 9
3AL 81209 AB––
STM–N OPTICAL MODULES
OPTO TRX SFP I–16.1 PLUG–IN SI–161 1AB 19637 0013 80 –– 10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 137 / 531

531
 Table 21. Accessories list

Max.
DESCRIPTION ACRONYM ANV P/N SLOT NOTES
Q.ty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

SOFTWARE 11
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
3AL 81205 AA––
1678MCC FAN UNIT FAN 2 –– 12
3AL 81205 AB––
1678MCC DUST FILTER UNIT –– 3AG 24350 AA–– 1 –– 14
1678MCC DUST FILTER –– 3AG 24354 AA–– 1 –– 15
1678MCC INSTALLATION KIT –– 3AL 89584 AA–– 1 –– 16
1678MCC INSTALLATION KIT –– 3AG 24367 AA–– 1 –– 17
DUMMY PLATE W=22.5 mm –– 3AN 52174 AA–– 6 –– 18
2 MB/S AUX CHANNEL 75 Ω KIT –– 3AL 38432 AA–– 1 –– ––
2 MB/S AUX CHANNEL 120 Ω KIT –– 3AL 38433 AA–– 1 –– ––
SDH SYNC ADAPTER 75 Ω UNBAL KIT –– 3AL 89586 AA–– 1 –– ––
SDH SYNC ADAPTER 120 Ω BAL KIT –– 3AL 89587 AA–– 1 –– ––
NGTRU NGTRU 3AL 81656 AA–– 1 –– 19
NGTRU DUMMY COVER –– 3AN 51536 AA–– 4 –– 20
DC/DC CONVERTER STEP–UP 2000 W STPUP 3AL 89590 AA–– 6 –– 21
NGTRU BYPASS NGBYP 3AL 38414 AA–– 6 –– 22
FAN UNIT PROTECTION –– 3AL94613 AA–– 1 –– 12
INSTALLATION KIT NGTRU –– 3AL 38423 AA–– 1 –– ––
ESD KIT –– 3AL 37973 AA–– 1 –– 23
EARTHQUAKE KIT –– 3AL 91637 AA–– 1 –– 24
ACCESSORY KIT 1678MCC –– 3AL 24268 AA–– 1 –– ––
KIT DCU TRAY 1678MCC RACK –– 3AL 91853 AA–– –– ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 138 / 531

531
 Table 22. Parts list: explanatory notes

Note Explanation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This item contains the NGTRU equipment (without converters and dummy covers) and the
not permitted without written authorization.

1
complete set of parts of the rack to host 1678MCC equipment.
2 It is the equipment shelf.
3 Shelf supports FANs with dust filter.
4 Only necessary in case of supported feature: Station Alarms
These items are mandatory and they are provisioned in 1+1 configuration: the boards perform
5
the filtering and the distribution of the power supply for the 1678MCC equipment.
6 The ALM board provides housekeeping, remote alarm and rack lamp interfaces.
Two LX boards are used in an 1+1 protected EPS configuration: the boards perform connec-
7
tion and cross–connection functionalities.
8 Up to eight SFP modules can be equipped (I–16.1) per board.
9 This is a spare part item; the 1678MCC shelf (SR78) already included it.
10 Up to 8 of these modules are hosted in LA20 board.
11 Details concerning the software P/N are given in the Operator’s Handbook.
These items are mandatory. Maintenance intervals are described in the ’Maintenance Hand-
12
book’.
13 Version for ANSI market.
14 Dust filter support.
15 The Kit includes three dust filter.
It contains the cables and all the accessories (connectors, caps, screws, etc.) concerning
16
Power Supply and Auxiliary systems (except Sync. and 2 Mbit/s Aux. systems).
17 Installation Kit 1678MCC for ANSI market.
It is essential to insert the relevant dummy plates on the space left by all LA20 boards NOT
18 supplied, in order to obtain the EMI/EMC performances. The number of six dummy plates is
necessary in case of 160G LO matrix (refer to Figure 71. ).
19 This is a spare part item; the 1678MCC rack already included it.
It is essential to insert the relevant dummy covers on the space left by all DC/DC Step–up
20 Converters (or NGTRU Bypass) NOT supplied in the NGTRU equipment, in order to obtain
the EMI/EMC performances.
These items are hosted in the NGTRU equipment in 1+1 configuration to supply the
21
1678MCC equipment.
When this item is used in alternative to the DC/DC Step–up Converter, only 8 Traffic Ports are
22
provisional in the 1678MCC equipment (four into slots 2 ÷ 9 and four into slots 12 ÷ 19).
23 Part of MCC rack
24 If earthquake proof is required.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 139 / 531

531
 11.3 Units Front View

This paragraph shows the access points (LEDs, switches etc.) present on each units together with legend
and meaning.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 74. on page 141 through Figure 78. on page 145 illustrate units front view available in the
not permitted without written authorization.

1678MCC Equipment.

NOTE: The unit dimensions in all figures are not the real ones.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 140 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LA20 2, 6 to 9, 12 to 15, 19

(2)

(3)

(8)

LEGENDA:
(9)
(1) Bicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2)to (9) STM–16 optical channel
(from ch. #1 to ch. #8)
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 74. Lower Order Adaptation 20G board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 141 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOT
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ALM 20 (1)
not permitted without written authorization.

(2)

(3)

(9)

LEGENDA:

(1) Multicolor LED

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
Yellow – in stand–by unit
(2) Rack Lamps (10)
(3) Housekeeping and Remote Alarms (4)
(4) Red LED – Urgent alarm (Critical or Major) (5)
(6)
(5) Red LED – Not Urgent alarm (Minor)
(7)
(6) Yellow LED – Alarm storing (Attended) (8)
(7) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition
(8) Yellow LED – Indicative alarm (Warning)
(9) Alarm storing push–botton (Attended)
(10) Future CT Interface (not used)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 75. Alarm board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 142 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

LX160 10, 11
not permitted without written authorization.

slot 10: MATRIX /A – main

slot 11: MATRIX /B – spare

(4)

(3)

(1)
LEGENDA:
(5)
(1) Debug Interface – for internal use only
(2) Multicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
Yellow – in stand–by unit (spare–EPS schema)
(3) LAN Interface
(for connection to the corresponding HO main shelf)
(4) LAN Interface
(for connection to the corresponding HO main shelf) (2)
(5) Reset command key
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

adhesive silk–screen printing front–plate

Figure 76. LO Centerstage Matrix Board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 143 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

PSF 24, 25

LEGENDA: (3)

(1) Bicolor LED:

Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) Equipment and boards Lamp Test key (2) (1)
(3) Input Power Supply

Figure 77. Power Supply and Filter board – front view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 144 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SUBRACKs

FAN n, n+2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

(2) (3)
(1)

LEGENDA:
(1) Bicolor LED:
Red – local unit alarm
Green – in service unit
(2) WARNING label: moving mechanical parts
(3) WARNING label: windage (air suction)

Figure 78. FANs unit – front view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 145 / 531

531
 12 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF THE OED SHELVES

This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the OED
shelves equipment.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated in Figure 79.

not permitted without written authorization.

The Main part codes and partition are listed in Table 29. on page 159 for 1670SM and Table 35. on
page 186 for 1662SMC.

The Accessory codes and partition are listed in Table 30. on page 160 for 1670SM and Table 36. on
page 187 for 1662SMC.

The Explanatory notes of part list are reported in Table 31. on page 161 for 1670SM and Table 37. on
page 188 for 1662SMC.

For the units front view refer to chapter 12.1.8

These paragraphs illustrate the interconnection points that can be accessed on the units front panel and
the alarm/status LEDs together with the relevant legend and meaning.

Notes:
The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turn-on and Maintenance operations is
not listed as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by Alcatel–Lucent.
Refer to Operator’s Handbook for PC hardware configuration.

Table 29. on page 159 contains the units of current equipment release. Units belonging to previous
equipment releases/versions (e.g. for configuration updating) are not here listed but still supported,
if compatible with the current one (for eventual units belonging to previous equipment
releases/versions refer to the relevant Technical Handbook).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 146 / 531

531
 12.1 1670SM Shelf

12.1.1 Shelf Layout

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1670SM shelf is divided in three areas (refer to Figure 79. ):

not permitted without written authorization.

– The Access area in the upper portion of the shelf mainly devoted to the physical interfaces
– The Traffic Ports area in the middle devoted to the traffic and control boards
– The Link area in the lower portion of the shelf devoted to the boards for the inter-shelf communication

A separate FAN subrack is mounted at the bottom of each 1670SM.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415161718 19 20 21

Accesscards

CONGIHC copyB
CONGIHC copyA

AccessArea

empty
empty
empty

22 23 2425 26 27 28 2930 31 323334 35 36 3738 3940 41

PortCards

HCMATRIX copyB
I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

HCMATRIX copyA

to VSR LINK 1

to VSR LINK 2

to VSR LINK 3

to VSR LINK 4

PortArea
empty

empty

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HCLINKE 1A

HCLINKE 1B

HCLINKE 2A

HCLINKE 2B

HCLINKE 3A

HCLINKE 3B

HCLINKE 4A

HCLINKE 4B

LinkArea
BTERM

SeparateFanShelf

Figure 79. 1670SM Shelf Front View

The Access area (21 slots) can contain the following boards:

– 2 slots for general service connectors such as Power, QB3 Int., Housekeeping, remote alarm, rack
lamp (CONGIHC/A and CONGIHC/B);
– 16 slots for traffic access modules;
– 3 slots empty (not used).

The Traffic Ports area (20 slots) can host the following boards:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– 2 slots for the matrices (master and slave) (HCMATRIX)

– 16 slots for the traffic ports
– 2 slots empty (not used)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 147 / 531

531
 The Link area (9 slots) can host the following boards:

– 1 slot for the internal bus termination (BTERM)

– 8 slots for the link boards (HCLINKE) used for inter-shelf connection to the main shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Note: The number of link boards depends on the number of equipped slots.
not permitted without written authorization.

The 1670SM shelf has a capacity of 256 STM-1 equivalents.

The maximum quantity of each interface per shelf is:

– 64 x 140 Mbit/s interfaces

– 256 x STM-1 electrical interfaces
– 256 x STM-1 optical interfaces
– 64 x STM-4 optical interfaces

12.1.2 Basic Equipment

Slot Board Mnemonic Comment

Access Area
1 Control and General Interface Board copy A CONGIHC Mandatory. “3–wire” variant
2..3 Empty
4...19 Access boards or empty
20 Empty
21 Control and General Interface Board copy B CONGIHC Mandatory. “3–wire” variant
Port Area
22 Matrix Hi–Cap copy A HCMATRIX Mandatory
23 Empty
24...39 I/O port boards
40 Empty
41 Matrix Hi–Cap copy B HCMATRIX Mandatory
Link Area
42 Optical Link Enhanced board 1 copy A HCLINKE HCLINKE boards are used only for connection to
the Main Shelf.
43 Optical Link Enhanced board 1 copy B HCLINKE
Only the required HCLINKE boards are equipped
44 Optical Link Enhanced board 2 copy A HCLINKE If the connection Main Shelf / 1670SM is not pro-
45 Optical Link Enhanced board 2 copy B HCLINKE tected, HCLINKE boards copy B is not equipped

47 Optical Link Enhanced board 3 copy A HCLINKE

48 Optical Link Enhanced board 3 copy B HCLINKE
49 Optical Link Enhanced board 4 copy A HCLINKE
50 Optical Link Enhanced board 4 copy B HCLINKE
46 Bus Termination Board BTERM Mandatory
Cooling: A separate FAN shelf must be mounted at the bottom of each 1670SM shelf

Table 23. Basic Equipment of the 1670SM Shelf

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 148 / 531

531
 12.1.3 Basic Function of the Boards

CONGIHC (Control and General Interface)

– Provides power supply interfaces and power supply distribution
(only the ’3-wire FPE’ variant 3AL 79135 AB** is used)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Provides the external LAN interface

not permitted without written authorization.

A Shelf Identifier is plugged on the CONGIHC B (Q2 interface)

Access Board
– Line Interface:
Access boards are used together with the STM-1 and 4xSTM-4 interfaces

Matrix Hi-Cap
– The synchronization function CRU is used for frame synchronization and for clock distribution within
the shelf.
– The Shelf Controller (SC) controls the ASICs of the shelf
– The SC provides the redundant interface to the control system

Port Board
– Transport, adaptation and termination functions
– Matrix Hi-Cap selection

Link board – HCLINKE

– The Link boards are the interfaces between 1670SM and 1678MCC Main shelf. The HCLINKE
boards are implemented in a 1+1 protected configuration. Each shelf can be equipped with max. 4+4
HCLINKE boards.

Bus Termination Board

– Electrical Termination of the buses routed on the backpanel.
– Power supply of the ISPB bus (management bus)

12.1.4 I/O Interfaces

The 1670SM integration offers the following interfaces:

– 140 Mbit/s
– STM-1e
– STM-1o
– STM-4

Mixed I/O configuration on shelf level is supported. For more details about supported STM-N interfaces
and configurations in R3 refer to chapter 12.1.5.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 149 / 531

531
 12.1.5 System Configurations

12.1.5.1 Supported I/O Boards, Relation Access/Port Boards

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

I/O Interfaces Access Boards Port Boards Connectors

not permitted without written authorization.

1 slot
1
4xSTM–4 proprietary
2
proprietary
S–4.1
L–4.1 2xSTM–4 SC/PC, FC/PC
3 4xSTM–4
L–4.2 proprietary
any mix of I/O modules allowed 4 proprietary P4S4
A2S4
1 slot

1 slot
1 SFP
. . .
. . .
. . .
16xSTM–1o
4 SFP
S–1.1 1 slot
LC
L–1.1 5
SFP 16xSTM–1o
L–1.2 .
. .
. . 12xSTM–1o
.
any mix of SFP I/O modules allowed
16 SFP P160S1
SFP I/O modules are pluggable A12OS1

1 slot 1 slot
16xSTM–1e 16xSTM–1e

16xSTM–1e
1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm

A16S1 P16S1

1 slot 1 slot
4xSTM–1e 4xSTM–1e

4xSTM–1e * 1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm

A4ES1 P4ES1

1 slot
1
4x140/155Mbit/s ICMI
ICMI I/O modules are pluggable 2
ICMI

2x140/155Mbit/s
1 slot 1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm
4x140/155Mbit/s
3 ICMI

4 P4E4
ICMI
A2S1

* only on customer request

Figure 80. 1670SM: Relation Port/Access Boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 150 / 531

531
 12.1.5.2 Configuration Rules for the I/O Boards

General I/O Configuration Rules

Table 24. 1670SM: General Configuration Rules for the I/O Boards
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

I/O Boards – The supported I/O boards are shown in Figure 80.
Take into account that some boards require an access board
– Each I/O slot has a capacity of 16 STM–1 eq.
– The slot position of the access boards have to be in line with the slot position of the corresponding port
boards
The connection port/access boards is done on the backpanel. (Ref.Table 25. )
– It is possible to equip a board only with the required I/O modules. I/O modules slots which are not
equipped must not be closed by a dummy plate.
Mixing of I/O – The boards can be plugged in almost any mix in any slot (flexible configuration) from left to right .
boards within The boards which are allowed to be mixed within a shelf are shown in Table 28.
a Shelf – A shelf may be equipped with combinations of all unprotected electrical boards and all
protected/unprotected optical boards.
– A flexible shelf configuration with EPS for 16xSTM–1e is also supported (Ref. chapter 12.1.5.3)
I/O Protection – The optical I/O signal can be 1+1 MSP protected or unprotected
– A protection connection must be established in the same shelf (no protection is possible across different
shelves)
HCLINKE – The HCLINKE boards are used only for the connection to the Main Shelf
Boards – Each HCLINKE board has a capacity of 64 STM–1equiv.
– HCLINKE boards copy A and copy B must be neighbor boards
– If the connections Main Shelf OEDs are not protected, the HCLINKE boards copy B are not equipped.
– There is a fixed relationship between I/O boards and HCLINKE boards:
I/O boards slot 24,25,26,27 HCLINKE board slot 42+43
slot 28,29,30,31 HCLINKE board slot 44+45
slot 32,33,34,35 HCLINKE board slot 47+48
slot 36,37,38,39 HCLINKE board slot 49+50
– Only the HCLINKE boards which are necessary are equipped.
Dummy Plates – The I/O slots and HCLINKE slots which are not equipped must be closed by a dummy plate for EMC
reasons.

Slot Relation Port/Access Boards

Table 25. 1670SM: Slot relation Port/Access Boards

I/O Board Width Slot relation Port/Access boards

4x140Mbit Unprotected 1 slot Port boards 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
STM–N Access boards 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4/16xSTM–1e unpro- 1 slot Port boards 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
tected Access boards 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4/16xSTM–1e Protected 1 slot Port boards 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
EPS N+1 (N=1+15) Access boards 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Protecting port board at the left side of the working boards
Protecting access board (HPROT/HPROT16): depends on position of protecting
port board
16xSTM–1o Protected/ 1 slot Port boards 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Unprotected Access boards 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4xSTM–4 Protected/Un- 1 slot Port boards 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
protected Access boards 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 151 / 531

531
 Slot Position of the Port Boards

Table 26. 1670SM: Position of the Port Boards in the Shelf

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

I/O Board Protection Width Slot positions

not permitted without written authorization.

4x140Mbit unprotected 1 slot any

4xSTM–1e unprotected 1 slot any
4xSTM–1e EPS N+1 (N=1...15) 1 slot protecting board: at the left side of working boards
working boards 25....39
unprotected 24...39 working boards
16xSTM–1e unprotected 1 slot any
16xSTM–1e EPS N+1 (N=1...15) 1 slot protecting board: at the left side of working boards
working boards 25....39
unprotected 24...39 working boards
16xSTM–1o unprotected or 1+1 MSP protected 1slot any

4xSTM-4 unprotected or 1+1 MSP protected 1 slot any

Interface Specific Configuration Rules

Table 27. 1670SM: Interface specific Configuration Rules

4xSTM–4
Board equipment: – The port board and the access board are equipped with one or two I/O modules
– If only two ports are required, the access board can be omitted
– Within a board, a mix of different STM–4 I/O modules (S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2) is allowed
– Within a board, a mix with other I/O modules is not allowed
Replacement of IF modules:
– The I/O modules are hot pluggable
Protection: – The I/O signal can be 1+1 MSP protected or unprotected
16xSTM–1o
Board equipment: – It is possible to equip 1 to 16 SFP modules
– If no more than 4 ports are required, the access board can be omitted
– The SFP modules are hot pluggable
– It is possible to equip only the required ports. The ports which are not equipped need not to be covered
by a dummy plate.
Protection: – The I/O signal can be 1+1 MSP protected or unprotected
Limitation – Timing reference can be derived only from interfaces of group 1: SFP 1 to 6 on A12OS1 and 3,4 on
P16OS1

4/16xSTM–1e
Shelf equipment Unprotected: Access boards: slots 4...19 Port boards: slots: 24...39
Protected:Working Access boards: slots 5...19 Port boards: slots: 25...39
Protecting HPROT/HPROT16: depends on position of protection board
Port board: left side of working boards
Protection Protection is performed at board level
4x140Mbit/s
Board equipment – The port board and the access board can be equipped with one or two ICMI I/O modules
– If only two ports are required, the access board can be omitted
– Within a board, a mix with other IF modules (e.g. STM–1e) is not allowed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

–The ports slots which are not equipped need not to be covered by a dummy plate.
Protection Protection not supported

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 152 / 531

531
 12.1.5.3 Flexible Configuration with EPS for 16xSTM–1e

As a general rule a 1670SM shelf may be equipped with combinations of all unprotected electrical I/O
boards and all protected/unprotected optical I/O boards. This is called the ’flexible configuration’.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

It is also possible to equip a ’flexible’ shelf with EPS protected 16xSTM–1e pairs.
not permitted without written authorization.

Configuration Rules

– The 16xSTM–1e boards with EPS are installed from the left to the right without any gap (no empty
slot allowed).
– The most left board is the protection board, the related access slot is equipped with the HPROT16
board.
– Other I/O boards are installed starting from the most right slot to allow extension of the EPS group.
– The following boards may be equipped in a flexible shelf:
• 16xSTM–1e with or without EPS
• 4x140Mbit/s without EPS
• all kinds of STM–N optical boards protected or unprotected
– Commissioning and reconfiguration is possible via remote access.

Figure 81. shows an example of a mixed electrical/optical shelf supporting EPS for the electrical ports.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415161718 19 20 21
Access 16 x STM–1e
Access 16 x STM–1e
Access 16 x STM–1e
Access 16 x STM–1e

Access 2 x 140Mb/s
Access 2 x 140Mb/s
Access 2 x STM–4
Access 2 x STM–4
Access 2 x STM–4
Access 2 x STM–4
empty
empty

empty
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped

CONGIHC B
CONGIHCA

HPRROT16

P W WW W

22 23 2425 26 27 28 2930 31 323334 35 36 3738 3940 41

Port 4 x 140Mbit/s
Port 4 x 140Mbit/s
Port 16xSTM–1e
Port 16xSTM–1e

Port 16xSTM–1e
Port 16xSTM–1e
Port 16xSTM–1e

HCMATRIX B
HCMATRIX A

empty

empty
Port 4 x STM–4
Port 4 x STM–4
Port 4 x STM–4
Port 4 x STM–4
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped
not equipped

P W W WW
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HCLINKE 1A

HCLINKE 1B

HCLINKE 2A

HCLINKE 2B

HCLINKE 3A

HCLINKE 3B

HCLINKE 4A

HCLINKE 4B
BTERM

W Working
P Protecting

Figure 81. 1670SM: Flexible Shelf equipped with 16xSTM–1e EPS protected and other I/O Boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 153 / 531

531
 12.1.5.4 Allowed Mix of I/O Boards

Table 28. 1670SM: Allowed mix of I/O Boards

16xSTM–1e EPSN+1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

16xSTM–1e unprot.
4xSTM–1e EPS N+1
not permitted without written authorization.

4xSTM–1e unprot.
4x140Mb unprot.
I/O Board Type

16xSTM–1o

4xSTM–4
4x140Mbit unprot. x x – x 1) x x
4xSTM–1e unprot. x x – x 1) x x
4xSTM–1e EPS N+1 – – x – – – –
16xSTM–1e unprot. x x – x 1) x x
16xSTM–1e EPS N+1
1) 1) – 1) x 1) 1)
(N=1..15)
16xSTM–1o x x – x 1) x x
4xSTM–4 x x – x 1) x x
1) According to Figure 81.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 154 / 531

531
 12.1.6 Connection to the Main Shelf

To connect the 1670SM with the 1678MCC main shelf no HW modification in the 1670SM is needed. The
STM-64 interface of the 1670SM is compatible with the STM-64 interface on the 1678MCC, both standard
SDH-interfaces, and are used as link interfaces. In the 1678MCC the 4xSTM-64 I–64.1 boards are used
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

as link board to the 1670SM. Each port can be physically connected to one HCLINKE board in the 1670SM
not permitted without written authorization.

shelf with an optical fibre.

In 1678MCC Release 3 the links between 1670SM and 1678MCC main shelf are statically assigned. The
4 leftmost I/O-slots in the 1670SM with a capacity of 4xSTM-16 are connected in the HO matrix of the
1670SM to the leftmost HCLINKE board copy A (refer to Figure 82. ). The next 4 I/O slots to the next link
board copy A and so on. For link protections the HCLINKE boards copy B are used and the HO matrix
connections are broadcasted to both corresponding link boards.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415161718 19 20 21

Accesscards

CONGIHC copyB
CONGIHC copyA

AccessArea

empty
empty
empty

22 23 2425 26 27 28 2930 31 323334 35 36 3738 3940 41

PortCards
HCMATRIX copyB
I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned
HCMATRIX copyA

to VSR LINK 1

to VSR LINK 2

to VSR LINK 3

to VSR LINK 4

PortArea
empty

empty

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HCLINKE 1A

HCLINKE 1B

HCLINKE 2A

HCLINKE 2B

HCLINKE 3A

HCLINKE 3B

HCLINKE 4A

HCLINKE 4B

LinkArea
BTERM

Figure 82. Assignment of I/O Boards to the Link Boards

In the link area of the 1670SM the link boards copy A and B are ordered alternately, i.e. A–B–A–B.
Also the fibre connection from the HCLINKE board in the OED to one port of a 4xSTM-64 board in the main
shelf is assigned statically. The HCLINKE boards copy A in the 1670SM are connected to the ports of the
leftmost 4xSTM64 I/O board in the main shelf. If the links are protected the HCLINKE boards copy B in
the OED are connected to the second 4xSTM-64 I/O board in the main shelf.

All links are MSP protected but can optionally also be configured as unprotected.

The connection Main Shelf/1670SM is done via the following ’connection items’:

– Optical cables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– On the Main Shelf side, the cables are plugged at the front of dedicated I/O boards 4xSTM–64
(I–64.1)
– On the 1670SM side, the cables are plugged at the front of HCLINKE boards.
– The connection may be unprotected or 1+1 MSP protected

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 155 / 531

531
 Figure 83. shows an example for a Main Shelf/1670SM connection 1+1 MSP protected.
Figure 84. shows an example for a Main Shelf/1670SM connection 1+1 MSP unprotected.

Number of connected 1670SM Shelves

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The number of 1670SM OEDs which can be connected to one 1678MCC main shelf is limited by the I/O
not permitted without written authorization.

ports used as link ports in the 1678MCC main shelf.

The 1678MCC main shelf offers 16 x 4 = 64 STM–64 ports which can be used as STM–64 link ports to
an 1670SM OED. Depending on the number of link modules equipped per 1670SM OED shelf,
16...64 OED shelves can be connected to the 1678MCC main shelf with links unprotected, or 8...32 OED
shelves with links protected, respectively.

OED: 1670SM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 15 161718 19 21

CONGIHC B
CONGIHCA
Main Shelf
FAN
4 x STM64 I–64.1 copy B

22 23 2425 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3940 41
4 x STM64 I–64.1 copy A
PSF

PSF
MX160/320/640 Copy B
MX160/320/640 Copy A

24 25
LAX20/40 Copy B (optional)
LAX20/40 Copy A (optional)

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned
to VSR LINKs 1

to VSR LINKs 2

to VSR LINKs 3

to VSR LINKs 4
FLCCONGI

HCMATRIX copyB
FLCSERV

HCMATRIX copyA

empty

empty
1 1

2 2

3 3
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
4 4
HCLINKE 1A

HCLINKE 1B

HCLINKE 2A

HCLINKE 2B

HCLINKE 3A

HCLINKE 3B

HCLINKE 4A

HCLINKE 4B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20
BTERM

FAN

Capacity: 1xSTM–64 per Link

Figure 83. Example for a Connection Main Shelf /1670SM (4 links, 1+1 MSP full protected)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 156 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
FLCSERV PSF

03
24

4
1

3
4 x STM64 I–64.1

1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9
MX160/320/640 Copy A

10

FAN
FAN

MX160/320/640 Copy B

LAX20/40 Copy A (optional)

LAX20/40 Copy B (optional)
FLCCONGI
25

PSF

11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20
Main Shelf
1

HCMATRIX copyA CONGIHCA

22

empty
42

HCLINKE 1A

Capacity: 1xSTM–64 per Link

I/O slots assigned
43

to VSR LINKs 1
HCLINKE 2A
44

I/O slots assigned

45

to VSR LINKs 2

531
BTERM
46

I/O slots assigned

HCLINKE 3A
47

to VSR LINKs 3
48

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

I/O slots assigned
HCLINKE 4A
49

to VSR LINKs 4
Figure 84. Example for a Connection Main Shelf /1670SM (4 links, unprotected)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 15 161718 19

50
23 2425 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3940

empty

HCMATRIX copyB
41

CONGIHC B
21
OED: 1670SM

157 / 531
 12.1.7 Part List

The Part List is subdivided in three tables, specifically:

• in Table 29. on page 159 is shown the Main part list

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• in Table 30. on page 160 is shown the Accessory list

• in Table 31. on page 161 is shown the Explanatory notes of previous lists.

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the
equipment are indicated too.

Such tables report the following information:

• Description: name of items

• Acronym: it is used to identified units and modules on the Craft Terminal applications

• ANV Part/Number

• Max Q.ty: maximum quantity of items in the 1670SM equipment

• Slot: position of the board inside the 1670SM equipment (refer to Figure 79. on page 147)

• Notes: are listed a set of explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 158 / 531

531
 Table 29. Main part list

ANV P/N Max.

NAME ACRONYM SLOT NOTE
Factory P/N Qty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
not permitted without written authorization.

1670SM MAIN SHELF SR70M 3AL 79245 AA–– 1 –– 1

ASEL FANS SUBRACK –– 3AN 52347 AA–– 4 –– 2
OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU –– 3AN 44815 AA–– 1 –– 3
SHELF IDENTIFICATION IDSHELF 3AL 79242 AA–– 1 –– 4
COMMON PARTS
CONTROL & GENERAL I/F HC CONGIHC 3AL 79135 AA–– 2 1, 21 5
ASEL CONTROL & GENERAL I/F HC
CONGIHC 3AL 79135 AB–– 2 1, 21 5
3WIRE
42 ÷ 45,
1670SM OPTICAL LINK ENH FC/PC HCLINKE 3AL 81509 AA–– 8 6
47 ÷ 50
42 ÷ 45,
1670SM OPTICAL LINK ENH SC/PC HCLINKE 3AL 81509 AB–– 8 6
47 ÷ 50
SWITCHING MATRIX
MATRIX HI–CAP HCMATRIX 3AL 78938 AA–– 2 22, 41 7
SPARE PARTS
TERMINATION BUS BTERM 3AL 79076 AA–– 1 46 8
EXTRACTORS KIT –– 3AL 79497 AA–– 1 –– ––
TRAFFIC PORTS: STM–1 (SDH)
16 x STM–1 OPTIC. / EL. PORT P16S1N 3AL 79152 AA–– 16 24 ÷ 39 9
16 x STM–1 OPTICAL COMPACT
P16OS1 3AL 80948 AA–– 16 24 ÷ 39 10
PORT
4 x 140/STM–1 SWITCH. O/E PORT/1 P4E4N 3AL 79263 AA–– 16 24 ÷ 39 11, 12
4 x STM–1 ELECTRICAL PORT P4ES1N 3AL 78823 AA–– 16 24 ÷ 39 25
TRAFFIC PORTS: STM–4 (SDH)
4 x STM–4 PORT P4S4N 3AL 79176 AA–– 16 24 ÷ 39 13
ACCESS BOARDS (CONNECTION MODULES)
2 x140/STM–1 OPT./EL. ADAPTER A2S1 3AL 78818 AA–– 16 4 ÷ 19 14
2 x STM–4 ACCESS A2S4 3AL 79177 AA–– 16 4 ÷ 19 15
4 x STM–1 EL A4ES1 3AL 78835 AA–– 16 4 ÷ 19 26
16 x STM–1 ELECTRICAL ACCESS A16ES1 3AL 80492 AA–– 16 4 ÷ 19 16
HIGH SPEED PROTECTION HPROT 3AL 78849 AA–– 3 4 ÷ 19 17
16 x HIGH SPEED PROTECTION HPROT16 3AL 81269 AA–– 3 4 ÷ 19 17
12 x STM–1 OPTICAL ACCESS
A12OS1 3AL 80949 AA–– 16 4 ÷ 19 18
COMPACT
STM–N ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL MODULES
140/155MB ELECTRICAL INTERF. ICMI 3AL 37558 AB–– 256 –– 19
OPTO TRX SFP S–1.1 PLUG–IN SS–1.1 1AB 19467 0001
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

OPTO TRX SFP L–1.1 PLUG–IN SL–1.1 1AB 19467 0002 256 –– 20
OPTO TRX SFP L–1.2 PLUG–IN SL–1.2 1AB 19467 0003

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 159 / 531

531
 ANV P/N Max.
NAME ACRONYM SLOT NOTE
Factory P/N Qty
S–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. FC/PC 3AL 79340 AA––
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

S–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. SC/PC IS–4.1 3AL 79451 AA––

not permitted without written authorization.

S–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. LC 3AL 91793 AA––

L–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. FC/PC 3AL 79452 AA––
L–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. SC/PC IL–4.1 3AL 79452 AB–– 64 –– 21
L–4.1 OPTICAL INTERF. LC 3AL 91794 AA––
L–4.2 OPTICAL INTERF. FC/PC 3AL 79453 AA––
L–4.2 OPTICAL INTERF. SC/PC IL–4.2 3AL 79453 AB––
L–4.2 OPTICAL INTERF. LC 3AL 91795 AA––

Table 30. Accessories list

ANV P/N Max.

NAME ACRONYM SLOT NOTE
Factory P/N Qty
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
FAN UNIT
FAN 3AL 79114 AA––
FOR FANS SHELF 21” 8 ––
ASEL FAN LEVEL 3WIRE FAN 3AL 79114 AB–– 22
PROTECTION
–– 3AN 50121 AA–– 4 ––
FOR FANS SHELF 21”
DUMMY PLATE W20 (h 290) –– 3AN 49397 AA–– 35 –– 23
DUMMY PLATE W40 (h 140) –– 3AN 49587 AA–– 8 –– 24
INSTALLATION KIT 1670SM for OPTI-
–– 3AL 79486 AA–– 1 –– ––
NEX RACK
INSTALLATION KIT 1670SM for
–– 3AL 81819 AA–– 1 –– ––
1678MCC RACK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 160 / 531

531
 Table 31. Parts list: explanatory notes

Note Explanation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1 It is the equipment shelf. It includes the back panel and a W10 dummy plate.
not permitted without written authorization.

Placed under the 1670SM Shelf, it is mandatory and does not include its accessories (two
2
FAN Units and one Protection).
3 OED rack for 1670SM and 1662SMC.
4 One Shelf ID per 1670SM shelf mandatory.
Delivers two voltage levels to all the boards.
Provides external connectors for housekeepings, rack lamps, Q interface, LAN interface.
5
A mixed configuration of two types of CONGIHC (3–wire and 2–wire) in the same 1670SM equip-
ment is not allowed.
6 Needed for connection to the 1678 main shelf.
Two HCMATRIX boards are used in an 1+1 protected EPS configuration; the board performs
7
connection and cross–connection functionalities and moreover synchronization functionalities.
This is a spare part item.
8
The 1670SM Shelf already includes it.
9 This board needs an access board (A16ES1) for 16xSTM–1 electrical connections.
This board manages up to sixteen STM–1 optical streams (numbered from Ch.1 to Ch.4).
It needs up to four SFP optical modules to be fully equipped and the others twelve SFP optical
10
modules have to be inserted on the relevant A12OS1 access board (numbered from Ch.5 to
Ch.16).
The port needs four (electrical or optical) modules to be fully connected. Two modules have
to be inserted on the board front panel and two on the corresponding access board 2xSTM–1
11 front panel (A2S1). Notice that different kind of access module (electrical and optical, also of
different characteristic and connectors) can be inserted in the port board or in the access
board.
12 Each port of this board can be configurated as 140 Mbit/s or STM–1.
The port needs four optical modules to be fully connected. Two modules have to be inserted
on the board front panel and two on the corresponding access board 2xSTM–4 front panel
13
(A2S4). Notice that different kind of access module (also of different characteristic and con-
nectors) can be inserted in the port board or in the access board.
This board needs up to 2 (electrical or optical) 140Mbit/s or STM–1 modules in the front panel,
14
numbered from top to bottom; this board is used for the 4x140/STM–1 O/E port (P4E4N).
This board needs up to 2 optical STM–4 modules in the front panel, numbered from top to bot-
15
tom; this board is used for the 4xSTM–4 port (P4S4N).
HS access board to be used for the 16xSTM–1 optical/electrical port (P16S1N). Allows the
16
bidirectional connection of up to 16 channels.
This board is used in an EPS protection scheme as access board for High Speed STM–1
17
electrical spare port (HPROT for P4ES1 and HPROT16 for P16S1).
This board is used in conjunction to the relevant 16xSTM–1 compact port (P16OS1).
18 It needs up to twelve SFP optical modules to be fully equipped (numbered from Ch.5 to
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Ch.16).
Up of 2 of these modules are inserted on the following boards P4E4N and A2S1 to realize
19
electrical connections for a maximum of 2 STM–1 channels (one for module).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 161 / 531

531
 Note Explanation
Up of to 4 of these SFP modules are inserted on P16OS1 board and up of to 12 of these mod-
20
ules are inserted on A12OS1 access board. They realize optical STM–1 connections.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Up of 2 of these modules are inserted on the boards P4S4N and A2S4 to realize optical con-
not permitted without written authorization.

21 nections for a maximum of 4 STM–4 channels (one for module). Optical modules supplied
with different connectors (SC/PC or FC/PC).
22 Accessories of FANs Subracks.
It is essential to insert the relevant dummy plates on the spaces left by all boards (port or ac-
23
cess board) not supplied in order to obtain the EMI/EMC performances.
24 Dummy plate for unequipped HCLINKE board.
25 This board needs an access board (A4ES1) for 4xSTM–1 electrical connections.
HS access board to be used for the 4xSTM–1 electrical port (P4S1N). Allows the bidirectional
26
connection of up to 4 channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 162 / 531

531
 12.1.8 Units Front View

This paragraph shows the access points (LEDs, switches etc.) present on each units together with legend
and meaning.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 85. on page 164 through Figure 97. on page 176 illustrate units front view available in the 1670SM
not permitted without written authorization.

Equipment.

Figure 101. on page 178 shows the pluggable module available in the 1670SM Equipment.

Note: The unit dimensions in all figures are not the real ones.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 163 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

P4E4N 24 to 39
not permitted without written authorization.

P4S4N

(1)

(2)

(1) Channel #1 (refer to Note)

(2) Channel #2 (refer to Note)
(3) Bicolor LED
Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service (3)

NOTE:
The P4E4N board can be equipped with electrical modules (refer to Figure 99. ).
The P4S4N board can be equipped with optical modules (refer to Figure 100. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 85. 4x140/STM-1 Switchable E/O Port Board or 4xSTM-4 Port Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 164 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ACRONYM SLOTS
not permitted without written authorization.

P4ES1 24 to 39

P16S1N 24 to 39

(1) Bicolor LED

Red: The system control (1)
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 86. 4xSTM-1 E/16xSTM-1 E/O Port Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 165 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

P16OS1 24 to 39
not permitted without written authorization.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) Bicolor LED (9)
Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service
(2) to (5) STM−1 optical channel (refer to Note)
(from channel #1 to channel #4)
(6) to (9) Laser restart key
(from channel #1 to channel #4)

(1)
Note: Others twelve STM91 channels are on A12OS1 access board
(refer to Figure 91. on page 170)
The cavities must be equipped with STM91 optical SFP module
plug9in (refer to Figure 101. on page 178)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 87. 16xSTM–1 COMPACT optical Port Board – front view

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 166 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ACRONYM SLOTS
not permitted without written authorization.

A2S1 4 to 19

A2S4 4 to 19

(1)

(2)

(1) Channel #3 (refer to Note)

(2) Channel #4 (refer to Note)
(3) Bicolor LED
Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service (3)

NOTE:
The A2S1 board can be equipped with electrical modules (refer to Figure 99. ).
The A2S4 board can be equipped with optical modules (refer to Figure 100. ).

Figure 88. 2x140Mbit/s/STM-1/STM-4 Access Board Optical – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 167 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ACRONYM SLOTS
not permitted without written authorization.

A4ES1 4 to 19

INPUT
OUTPUT (1)

(2)
INPUT

OUTPUT

(3)
INPUT

OUTPUT

INPUT (4)

OUTPUT

(1) to (4) STM91 electrical Channel

(5) Bicolor LED: (5)
Red: The system control detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service

Figure 89. 4xSTM–1 Electrical 75 Ohm Access Board – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 168 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A16ES1 4 to 19
not permitted without written authorization.

INPUT OUTPUT

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)

(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)

(16)

(1) to (16) STM91 electrical Channel

(17) Bicolor LED:
Red: The system control detected a board error, (17)
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 90. 16xSTM-1 Electrical 75 Ohm Access Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 169 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A12OS1 4 to 19

(1)

(14)
(2)
(15)
(3)
(16)
(4)
(17)
(5)

(18)
(6)
(19)

(7)
(20)
(8)

(1) to (12) STM91 optical channel (refer to Note) (21)

(from channel #5 to channel #16) (9)
(14) to (25) Laser restart key (22)
(from channel #5 to channel #16)
(10)
(13) Bicolor LED (23)
Red: The system control
(11)
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT) (24)
Green: The board is in service (12)

(25)

Note: First four STM91 channels are on P16OS1 port board (13)
(refer to Figure 87. on page 166)
The cavities must be equipped with STM91 optical SFP
module plug9in (refer to Figure 101. on page 178)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 91. 12xSTM-1 COMPACT optical Access Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 170 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

HPROT 4 to 19

HPROT16 4 to 19

(1) Bicolor LED

Red: The system control
(1)
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service

Figure 92. High-Speed Protection Board – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 171 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOT

BTERM 46
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)

(1) Bicolor LED

Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service

Figure 93. Bus Termination Board – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 172 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HCMATRIX 22 and 41
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)

(3)

(2)

(1) For factory and maintenance only.

(2) Reset command key.
(3) Multicolor LED
Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service (main)
Yellow: The board is in stand by (spare)

Figure 94. HiCap Matrix Board – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 173 / 531

531
 FC/PC
ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

42 to 45
HCLINKE 47 to 50
(1)

HCLINKE main: slot 42, 44, 47, 49

HCLINKE spare: slot 43, 45, 48, 50 (2)

(3)

INPUT

OUTPUT

(1) Bicolor LED

Red: The system control
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service
(2) Laser Restart Key
(3) Optical IN/OUT 10 GBit/s signal

Figure 95. Optical Link Enhanced Board – Front view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 174 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

CONGIHC 1, 21
not permitted without written authorization.

(1)
CONGIHC/A Slot 1
CONGIHC/B Slot 21
(8)

(1) Power (−48/60 V)

(2)
(2) Housekeeping and remote alarm (only used in slot 1)
(3) Rack lamp (only used in slot 1)
(9)
(4) Shelf Identifier block (not used in slot 1)
(3)
(5) not used (external LAN, 10Base2)
(6) not used (external LAN, 10Base2)
(7) External LAN (Slot 1), 10BaseT
IP or Q interface (single LAN configuration) (4)
Customer’s LAN (Slot 21), 10BaseT (optionally)
only Q interface (separated LAN configuration (10)
(8) Auxiliary housekeeping (8 + 8), connector for FAN alarm cable
(9) not Used (5) (11)
(10) Internal LAN 9 10baseT (link #1) − Main LAN
(6) (12)
(11) not used
(12) not used (7) (13)
(13) Internal LAN 9 10baseT (link #2) − Redundant LAN
(14) Bicolor LED
Red: The system control
(14)
detected a board error,
local board alarm (INT)
Green: The board is in service

Figure 96. Control and Generic Interface Board – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 175 / 531

531
 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fans Unit #1
not permitted without written authorization.

Fans Unit #2 (8)

LEGENDA:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Red LED – (NURG) – not used or not present

(2) Red LED – Urgent alarm (URG)
(3) Yellow LED – Alarm storing (ATTD)
(4) Alarm storing push–botton (Attended)
(5) Red LED – not used or not present
(6) Red LED – fans Urgent alarm (URG–V)
(7) WARNING label: windage (air suction)
(8) WARNING label: moving mechanical parts

Figure 97. FANs Subrack Cover – Front View

Connector SUB9D Rotary Switch

159pin, male for ID
Shelf ID Connector
is connected on
CONGIHC Board B
(Slot 21)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 98. Shelf ID Connector for 1670SM

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 176 / 531

531
 MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS
ICMI P4E4N
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A2S1
not permitted without written authorization.

Input

Output

Figure 99. Electrical pluggable module

Optical Module FC/PC

MODULE EQUIPPED
ACRONYM on CARDS
IS–41 P4S4N
IL–41 A2S4 Input
IL–42
Output

Laser Restart Key

Optical Module LC Optical Module SC/PC

Laser Restart Key

Input
Output
Output

Input

Laser Restart Key

Figure 100. STM–4 Optical Modules

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 177 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
SL–11
SL–12
SS–1.1
MODULE
ACRONYM

P16OS1
A12OS1
EQUIPPED
on CARDS

Figure 101. Optical SFP module

531
Optical cables

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

TRX STM–1 SFP module

178 / 531
 12.2 1662SMC Shelf

12.2.1 Shelf Layout

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1662SMC is a single row construction. The mechanical integration is such that the 1662SMC is
not permitted without written authorization.

housed in 600x300 mm racks. Back to back and stand alone application of OED-Racks will be supported.
EMC shielding is done on shelf level. The 1662SMC shelves are indoor equipment and it is recommended
to be installed in a air conditioned location.
It must be noted that max 504x2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped in one shelf (unprotected configuration).
In the configuration with EPS max 378x2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped.
The layout of the 1662SMC shelf is shown in Figure 102.

1662SMC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

SYNTH16 copyA

SYNTH16 copyB
A

B
Access
Access
Access
Access

Access
Access
Access
Access
CONGI

CONGI
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
* * * Slot 21 and 22 for
BUSTERM board
(behind SYNTH16)

Figure 102. 1662SMC Shelf: Face Layout

12.2.2 1662SMC: Basic Equipment

Table 32. 1662SMC: Basic Equipment

Slot Board Mnemonic Comment

1 Control & General I/F Board CONGI Mandatory
2 ... 5 Access boards 63x2Mbit/s A63x2E1A/B
6 Compact STM–16 copy A SYNTH16 Mandatory
7 ... 14 Port boards 63x2Mbit/s P63E1/N/N–M4
15 Compact STM–16 copy B SYNTH16 Mandatory
16 ... 19 Access boards 63x2Mbit/s A63x2E1A/B
20 Control & General I/F Board CONGI Mandatory
21, 22 Termination Bus 1662 T_BUS Mandatory
Cooling A separate FAN subrack is mounted at the bottom of each 1662SMC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 179 / 531

531
 12.2.3 Basic Function of the Boards

CONGI (Control and General Interface)

– Provides power supply interfaces and power supply distribution
– Provides the external LAN interface
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A Shelf Identifier is plugged on the CONGI in slot 20 (Q2 interface)

SYNTH16
SYNTH16 board includes:
– SDH matrix
The matrix implements the Cross-Connect functions. The full non blocking matrix allows
cross-connections of up to 96x96 STM-1 equivalents at High Order level and up to 64x64 STM-1
equivalents at Low Order level between all traffic ports.
– Clock reference and
– Equipment control functions.

BUSTERM (Termination Bus)

– Provides voltage logical reference to all Control and Auxiliary buses
The board is mandatory and is located behind the SYNTH16 board (not visible in front view)

Access board
– Line Interface:
Access boards are used together with the 2 Mbit/s interfaces
– Protection board (LPROT)

Port board
– Transport, adaptation and termination functions
– Matrix selection

I/O Interfaces

The 1662SMC integration of this Release supports only 2 Mbit/s interfaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 180 / 531

531
 12.2.4 System Configurations

12.2.4.1 Supported I/O Boards, relation Access/Port Boards

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Interface Access Boards Port Boards Connectors

1 slot 1 slot
1

....

....
63x2Mbit/s
63 x 2Mbit/s 63x2Mbit/s

Access standard HM 75Ohm or 120Ohm

Port standard 63 Standard Standard

1 slot 1 slot
1
63x2Mbit/s
....

63x2Mbit/s

....
63 x 2Mbit/s
HM 120Ohm
Access K20
Port standard 63 K20 Standard

1 slot 1 slot
1
63 x 2Mbit/s
....

....
63x2Mbit/s 63x2Mbit/s
Access standard HM 75Ohm or 120Ohm
Port with retiming 63
with retiming
Standard function
function

1 slot 1 slot
1
63 x 2Mbit/s 63x2Mbit/s
....

63x2Mbit/s
....

Access K20 HM 120Ohm

Port with retiming with retiming
63 K20
function function

2 slot
1 x STM–16 SYNTH16
S–16.1
FC/PC
SC/PC
Used only for the connection to the Main Shelf

Figure 103. 1662SMC: I/O Boards. Relation Access/Port Boards

12.2.4.2 Relation Access Board/Port Board

Table 33. 1662SMC: Relation Access / Port Boards

Slot Access Board 2 3 4 5 16 17 18 19

Slot Port Board 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 181 / 531

531
 12.2.4.3 Configuration Rules

Table 34. 1662SMC: Configuration Rules

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Capacity – Capacity of the Shelf: 16 STM–1eq.

(Actually needed capacity in the 1678MCC application R3: 8 STM–1equiv.)
not permitted without written authorization.

– Max. number of 1662SMC which can be attached to the Main Shelf: 32

This number is limited by the max. capacity of the LO matrix: 256STM–1 eq.
I/O Boards – Only 2Mbit/s boards are supported
– Each slot has a capacity of 2 STM–1eq.
– The 2Mbit/s I/O interfaces consists of port and access boards.
– The 2 Mbit/s port and access boards are available in different versions as shown in Figure 103.
I/O Protection – EPS 1:n (n=1...3). One or two protection groups are possible
– The protection access board LPROT may be located in slots 2 to 5, resp. 18 to 21. The protection I/O
port board have to be inserted in a slot at the most left of the protected port boards group. (for
relation of access and port board ref. Table 33. )
Dummy Plates – The slots which are not equipped must be closed by a dummy plate for EMC reasons
Connection to – The connection to the Main Shelf is done via the SYNTH16 (S–16.1) boards: the connection cables
the Main Shelf are plugged at the front of the SYNTH16
– Capacity of the SYNTH16 board: 16 STM–1eq.

Face Layout of the Shelf equipped with 2Mbit/s I/O Boards

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SYNTH16 copyA

SYNTH16 copyB
CONGI copyA
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s

Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
CONGI copyB
A

B
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port

WW W W WW W W W W W W W W WW

Figure 104. 1662SMC Equipment: Unprotected Configuration with 2Mbit/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
prot. Port 63 x 2Mb/s

prot. Port 63 x 2Mb/s

Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s

Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
Access 63 x 2Mb/s
SYNTH16 copyA

SYNTH16 copyB
CONGI copyA

CONGI copyB
A

Port 63 x 2Mb/s
Port 63 x 2Mb/s
Port 63 x 2Mb/s

Port 63 x 2Mb/s
Port 63 x 2Mb/s
Port 63 x 2Mb/s
B

LPROT
LPROT

W: Working
P: Protection P W WW P W W W P WW W P W WW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 105. 1662SMC Equipment: Protected Configuration with 2Mbit/s

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 182 / 531

531
 12.2.4.4 Connection to the Main shelf

In deviation to the 1670SM where the link capacity is STM-64, the capacity for each link for the 1662SMC
is STM-16. As link board in the 1662SMC the STM-16 I/O board (SYNTH16) is used which is connected
with fibres to one port of the 16xSTM-16 I/O board in the main shelf of the 1678MCC.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The link can be configured in a flexible way, i.e. the STM-16 ports can be chosen in an arbitrary way.

The links are MSP protected. Two (SYNTH16) boards using a STM-16 interface in the 1662SMC are
connected with two fibres to two different STM-16 ports on possibly different 16xSTM-16 boards in the
1678MCC (refer to Figure 106. ).

The synchronization between OED and main-shelf is done via the STM-16 links. No additional cabling is
required. The clock source can be either selected from an I/O port at the OED and the synchronization
is transmitted over the link to the main-shelf which selects the link as clock source, or vice versa. The
STM-16 links allow a complete SSM handling for synchronization.

The connection main shelf/1662SMC is done via the following ’connection items’:

– Optical cables.
– On the Main Shelf side, the cables are plugged at the front of dedicated I/O boards 16xSTM-16
(S–16.1)
– On the 1662SMC side, the cables are plugged at the front of the SYNTH 16 boards (S–16.1).
– The connection may be unprotected or 1+1 MSP protected.

Figure 106. shows an example for a Main Shelf/1662SMC connection 1+1 MSP protected.
Figure 107. shows an example for a Main Shelf/1662SMC connection 1+1 MSP unprotected.

Main Shelf
FAN
16xSTM–16 S–16.1 copyA
16xSTM–16 S–16.1 copyB
PWI

PWI

24 25
MX160/320/640 Copy B
MX160/320/640 Copy A

1662SMC
SYNTH16 copyBB(S–16.1)
SYNTH16 copyAA(S–16.1)
FLCCONGI
FLCSERV

CONGI copyA

..
CONGI copyB

..
LAX40 copyB
LAX40 copyA

.. ..
Access
Access
Access

Access

Access
Access
Access
Access
Port

Port
Port
Port
Port
Port

Port
Port

1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

FAN
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 16 17 18 19 20

Capacity: 1xSTM–16 per Link

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 106. Connection Main Shelf/1662SMC (1+1MSP protected)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 183 / 531

531
 Main Shelf
FAN
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

16xSTM–16 S–16.1 copyA

not permitted without written authorization.

PWI

PWI
24 25

MX160/320/640 Copy B
MX160/320/640 Copy A
1662SMC

SYNTH16 copyBB(S–16.1)
SYNTH16 copyAA(S–16.1)
FLCCONGI
FLCSERV

CONGI copyA

CONGI copyB
..

LAX40 copyB
LAX40 copyA
.

Access
Access
Access

Access

Access
Access
Access
Access
Port

Port
Port
Port
Port
Port

Port
Port
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

FAN
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 16 17 18 19 20

Capacity: 1xSTM–16 per Link

Figure 107. Connection Main Shelf/1662SMC (unprotected)

Number of connected 1662SMC Shelves

The number of OEDs which can be connected to one 1678MCC main shelf is limited by the I/O ports used
as link ports in the 1678MCC main shelf. For 1662SMC OEDs, an additional limit is given by the LO matrix
capacity offered by the 1678MCC main shelf (max. 160G).

For the 1662SMC integration the 1678MCC main shelf offers 16x16 = 256 STM–16 ports which can be
used as STM–16 link ports. Theoretically 256 1662SMC OEDs could be connected unprotected or
128 OEDs with a protected link. Because the 1662SMC OEDs are integrated to reuse the LO I/O ports
(2Mbit/s), the number of OEDs is restricted by the LO matrix capacity of the main shelf. In this release the
LO matrix capacity is max. 160G (1024 STM–1 equivalents).

Because the 1662SMC uses only STM–8 capacity in the STM–16 link up to 128 1662SMC can be
connected to the main shelf to use 100% of the LO matrix capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 184 / 531

531
 12.2.5 Part List

The Part List is subdivided in three tables, specifically:

• in Table 35. on page 186 is shown the Main part list

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• in Table 36. on page 187 is shown the Accessory list

• in Table 37. on page 188 is shown the Explanatory notes of previous lists.

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the
equipment are indicated too.

Such tables report the following information:

• Description: name of items

• Acronym: it is used to identified units and modules on the Craft Terminal applications

• ANV Part/Number

• Max Q.ty: maximum quantity of items in the 1662SMC equipment

• Slot: position of the board inside the 1662SMC equipment (refer to Figure 102. on page 179)

• Notes: are listed a set of explanatory notes

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 185 / 531

531
 Table 35. Main part list

ANV P/N Max.

NAME ACRONYM SLOT NOTE
Factory P/N Qty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
not permitted without written authorization.

1662SMC SHELF SR62C 3AL 98009 AB–– 1 –– 1

FANS SHELF 19” –– 3AL 79773 AA–– 1 –– 2
OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU –– 3AN 44815 AA–– 1 –– 3
TERMINATION BUS/2 T_BUS 3AL 79088 AC–– 2 21, 22 4
SHELF IDENTIFICATION IDSHELF 3AL 79242 AA–– 1 –– 5
COMMON PARTS
CONTROL AND GENERAL I/F CONGI 3AL 78830 AD–– 2 1, 20 6
3AL 98038 AC––
COMPACT ADM 16 SYNTH16 2 6, 15 7
3AL 98038 AD––
SPARE PARTS
EXTRACTORS KIT –– 3AL 79497 AA–– 1 –– 8
TRAFFIC PORTS: LOW SPEED (PDH)
63x2 MBIT/S PORT P63E1 3AL 79092 AA–– 9
63x2 MBIT/S G703/ISDN–PRA–FS 8 7 ÷ 14
P63E1N 3AL 79092 AC–– 10
PORT
LS (LOW SPEED) ACCESS BOARDS (CONNECTION MODULES)
63x2 MBIT/S PROT. 75 OHM HM A63E1A 3AL 98029 AA––
2 ÷ 5, 11
63x2 MBIT/S PROT. 120 OHM HM A63E1B 3AL 98035 AA–– 8
16 ÷ 19
63x2 MBIT/S PROT. 120 OHM HM K20 A63E1B 3AL 98051 AA–– 11, 12
2 ÷ 5,
LOW SPEED PROTECTION LPROT 3AL 98026 AA–– 2 13
16 ÷ 19
STM–N OPTICAL MODULES
OPTO TRX SFP S–16.1 PLUG–IN SS–161 1AB 19637 0001 2 –– 14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 186 / 531

531
 Table 36. Accessories list

ANV P/N Max.

NAME ACRONYM SLOT NOTE
Factory P/N Qty
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
FAN UNIT
FAN 3AL 79772 AA–– 4 –– 15
FOR FANS SHELF 19”
METALLIC FAN GRID –– 3AL 81812 AA–– 1 –– 16
INSTALLATION KIT FAN SHELF
–– 3AL 80807 AA–– 1 –– ––
1662SMC for OPTINEX RACK
INSTALLATION KIT FAN SHELF
–– 3AG 24277 AA–– 1 –– ––
1662SMC for 1678MCC RACK
INSTALLATION KIT 1662SMC for OP-
–– 3AL 79463 AA–– 1 –– ––
TINEX RACK
INSTALLATION KIT 1662SMC for
–– 3AL 91636 AA–– 1 –– ––
1678MCC RACK
1662SMC 19/21” ADAPTER –– 3AL 98097 AA–– 1 –– 17
1662SMC FIBER INSTALLATION KIT
–– 3AL 98198 AA–– 1 –– ––
21”
2MB/S CABLING TOOLS –– 3AL 98162 AA–– 1 –– ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 187 / 531

531
 Table 37. Parts list: explanatory notes

Note Explanation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1 It is the equipment shelf. It includes the back panel.

not permitted without written authorization.

Placed under the 1662SMC Shelf, it is mandatory and does not include its accessories (two
2
FAN Units and one Protection).
3 OED rack for 1670SM and 1662SMC.
Mandatory board, it is used to provide voltage logical reference to all control and auxiliary
4
busses.
5 One Shelf ID per 1662SMC shelf mandatory.
Delivers two voltage levels to all the boards. Only the CONGI in slot1 provides external con-
6 nectors for housekeeping, rack lamps, Q interface, LAN interface. Both CONGI boards (slot1
and 20) deliver remote alarms.
Needed for connection to the 1678 main shelf. The board provides: 1xSTM–16 line interface,
7 equipment controller, shelf controller, matrix and synchronization function (1+1 protected EPS
configuration).
8 Tool used to extract the connectors.
To be used with access board A63E1. Each access board A63E1 are needed to fully connect
9
the port channels.
The board supports the NT functionality, performance monitoring and retiming on 2 Mbit/s
10
ISDN–PRA.
Protected LS access board. Allow bidirectional connection of up to 63x2 Mbit/s channels. To
11
be used in EPS protection configurations.
12 LS access board complaint with ITU K20 norms.
To be used in EPS protection schemes as access board for the LS electrical port (63x2 Mbit/
13
s).
14 Optical SFP module used on the SYNTH16 board.
15 Two FAN units for each 1662SMC shelf are necessary in the FAN shelf.
16 Metallic FAN grid.
17 Mechanical adapter utilized to insert the subrack in an 21” rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 188 / 531

531
 12.2.6 Units Front View

This paragraph shows the access points (LEDs, switches etc.) present on each units together with legend
and meaning.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 108. on page 190 through Figure 113. on page 195 illustrate units front view available in the
not permitted without written authorization.

1662SMC Equipment.

Figure 114. on page 196 shows the pluggable module available in the 1662SMC Equipment.

Note: The unit dimensions in all figures are not the real ones.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 189 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P63E1 7 to 14

P63E1N–M4 7 to 14

3AL XXXXX AA

(1) Multicolor LED (1)

xxxxxx

Red led – local unit alarm

Green led – in service unit
Orange led –unit in Stand–by (EPS schema)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 108. 63 x 2 Mbit/s Port Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 190 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

CONGI 1, 20

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Power
(5)
(2) Housekeeping and remote alarm
(3) Rack lamps (not used on CONGI in slot 20)
(4) QMD (Q2) (Fan alarm on CONGI in Slot 1)
(Shelf ID on CONGI in Slot 20) (6)
(5) I/O BNC for Q3 10 base 2 (not used on CONGI in slot 20)
3AL XXXXX AA

(6) RJ45 for Q3 10 base T (not used on CONGI in slot 20)

(7)
xxxxxx

(7) Bicolor LED:

Red led – local unit alarm
Green led – in service unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 109. Control and General Interface – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 191 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

SYNTH16 6, 15

(5)

(1) PC Connector (F interface)

(2) Reset Command Key
(3) Alarm Storing Pushbutton (Attended)
(4) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(5) Channel #1 (N.B.)
(6) Red LED – Urgent Alarm (Critical or Major) (1)
(7) Red LED – Not Urgent alarm (Minor)
(8) Yellow LED – Alarm storing (Attended)
(9) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition (6)
(10) Yellow LED – Indicative Alarm (Warning) U
(11) Green LED – when on, unit is active NU (7)
when off, unit is standby R AT (8)
(12) Bicolor LED: (2)
Red led – local unit alarm AB (9)
Green led – in service unit (3) IN (10)
(11)
(4) (12)

N.B. The SYNTH16 board can be equipped with the SS–161 Module (refer to Figure 114. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 110. SYNTH16 Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 192 / 531

531
 ACRONYM SLOTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A63E1A (75 OHM) 2 to 5, 16 to 19

not permitted without written authorization.

A63E1B (120 Ohm) 2 to 5, 16 to 19

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Channel # 1 –7 (8)

(2) Channel # 8 – 14
(3) Channel # 15 –21
(4) Channel # 22 – 28 (9)
(5) Channel # 29 – 35
(6) Channel # 36 – 42
(7) Channel # 43 – 49
3AL XXXXX AA
xxxxxx

(8) Channel # 50 – 56
(9) Channel # 57 – 63
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 111. 63 x 2 Mbit/s Access Board – Front View

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 193 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
(1)

03
LPROT
ACRONYM

Bicolor LED:
SLOTS

Red led – local unit alarm

Green led – in service unit
2 to 5, 16 to 19

531
Figure 112. Low Speed Protection Board – Front View
xxxxxx
3AL XXXXX AA

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

(1)

194 / 531
 (1)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

(2) (4) (5) (6) (3)

(1) Multicolor LED

Red led – local unit alarm
Orange led – temperature major than 55 °C
Green led – in service unit

(2) Battery A connector

(3) Battery B connector
(4) not used
(5) Alarm connector
(6) not used

Figure 113. FANs Subrack Cover – Front View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 195 / 531

531
 MODULE EQUIPPED TRX STM–16 SFP MODULE
ACRONYM on CARDS
SS–161 SYNTH16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Optical cables

Figure 114. STM-16 optical SFP module

Connector SUB9D Rotary Switch

159pin, male for ID
Shelf ID Connector
is connected on
CONGI Board B
(Slot 20)

Figure 115. Shelf ID Connector for 1662SMC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 196 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
197 / 531
 13 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

13.1 General Description

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The boards equipped in 1678MCC are divided in the following types:

not permitted without written authorization.

1. Centralized Common boards

2. Equipment units
3. Traffic Ports SDH boards

13.1.1 Centralized Common Boards

The following boards are available; they are mandatory in the 1678MCC main shelf equipment about
control and connections:

• First Level Controller and Service interfaces board (FLCSERV)

The board provides the following functionalities:

– First Level Controller function (spare)

• F interface for Local Craft Terminal (CT)

• Communication with the Operation System (OS) through different interfaces (DCC,
QB3 etc.)
• 2 MHz Input/Output

• First Level Controller and Control & General interfaces board (FLCCONGI)

The board provides the following functionalities:

– First Level Controller function (main)

• F interface for Local Craft Terminal (CT)

• Communication with the Operation System (OS) through different interfaces (DCC,
QB3 etc.)
• QB3 Interface
• Housekeeping and Remote Alarm interface
• Auxiliary Housekeeping interface

Note:
The two previous boards in main/spare configuration are provided (redundant EC); when the board
is in the “Active” state it manages the F interface.

• High Capacity Matrix board

Three types of HO matrix boards exist:

– MX640 with 4096 STM-1 equiv. (SDH, SONET)

– MX320 with 2048 STM-1 equiv. (SDH, SONET)
– MX160 with 1024 STM-1 equiv. (SDH)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 198 / 531

531
 The board provides the following functionalities:

– HO Matrix that performs HPC

– Protection functions
– HPOM / HSUT functions
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Synchronization functions
not permitted without written authorization.

– Shelf Controller function

Two boards in master/slave configuration are provided (redundant SLC).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 199 / 531

531
 13.1.2 Equipment Units

The following units are available; they are mandatory in the 1678MCC equipment about powering, cooling
and bus terminating:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Power Supply and Filter board (PSF)

not permitted without written authorization.

The board provides the following functionality:

• distribution of Power Supply (65 V) after filtering process

Two PSF boards in 1+1 configuration are provided (they are both mandatory).

• Bus Termination board (BUSTERM)

The board provides the following functionality:

• electrical termination to the buses routed in the backplane

Two BUSTERM boards are provided (they are both mandatory).

• FANs unit (FAN)

The unit provides the following functionality:

• cooling the equipment

Two FAN units are provided (they are both mandatory).

13.1.3 Traffic Ports boards

The following boards are available in the 1678MCC main shelf:

• 16xSTM–1/4 optical board (P16S1S4)

The board provides to process up to sixteen STM–1/4’s (SFP plug–in).

Any combination of optical interface (Short or Long haul) is possible on the same port. That must
be done by groups of four continuous STM–n ports.

The 16 x STM–1/4 board is a single blade board providing 16 slots. Each slot can host a
STM–1/4 SFP (small form factor plug–in) optical module, so that each board can provide up to
16 optical interfaces.
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
The 1678MCC can host up to sixteen 16 x STM–1/4 boards in one shelf. So the maximum
number of STM–1/4 interfaces per shelf is 256.

Each STM–1 SFP module is available with S–1.1, L–1.1 or L–1.2 interface and each STM–4
SFP module is available with S–4.1, L–4.1 or L–4.2 interface. So each 16 x STM–1/4 board can
host any mix of the above mentioned interfaces.
All STM–1/4 modules can be protected in SNCP or 1+1 / 1:N MSP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 200 / 531

531
 • 16xSTM–1 board (P16S1S)

The board provides to process up to sixteen STM–1’s (SFP plug–in).

A combination of optical interfaces (Short or Long haul) and electrical interfaces is possible on
the same port. That must be done by groups of four continuous STM–n ports.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The 16 x STM–1 board is a single blade board providing 16 slots. Each slot can host a STM–1
SFP (small form factor plug–in) optical or electrical module, so that each board can provide up
to 16 optical/electrical interfaces.
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
The 1678MCC can host up to sixteen 16 x STM–1 boards in one shelf. So the maximum number
of STM–1 interfaces per shelf is 256.
Limitation (In case of electrical interfaces): Due to mechanical restrictions, up to 32 STM–1
electrical ports can be supported within1678MCC with front cover. The boards have to be
located as follow:
– one board on right side of the shelf
– one board on left side of the shelf.
Each STM–1 SFP module is available with SES1, S–1.1, L–1.1 or L–1.2 interface.

• 4/8/16xSTM–16 optical board (P4S16, P8S16, P16S16)

The board provides to process up to four/eight/sixteen STM–16’s (SFP plug–in).

Any combination of optical interface (Short or Long haul) is possible on the same port.

The 4/8/16 x STM–16 board is a single blade board providing 16 slots. Each slot can host a
STM–16 SFP (small form factor plug–in) optical module, so that each board can provide up to
4/8/16 optical interfaces.
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
The 1678MCC can host up to sixteen 4/8/16 x STM–16 boards in one shelf. So the maximum
number of STM–16 interfaces per shelf is 256.
Each STM–16 SFP module is available with S–16.1, L–16.1 or L–16.2 interface, so each
4/8/16xSTM–16 board can host any mix of four/eight/sixteen STM–16 interfaces.
They may be used in the following configurations:

• N x unprotected STM–16 lines

• N x 1+1/1:N STM–16 terminal
• N x SNC–P rings
• N x 2–fiber MS–SPRing
• or any combinations of the above unprotected and protected configurations

• 1xSTM–64 board

The board provides one STM–64 optical interface.

The 1 x STM–64 optical board (S64M) is a single slot board providing one STM–64 optical
interface (on front panel).
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
The STM–64 interface is available with FC or SC connectors.
Several interface types are available:

• S–64.2
• I–64.1 (VSR2000–2R1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• L–64.2
• V–64.2
• U–64.2

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 201 / 531

531
 • 2xSTM–64 board

The board provides two STM–64 optical interface.

The 2xSTM–64 optical board (P2S64M) is a single slot board providing two STM–64 optical
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

interface (on front panel).

not permitted without written authorization.

This board is 4.5 TE wide. The STM–64 interface is available with FC or SC connectors.
Several interface types are available:

• S–64.2
• I–64.1 (VSR2000–2R1)
• 2xSTM-64 interfaces per board for XFP/E modules

• 4xSTM–64 board

The board provides four STM–64 optical interface.

The 4xSTM–64 optical board (P4S64M) is a single slot board providing four STM–64 optical
interfaces (on front panel).
This board is 4.5 TE wide. The four STM–64 interfaces are available with FC or SC connectors.
The 1678MCC can host up to sixteen 4 x STM–64 boards in one shelf. So the maximum number
of STM–64 interfaces per shelf is 64.
Several interface types are available:

• I–64.1 (VSR2000–2R1)
• 4xSTM-64 interfaces per board for XFP/E modules
The I–64.1 board can be used for the intra–shelf connections of 1670SM OEDs. The links can
be 1+1 MSP protected.

All STM–64 boards can be used in the following configurations:

• N x unprotected STM–64 lines

• N x 1+1/1:N STM–64 terminal
• N x SNC–P rings
• N x 2–fiber MS–SPRing
• or any combinations of the above unprotected and protected configurations

• 4/8/16xGE board

The board provides to process up to four/eight/sixteen GE optical interfaces (SFP plug–in).

Flexible mix of short range (1000SX) and long range (1000LX) optics is possible.

The 4/8/16 x GE board is a single blade board providing up to 16 slots. Each slot can host a GE
SFP (small form factor plug–in) optical module, so that each board can provide up to 4/8/16
optical interfaces.
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
The 1678MCC can host up to sixteen 4/8/16 x GE boards in one shelf. So the maximum number
of GE interfaces per shelf is 256.
Each GE SFP module is available with 1000SX or 1000LX interface, so each 4/8/16xSTM–16
board can host any mix of four/eight/sixteen GE interfaces.
They may be used in the following configurations:

• N x SNC–P rings
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

N x 2–fiber MS–SPRing

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 202 / 531

531
 • 2/4x10 GE board

The board provides to process up to two/four GE optical interfaces (XFP plug–in).

Flexible mix of 10GE–SR, 10GE–LR and 10GE–ER is possible.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 2/4x10GE board is a single blade board providing up to 2/4 slots. Each slot can host a XFP
not permitted without written authorization.

optical module, so that each board can provide up to 2/4 optical interfaces.
This board is 4.5 TE wide.

• Lower Order Matrix board

Two types of LO matrix boards exist:

– LAX40 with 256 STM-1 equiv.

– LAX20 with 128 STM-1 equiv.

The board provides the following functionalities:

– LO Matrix
– Adaptation function
– Switching entities: VC–3, VC–12, VC–11 (for future VC–2)
– Protection capabilities: SNCP/I, SNCP/N

Two boards in master/slave configuration are provided.

• Lower Order Matrix Link 40G (LAC40)

This board is used to connect the 1678MCC main shelf with the LO extension shelf.

The LAC40 board is a single blade board providing 16 slots. Each slot can host a STM–16 SFP
(small form factor plug–in) optical module, so that each board can provide up to 16 optical
interfaces (in general I–16.1).
This board is 4.5 TE wide.
Max. 5 (4+1) LAC40 boards are necessary to connect a fully equipped 160G LO extension shelf.

• ES64 board

This board has a ethernet switching function (L2 switching)

This board is 4.5 TE wide.

The ES64 board can be used in the following configuration:

• always 1+1 EPS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 203 / 531

531
 13.1.4 Lower Order Extension Shelf

The lower order partsystem provides lower order functionality with a capacity of 160 Gbit (1 K LO matrix).

13.1.4.1 Centralized Common Boards

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The following boards are available; they are mandatory in the LO extension shelf equipment about control
and connections:

• Alarm board (ALM)

The board provides housekeeping, remote alarm and rack lamp interfaces.

• LO Centerstage Matrix board

LX160 with 1024 STM-1 equiv.

The board provides the following functionalities:

– Adaptation function
– LO three stage matrix (1 : N MSP protected, N=1...7)
– Protection capabilities: SNCP/I, SNCP/N
– Redundant clock generator

Two boards in master/slave configuration are provided.

13.1.4.2 Equipment Units

The shelf includes also the equipment units PSF, BUSTERM and FANs as described in chapter 13.1.2 on
page 200.

13.1.4.3 Port Boards

The port board area of the shelf can be equipped with up to 16 port boards.

• LO Adaptation 20G board (LA20)

The board provides the following functionalities:

– The board is a single blade board providing 8 slots. Each slot can host a STM–16 SFP
(small form factor plug–in) optical module, so that each board can provide up to 8 optical
interfaces (in general I–16.1).
– This board is 4.5 TE wide.
– For the 160G LO matrix a maximum of 10 (8+2) LA20 boards per shelf are supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 204 / 531

531
 13.2 Subsystems and involved Boards

Figure 116. on page 205 illustrates, in block diagram form, some boards employed in the 1678MCC
equipment and the general operating functions.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

For more details about the boards managed refer to chapter 17 on page 441.
not permitted without written authorization.

Main shelf FLCSERV

optical 2MHz/2Mb T4/T5
interface I/O board synch G.703 T3/T6
O
DCC
STM-N Logical/
First Level
Physical
Controller Q3
Transport OBPS
and
Adaption
Function VccA / VccB
BattA / BattB Control

FLCCONGI

OBPS 2MHz/2Mb T4/T5

16 synch G.703 T3/T6
1 DCC
BattA / BattB VccA / VccB
First Level
Controller Q3
HO MATRIX OBPS

T0 VC-4/-nc VccA / VccB

BattA / BattB Control
Matrix

SEC T4/T5 Power Supply Filter A

T1 VccA Power A
T3/T6
DC/DC

OBPS SLC BattA

2 Control
1
BattA / BattB VccA / VccB Control
VccB Power Supply Filter B
Power B

LO MATRIX DC/DC

BattB
VC-3/VC-12/ Control
VC11 Matrix

OBPS
2
1
BattA / BattB VccA / VccB

Figure 116. 1678MCC Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 205 / 531

531
 The functions carried out by the unit can be splitted into the following subsystems:

• Connections subsystem (refer to para. 13.3 on page 208)

• Signal management subsystem (refer to para. 13.4 on page 217)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• Controller subsystem (refer to para. 13.5 on page 224)

• Synchronization subsystem (refer to para. 13.6 on page 236)

• Protection subsystem (refer to para. 13.7 on page 239)

• Performance Monitoring subsystem (refer to para. 13.8 on page 301)

• External Interfaces subsystem (refer to para. 13.9 on page 303)

• Power Supply subsystem (refer to para. 13.10 on page 304)

• Equipment Alarms and Test subsystem (refer to para. 13.11 on page 312)

• Remote Inventory subsystem (refer to para. 13.13 on page 321)

In the following paragraphs a detailed description of each subsystem is given.

Each logical function does not correspond necessarily to a physical board but can be distributed over more
than one board. On the other side, one board can house more than one function.

For each subsystem the list of the involved boards and a brief abstract of the function detailed on the
following paragraphs is reported in Table 38. on page 207.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 206 / 531

531
 Table 38. Subsystems and involved boards

Subsystem Board involved Short description

Connections MATRIX and ports On the paragraph is explained how the sig-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

nal is managed between the port and the

not permitted without written authorization.

MATRIX.
Signal management all ports On the paragraph it is explained how the
SDH signals are elaborated on the ports.
The description in compliancy with the
G.783 ITU–T Rec.
Controller FLCSERV and FLCCONGI, The control system is centralized.
HO MATRIX The FLCSERV and the FLCCONGI perform
the First Level Controller (FLC) function and
the HO MATRIX performs the Second Level
Controller (SLC) function.
Protection Network all ports The following network protection are ex-
protections plained: linear MSP, SNCP/I and SNCP/N
(among VC–4 only), Drop & Continue + in-
sertion SNCP, Collapsed single–node ring
interconnection, Collapsed dual–node ring
interconnection, 2F MS–SPRing. The HO
MATRIX board manages all the protections.
Equipment FLCSERV and FLCCONGI, The SLC on the HO MATRIX board controls
protections HO MATRIX the EPS protections.

Synchronization HO MATRIX The MATRIX performs the synchronization

function therefore distributing the clock and
synchronism to all the equipment units.
Auxiliary and External all ports, FLCSERV, On the paragraph is explained how the OH
FLCCONGI bytes (DCC) are framed and managed.
(Note: EOW and AUX channels are not sup-
ported.)
Also the External Interfaces (Housekeeping,
Craft Terminal, Remote Alarms and Rack
Alarms) are described.
Power Supply all boards, PSF The powering is distributed over the all
equipment boards. The PSF boards pro-
vides the 65 V and the service 3.3 V to pow-
er each board.
Equipment Alarms all boards and modules On the paragraph is explained the Alarms
and Test and the Test (Loop) managed.
Remote Inventory all boards and modules On the paragraph is explained the Remote
Inventory architecture.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 207 / 531

531
 13.3 Connections Subsystem

13.3.1 High Order SDH/SONET/OTN Cross Connect Subsystem

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC cross–connect is built upon a non–blocking matrix (the HO 640/320/160Gb/s matrix) that
not permitted without written authorization.

can interconnect AU–4s (or AU–3s) between any SDH/SONET port accessing the system.
The same board can switch ODU–x entities, implementing the G.709 optical layer.

Several types of connections can be established, such as:

• unidirectional point–to–point (protected or unprotected)

• bi–directional point–to–point (protected or unprotected)
• unidirectional point–to–multipoint
• SNCP Drop & Continue

The HO matrix capacity is max. 4096x4096 STM–1 equivalent ports at the Higher Order VC level.

The HO matrix can support, in accordance with the ITU–T G.783 Rec., the following functions:

• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) according to G.841, which provides protection for the
STM–N signal against line failures within a multiplex section, by using the protocol defined for
the MSP bytes: K1 and K2;

• HPC (Higher Order Path Connection), which performs the AU–4 (AU–3) cross–connections,
assigning an incoming VC–4’s to an outgoing VC–4’s. The characteristic of the connection
depends on:
– Type of connection (unprotected, 1+1 protected by means of SNCP/I, SNCP/N protection);
– Input and Output connection points.

The SDH/SONET matrix is responsible for all the network protection mechanisms: SNCP and linear MSP.
The matrix is always protected in 1+1 EPS configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 208 / 531

531
 13.3.2 20/40G Lower Order Subsystem

Principle

The LO Matrix is a square matrix. Two LO board types are supported:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– LAX40
– LAX20

Equipment

The LO Matrix is implemented in 1+1 LAX matrix boards. The LAX boards are always all equipped.

The LAX board implements the square low order matrix together with the so called adaptation function
(Higher Order path termination and adaptation function). The LAX board is always 1+1 protected.

Lower order
adaption and
monitoring
Backplane

interface
to higher LO matrix
order function
subsystem

32 x 2.5 Gbit/s
Copy A and B
to/from HO Matrix

16 x 2.5 Gbit/s 16 x 2.5 Gbit/s

Figure 117. Low Order Matrix Overview

Switching entities

– VC-3
– VC-12
– VC-11 (SONET).

Capacity

– LAX40 has a capacity of 256 STM–1 eq. (40 Gbit/s)

– LAX20 has a capacity of 128 STM–1 eq. (20 Gbit/s)

This results in a maximum capacity of 256 STM-1eq. for the LO matrix, if the LAX40 board is used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 209 / 531

531
 Protection

– 1+1 protected
– SNCP/I and SNCP/N with:
• Hold off timers (limited to 4 values: disabled, 10,100,1000 ms)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Wait to restore timers (disabled and 1 minute).

not permitted without written authorization.

Matrix Management

Figure 118. shows the physical signal flow between HO matrix and LO matrix. Receive and transmit
direction are depicted as dedicated boards on the left and the right hand side of the HO matrix. In reality
both signal directions are unified on a board and allow the insertion of remote information into the
transmission paths.

RX direction TX direction
STM–N, VC4
STM–N, VC4
structured
1 1 structured
STM–N, VC4
STM–N, VC4
unstructured
unstructured
... ...

2Mbit 2Mbit

STM-1e/140Mbit HO I/O 14 * HO I/O STM-1e/140Mbit

MX640 14 *
boards 256 STM1 4096 x 4096 256 STM1 boards
STM–N, VC4 STM–N, VC4
structured OED VC4
square matrix VC4 OED structured

STM–N, VC4 STM–N, VC4

unstructured unstructured

Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet

4096 4096
256 STM1 256 STM1

1
LAX40 ...
256 x 256
square matrix 256

Figure 118. Physical Matrix View with MX640 and LAX40

OEDs are connected to the main shelf via normal interfaces.

In case the I/O port receives structured SDH/SONET signals (from OED or directly from an HO I/O) the
signal can be connected to an assembler located on an LAX board (refer to Figure 119. for matrix logical
view).

Low order PDH traffic (only via OED) is connected via the HO matrix to the LAX boards. The connection
is established as soon as the OED ports are put into service. The AU4 path through the HO matrix and
the assembler on the LAX board are internal. Each of the low order signals is connected with the LO matrix
to a free assembler or to another PDH port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 210 / 531

531
 RX direction TX direction

STM–N HO
Matrix
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

structured
document, use and communication of its contents

STM–N
structured
not permitted without written authorization.

STM–N
unstructured
STM–N
unstructured

Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit

Ethernet

STM-1e/140Mbit
I/O I/O STM-1e/140Mbit
board board

LO

Assembler
Assembler

Matrix

2Mbit I/O I/O 2Mbit

board board

Figure 119. Logical Matrix View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 211 / 531

531
 13.3.3 160G Lower Order Partsystem

This partsystem has a LO functionality up to the capacity of 160 Gbit. The Lower Order crossconnect
functionality is implemented in an extension shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Lower Order system of the 1678MCC contains the following functions:
not permitted without written authorization.

– Adaptation function (TU–Pointer Processor), 1:N protected

– Low Order three stage matrix

• scalable in steps of 20 GBit/s,
• the second stage is 1+1 EPS protected,
• the first and third stages are 1:N protected using MSP, N is 4 in case of 160G

– Switching entities : VC–3, VC–12

– Protection capabilities : SNCP/I, SNCP/N

– Redundant clock generator (ETSI compliance)

The 1678MCC Main Shelf with 160G Lower Order extension shelf is shown in Figure 120.

STM –16
16 x STM–16 link card
Intra system link
(16x 1:4 MSP)
1678MCC LO shelf
LA20 LX160
MX640GE LAC40 Link Daffodil TUPP ES
8x2.5G
MSP #1 LO CS
I/O #1
#1 HPC .. .. Copy A
.. 640G .. . .
. Copy A .
Link Daffodil TUPP ES
8x2.5G
#4 #8
MSP
HPC Link
640G 8x2.5G
Daffodil TUPP ES
#P1
I/O Copy B #P LO CS
#11 Copy B
Link Daffodil
8x2.5G TUPP ES
#P2

Figure 120. 1678MCC Main Shelf with 160G Lower Order Shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 212 / 531

531
 13.3.4 Transmission Management

The following functionalities are managed:

• J0 and J1 management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• POM on AU–4 and AU–3

not permitted without written authorization.

• SUT on AU–4
• MSP 1+1 @ STM–16 / STM–64
• MSP 1+1 @ STM–1 / STM–4
• AU–3 switching
• F4 filter configuration at path layer

For more details refer to Operator’s Handbook.

13.3.4.1 Section Trace Management (J0)

The regenerator section trace identifier information is managed, according to ITU–T G.707 Rec.: when
the accepted identifier (AcTI detected in the byte J0) is different from the expected (ExTI), an alarm “Trace
Identifier Mismatch“ (TIM) is generated. The control can be disabled by setting ExTI=NULL.

13.3.4.2 Path Trace Management (J1)

The trail trace identifier information is managed, according to ITU–T G.707 Rec.: when the accepted
identifier (AcTI detected in the byte J1) is different from the expected (ExTI), an alarm “Trace Identifier
Mismatch“ (TIM) is generated. The control can be disabled by setting ExTI=NULL.
Note that the NE calculates the CRC–7 value to be inserted even if this parameter is passed to the NE
from the managing system.

13.3.4.3 Path Overhead Monitoring

Path Overhead (Non–intrusive) Monitoring function is implemented according to ITU–T G.783 Rec.
The POM function monitors the VC–4 or VC–3 for errors, and recovers the trail termination status.
It extracts and processes the payload overhead bytes from the VC.
The POM function detects the following alarms: Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM), EXCessive error (EXC),
UNEQuipped (UNEQ), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), DEGraded Signal
(DEG), Server Signal Failure (SSF).
The object modeling the POM function is created by CT/OS below the AU–4 or AU–3.
The POM can be used also for obtaining the SNCP switch criteria.

13.3.4.4 Supervisory Unequipped Termination

SUT functions are implemented according to ITU–T G.783 Rec.

The object modeling the SUT function is created by CT/OS below the AU–4.
SUT on AU–3 is not supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 213 / 531

531
 13.3.5 Connection Management

The following functionalities are managed:

• SNCP/I on AU –4 and AU–3
•
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SNCP/N on AU –4 and AU –3
not permitted without written authorization.

13.3.5.1 Overview

The connection management covers:

• the management of the connections at AU–4 and AU–3 level
• the management of unidirectional 1+1 revertive/not revertive subnetwork connection protection
(for both AU–4 and AU–3)

The 1678MCC has the capability to manage and configure upon management request several types of
connections, namely:
• point–to–point connection (unidirectional and bidirectional)
– unprotected
– protected

• point–to–multipoint connection (unidirectional)

– unprotected
– protected

For the 1678MCC equipment the maximum number of cross–connections is obtained exploiting totally the
matrix capability: 4096 AU4 crossconnectable (12288 AU3 crossconnectable).
The connections are established between ports belonging to the shelves and are always performed by
the matrix: no direct connection between two ports is allowed.
The managed system allows the managing system to protect a connection. Such protected connections
can be used in network protection applications.

13.3.5.2 Unprotected Point–to–Point Connections

The following Table 39. on page 215 shows the possible unprotected point–to–point connections
(unidirectional and bidirectional).

There is not any constraint for the timeslot change for each cross–connection (i.e. the AU–4#x of a
STM–64 port can be cross–connected with the AU–4#y of a STM–16 port). Such connections are allowed
for both AU–4 and AU–3.

13.3.5.3 Protected Point–to–Point Connections

Protected point–to–point connections (unidirectional and bidirectional) are defined by Figure 121. on
page 216. Such connections are allowed for both AU–4 and AU–3.

13.3.5.4 Unprotected Point–to–Multipoint Connections

Unprotected unidirectional point–to–multipoint (broadcast) connections are defined by Figure 121. on

page 216. Such connections are allowed for both AU–4 and AU–3.

13.3.5.5 Protected Point–to–Multipoint Connections

Protected point–to–multipoint connections are defined by Figure 121. on page 216.

Such connections are allowed for both AU–4 and AU–3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 214 / 531

531
 Table 39. Point–to–point connections

STM–1 STM–4 STM–16 STM–64

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

AU3 AU4 AU3 AU4 AU4 AU3 AU4 AU4 AU4 AU3 AU4 AU4 AU4 AU4
not permitted without written authorization.

–4c –4c –16c –4c –16c –64c

STM–1 AU3 X X X X
AU4 X X X X
STM–4 AU3 X X X X
AU4 X X X X
AU4 X X X
–4c

STM–16 AU3 X X X X
AU4 X X X X
AU4 X X X
–4c

AU4 X X
–16c

STM–64 AU3 X X X X
AU4 X X X X
AU4 X X X
–4c

AU4 X X
–16c

AU4 X
–64c
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 215 / 531

531
 AU4 slot i
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

AU4 slot j
not permitted without written authorization.

protected point–to–point unidirectional connection

AU4 slot x

AU4 slot i

AU4 slot j

protected point–to–point bidirectional connection

AU4 slot x

AU4 slot h
AU4 slot i

AU4 slot j
unprotected point–to–multipoint connection
AU4 slot x AU4 slot k

Protected AU4 slot i Protecting AU4 slot h

AU4 slot j

AU4 slot x AU4 slot k protected point–to–multipoint connection

Figure 121. Types of connections managed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 216 / 531

531
 13.4 Signal Management Subsystem

13.4.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This section describes the signal management architecture implemented in 1678MCC equipment.
not permitted without written authorization.

The signal management architecture has been designed in order to obtain a flexible system in which the
switching matrix is kept as much as possible payload independent. This implies that SDH payload specific
functions are implemented in the I/O port boards.

13.4.2 SDH functional Model

SDH Payload matrices, foreseen by ITU–T standards, (i.e. MSP_RX, H PC, MSP_TX matrices) collapse
into one single device, performing fully non blocking 4096x4096 AU–4 switch, with respect to any
broadcast type.
Figure 122. on page 217 depicts the payload processing subsystem functional partitioning.

PORT BOARD

MATRIX
BOARD

Figure 122. SDH payload subsystem functional model: physical position of functional blocks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 217 / 531

531
 13.4.3 ITU–T/ETSI SDH Functional Block

13.4.3.1 SDH Port Board

At port board level, functions related to the payload processing are integrated, causing, in principle, a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

violation of ITU–T G.783 functional model. The functional block diagram is reported in Figure 123. on
not permitted without written authorization.

page 218, with its corresponding atomic function representation.

Figure 123. Port board implementation and corresponding ITU–T G.783 functional model
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 218 / 531

531
 The received/transmitted line signal is optical STM–N with N=1, 4, 16, 64, 256 (ITU–T G.957 Rec. and
ITU–T G.691 Rec.). The SDH frame format is compliant with ITU–T G.707 Rec.

a) SDH Physical Layer

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Optical Section Layer Trail Termination: OSn_TT

not permitted without written authorization.

OSn_TT_Sk
input LOS detection
TSF insertion on LOS detection

OSn_TT_So
signal conditioning for transmission medium

– Optical Section Layer Adaptation to Regenerator Section Layer: OSn/RSn_A

OSn/RSn_A_Sk
descrambler
OOF count and LOF detection
SSF insertion (on LOF detection)

OSn/RSn_A_So
scrambler

b) Regenerator Section Layer

– Regenerator Section Layer Trail Termination: RSn_TT

RS_TT_Sk
A1, A2: frame alignment detection
J0: regenerator section trace recovery and mismatch detection
B1: BIP–8 Errored Block count: even bit parity is computed and compared with B1 recovered
from the current frame
BMD: Processed for detection of a fiber failure in a single fiber transmission. BMD byte is set
in position S(2,2,1).
D1–D3: RS data communication (DCC–R) extraction
SSF detection
TSF insertion (on SSF or TIM detection)
RS_TT_So
A1, A2: frame alignment insertion
J0: regenerator section trace insertion
B1: BIP–8 calculation and insertion
BMD: BMD message insertion for detection of a fiber failure in a single fiber transmission.
D1–D3: RS data communication (DCC–R) insertion

– Regenerator Section Layer Adaptation to Multiplex Section Layer: RSn/MSn_A

RSn/MSn_A_Sk
TSF detection
SSF insertion (on TSF detection)
RSn/MSn_A_So
no information is inserted

c) Multiplex Section Layer

– Multiplex Section Layer Trail Termination: MSn_TT

MSn_TT_Sk
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

B2: BIP–24N Errored Block count

M1, M0: MS–REI recovery (M0 significant for STM–64/STM–256 only)
K2[6–8]: MS–RDI detection

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 219 / 531

531
 K2[6–8]: MS–AIS detection
D4–D12: MS data communication (DCC–M) extraction
D13–D156: Extended MS data communication (DCC–Mx) extraction (STM–256 only)
S1: SSM message extraction
TSD insertion on MS –DEG (Signal Degrade) detection
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

TSF insertion (on MS–AIS detection)

not permitted without written authorization.

MSn_TT_So
B2: BIP–24N calculation and insertion
M1, M0: MS–REI insertion (M0 significant for STM–64/STM–256 only)
K2[6–8]: MS–RDI insertion
K2[6–8]: MS–AIS insertion
D4–D12: MS data communication (DCC–M) insertion
D13–D156: Extended MS data communication (DCC–Mx) insertion (STM–256 only)
S1: SSM message insertion

– Multiplex Section Sub–layer protection function:

• Multiplex Section Layer Adaptation to the Multiplex Section Protection Sub–layer:
MSn/MSnP_A
MSn/MSnP_A_Sk
the K1–K2 (extended to K0) information (APS protocol) is recovered
SSF insertion (on TSF detection)
SSD insertion (on TSD detection)
MSn/MSnP_A_So
generation of K1–K2 information (APS protocol – extended to K0).

– Multiplex Section Protection Sub–layer Termination: MSnP_TT

MSnP_TT_Sk
SSF detection
TSF insertion (on SSF detection)
MSnP_TT_So
no information is inserted

– Multiplex Section Layer Adaptation to the high Order Path Layer: MSn/Sn_A
MSn/Sn_A_Sk
AU–4 Pointer interpreter
SSF insertion (on LOP and AU–AIS detection)
PJE (Pointer Justification Event) count
MSn/Sn_A_So
AUG assembly and byte interleaving
AU–4 Pointer generator
AU–AIS generator

d) Path Layer

– High Order Path Overhead Monitoring Function (POM): Snm_TT

Snm_TT_Sk
J1: Path Trace information is recovered.
G1[1–4]: The REI information is recovered.
G1[5–7]: Path Status monitoring detection ––> G1[5] is used for HP–RDI detection; G1[6 –7]
is optionally used for HP–RDI coding enhancement.
C2: Signal Label Monitoring ––> UNEQ and VC –AIS detection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

B3: VC–4 BIP–8 Errored Block Count.

TSF insertion (on SSF or UNEQ or TIM or AIS detection).
TSD insertion (on a condition of degraded signal detection).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 220 / 531

531
 – High Order Supervisory Unequipped Termination (HSUT) : Sns_TT
Sns_TT_Sk
J1: Path Trace information is recovered.
G1[1–4]: The REI information is recovered.
G1[5]: Path Status monitoring detection ––> G1[5] is used for HP–RDI detection; G1[6 –7] is
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

optionally used for HP–RDI coding enhancement.

not permitted without written authorization.

C2: Signal Label Monitoring ––> UNEQ and VC–AIS detection.

B3: VC–4 BIP –8 Errored Block Count.
Sns_TT_So
Generation of an unequipped container and frame offset.
C2: “unequipped“ insertion.
J1: trail trace identifier is generated.
G1: insertion of RDI and/or REI information.
B3: VC–4 Bip –8 calculation and insertion.

– VC–4 Tandem Connection Trail Termination: SnD_TT

SnD_TT_Sk
N1[1–4]: VC–4 BIP–8 extraction and EDC calculation.
N1[8][73]: RDI extraction.
N1[5]: REI extraction.
N1[7][74]: ODI extraction (Outgoing Defect Indication).
N1[6]: OEI extraction (Outgoing Error Indication).
N1[7–8]: extraction from the multiframed channel N1[7–8] of:
FAS (Frame Alignment Signal) in frames 1 to 8.
trace identifier in frames 9 to 72.
TC RDI and ODI in frames 73 to 76.
B3: BIP–8 compensation.
SnD_TT_So
N1[8][73]: RDI insertion.
N1[5]: REI insertion.
N1[7][74]: ODI insertion (Outgoing Defect Indication).
N1[6]: OEI insertion (Outgoing Error Indication).
N1[7–8]: insertion in the multiframed channel N1[7 –8] of:
FAS (Frame Alignment Signal) in frames 1 to 8.
trace identifier in frames 9 to 72.
TC RDI and ODI in frames 73 to 76.
N1[1–4]: BIP–8 calculation and insertion.
B3: BIP–8 compensation.

– VC–4 Tandem Connection Adaptation: SnD_A

SnD_A_Sk
his function will restore the invalid Frame Start condition if that existed at the ingress of the
tandem connection.
AIS insertion.
SnD_A_So
this function will replace the incoming Frame Start signal by a local generated one if all–ONEs
VC is received.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 221 / 531

531
 – VC–4 Tandem Connection non–intrusive monitoring: SnDm_TT
SnDm_TT_Sk
N1[1–4]: VC–4 BIP–8 extraction and EDC calculation.
N1[8][73]: RDI extraction.
N1[5]: REI extraction.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N1[7][74]: ODI extraction (Outgoing Defect Indication).

not permitted without written authorization.

N1[6]: OEI extraction (Outgoing Error Indication).

N1[7–8]: extraction from the multiframed channel N1[7–8] of:
FAS (Frame Alignment Signal) in frames 1 to 8.
trace identifier in frames 9 to 72.
TC RDI and ODI in frames 73 to 76.

– Path Sub–layer protection function:

Note:
The path sublayer is not only related to protection information management, but also dedicated
to the add/drop of particular POH bytes, without the need to regenerate the path layer. This is
achieved thanks to Daffodil framer, which allows POH insertion with B3 compensation.

– Path Layer Adaptation to the Path Protection Sub–layer: Sn/SnP_A

Sn/SnP_A_Sk
the K3 information (APS protocol) is recovered
SSF insertion (on TSF detection)
SSD insertion (on TSD detection)
F2, F3: path user channel insertion
Sn/SnP_A_So
generation of K3 information (APS protocol)
F2, F3: path user channel extraction

– Path Protection Sub–layer Termination: SnP_TT

SnP_TT_Sk
SSF detection
TSF insertion (on SSF detection)
SnP_TT_So
no information is inserted
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 222 / 531

531
 13.4.4 Matrix Board

The matrix module provides switching capabilities with STS–1 minimum granularity, achieving full
SONET/SDH compatibility. Both MSPC (Multiplex Section Protection Connection) and HPC (Higher Order
Path Connection) switching functions are integrated in one single device.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The maximum switching capacity is equivalent to 12288x12288 at AU–3 level (i.e. 4096x4096 at AU–4
not permitted without written authorization.

level), fully non blocking with respect to any broadcast type.

13.4.4.1 Matrix Physical Representation

The payload processing functionalities integrated in the matrix board are limited to AU–4 switching
operations only. The corresponding functional model of the matrix board is depicted in Figure 124. on
page 223.
The statuses of MSPC and HPC connection functions are individually calculated, as if they were two
physical entities. The switching command is then derived correlating MSPC status and HPC status.

Main Board

MSnP + Sn

Figure 124. Matrix board implementation: payload processing

MSPC connection function status is determined in order to provide protection for the STM–N signal against
channel–associated failures within a multiplex section, by using the bit–oriented protocol defined for the
MSP bytes K1, K2 and optionally K0. Under failure condition in Rx direction valid data are no longer taken
from the working line termination but from the spare one; the required switch operation for MSP protection
does not involve HPC. Similarly in Tx direction the MSPC status is such to guarantee data forking to both
working and spare lines.

HPC connection function status is generated in order to provide VC–ns connectivity among input and
output ports. The assignment of incoming VC –ns to outgoing VC–ns is defined as the “connection pattern”
which can be described by a uni–directional connection matrix and characterized by:

– Type of connection (unprotected, 1+1 protected by means of SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S protection
or 1:n SNCP by using the bit oriented protocol defined in K3 byte).
– Traffic direction (unidirectional, bi –directional).
– Input and output connection points.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 223 / 531

531
 13.5 Controller Subsystem

13.5.1 Overview
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The controller subsystem implements the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
not permitted without written authorization.

defined by ITU–T G.783 Rec. It communicates with external management systems through a standard
QB3 CMIP interface.
The management information model is based on the ITU–T G.774 series of recommendations.
Communication with the local Craft Terminal (CT) is also based on the same interface.

The controller subsystem is responsible for applying the configuration requested by the element manager
or CT and to report the status of the equipment as well as alarm and performance information. It is also
responsible to drive automatic protection switching.

The 1678MCC has centralized control architecture, built upon a two–level model:

• First Level Controller (FLC) mainly for DCC networking, CT/OS interface and database
management;
• Second Level Controller (SLC) mainly for provisioning, alarm detection, performance
monitoring and protection switching.

Two microprocessors are dedicated respectively to the FLC and SLC functions.
The FLC processor is 1+1 protected (one is located on the FLCCONGI board, the other on the FLCSERV
board), like the Second Level Controller processors (located on the two HO Matrix and Lower Order Matrix
boards).
They communicate through an internal ISSB bus (ILAN – Internal LAN).

The SLC processor interfaces directly through a backplane parallel bus (ISPB – Intra Shelf Parallel Bus)
all circuits (ASICs) implementing the SDH functions in the shelf, for data collection (alarms, performance
monitoring) and configuration provisioning purposes.

A 60 GB hard disk located in the FLCCONGI board for the configuration database and SW loads provides
a mass storage board. It is protected by another 60 GB hard disk located in the FLCSERV board.

A failure on the FLCCONGI or FLCSERV board has no impact on traffic, or on automatic protection
switching functions, which are managed by the SLC processor inside the HO Matrix board.
Moreover a failure on the FLCCONGI or FLCSERV board has no impact on the node availability in the
Network Management (supervision), thanks to the FLC duplication.

DCC Channels

The number of DCC channels depends on the installed FLC type. Two types of FLCs exists:

– FLC with 33 MHz PCI clock frequency

– FLC with 66 MHz PCI clock frequency.

The following number of DCC channels per board and system are possible:

FLC Type FLC 33 MHz FLC 66 MHz

DCC per Board 16 DCC–M + 16 DCC–R 16 DCC–M + 16 DCC–R
DCC per System 61 DCC–M + 16 DCC–R 95 DCC–M + 16 DCC–R
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Selection of the STM–n ports and of the DCCM or DCCR channel is via Local CT or Network Manager (NM).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 224 / 531

531
 13.5.2 FLC and SLC Functions

In the 1678MCC the control system is based on First Level Controller (FLC) and Second Level Controller
(SLC). Figure 125. shows the control functionality of the 1678MCC main shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

OS

GMPLS UNI GMPLS UNI

... ...
Neighbor ISP 1 Customer DCN Neighbor ISP 2

FLCSERV FLCCONGI
internal LAN switch internal LAN switch

DCR EM DCR EM

ISSB

SLC SLC

HO Matrix Copy A HO Matrix Copy B

1678MCC Main shelf

Figure 125. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf only configuration

13.5.2.1 FLC Functions

The FLC functionalities are the following:

• provides the HW resources and SW functions required for the communication between the NE
and the managing system (OS/CT);
• performs all the SW functions related to the control and management activities of the “virtual“
machine: info–model processing, event reporting and logging, equipment database
management, SW downloading and management; to support these activities the FLC function
requires a nonvolatile memory;
• system memory for FLC:
– Flash EPROM Boot bank (boot information)
– system RAM bank (application program and data)
– non–volatile mass–storage (database storage, SW program storage, event logging,
provisioning and maintenance data)

The board with the FLC, about the bootstrap function, can be classified as disk based: the board
bootstraps the software from the equipped Mass Storage memory on the board.
The software code resides (at least 2 copies per board) only on the Mass Storage.

The download must be done in two distinct contexts:

• initial: over CT on LAN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• upgrade: NM via DCN

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 225 / 531

531
 In the 1678MCC NE the First Level Controller functionality is performed on FLCCONGI (main) and on
FLCSERV (spare).

13.5.2.2 SLC Functions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The SLC functionalities are the following:

not permitted without written authorization.

• control and management of the “real“ machine; to perform this, SLC directly interfaces the
ASICs implementing functions for data collection and configuration provisioning;
• system memory for SLC:
– Flash EPROM Boot bank (boot information)
– system RAM bank (application program and data)

The duplication of SLC functionalities is based on the following Scheme:

• one SLC is in active state and the other in stand–by state

• FLC provisions both SLCs with the same data and commands
• hardware (ASIC, FPGA) is controlled by the active SLC

FLC bootstraps the software application through a disk based protocol, while the SLC through a Network
based protocol.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 226 / 531

531
 13.5.2.3 Control of OED Shelves and Lower Order Extension Shelf

The main shelf and the OED shelf/LO extension shelf are managed as a single NE. The control system
located in the main shelf acts as the control system of the whole NE. In case of single rack configurations
the OED shelf/LO extension shelf are connected over internal LAN switches. In case of multi rack
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

configurations the OED shelf/LO extension shelf are connected over external LAN switches.
not permitted without written authorization.

Single Rack Configurations

A system configuration consisting of the 1678MCC Main shelf plus one OED shelf/LO extension shelf in
one rack has no need for an external LAN switch.

The following Figures show system configurations consisting of only one rack:

– Main shelf plus 1670SM OED (Figure 126. )

– Main shelf plus 1662SMC OED (Figure 127. )
– Main shelf plus LO extension shelf (Figure 128. )

One single OED shelf/LO extension shelf can be connected directly to the internal LAN switch. This
connection is provided on the FLC boards (refer to Figure 57. on page 119 and Figure 58. on page 120).

OS

GMPLS UNI GMPLS UNI

... ...
Neighbor ISP 1 Customer DCN Neighbor ISP 2

FLCSERV FLCCONGI
internal LAN switch internal LAN switch

DCR EM DCR EM

1678MCC Main shelf

CONGI A CONGI B

SC A SC B
OED 1670SM

Figure 126. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single 1670SM OED configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 227 / 531

531
 OS

GMPLS UNI GMPLS UNI

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

... ...
Neighbor ISP 1 Customer DCN Neighbor ISP 2
not permitted without written authorization.

FLCSERV FLCCONGI

internal LAN switch internal LAN switch

DCR EM DCR EM

1678MCC Main shelf

CONGI A

SC A SC B
OED 1662SMC

Figure 127. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single 1662SMC OED configuration

OS

GMPLS UNI GMPLS UNI

... ...
Neighbor ISP 1 Customer DCN Neighbor ISP 2

FLCSERV FLCCONGI
internal LAN switch internal LAN switch

DCR EM DCR EM

1678MCC Main shelf

SC A SC B

LX160 A LX160 B
LO Extension Shelf

Figure 128. Physical LAN Topology of Main shelf with single LO extension shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 228 / 531

531
 Multi Rack Configurations

For multirack configurations consisting of a 1678MCC main rack and several OED racks a pair of Ethernet
LAN switches are needed to interconnect the internal control plane.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The OED 1670SM and the LO extension shelf are connected via two LAN connections to both external
not permitted without written authorization.

LAN switches (LSX). The 1662SMC used as a LO OED supports only one LAN interconnection. Therefore
the 1662SMC is connected non–redundant to LAN switch LSX A or LSX B (all on one).

The following Figure 129. shows the principle of multi rack system configurations with LO extension shelf,
OED 1670SM and OED 1662SMC.

OS

GMPLS UNI GMPLS UNI

... ...
Neighbor ISP 1 Customer DCN Neighbor ISP 2

FLCSERV FLCCONGI
internal LAN switch internal LAN switch

DCR EM DCR EM

1678MCC Main shelf

extension LAN switch (LSX A) extension LAN switch (LSX B)

SC A SC B CONGI A CONGI B CONGI A

LX160 A LX160 B
EC A EC B
ISSB
SC A SC B
SC A SC B

SYNTH16 SYNTH16
LO Extension Shelf OED 1670SM
OED 1662SMC

Figure 129. Physical LAN Topology of Multi Rack Setup

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 229 / 531

531
 13.5.3 External Communication and Routing

The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning
the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide global
communication capabilities inside the network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

13.5.3.1 Introduction

Protocol Stack
The set of protocols used in a communications network compose a protocol stack. Thus, a protocol stack
is a prescribed hierarchy of software layers. This layered structure also allows to use different protocols
to accommodate different network architectures. A protocol stack resides in each client and server.

OSI Stack
An OSI protocol stack (short: OSI stack) is a protocol stack according to the ISO/OSI standard for
worldwide communications that defines a framework for implementing protocols in seven layers. Control
is passed from one layer to the next, starting at the application layer in one network node, proceeding to
the bottom layer, over the channel to the next node and back up the hierarchy. For routing purposes only
the first three layers of the OSI protocol stack are relevant.

In an OSI network there are the following significant architectural entities (see Figure 130. ):

– domain
A domain is any part of an OSI network that is under common administrative authority.

– area
An area is a logical part of a domain formed by a set of adjacent routers and the data links that connect
them. Within any OSI domain, one or more areas can be defined. All routers in the same area
exchange information about all of the hosts that they can reach.

– backbone
The areas are connected by a backbone. All routers on the backbone know how to reach all areas.

– host
A host is a network node, router or network element (NE).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 230 / 531

531
 Routing Domain

Area 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Area 2
document, use and communication of its contents

L1
not permitted without written authorization.

ES
L2
ES
L1
IS
L1
IS
L2 IS
L2 IS

Backbone
L1
IS

L2 IS

L1 L1
IS IS

Area 3
L1
IS
L1
IS

L1
ES

ES End System
IS Intermediate System
L1 Level 1
hosts/ routers/ NEs/ nodes L2 Level 2

Figure 130. Example of a routing domain

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 231 / 531

531
 OSI Stacks in the 1678MCC
The 1678MCC uses OSI stacks for communication and routing. Figure 131. shows an example of an OSI
protocol stack can be configured. Since the 1678MCC is used as a router only the first three layers of the
OSI protocol stack are shown.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The “Don’t care” in layer 1 and 2 under IP in Figure 131. means that the layer 1 and 2 protocols under IP
not permitted without written authorization.

are not fixed, but any of the protocols of the corresponding layer shown in the left blocks can be used.

The 1678MCC provides a ready-to-use default OSI stack to which a standard local Ethernet is assigned
as physical layer. Ethernet is the most widely used local area network (LAN) access method, defined by
the IEEE as the 802.3 standard. In this handbook the terms “LAN” and “Ethernet” are used as synonyms.

OSI Protocol Stack: layer 1 - 3

CLNS, CLNP: ISO 8880-3, 8473 / ITU Q.811

3
ES-IS: ISO 9542 IP
Network
IS-IS: ISO 10589
2 LLC class 1: ISO 8802-2/ ITU X.802.2 LAPD: ITU Q.921
Don’t care
Data Link CSMA/CD: ISO 8802-2/ ITU X.802.2
1 Ethernet SDH DCC-R / DCC-M
Physical Don’t care
D1- D3, D4 - D12

Figure 131. OSI protocol stack (layer 1 - 3)

Multiple OSI Areas

You can create further OSI stacks to support multiple OSI Level 1 sub domains (short: OSI areas). Multiple
OSI area support means that different data communication channels (DCC) or local area network (LAN)
interfaces can be assigned to different OSI areas.

LAPD/DCC and In-Band Signalling

LAPD/DCC connections use in-band signalling, which means meta data and network control information
are transmitted in the SDH overhead bytes. Network nodes connected via LAPD/DCC build-up an in-band
data communication network (DCN).

LAN and Out-Of-Band Signalling

Out-of-band signalling is the complement to in-band signalling, which means any signalling where the
meta data and network control information are not transmitted in the SDH overhead bytes. Network nodes
connected via LAN build-up an out-of-band DCN.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 232 / 531

531
 13.5.3.2 Background

DCC channels and external LANs can be used for the following purposes in 1678MCC:

– Communication between local and remote NEs, and TMN managers via Q3 or QRFC1006
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Communication between CS–Server, and Equipment Provisioning and maintenance applications via
IP

– Communication between GMRE and ASON manager via CORBA

– Communication between GMREs via IP

– Fast DCC link protection is needed for the dataplane signaling and routing protocols running between
neighboring GMREs

– IP–in–IP tunnels via the external LANs are used by GMRE as backup links for the dataplane signaling
and routing protocols

– IP–in–CLNP tunnels are used to reach IP managed NEs through OSI network islands

– To connect UNI clients/client networks, GMRE configures VLANs on top of the external LAN to
achieve traffic separation between DCN traffic and client signaling traffic

– The IS–IS protocol is used for the routing of OSI management traffic

– The OSPF protocol is used for the routing of IP management and signaling traffic

All GMRE related information are described in chapter 13.7.5 Restoration – Support of the GMPLS
Protocol.

13.5.3.3 Multi OSI Area Management

The 1678MCC provides the feature Multi OSI Area. The 1678MCC can act as a transit NE and as a
Gateway NE (GNE).

The principle of multi OSI areas

There are several OSI areas within a routing domain. Each area can include the following systems:

– End System (ES)

– Intermediate Systems (IS).
The Intermediate Systems can be configured as Level 1 (L1) and Level 2 (L2) systems.

Figure 130. shows an example for Multi OSI Area Routing.

Two types of routing protocols exists:

– ES–IS
IS learns about directly connected ESs and vice versa

– IS–IS
L1 ISs learn topology of their own area
L2 ISs learn topology of complete L2 backbone (all areas).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 233 / 531

531
 Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Transit NE

In this example the 1678MCC is used as transit NE (refer also to Figure 132. ). That means:

– One area per ring (or group of rings)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– All NEs are Level 1 IS (L1)

not permitted without written authorization.

(NE assuming routing functionality inside an area)

– 1678MCC runs one L1 osi_ll process per area
(osi_ll is equal to OSI stack)
– Q–Interface Adapter (QIA) connects to one osi_ll
– 1678MCC is Gateway NE (GNE) for at most one area
– 1678MCC is transit NE for other areas.

1678MCC
QIA

osi_ll#1 osi_ll#2 osi_ll#3

L1 L1 L1

L1
L1 L1 L1
L1

L1
A1 A2 A3
L1
L1 L1 L1

L1 L2

L1 L1

L2 L2

A1...A3 OSI Area 1...3

L1 Level 1 IS
L2 Level 2 IS
osi_ll OSI stack
QIA Q–Interface Adapter

Figure 132. Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Transit NE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 234 / 531

531
 Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Gateway NE

In this example the 1678MCC is used as Gateway NE (refer also to Figure 133. ). That means:

– One area per ring (or group of rings)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– All NEs are Level 1 IS (L1)

not permitted without written authorization.

(NE assuming routing functionality inside an area)

– 1678MCC runs one L1 osi_ll process per area
(osi_ll is equal to OSI stack)
– Q–Interface Adapter (QIA) connects to one osi_ll
– 1678MCC is Gateway NE (GNE) for all areas
– Each osi_ll is connected to multi–area IS–IS router via separate VLAN.

L1/L2

1678MCC

VLAN
QIA

osi_ll#1 osi_ll#2 osi_ll#3

L1 L1 L1

L1
L1 L1 L1
L1

L1
A1 A2 A3
L1
L1 L1 L1

L1

L1 L1

A1...A3 OSI Area 1...3

L1 Level 1 IS
L2 Level 2 IS
osi_ll OSI stack
QIA Q–Interface Adapter
VLAN Virtual LAN

Figure 133. Multiple Rings on 1678MCC as Gateway NE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 235 / 531

531
 13.6 Synchronization Subsystem

The synchronization subsystem is located on the matrix boards. As the SDH/SONET matrix is protected
in 1+1 configuration, also the Clock Reference function is protected.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The synchronization subsystem provides the timing reference required by all components in the network
not permitted without written authorization.

element. The subsystem performs the functionality identified by the ITU–T recommendation G.781/G.783
as Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The SETS function is implemented in the SDH/SONET HO Matrix board (MX640, MX320, MX160) as
shown in Figure 134. on page 236.

T4/T5
Selector Squelch Selector
A C
A to
FLCSERV /
Squelch FLCCONGI
B
from ports
T1/T2 3
Selector T0
2 SETG
T3/T6 B
from
FLCSERV /
FLCCONGI HO Matrix Board
OSC
SETS Function

Figure 134. SETS function

The SETS accepts synchronization inputs from a number of sources:

• T0 is the reference signal for the internal system clock and system framing signal
• STM–N traffic ports (T1)
T1 is the clock derived from an STM–N signal (from STM–N port)
• 2 Mbit/s traffic ports (T2)
T2 is a 2 Mbit/s signal (derived from a 2 Mbit/s framed signal – E1 port)
• 2 MHz (T3)
T3 is a 2 MHz signal (from FLCSERV / FLCCONGI board)
• 2 Mbit/s external input (T6)
• 1.544 Mbit/s external input (T6)
T6 is a 2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s signal (from FLCSERV / FLCCONGI board without data)
• Internal Oscillator.

Automatic selection of one of the above sources for system timing (T0) is performed by selector B, using
quality (Synchronization Status Message (SSM) algorithm) and priority criteria. The quality criteria can be
disabled. Also manual selection is possible.
The NE clock reference is used as internal timing source and to time the outgoing STM– signals.

Automatic selection of one of the above sources (except internal oscillator) performed by selector A is
used for external devices (T4/T5). This output is duplicated (1+1) on both FLC boards to avoid single point
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

of failure. It can be configured for 2 MHz (T4) or 2 Mbit/s (T5). Such outputs are not available, if
1.544 Mbit/s sources are used.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 236 / 531

531
 Up to three references (T1) may be selected among all STM–N traffic ports in the system.
Two external inputs (2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s) are available. When configured as 2 Mbit/s, the
external clock signals can carry the SSM information.
If the selected reference is 1.544 Mbit/s, then only selector B is available. In this case no quality selection
(SSM) is possible.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation (SETG) function has three modes of operation: locked,
holdover and free running. In holdover mode, the SETG holds the frequency of the last valid reference with
a maximum drift of +/– 0.37–ppm per day. The accuracy of the local oscillator is 4.6 ppm, according to
ITU–T G.813.
By user command will be possible forcing the timing circuitry into holdover or free running mode.

Synchronization of NEs, within the SDH/SONET network, is necessary in order to prevent pointer
accumulation.
The timing can be provided by:

• A timing signal external to the NE (T1, T2, T3, T6)

• An internal timing generator (OSC)

Master–slave synchronization of SDH/SONET NE uses a hierarchy of clocks in which each level of the
hierarchy is synchronized with reference to a next higher level.
The highest level is the Primary Reference Clock (PRC).

The general structure of SETS is following described (refer to Figure 134. on page 236.):

• The SDH Equipment Clock accepts synchronization inputs from a number of sources (T1, T2,
T3, T6)

• Automatic selection of one of these sources is achieved by selector A or B, using quality (SSM
algorithm) and priority criteria; also manual selection is possible; T0 (after a filtering operation
by SETG block) is used like internal clock and to time the outgoing SDH STM–N signals;
(in case of T6=1.5 Mbit/s only selector B without quality criteria available)

• STM-N/2 Mbit/s signals received at drop shelves (OEDs) can only be used for internal timing
at selector B, but not for the selector A.

• The clock signal T4 (2 MHz) or T5 (2 Mbit/s) is a possible source for an external device.
T4 and T5 output can also be forced to T0 for testing purposes of the system clock.

In order to prevent phase jumps, always use a Secondary Support Unit (SSU) between
output T4/T5 and input of an external equipment .

The SETG function filters the selected timing reference to ensure that the timing requirements at the T0
reference point are met. Additionally the SETG function filters the frequency changes caused by selecting
a different reference source to achieve clock switching without any traffic hit. It has three modes of
operation:

• Locked mode: output signal controlled by the selected external timing reference;

• Holdover mode: SETG has lost its controlling external timing reference, and is using stored
data, acquired whilst in locked mode, to control its output; the internal oscillator signal is phase
corrected according to the stored data, and used as timing reference by SETG in the holdover
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

mode;

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 237 / 531

531
 • Free run mode: it is not a normal operating mode. In this mode the clock has never acquired
lock with an external timing reference, or has not access to the stored data acquired during
previous lock state; the SETG output timing, in free run mode, is locked to the internal oscillator.

In 1678MCC both FLCSERV and FLCCONGI boards support one T3/T6 input signal and one T4/T5 output
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

signal. The T4/T5 output signal is the same for both boards.
not permitted without written authorization.

The maximum number of STM–N / 2 Mbit/s signals, incoming from STM–N / E1 ports, that can be used
as timing reference (in the protection group) is equal to three. There is not any restriction about the number
of signals coming from each board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 238 / 531

531
 13.7 Protection Subsystem

The available types of protections supported in the 1678MCC equipment are:

• Equipment Protection (EPS), refer to para. 13.7.1 on page 240, para 13.7.2 on page 241
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• Network protections, refer to para. 13.7.4 on page 247

– MSP (Multiple Section linear trail Protection):

• 1+1 linear single–ended
• 1+1 linear dual–ended
• N:1 (Nmax=14)

– SNCP/I and SNCP/N

It is used on ring, linear and mesh network topology. Switching occurs on the path,
selecting (Rx side) the signal transmitted to both Tx A and Tx B (A and B are two different
directions) sides.

– Drop & Continue (dual node or collapsed).

It is an architecture to connect sub–networks, in order to improve traffic availability with
hardware resource reduction.

– MS–SPRing.
The 1678MCC supports the following MS–SPRing protection schemes:
• 2 Fiber at STM–16 interfaces
• 2 Fiber at STM–64 interfaces

MS–SPRing protection is supported only for sections not containing AU–3.

The main features of the 2 Fiber MS–SPRing are:
• D&C
• Programmable WTR
The 1678MCC supports programmable WTR (Wait To Restore) time to recover from
the failure status; the following values are allowed:
– 1 – 15 min in steps of 1 min
– 20, 30, 45, 60, 90 min
– 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 48 hours
• Programmable Hold off Time
The Hold off Time for line switching is provisionable in the range of 0 – 10 sec with
the following steps: 0, 30ms, 50ms, 70ms, 100ms, 300ms, 500ms, 700ms, 1s, 3s,
5s, 10s.
Note:
The 1678MCC can support up to 28 2F MS–SPRing schemes at the same time
independently on they are @STM–16 and/or @STM–64.

• Centralized restoration.
The 1678MCC can automatically restore a path in a centralized meshed network, under the
1354NP manager. The path is restored at VC–4/VC–4nc level.
The centralized restoration time is < 500 ms in worst case (fiber cut scenario).
The First Level Controller function is redundant for maximizing the node availability. The same
node can manage together the meshed and ring network: the resources dedicated to the
restoration are managed by NP, while the others are managed by RM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Distributed restoration.
The distributed restoration is one of the major benefits introduced with the GMPLS control
plane.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 239 / 531

531
 13.7.1 EPS Protection Main Shelf

The EPS protection is supported on the 1678MCC equipment for the following boards:

• MX160/320/640GE board (redundancy of HO matrix, CRU and SLC)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• LAX20/LAX40 board
not permitted without written authorization.

• FLCCONGI and FLCSERV boards (only for First Level Controller and GMRE functions)

13.7.1.1 HO Matrix EPS

The positions of main and spare matrices are fixed (at start–up and in normal conditions):

• slot 10 : MX160/320/640GE main

• slot 11 : MX160/320/640GE spare

1+1 MATRIX + TIMING EPS

The 1678MCC architecture merges on the same board the Matrix and Timing, as well as the SLC
driving this circuitry and the peripheral logic of each service/traffic board equipped in the shelf.
Every failure condition blocking the availability of one of these centralized functions initiates the EPS
switch algorithm, which affects simultaneously the three parts.

In case of switching due to operator commands (manual command), the Matrix + Timing + SLC
switching mechanism is traffic hitless if the NE is synchronized (in locked state), if the NE is in
free–running or in Holdover condition the switching can cause some errors on traffic.
This protection is not revertive.

External commands to control the switch position are:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (Main board) to protecting board (Spare board).
This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.
• Manual to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare board) to protected one (Main
board).
This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board.
• Lockout: the protection is locked, the traffic is managed by protected board independently of
its status, in failure or not in failure.
• Clear: release command which is active.

13.7.1.2 LO Matrix EPS

The positions of main and spare LAX boards are flexible as follow. LAX A and LAX B have to be mounted
always as pair (1+1 EPS) in the port slots (slot #2 to #9 or slot #12 to #19).
The HO SLC controls the LAX20/40 like an I/O board that can be EPS protected with another LAX20/40.

NOTE:
Any LAX20/40 switch leads to a transmission hit. In case of EPS, traffic will be interrupted for <50 ms!
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 240 / 531

531
 13.7.1.3 FLC EPS

The positions of main and spare First Level Controllers are fixed (at start–up and in normal conditions):

• slot 20 : First Level Controller main (on FLCCONGI board)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• slot 1 : First Level Controller spare (on FLCSERV board)

not permitted without written authorization.

The EPS is characterized by the parameters shows in the following Table 40. on page 241.

Table 40. EPS Protection Scheme parameters

Parameter Values
Architecture type 1 +1
Switching type uni–directional (single–ended)
Operation type not revertive
WTR time not applicable
Switching time = 5 min
Signal switching condition equipment failure condition
Priority not applicable

13.7.2 EPS Protection 1670SM Shelf

EPS protection is applicable to the service boards and to the PDH/SDH traffic boards with electrical
interfaces. In the latter case the EPS is applied to the interface traffic board only; the access module boards
are part of the line and unprotected.

General characteristics of the EPS protection mode are:

• Switching criteria: board–missing, board–fail;

• Switching time: max 50 ms;
• Operation mode:1+1 EPS on matrix is always non–revertive, N+1 EPS is always revertive with
fixed WTR = 5 minutes;
• External commands to control the switch position: Manual, Lockout, Clear.

Equipment modularity and implementation peculiarities will be case by case mentioned in the description
of the individual EPS protection.

For the EPS protection it is necessary to distinguish between:

• High Capacity Matrix board protection (refer to para. 13.7.2.1 on page 242);
• High Speed port protection: 4 x STM–1 or 16 x STM–1 (refer to para. 13.7.2.2 on page 242).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 241 / 531

531
 EPS protection will be characterized by the following parameters:

Parameters Values

1 + 1 EPS N + 1 EPS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Architecture type 1+1 N+1

Switching type uni–directional (single–ended) uni–directional (single–ended)
Operation type not revertive revertive
WTR time (*) not applicable supported but fixed to 5 min
Signal switching condition Equipment failure condition Equipment failure condition
Architecture type 1+1 N+1

(*) the WTR cannot be used in case of release of operator commands.

13.7.2.1 Matrix Board Protection

The positions of main and spare matrices are fixed (at start–up and in normal conditions):

• slot 22 : HCMATRIX main

• slot 41 : HCMATRIX spare

1+1 MATRIX + TIMING EPS

The OMSN architecture merges on the same board the Matrix and Timing, as well as the SLC driving this
circuitry and the peripheral logic of each service/traffic board equipped in the shelf.
Every failure condition blocking the availability of one of these centralized functions initiates the EPS
switch algorithm, which affects simultaneously the three parts.

In case of switching due to operator commands ( manual command), the Matrix + Timing + SLC switching
mechanism is traffic hitless if the NE is synchronized (in locked state), if the NE is in free–running or in
Holdover condition the switching can cause some errors on traffic. This protection is not revertive.
External commands to control the switch position are:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (main board) to protecting board (Spare board).
This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board;
• Manual to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare board) to protected one (main
board) This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board;
• Lockout: the protection is locked, the traffic is managed by protected board independently of
its status, in failure or not in failure;
• Clear: release command which is active.

13.7.2.2 High Speed (HS) Port Protection

In 1670SM equipment are available the following two EPS:

• 4 x STM–1 electrical
• 16 x STM–1 electrical

N+1 4 x STM–1 electrical EPS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The EPS is supported for the 4 x STM–1 electrical board (P4ES1N) used in conjunction with the 4 x STM–1
access module (A4ES1).
One or more N+1 EPS protection groups can be configured (up to three).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 242 / 531

531
 The position of the spare board is flexible but in the corresponding access slot the HPROT board has to
be plugged in. The spare board has to be plugged at the left side of the main ports; the main/spare ports
have to be adjacent.
The scheme is revertive with fixed WTR= 5 min.
In 1670SM up to 15 main boards can be protected in EPS (15+1).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

External commands to control the switch position are:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (main board) to protecting board (Spare board);
this command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board;
• Lockout protection : the protection is locked, the no main board can be used protection;
• Clear: release command, which is active.

N+1 16xSTM–1 electrical EPS

The EPS is supported for the 16STM–1 electrical/optical board (P16S1N) used in conjunction with the
16xSTM–1 electrical access module (A16ES1).
One or more N+1 EPS protection can be configured (up to three).
The position of the spare board is flexible but in the corresponding access slot the HPROT16 board has
to be plugged in. The spare board has to be plugged at the left side of the main ports; the main/spare ports
have to be adjacent.
The scheme is revertive with fixed WTR= 5 min.
In 1670SM up to 15 main boards can be protected in EPS (15+1).

External commands to control the switch position are the same of N+1 4xSTM–1 electrical EPS.

Here below are present more details referred to N+1 4xSTM–1 electrical EPS.

As High Speed ports (HS) are intended 155 Mbit/s speed ports.
Up to 16 HS ports can be housed in the basic area.
For the electrical HS ports the corresponding access boards have to be put in the access area with fixed
relations.

More than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created, depending on the equipment configuration.
For each group N+1 protected group the revertive mode is supported while the 1+1 EPS can be only
revertive.

The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way.

The only constraints are the following:

• the access board corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT access board
• the HPROT board has to be plugged at the left side of the access board group (A4ES1)
• the main/spare ports have to be adjacent
• the protecting ports has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of ports (P4ES1N)
• the protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type.

Note that no protection is planned for the access board, and note also that the type of protection can’t be
changed (i.e. it is not possible to change the protection scheme from N+1 to 1+1).

Manual Switch and force switch commands can be given via software by the user to activate the spare
boards.

Each access board is connected also with the previous one and with the next one; in this way N+1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

protection is provided using HPROT board in last position at the left side of the access boards pertaining
to the protected port group.

Each electrical High Speed port (P4ES1N) can manage up to 4 HS streams.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 243 / 531

531
 Input side (from the access module point of view)

The CMI encoded signal coming from the line and connected to the access board is NRZ decoded. The
clock CK is extracted from the data. By means of the back panel connections, NRZ data and CK are
forwarded to the pertaining main port and to the spare port.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Moreover NRZ data and Clock are sent to the next access board if present to perform N+1 protection.
not permitted without written authorization.

The spare port should not be devoted to a specific main port therefore a distributed switch matrix (on every
access board) is used to allows the signal to gain the spare port.
The command criteria for the distributed switch matrix comes from the matrix board via serial interface.

Output side (from the access module point of view)

The signal, coming from Main and Spare ports via back panel connections, is coded into CMI format.
The spare port is not devoted to a specific main port, therefore the signal transmitted from the spare is
distributed to all access boards involved in the protection scheme. The connections are functionally
point–to–multipoint but physically every access board realizes a point–to–point connection towards the
previous and the next access board using a buffer to decouple and regenerate the signal.

Hardware failures types

The hardware failures causing automatic EPS protection switch can be grouped as:

• failures causing the internal equipment link loss as powering KO, Clock loss, board missing
(referred as LOS/LOF);
• failures causing traffic loss (the internal link is preserved) as for instance unlocked oscillator,
electrical interface defective and so on;
• failures not causing traffic loss nor internal link loss but causing loss of management as ISBP
failure or SPI failure.

Moreover some failures can cause equipment malfunctioning (as remote inventory fault, laser degrade,
loss of DC/DC synchronism).
These hardware faults are signalled to the management system and do not provokes an automatic switch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 244 / 531

531
 13.7.3 EPS Protection 1662SMC Shelf

The EPS protection is supported on the 1662SMC equipment for the following boards:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Equipment Boards Protection Scheme Number of protec- Mode

not permitted without written authorization.

tion schemes

SYNTH16 1+1 1 Not revertive

Low Speed ports: N+1 (N max = 6) 1 Revertive

– 63x2Mbit/s

13.7.3.1 SYNTH16 Board Protection

The positions of main and spare SYNTH16 are fixed:

– slot 6 : COMPACT ADM main

– slot 15 : COMPACT ADM spare

13.7.3.2 Low Speed (LS) Port Protection

As Low Speed ports (LS) are intended the 2 Mbit/s ports.

For the relation between LS ports and access boards refer to para 12.2.4.3 on page 182.
The positions of main and spare P63E1 are optional.

The P63E1 port can manage up to 63 x 2 Mbit/s ports. Sixty–three bidirectional links are used for each
connection between P63E1 port and A63E1 access board.
The main P63E1 ports are connected in a fixed way to A63E1 access boards using point–to–point
connections. The spare P63E1 port is connected to LSPROT board also using point–to–point
connections.

Under alarm condition, the signal transmitted and received from the main port is switched towards the
LSPROT board, and then connects to the spare port.

In the following a generic description of the access board is given:

Input side

Under normal operating condition, the signal received from the line is sent to the 63 x 2 Mbit/s Pertaining
port board.
Under alarm condition, the signal received from the line is switched towards the LSPROT board. The
switching command SEL is received from the RIBUS I/F block.
A protection block is present to protect the incoming signal against spikes (G.703).

Output side

Under normal operating condition, the signal received from the main port is sent to the line.
Under alarm condition, the signal received from the spare port is switched towards the LSPROT board
and then sent to the line.

The SEL command, received from the RIBUS I/F block, select the signal to sent to the line.
The LSPROT board is used to realize EPS protection for Low Speed ports. It realizes the connection
between the spare port board and LS protection bus if protection request.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The switches to select between main links and protection links are located on the access boards and
managed by the RIBUS block. The switch is activated in case of failure.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 245 / 531

531
 Hardware failures types

The hardware failures causing automatic EPS protection switch can be grouped as:

• failures causing the internal equipment link loss as powering KO, Clock loss, board missing
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

(referred as LOS/LOF);
not permitted without written authorization.

• failures causing traffic loss (the internal link is preserved) as for instance unlocked oscillator,
electrical interface defective and so on;
• failures not causing traffic loss nor internal link loss but causing loss of management as ISBP
failure or SPI failure.

Moreover some failures can cause equipment malfunctioning (as remote inventory fault, laser degrade,
loss of DC/DC synchronism).
These hardware faults are signalled to the management system and do not provokes an automatic switch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 246 / 531

531
 13.7.4 Network Protections

13.7.4.1 Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)

Special features of the 1670 OED Shelf

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

STM–N Linear Single–Ended 1+1 APS and STM–N Linear Dual–Ended 1+1 APS are only supported
for optical interfaces (STM–1 and STM–4 optical)!
MSP 1:N is supported for STM–1/4 optical and STM–1 electrical interfaces.

The following restrictions exist for the MSP 1:N feature for electrical interfaces in the 1670 OED shelf:

– MSP 1:N is only supported for A16ES1/P16S1 boards.

– No EPS allowed in case of MSP 1:N protection

That means there is no support of a mixed configuration of MSP 1:N and EPS within a shelf. Also,
if MSP is configured, no HPROT board can be provisioned.

– HW limits a mix of port numbers only in the group of ports 1..8 and the group of ports 9..16.

– The electrical interfaces of an OED cannot be in the same MSP group as optical interfaces.

STM–N Linear Single–Ended 1+1 APS

The whole section is duplicated from the originating node for each direction of transmission.
Tx side is permanently bridged. In Rx side the best signal is selected. As the scheme is “unidirectional
protection mode“, the switch occurs only at the near–end where the failure is detected and the K1/K2
messages are just devoted to carry info switch status to the far–end.

This protection protects against Transmission failures (LOS, LOF, MS_AIS) or section degradation
(MS_SD or MS_EXBER) or HW failure which affects the traffic.
Only Non–revertive mode is supported.
Protection takes place within 50 ms.

The implementation is compliant with the G.841 – 7.1 clause: MSP protocol compatible with the 1:N MSP
operation.
Operator command are according G.841 and the following one are supported:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Manual to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare resource) to protected one (Main
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board.

• Force to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Force to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare resource) to protected one (Main
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board.

• Lockout: the protection is locked, the traffic is managed by protected board independently of
its status, in failure or not in failure.

• Clear: release command which is active.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Exercise: not supported.

Refer to Figure 135. on page 249.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 247 / 531

531
 STM–N Linear Dual–Ended 1+1 APS

The whole section is duplicated from the originating node for each direction of transmission.
Tx side is permanently bridged. In Rx side the best signal is selected, in bi–directional operation mode the
selector is moved only when the two sides agreed the operation; and for this reason a side makes requests
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

then waiting for acknowledgements of switch action from other side by using the APS bytes.
not permitted without written authorization.

This protection protects against Transmission failures (LOS, LOF, MS_AIS) or section degradation
(MS_SD or MS_EXBER) or HW failure which affects the traffic.
Only Non–revertive mode is supported.
Protection takes place within 50 ms.

The implementation is compliant with the G.841 – 7.1 clause: MSP protocol compatible with the 1:N MSP
operation.

Operator command are according G.841 and the following one are supported:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Manual to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare resource) to protected one (Main
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board.

• Force to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Force to protected: to switch from protecting board (Spare resource) to protected one (Main
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protected board.

• Lockout: the protection is locked, the traffic is managed by protected board independently of
its status, in failure or not in failure.

• Clear: release command which is active.

• Exercise: not supported.

Refer to Figure 135. on page 249.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 248 / 531

531
 Single ended 1+1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1
not permitted without written authorization.

MAIN MAIN
2

1
SPARE SPARE
2
a) Normal conditions

APS SWITCH
1
MAIN MAIN
2
MS–RDI

1
SPARE SPARE
2

b) Unidirectional failure

Dual ended 1+1

1
MAIN MAIN
2

1
SPARE SPARE
2
a) Normal conditions

APS
1 SWITCH
MAIN MAIN
2
APS

1
SPARE SPARE
SWITCH 2

b) Unidirectional failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 135. MSP Linear 1+1 single and dual ended protection

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 249 / 531

531
 STM–N Linear dual–ended 1:N APS

1:N (N=14 max.) linear protection without extra traffic is supported.

One section is used as spare resource to protect one of the N main sections when in failure.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The implementation is compliant with the G.841 – clause 7.1 MSP protocol compatible with the 1:N MSP
operation.

Only revertive mode is supported. A WTR time beween 1 and 15 minutes can be configured in steps of
1 minute. A Hold–off time between 0 and 10 seconds can be configured.

When the protection section is not in use, null signal is indicated on both sent K1 and K2 bytes.
The operation switch is bi–directional, which means that both Tx side and Rx side switch will occur (using
K1/K2 messages) in compliant with the G.841 protocol operations.

In this mechanism the priority can be assigned to the main resource so that in case of double failure the
high priority traffic is restored.

This protection protects against transmission failures (LOS, LOF, MS_AIS) or section degradation
(MS_SD or MS_EXBER) or hardware failure, which affects the traffic.

Protection takes place within 50 ms.

Operator command are according G.841 and the following one are supported:

• Manual to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Force to protection: to switch from protected (Main resource) to protecting board (Spare
resource). This command is accepted if no failure is present on protecting board.

• Lockout: the protection is locked, the traffic is managed by protected board independently of
its status, in failure or not in failure.

• Clear: release command which is active.

• Clear WTR: supported.

• Exercise: not supported.

Refer to Figure 136. on page 251.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 250 / 531

531
 Dual ended 1:N without extra traffic
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1 1
not permitted without written authorization.

2 2
MAIN MAIN
1 1

2 #1 #1
2

1 1

2 2
MAIN MAIN
1 1

2 #N #N 2

SPARE SPARE
a) Normal conditions

1 1

2 2
MAIN MAIN
1 1
#1 #1
2 2

Link failure

SWITCH SWITCH
1 1

2 2
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH 1 1 SWITCH

#N #N
2 2

SPARE SPARE
b) Failure conditions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 136. MSP Linear 1:N Dual–Ended protection

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 251 / 531

531
 13.7.4.2 SNCP (Sub–Network Connection Protection)

Refer to Figure 137. on page 253 and Figure 138. on page 254.

Subnetwork Network Connection protection is a dedicated protection mechanism that can be used to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

protect a path (e.g. that portion where two separate path segments are available) or the full end–to–end
not permitted without written authorization.

path. It may be applied at any path layer in a layered network.

Two types of SNCP are possible:
• SNCP/I (Inherent monitoring) that switches on SSF criteria (AU–AIS and AU–LOP);
• SNCP/N (Non–intrusive monitoring) where POH is monitored by the POM enabled before the
matrix. The switches criteria are SSF and one or more of ExBER, TIM, UNEQ, SD; in this case
the same selection must be made on each NE of the ring.
SNCP is employed on ring networks on which several equipments have been installed.
It can be also employed in Linear or Meshed network topology.
Two operating mode can be selected for single VC SNCP:

• revertive (the signal is switched back into the working channel, after recovery of the fault).
In the revertive operation the ”Wait time to restore” (WTR) is fixed at 5 min.
• not revertive

As illustrated in the example shown in Figure 137. on page 253 several equipment (numbered 1 to 5) are
ring–connected on a looped path.
Each of the equipment on the node is bidirectionally connected (Side A and Side B). One of the two
directions represent the main path (clockwise). The opposite direction will utilize a second fiber line for the
spare traffic (counter clockwise).
The SNCP automatic protection intervenes upon detecting path failure (SSF).
Each transmitting signal node is permanently connected (bridge) in the main traffic direction (clockwise)
and in the protected traffic direction(counter clockwise).
The Tx signal reaches destination through two different paths thus enabling the node receiving it to select
the best one (switch).
The switching decision can be taken at the NE level (automatic switch) or at the OS level (management
switch).The forced switch and lockout command is supported.

The automatic switch is initiated upon detection of failure on the receiving end (sink side). The following
table resumes the protection scheme features for SNCP/I and SNCP/N.

Table 41. SNCP configuration

Switching Switching Hold Off time Wait to Re-

Protection type mode
Type Criteria (sec) store time

SNCP/I unidirectional/ AIS (SSF) revertive/

(not planned) fixed 5 min
(inherent) single ended AU–LOP (SSF) not revertive

AU–AIS (SSF)
AU–LOP (SSF)
SNCP/N unidirectional/ ExBER selectable revertive/
fixed 5 min
(non intrusive) single ended TIM (future release) not revertive
UNEQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

SD

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 252 / 531

531
 The example of Figure 137. on page 253 illustrates the connection between two signals (T1 between
nodes 2 and 5 and T2 between nodes 1 and 4) and relevant in/out nodes with associated pass–through.
Figure 138. on page 254 shows two examples of failures and subsequent SNCP switching mechanism.
A failure or degrade on the main path causes to switch over to the spare one.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

When the receiving end switches no information is sent to the corresponding Tx side to activate the
not permitted without written authorization.

switching operation at the remote end (Single ended ”switching operation).

To manage switching the SNCP architecture utilizes the data inherent to the Path and not to the Line.
Switching is in fact activated by defective operations occurring at the VCn levels (AU–AIS, AU–LOP,
ExBER).
When the path is no longer available, an AIS signal is transmitted on the same path to activate protection.
In this manner SNCP can protect the paths following cable break–down or failures along the fiber and
nodes.
Cable break–down concerns all the fibers it contains hence it places traffic in both directions out–of–
service, while a failure concerns only one fiber.
The units are provided with a path switching circuit (bridge + switch).
Its enabling depends on the equipment configuration.
With SNCP each working path has a dedicated protection path.

Side B 3 Side A

T1, T2 Pass–through

2 Side A Side B 4
BRIDGE
T2

T1
T2 Pass–through T1 Pass–through
T1 Drop/Ins Prot. T2 Drop/Ins Prot.

SWITCH Side B Side A

COUNTER
CLOCKWISE
1 CLOCKWISE
Side A 5
Side B
T1
T2 T1 Pass–through T2 Pass–through
T2 Drop/Ins Prot. T1 Drop/Ins Prot.

Side B
Side A

NOTES: On Craft Terminal, the following terminology is used:

Pass–Through= Bidirectional Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Drop/Ins Prot.= Bidirectonal Protected Connection

Figure 137. Typical ring network with SNCP

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 253 / 531

531
 Case of cable break between nodes 2 and 3
Cable break 3 AU–AIS on T1,T2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Switch on spare path

2 4 SSF

T1
T2

MAIN SPARE
1 Switch on spare path
5 SSF

T2
T1

Case of unidirectional failure between nodes 5 and 1

3
Switch on spare path
2 4

T1
T2

SSF

MAIN SPARE
1
5

T2
T1

SSF

Switch on spare path

Unidirectional failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 138. Failure examples in SNCP ring

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 254 / 531

531
 13.7.4.3 Drop and Continue

Refer to from Figure 139. on page 256 to Figure 141. on page 258.

The Drop and Continue architecture has been implemented in the network to improve traffic availability.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Drop and Continue is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of sub–networks, e.g., rings.

The sub–networks should be connected through at least two nodes (so realizing two independent
connections).

The equipment is configured as ”DROP and CONTINUE” on each interconnection node.

The subnetworks’ equipment implement the connection between two SNCP rings.

The resulting architecture affords protection against multiple failures (evenly distributed one per
subnetwork) tolerated without traffic loss (node failure or single cable cut).

The Drop and Continue feature improves traffic availability as compared with the simple ”end–to–end
SNCP”.
More subnetworks are connected the further is availability increased.

The Drop and Continue features simultaneously realizes the following on one node:

• unidirectional pass–through
• protected drop
• insertion in one direction

The configurations achievable are:

• D/C–A INS–A (called “Normal” on Craft Terminal)

• D/C–A INS–B (called “Inverse” on Craft Terminal)

D/C stands for ”Drop and Continue”, the letter after it (A = line side” A”) indicates the ”drop ” side (e.g., “A”
means “A main side”, and consequently the spare side is the “B” one).
The end letter (INS–B or INS–A) indicates the insert side.

Note:
The letters “A” and “B” are not referred to a specific board or ports in a physical slot of the
subrack; “A” and “B” are used in the figures of this paragraph to identify a Line direction.

The ”Unidirectional pass–through” is always in the direction opposite to that of the ”insert” side (e.g., when
”INS B” the pass–through is from B side to A side).

For further information refer to Figure 139. on page 256 which shows the D/C–A INS–A configuration
(called “Normal” on CT) and the D/C–A INS–B configuration (called “Inverse” on CT).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 255 / 531

531
 Drop and Continue D/C A INS A (”Normal”)

LINE PORT LINE PORT

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SIDE A SIDE B
Input Output
not permitted without written authorization.

Output Input

Symbol used on Craft Terminal

PORT

Input Output

Drop and Continue D/C A INS B (”Inverse”)

LINE PORT LINE PORT
SIDE A SIDE B
Input Output

Output Input

Symbol used on Craft Terminal

PORT

Input Output

Figure 139. Drop and Continue D/C A INS A and D/C A INS B

The ”Drop and Continue” featuring two connected SNCP rings (with dual node connection) is indicated
in Figure 140. on page 257. It shows the connection of a path signal between the two nodes 1 and 8.
The relevant path signal is:

• connected in Drop and Continue (D/C A – INS A) in nodes 3, 4, 6 and 10

• connected in pass–through in nodes 2, 5, 7, 9
• connected in drop/ins protection in nodes 1, 8
Note: The following terminology is used on Craft Terminal:
pass–through = Bidirectional connection
drop/ins protection = Bidirectional Protected connection

When in normal condition, the unidirectional way of traffic from 1 to 8 is supposed to be 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 6

! 7 ! 8.
After a failure on the 1st ring between nodes 2 and 3 (refer to Figure 141. on page 258), the link direction
is: 1 ! 5 ! 4 ! 3 ! 6 ! 7 ! 8, with a switch on node 3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

After a second failure on the 2nd ring between nodes 6 and 7 (refer to Figure 141. on page 258) the
selected direction on the link is: 1 ! 5 ! 4 ! 10 ! 9 ! 8. The operative switch is on node 8 and the
previous pass–through between nodes 4 and 3 is no more used.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 256 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

2 SNCP ring 5
D/CA INSA D/CB INS B
A Port 1 Port 2 B A Port 1 Port 2 B

INS
INS
A 3 4 B

Port 3 Port 3

Port 3 Port 3

6 10
INS
INS B
A

A Port 1 Port 2 B A Port 1 Port 2 B

D/CA INSA D/CB INSB

7 SNCP ring 9

Figure 140. Drop and Continue

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 257 / 531

531
 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

2 SNCP ring 5

3 4

switched Drop & Continue

1st failure

6 10
SNCP ring
7 9
8

2 SNCP ring 5

3 4

Drop & Continue

2nd failure

6 10
SNCP ring
7 9
8

switched

Figure 141. Drop and Continue – 1st and 2nd failure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 258 / 531

531
 13.7.4.4 Multiplex Section shared Protection Rings (MS–SPRING)

The following protection MS–SPRING is supported:

– 2 fiber MS–SPRING at STM–16

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– 2 fiber MS–SPRING at STM–64

The supported MS–SPRING is compliant to the ITU–T Rec. G.841

The MS–SPRING protection is realized in the MATRIX card.

A 2 fiber MS–SPRING (Multiple Section–Shared Protection Ring) consist of a set of NEs each equipped
with a two bidirectional port, one for the clockwise and the other for the counter–clockwise. The
MS–SPRING is said ”two fiber” because each pair of adjacent NEs is linked by two fibers, one for each
direction.
The MS SPRING protection is an alternative with respect to SNCP. While MS SPRING allows the
connection at the same time on the clockwise and on the counterclockwise direction on the same AU4 that
can be inserted and extracted in each span, on the contrary the SNCP connection engages the same AU4
on both sides for the whole link.

Note:
In the following the 2F MS–SPRING at STM–16 will be explained; the same description can be
applied to 2F MS–SPRING at STM–64 taking into account that 64 AU– 4 are available and that the
bandwidth is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively ”working” (AU4#1 to
AU4#32) and ”protection” capacity (AU4#33 to AU4#64).

2 fiber MS–SPRING at STM–16 level

The bandwidth of a 2F MS–SPRING is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively
”working” (AU4#1 to AU4#8) and ”protection” capacity (AU4#9 to AU4#16). The AU4#1 is protected by
AU4#9 up to AU4#8 that is protected by the AU4#16. The ”working ” capacity is used to carry the ”high
priority traffic”, while the ”protection” capacity can be used for ”low priority” traffic that is lost in case of
failure. Refer to Figure 142. on page 260.

The MS SPRING algorithm starts as a consequence of the following section alarms:

• LOS, LOF, MS AIS, EXBER (B2), SIGNAL DEGRADE (B2)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 259 / 531

531
 PORT

B A B A
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A 1 2 3 B
6 5 4 A
B

A B A B

WORKING CHANNELS (AU4#1 TO AU4#8)

PORT
PROTECTION CHANNELS (AU4#9 TO AU4#16)

Figure 142. 2F MS SPRING Connection

APS in 2–fiber MS–SPRING

In case of fibre break the APS for 2F MS–SPRING uses a synchronized sequence of ”bridge” and
”switch” operations that modify the internal connections of the two NEs adjacent to the failure and
permits the ”high priority” traffic to be restored.

Only the NEs adjacent to the failure are interested to the ”switch” and ”bridge” functions while for all other
NEs the final configuration is a ”pass through” of all ”protection” (low priority) AU4s.

Figure 143. and Figure 144. on page 261, Figure 145. and Figure 146. on page 262 highlight how the
connections are modified as a consequence of a ”bridge ” or a ”switch” operation.
The Bridge operation is performed on the Tx side while the Switch is performed on the Rx side.

• The ”Bridge” operation on the B side has the effect of routing the outgoing ”high priority” A traffic
to the outgoing ”protection” B capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.

• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the B side all the connections having an AU4
belonging to the A working capacity as a source, are replaced by connections having the
incoming B protection traffic as a source. The signals maintain the same end point connection.
The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the opposite
side.

In the same way:

• The ”Bridge” operation on the A side has the effect of routing the outgoing ”high priority” B traffic
to the outgoing ”protection” A capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.

• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the A side all the connections having an AU4
belonging to the B working capacity as a source, are replaced by connections having the
incoming A protection traffic as a source. The signals maintain the same end point connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 260 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A B A B
not permitted without written authorization.

A B A B

protection
working

BEFORE AFTER

Figure 143. Effect of a BRIDGE “B side” operation

A B A B

A B A B

protection
working

BEFORE AFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 144. Effect of a BRIDGE “A side” operation

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 261 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A B A B

A B A B

protection
BEFORE working AFTER

Figure 145. Effect of SWITCH “B side” operation

A B A B

A B A B

protection
BEFORE working AFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 146. Effect of SWITCH “A side” operation

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 262 / 531

531
 Figure 147. on page 263 depicts the final effect of Bridge and Switch synchronized steps for traffic
restoration in a network with one fault.
They are carried out via a protocol that uses the K1 and K2 bytes. The failed span is replaced by the
protection traffic of the span not affected by the failure.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The K1 and K2 are exchanged between the Node that are adjacent to the failure, instead the other Nodes
not permitted without written authorization.

put K1 and K2 in passthrough.

SWITCH BRIDGE
side A side A SWITCH
PROTECTED BRIDGE
SIGNAL side B
side B

B A B A

A 1 2 3 B

6 5 4
B A

(*) (*)

A B A B

WORKING CHANNELS

PROTECTION CHANNELS PROTECTED

SIGNAL
BRIDGE

SWITCH
(*) All protection AU4 are put in Pass–through in the 5th and 6th NEs

Figure 147. Line break recovering operations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 263 / 531

531
 An example of 2F MS–SPRING is reported in Figure 148. on page 265.

In the example a ring of four nodes is protected with 2F MS–SPRING

AU4–1 carries the traffic of the span : C–B, B–A, A–D, D–C
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

AU4–2 carries the traffic of the span D–B (pass–through in C)

AU4–9 protects AU4–1.

AU4–10 protects AU4–2.

After a failure in the section C–B, the following actions are performed on:

– node B : Streams access 1 and 2, previously drop–inserted on AU4–1 and AU4–2

“side A”, are switched respectively on AU4–9 and AU4– 10 “side B”.
In this way, C is reached through nodes A and D.

– node C: Stream access 1, previously drop–inserted on AU4.1 “side B”, is switched on

AU4–9 “side A”.
In this way, B is reached through nodes D and A.
Rx AU4–2 “side A”, previously in pass–through on Tx AU4–2 “side B”, is looped
on Tx AU4–10 “side A”. In this way, B is reached through nodes D–A (signal
transmitted D to B).
Rx AU4–2 “side B” is no more received.
So, Rx AU4–10 “side A” is looped on the Tx AU4–2 “side A”.
In this way, the signal transmitted by node B follows the path :
A–D– C and here is looped to reaches node D again.

– nodes A and D do not switch

We can obtain from the example that is possible bandwidth re–used for some traffic patterns (AU4–9
protects four connection on AU4–1) having the same protection for some several connections (shared
protection).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 264 / 531

531
 A
D A . AU4 1 A B : AU4 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

AU4.9–Prot. AU4.1

AU4.10 Prot. AU4.2

D B

C
D C : AU4 1 C B : AU4 1

D B : AU4 2

side B
D B
side A

side A side B

C B

side A side B side A side B

AU4 AU4 AU4 AU4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10

1 1 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 148. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 265 / 531

531
 SQUELCHING FUNCTION

The squelching function is activated when a node that carries Drop/Insert streams, remains isolated
because of a double failure.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In this case to avoid misconnections on the AU4 involved in MS SPRING protection, an AIS signal will be
not permitted without written authorization.

inserted on Low Priority streams transmitted from the nodes adjacent to the isolated one. See Figure 149.

Before Node 2 isolation because of the double failure, the following connections were active using the
AU4#1

– Stream between Port 3 and Port 1

– Stream between Port 2 and Port 4

After a second failure, the Nodes adjacent to the isolated Node 2 send AIS on the Low Priority traffic
(AU4#9) by means of the Squelching function thus avoiding the misconnection between Port 3 and Port 4.

If the squelching function were not active, the MS SPRING algorithm would activate the Bridge and Switch
functions on the nodes adjacent to Node 2 thus misconnecting Port 3 and Port 4 using AU4#9 as
protection. In virtue of squelching function the nodes adjacent to isolated Node 2 send AIS on Low Priority
AU4#9 avoiding in this way the misconnection between Port 3 and Port 4 in this case.
After the failure has been removed, a similar reverse sequence of operations on the NEs adjacent to the
recovered span will be activated. The reverse procedure can start after a step programmable WTR.

PORT 3 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 4

AU4 #1 AU4 #1 AU4 #1 AU4 #1

B A B A
BRIDGE SWITCH
side A side B

1 SWITCH
2 3
side A BRIDGE
side B

(SF/SD) (SF/SD) B
A
AIS ON AIS ON
AU4 # 9 AU4# 9
5 4
B
A
AIS ON AIS ON AIS ON
AU4 # 9 AU4 # 9 AU4 # 9
PASS–THROUGH PASS–THROUGH PASS–THROUGH
6

A B A B

WORKING CHANNELS

PROTECTION CHANNELS

Figure 149. Squelching on isolated Node connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 266 / 531

531
 MS – SPRING Interworking

When a 2f MS–SPRING is interconnected with another ring (either SNCP/I or MS–SPRING), the
interconnection of the two is performed by connecting two nodes per ring with HVC connections, as shown
in Figure 150. on page 267.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Each VC4 that has to cross the ring boundary (only HVC level ring interconnections are considered here)
must be output by two nodes, one of which, the Primary Service Node (PSN) drops it and continues to the
Secondary Service Node (SSN). In the opposite direction, the SSN inserts a copy of the VC4 into the ring
and the PSN selects by means the Primary Node Service Selector function, between the VC4 coming from
the SSN and the VC4 that can be locally inserted by means an STM–1 Tributary. The selection is made
on the Path–AIS basis (AU–AIS).

The protection mechanism works on the hypothesis that the other ring selects one of the two versions of
the incoming VC4 and transmits two identical copies of the VC4 towards the PSN and the SSN (this is
guaranteed if the other ring is an MS–SPRING or an SNCP ring).

Note that the PSN and the SSN need not to be adjacent and need not to be the same for all of the VC4
that cross the ring boundary: i.e. each crossing VC4 has two associated nodes that act as PSN and SSN.

2F MS – SPRING

side A
side B
side B side A
Secondary
SS Service
Node
Primary
Service
side A side B side A side B
Node

SNCP or MS–SPRING

SS = Service Selector
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 150. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 267 / 531

531
 13.7.4.5 Collapsed Dual Node Ring Interconnection

Refer to Figure 151. on page 269 and Figure 152. on page 270.

The “Collapsed dual node ring interconnection” is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

sub–networks, e.g., rings.

not permitted without written authorization.

The sub–networks should be connected through at least two nodes (so realizing two independent
connections).

Respect to the configuration shown in Figure 140. on page 257 (”Drop and Continue”), “Collapsed dual
node interconnection” allows a hardware reduction, since an OMSN contains several ports and a path
signal can be connected in protected mode, from a generic pot to another one, on the same equipment.

The subnetworks’ equipment implement the SNCP connection.

The resulting architecture affords protection against multiple failures (evenly distributed one per
subnetwork) tolerated without traffic loss (node failure or single cable cut).

The “Collapsed dual node ring interconnection” featuring two connected rings (with dual connection) is
indicated in Figure 151. on page 269.

SNCP protection is enabled throughout the equipment. When in normal condition, the unidirectional way
of traffic from 1 to 8 is supposed to be 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 6 ! 8.

After a failure on the 1st ring between nodes 2 and 3 (refer to Figure 152. on page 270), the link direction
is: 1 ! 5 ! 4 ! 3 ! 6 ! 8.

Pass–through is used between nodes 4 and 3, and switch on node 3.

After a second failure on the 2nd ring between nodes 3 and 6 (refer to Figure 152. on page 270) the
selected direction on the link is: 1 ! 5 ! 4 ! 7 ! 8.

The operative switch is on node 8 and the previous pass–through between nodes 4 and 3 is no more used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 268 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
6
2

03
3

C
A

Port 3
Port 1

8
Port 2

Port 4
1

D
B
SNCP ring

SNCP ring
C
A

Port 3
Port 1

Figure 151. Collapsed dual node interconnection

531
Port 2

Port 4

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

D
B

7
5

269 / 531
 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

2 5
SNCP ring

switched 3 4 Collapsed dual node interconnection

1st failure

SNCP ring
6 7
8

2 5
SNCP ring

Collapsed dual node interconnection

3 4
2nd failure

SNCP ring
6 7
8

switched

Figure 152. Collapsed dual node interconnection – 1st and 2nd failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 270 / 531

531
 13.7.4.6 Collapsed Single Node Ring Interconnection

Refer to from Figure 153. on page 271 to Figure 155. on page 273.
The “Collapsed single node ring interconnection” is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

sub–networks, e.g., rings.

not permitted without written authorization.

Respect to the configuration shown in Figure 140. on page 257 (”Drop and Continue”), “Collapsed single
node ring interconnection” allows the best hardware reduction; as a matter of fact four nodes are collapsed
in one node.
The protection operating mode is similar to that described for the “Collapsed dual node ring
interconnection” (refer to para. 13.7.4.5 on page 268).

SNCP ring
2 4
Port 1 Port 2

Port 3 Port 4

5 7
SNCP ring

6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 153. Collapsed single node ring interconnection

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 271 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
2

03
switched

Port 3
Port 1

6
1

SNCP ring

SNCP ring

531
Port 2

Figure 154. Collapsed single node ring interconnection –1st failure

Port 4

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

3

7
4

272 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
5
2

03
switched
Port 3
Port 1

6
1

SNCP ring

SNCP ring

531
Port 2

Figure 155. Collapsed single node ring interconnection –2nd failure

Port 4

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

3

7
4

273 / 531
 13.7.5 Restoration – Support of the GMPLS Protocol

13.7.5.1 Overview

The main objectives of Intelligent Optical Networks ION are:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Automatic and rapid provisioning of bandwidth.

– High network flexibility and scalability.
– Optimized usage of network resources.
– High resilience against failures with a minimum of additional resources.
– Interoperability between different vendors.
– Interoperability between different technologies: IP, ATM, SDH, OTH.

These objectives can be fulfilled in networks which use the Generalized Multi Protocol Label Switching
(GMPLS) protocol.

Up to now, the Alcatel–Lucent SDH Network Elements were managed within the Alcatel–Lucent
proprietary Network Release suite which is based on a centralized concept.
The limitation of this concept is that it does not work in a multi-vendor and multi-technology environment
and that it is quite slow because all the management commands run over the Network Management
System.

1678MCC overcomes these limitations by supporting the GMPLS protocol.

GMPLS provides the following main advantages:

– Path routing is performed at NE level (not via the Network Management System): this allows very
fast connection provisioning and distributed restoration.
– It is standardized, this means that it can work in a multi-vendor environment.
– It is designed to work in a multi-technology environment: IP, ATM, SDH and OTH networks.

13.7.5.2 Standardization

In order to fulfill the requirements described above, several groups have participated to the elaboration
of standards:

OIF Optical Internetworking Forum

Industry forum to agree on interoperable standards.
Defines standard control interfaces: User to Network Interface (UNI) and Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI). Both are based on protocols defined by IETF.

IETF/RFC Internet Engineering Task Force / Request For Comments

Work inspired by Internet consideration, in charge to standardize the Internet protocols.
Defines the GMPLS protocol.

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication sector

Work inspired by Network Layering and legacy considerations. Scope is SDH+OTH networks
Defines the ASON recommendation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 274 / 531

531
 The following standards have been defined:

UNI User to Network Interface

NNI Network to Network Interface

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

GMPLS Generalized Multi Protocol Label Switching

GMPLS is an extension of the MPLS protocol used in data networks. MPLS is a packet-based
technology which is intended to combine the advantages of packet and circuit based networks.
GMPLS is then the extension of this concept to cope additionally with SDH and OTH based
transmission networks.
Thus GMPLS includes, in addition to packet switching capable devices (IP/MPLS), also frame
(Ethernet), cell (ATM), time-slot (SONET/SDH, OTH), wavelength (optical channels) and
spatial (fiber) switching capable devices.

ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network

ITU-T standard (G.8080) for dynamic optical networks.

G.ASTN GMPLS.Automatically Switched Transport Network

ITU-T Architecture for the implementation of ASON.
The G.ASTN is a GMPLS based network.

13.7.5.3 Network Interfaces

The following network interfaces have been standardized:

UNI User to Network Interface

The UNI is the service control interface between the transport network and a client equipment
e.g. a router.
The UNI supports the following basic functions:
– Call control
– Resource discovery
– Connection control
– Connection selection
There is no routing function associated with the UNI reference point.
Network internals are hidden to client.

NNI Network to Network Interface

The NNI is the service control interface between nodes within the transport network.
There are two kinds of NNI: the E-NNI (External NNI), and the I-NNI (Internal NNI)

I-NNI Internal Network to Network Interface

It is the service control interface between nodes within a network domain. The network domain
may be a vendor specific domain or a part of a network.
The I-NNI supports the following basic functions:
– Resource discovery
– Connection control
– Connection selection
– Connection routing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 275 / 531

531
 E-NNI External Network to Network Interface
It is the service control interface between network domains, e.g. between different vendor
domains.
The E-NNI supports the following basic functions:
– Call control
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Resource discovery
not permitted without written authorization.

– Connection control
– Connection selection
– Connection routing

Carrier Domain 1

I–NNI
Client 2

Client 1
E–NNI

I–NNI
Carrier Domain 2

Transport Network

Figure 156. Network Interfaces UNI /NNI

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 276 / 531

531
 13.7.5.4 GMPLS Protocol

The basic idea is that path routing possibilities can be negotiated directly (not via the Network
Management System) between intelligent NEs which can then setup the corresponding paths. For that
the GMPLS protocol is used.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The GMPLS protocol must support the following functions:

– Exchange of topology and resource information between NEs.

– Communication of route decisions to the involved NEs.
– Setup of the corresponding paths.

The GMPLS consists of the following main protocols:

– The routing protocols (OSPF / OSPF-TE)

Opens Shortest Path First / Opens Shortest Path First with Traffic Engineering extension.
These protocols are used to exchange topology and reachability information between NEs in order
to allow each NE to build its own topology map of the entire network or subnetwork.
A topology map basically consists of NEs and Links related information: each NE disseminates
periodically information describing the NE itself and its local links to its adjacent neighbors. The
routing information, a NE periodically receives from each of its neighbors, is used to update its local
topology map and is further advertised to all adjacent neighbors.
This mechanism ensures that each NE in the network repeatedly obtains information describing all
the NEs and links in the network.
In G.ASTNs, multiple physical links may exist between a client and the adjacent network border NE
or between adjacent NEs, respectively. For routing purposes, multiple data links may be combined
to form a single ’Traffic Engineering’ Link (TE-Link). This summarization mechanism reduces the
amount of routing information that has to be disseminated through the network.

– The signaling protocols (RSVP / RSVP-TE)

Resource Reservation Protocol / Resource Reservation Protocol with Traffic Engineering extension)
These protocols are used to exchange information between neighbor NEs mainly for the purpose of
establishing or releasing a path across the network or subnetwork.
When a new path is being established, the signaling messages have to be processed in every NE
along that path. Signaling protocols facilitate the establishment of a link connection over a particular
transmission link between a pair of connection points (e.g. VC4-16c-CTPs). For this purpose they
convey the assigned labels between each pair of neighbor NEs. Furthermore, the signaling
messages carry client end point identification information (e.g. TNA addresses) as well as routing
information (e.g. explicit route object) which specify the route a new path has at least to follow within
a network.
From the perspective of a single NE, the upstream and downstream link connections belonging to
the same path are bound together by a crossconnection which is created between the two link
connection end points (CTPs). As a result of the individual signaling actions between the NEs along
a path and of the crossconnections which are created in each NE, an end-to-end path is established
from a source to a destination.
In the path establishment process this information is used to calculate a route from a given source
to a given destination or to determine the ’next hop’ leading to the direction of the given destination.

– Link Management Protocol (LMP)

The Link Management Protocol (LMP) that runs between neighbor NEs is used to manage the TE-
Links. Furthermore it supports supervision of control channel connectivity and verification of the
physical connectivity of the transmission links.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 277 / 531

531
 13.7.5.5 GMPLS based Network: G.ASTN

Overview

The G.ASTN (GMPLS based Automatically Switched Transport Network) implies the introduction of a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Control Plane between transport and management planes. The control plane communicates with the
not permitted without written authorization.

underlying transport plane and with the management plane.

Even if in a G.ASTN a lot of tasks are performed autonomously by the control plane, a network
management system is required to manage the network in full context.

Management Plane

NMS

Control Plane

B
SNC " SNC " SNC
Y Y Y

Transport Plane

B B B
UNI UNI
NE NE NE Router
Router

NNI NNI

NMS Network Management System

NE Network Element
SNC Subnetwork Controller
UNI User to Network Interface
NNI Network Node Interface

Figure 157. G.ASTN architecture

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 278 / 531

531
 Description of the Control Plane

The role of the Control Plane is:

– To facilitate fast and efficient configuration of connections within the transport network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

(Switched Connections which are initiated by the client and Soft Permanent Connections SPC which
not permitted without written authorization.

are initiated by the NMS are supported).

– To reconfigure or modify connections that have previously been set up.
– To perform a restoration function.

The tasks of the Control Plane are:

– Network discovery: this allows a NE to find its place in the network. This means that a new NE is
automatically inserted in the network such that finally all NEs in the network are aware of the whole
topology without manual intervention.
– Link discovery: this allows each pair of a link to discover the neighboring NEs. On this way a newly
installed link can automatically be inserted in the network without pre-configuration.
– Service discovery: this allows two NEs to exchange information about their capabilities such that
a common set of functionalities can be agreed between them in an automatic way.
– Fast and automated path provisioning.

The elements of the Control Plane are:

– The Subnetwork Controllers SNCs

The SNC implements the GMPLS protocol and ensures the connection with the underlying NE and
with the network management system.
One SNC is associated with one NE.

– The connections between SNCs.

The connection links transport the IP based routing / signaling / link management protocols.
They can be:
• Dedicated Ethernet connections (Out-of-Fiber / Out-Of-Band control plane traffic).
• SDH links using the DCC channels (In-Fiber / In-Band control plane traffic).

13.7.5.6 Benefits of the G.ASTN

– Fast and automated path provisioning

– Enhanced scalability
– Support of multi-vendor networks
– Interworking with other networks at boundary nodes
– Support of multi-technology networks (IP, ATM, SDH, OTH)
– Seamless integration of data and transmission networks
– More efficient restoration procedure: distributed restoration against centralized restoration
– Fast and efficient network reaction in failure situations
– Maintenance improvement: since all necessary network information is available locally, coordination
of maintenance actions is simplified
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 279 / 531

531
 13.7.5.7 The Alcatel–Lucent Solution

This chapter describes how Alcatel–Lucent has implemented the GMPLS protocol in conjunction with the
1678MCC.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

13.7.5.7.1 GMPLS Routing Engine: GMRE

not permitted without written authorization.

Each 1678MCC is equipped with a controller called GMRE which runs the GMPLS protocol.
The GMRE is a SW package which is installed on top of the NE SW.
One of the major task of the GMRE is the coordination of the various actions which are necessary to
provide the dynamic establishment and release of connections in a decentralized fashion.

Reference Model

The NE together with the GMRE build the Transport NE (TNE).

Figure 158. shows the TNE reference model. It consists of:

– A single NE + GMRE.
– An internal Control Interface NMI (Q3 in the first step) between NE and GMRE SW.
– At least one redundant or not redundant IP Control Channel (IPCC) between the GMRE and each
of its neighbors.
– A neighbor can be a client (e.g. a router) attached to the TNE or another TNE.
– The IPCC can be Out-Of-Fiber/Out-Of-Band (running on Ethernet links between GMREs) or
In-Fiber/In-Band (using the DCC on the SDH links).
– At least one transmission interface between the NE and each of its neighbors associated with the
corresponding IPCCs.
– GMRE management interfaces:
• Command Line Interface CLI
• MTNM Interface based on the CORBA protocol
– The conventional NE Management Interface Q3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 280 / 531

531
 Craft Terminal Network Management System

CT NMS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

CLIS MTNM
(CORBA based)
S S Q3

S
IPCC
GMRE

Client/Neighbor
S NMI (Q3)

TNE
S
Transmission IF NE
e.g. 1678MCC

TNE

NE Network Element IPCC IP Control Channel

TNE Transport Network Element CLI Command Line Interface
MTNM Multi Technology Network Management Q3 NE Management Interface
NMI Network Management Interface COPS Common Open Policy Server

Figure 158. TNE reference model

The GMRE is an integral part of the TNE. It controls the resources (entirely or partially) of the underlying
NE. These resources are:
– Connection Termination Points (CTPs).
– Crossconnections between two CTPs.

There is a strict 1:1 relationship between GMRE and NE: there is one GMRE for one NE.
Signaling, routing and link management protocols are running over the IPCC interfaces.
Each IPCC can be operated in a redundant or non-redundant configuration and has one or multiple
associated transmission interfaces.
Each IPCC interface together with its associated transmission interface(s) is either playing the role of a
UNI or of a NNI.

The GMRE can be managed from a CT using a CLI interface or from a Network Management System
(NMS) via a CORBA based MTNM interface.

The GMRE itself controls the underlying NE via the NE conventional management interface Q3.
The Q3 interface can also be used in parallel to manage the NE in a conventional way.

The GMRE configuration data (persistency database and configuration files) can be backed up and
restored in the same way as the 1678MCC configuration data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 281 / 531

531
 GMRE Architecture

Figure 159. shows the top level architecture of the GMRE and its interfaces
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Network Management Craft Terminal

System

MTNM CLI

CORBA
NMI

GMRE Management Agent

IPCC

OSPF–TE

Clients / Signaling Route Route_

RSVP–TE
Neighbor Handler Handler DB
Sig_DB
GMREs

LMP

Link
Management

Path Management
Path_
Link_DB
DB

NCI

NE Adaptation

GMRE

NMI

NE

Figure 159. GMRE: SW Top level architecture

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 282 / 531

531
 Short description of the single components

– Route management:
Coordinates all the tasks which have to be performed by the other components when connections
are set up or torn down.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Signaling handler:
not permitted without written authorization.

Responsible to encode and decode signaling messages and to perform protocol specific tasks.
– Route handler:
Maintenance of a database containing network topology and link state information.
Computation of a route from a given source to a given destination that meets a given set of
constraints.
IP Routing
– Link management:
Manages the link resources from the underlying NE to all of its neighbors.
– GMRE management agent:
Provides the Command Line Interface (CLI) which has to be used by the operator to configure and
control the GMRE.
– CORBA NMI:
Provides an MTMN interface for management system.
– NE adaptation:
Allows to map requests from other GMRE components to the specific underlying NE.

Key Mechanisms

The following key mechanisms are implemented in the GMRE:

– Routing and Route Computation

Routing is a mechanism to get a topological map of the network, including nodes and links with their
capabilities, as well as end system reachability information. Based on this information the routing has
the means for signaling requests to calculate a route from this node to an end system (client) or to
the border of the network.
The NEs exchange their network state. Information received from one directly attached neighbor is
distributed to other directly attached neighbors. On this way, the network states are flooded within
the network and each NE obtains the entire network information.
Routing messages carry node and link information allowing the receiving nodes to learn the node
and link states.

– Signaling
Signaling is a mechanism supporting setup, maintenance and release of routes or connections
across the network. This is achieved by exchanging signaling messages between peer nodes.
The request is passed from source to destination with intermediate node processing in a hop by hop
manner.

– Link and Port Management

This mechanism is responsible for managing control and transport plane interfaces. It provides:

• A central repository and manager for all GMRE related control and transport plane interfaces.
• Informational services to other GMRE applications related to control and transport plane
interfaces.
• Autodiscovery

For each adjacent neighbor node an individual neighbor relationship is maintained, managing the control
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

and transport plane links.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 283 / 531

531
 – Route Management
Route management is responsible for creating, modifying and releasing crossconnections on the NE
in response to signaling or timer events.

– NE Adaptation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The GMRE is designed to control different types of NEs. These NEs may have different management
not permitted without written authorization.

interfaces and different behaviors. The NE adaptation mechanism decouples the generic GMRE
applications from the specifics of the NE under control: it translates between the representation of
interfaces and labels used by the GMRE applications and the corresponding representations used
by the NE.
The NE adaptation is planned to communicate with Q3, TL1, CORBA or other interfaces. Presently,
only the Q3 adaptation is supported.

– Management Interfaces and Agents

There is a necessity to provide access to and control of the application and data within the GMRE
in order to manage it: the GMRE must be provisioned, configured (or customized) and diagnosed
via a management system.
The management system may access the GMRE and target multiple applications such as routing,
signaling, link and route management.

– Management CLI
The Command Line Interface CLI is a management interface via typed commands entered in an
ordinary Telnet Shell.
Management via CLI has the following objectives:

• Translates the user input string, searches in the command tree for the corresponding command
function, executes it and print the response.
• Collects trap/alarm events from the system and display them to the user.

The CLI provides the following features:

• Easy editor mode

• Command completion
• Command history
• Context sensitive help
• Scripting: the user is able to execute a script (sequence of commands)
• Security level access
• Display trap/alarm events
• Small effort to create a new command or to change an older one: it changes the current
command tree by adding, deleting and modifying commands.

– CORBA Interface for Network Management (NMI)

The interface is based on the MTNM model of network management as standardized by TMF: thus
it can be used by the Alcatel–Lucent Network Management Systems as well as by 3rd party
applications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 284 / 531

531
 – External Communication

External communication has to fulfill the following tasks:

• Support redundancy of IPCCs

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Support integration of the GMRE into the DCN

not permitted without written authorization.

• Support easy access to raw-IP services

• Support communication with the NE under GMRE control
• Handling of logical and physical interface IP addresses

The GMRE has 4 major external logical communication interfaces:

• CLI to the GMRE manager:

Via the CLI the GMRE performs management activities and receive notifications.
The sessions are based on the telnet over TCP protocol. This allows easy access to the GMRE
via telnet from any kind of computer. No specific application is required to manage the GMRE.
• IPCC interface in UNI and NNI roles to neighbor nodes
The IPCC interfaces are used to exchange signaling, routing and link management information.
The IPCCs between two nodes are optionally redundant (1:1).
• Q3 for communication between GMRE and NE under GMRE control: a CMISE-like interface
is used, (full Q3 stack is planned for the future).
• CORBA for communication between GMRE and network management (RM).

– Persistent storage

This mechanism provides:

• Reliable storage of application data with respect to all possible system failures.
• Application with enough data for restart after any type of failure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 285 / 531

531
 13.7.5.8 Implementation

GMRE

– The GMRE is a SW package. No additional HW is required for the implementation of the GMPLS.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– The GMRE SW is distributed across the processor modules located redundantly on the FLC boards:
not permitted without written authorization.

The protocol processing parts are deployed on the DCR modules, the DXC SW and those parts of
the GMRE SW which use persistency and which interact closely with the DXC SW are deployed on
the EM modules.
– The DCR modules implement also the IP-over-DCC services used for In-Fiber / In-Band control plane
traffic.
– A redundancy switch triggered by the DXC SW causes also a redundancy switch of the GMRE SW.
– The operating system is LINUX for PowerPC.
– The installation procedure for the GMRE SW has to be triggered by the user explicitly. De-installation
of the GMRE SW is possible.
– The GMRE databases and configuration files are included into the NE configuration backup.

External Interfaces

There are two types of external interfaces:

– UNI–IPCC via OF/OB DCN

– NNI–IPCC
• DCC
• IP–in–IP tunnel via OF/OB DCN

GMRE Maintenance

For GMRE maintenance, the CT provides corresponding SMF (System Maintenance Functions):

– Open CLI Telnet session to selected GMRE.

– Backup/Restore for selected NE incl. GMRE.

13.7.5.8.1 Connections between GMREs

To exchange control plane traffic the GMREs can use two types of connection networks:

– An external IP network.
– The SDH network using the DCC channels.

External IP network (Out-Of-Fiber / Out-Of-Band control plane traffic)

The GMREs nodes are interconnected via dedicated ethernet links.

This transport mode is called Out-Of-Fiber / Out-Of-Band control plane traffic.
1678MCC supports a fully routed IP network as control plane.
GMRE-to-GMRE traffic needs to be routed Out-of-Fiber/Out-Of–Band through the customer DCN.
For this purpose the traffic can be tunneled via Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) or IP-in-IP.
Out-Of-Fiber/ Out-Of-Band control plane traffic allows interworking with non-Alcatel-Lucent subnetworks.
The external IP network must be completely independent from the transport plane.

SDH network using the DCC channels (In-Fiber / In-Band control plane traffic)

The GMREs nodes are connected over the SDH links and make use of the DCC channels to transport the
control plane messages.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

This transport mode is called ’In-Fiber / In-Band’ control plane traffic.

Using this mode, the customer needs not to invest in an additional IP network: the control plane network
can be setup and maintained on the existing SDH links.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 286 / 531

531
 As all GMRE protocols are IP based, an IP over DCC stack (running in parallel to the existing OSI over
DCC stack) is used to transport and route the control plane traffic between GMREs.
The IP-over-DCC interfaces can be seen as local interfaces of the GMRE protocol processor, connecting
it directly to the neighbor GMRE processors. In this case the FLCCONGI/FLCSERVICE are configured
to act as IP routers and become part of the control plane.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

As the topology of the control and transport planes are not necessarily identical, the GMRE SW separates
not permitted without written authorization.

their routing messages.

DCC Protection

In–Fibre / In–Band protection

For GMRE IF/IB signalling, static routes to the neighbor GMREs are setup on the LAPD interfaces. In case
of a failure of one LAPD, the OS chooses an alternative LAPD interface.

In case of failure of a DCC link the rerouting is realized with IP–over–LAPD–over–DCC as shown in
Figure 160.

In–Fiber / In–Band control plane traffic can only be used within Alcatel–Lucent networks.

Rerouting Fast DCC Protection

FLC A FLC A
GMRE Node A GMRE Node A

IP IP IP
LAPD
LAPD 0 LAPD 1 DCC protection
DCC DCC DCC DCC

failure broadcast selection

DCC DCC DCC DCC

DCC protection
LAPD 0 LAPD 1 LAPD
IP IP IP

GMRE Node B GMRE Node B

FLC B FLC B

Figure 160. DCC Protection Mechanism In–Fibre / In–Band

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 287 / 531

531
 In–Band / Out Of–Band protection

To provide additional robustness (regarding to the In–Fibre / In–Band protection) in case that all LAPD
interfaces are down, IP–in–IP tunnels to each GMRE neighbor and corresponding static routes on the
external LAN interface are configured. IP–in–IP tunnels are used as Out of–Band backup links for the DCC
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

links (refer to Figure 161. ).

not permitted without written authorization.

Static routes over tunnels are defined in a metric. This metric is only active if all LAPDs are down.
As soon as one LAPD interface is available again, the static route is inactive and the LAPD interface is
be used again.

FLC A tun0
GMRE Node A

IP IP
LAPD 0 LAPD 1
DCC DCC

failure failure Customer

DCN

DCC DCC
LAPD 0 LAPD 1
IP IP

GMRE Node B
FLC B tun0

Figure 161. DCC Protection Mechanism In–Band / Out of–Band

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 288 / 531

531
 13.7.5.8.2 Work Split between Control Plane and NMS

The control plane enhances the NEs with intelligent multi-vendor, end-to-end and real time capabilities
but it does not replace the NMS.
There is a request for some centralized network management functions (e.g.):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Full awareness of the current network status (configuration, routes, alarms)

– Separation of network domains in order to hide network knowledge to the world.

A mixed approach is followed whereas the NMS manages the network, it:

– Provides the operator an actual view about the status of the whole network.
– Allows the operator to override the control plane decisions or freeze resources such that their status
is no more under the control of the control plane.
– Maintains consistency between nominal route (according to the original network planning) and
current route.
These functions are performed by the ASON Manager. The ASON Manager is a Network Protection
Architecture (NPA) as part of the Network Manager 1354RM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 289 / 531

531
 13.7.5.9 Main Functions supported

13.7.5.9.1 Network Management

Network construction and configuration management

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Autodiscovery based on G.7714.1

– Automatic provisioning of In–Fibre/In–Band control plane and IP–in–IP tunnels
– Assignment and de-assignment of data bearers to TE-links
– Provisioning of data bearer and TE-link related information
– Retrieval of the data bearers TE-links
– Network construction is driven by management system (ASON)

Connection management functions

– SPC Management: 5 priority levels, support of multiple different protection/restoration schemes,

AU4CTPs as endpoints, VC–4 trails in support of GE connections
– Switched Connections management
– Retrieval of SPC and Switched Connections, filtering supported
– Interworking of MS-SPRing and SPCs on domain boundary for SPCs (MS-SPRing on ’drop ports’)
– Modification of existing SPCs: priority, protection type
– Path diversity for dual homing
– Support of SNCP rings (single node interconnection)
– Compound link support

Communication between GMRE and ASON manager

Message loss detection mechanism which allows the ASON Manager to detect wether re-synchronization
with the GMRE is required.

CLI Integration in the USM

CLI access is managed at NE USM level:

Opening the 1678MCC USM, the 1353NM operator sees wether a GMRE instance is controlling the NE
or not.

Split NE Concept

It is possible to partition a NE and to assign these parts to different managers: e.g. a part can be managed
in a traditional way (1354RM) while another part belongs to the GMRE domain and is under GMRE control.
The partitioning is flexible.

Shared ports between different managers

Drop ports are sharable between different managers (e.g. between GMRE and 1354RM).
e.g.: The GMRE closes a SNCP ring (termination of a 1+1 SNCP between 2 drop ports and an NNI port)
and the 1354RM interconnects other CTPs of these 2 ports.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 290 / 531

531
 13.7.5.9.2 Maintenance

Maintenance functions

– Controlled shutting down of a port

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Changing of the nominal route of a SPC

not permitted without written authorization.

– Changing of the current route of a SPC/SC via soft rerouting

Alarm management

– Alarm reporting and state change notifications

13.7.5.9.3 Distributed Restoration

With the introduction of the GMRE, Distributed Restoration is supported, which is implemented in a
distributed way. This means that the restoration actions are performed autonomously by the control plane.

In a distributed restoration network, backup route calculation and implementation is done in parallel by all
the nodes implied in the affected routes. Once a backup route has been calculated by a source node, route
reservation messages are sent to all the GMREs along the backup route. The addressed GMREs translate
the route setup messages to corresponding commands towards the underlying NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 291 / 531

531
 13.7.5.9.4 Protection

Protection (SNCP) is static. The protecting capacity is provisioned in advance and requires 100%
additional network resources (in case of 1+1 SNCP).
Protection performance is very fast (<50 ms), but requires 100% additional network resources (1+1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SNCP).
not permitted without written authorization.

SNCP Ring Closure

SNCP ring closure means a domain–external SNCP that is terminated on the GMRE domain boundary.

There are many different SPC configurations possible: the external SNCP could reside in the ingress node
(head end of the connection), in the egress node (tail end of the connection), or external SNCPs could even
exist on both ends of the connection segment crossing the GMRE domain. Moreover, the connection
segment inside the GMRE domain can be unprotected, or 1+1 SNCP protected. For a subset of the
possible connection types refer to Figure 162.

Ingress Transit Egress

Node Nodes Node

SPC Setup Direction

Connection with ...

1+1 SNCP at
the head end

Connection with ...

1+1 SNCP at
the tail end

Connection with ...

1+1 SNCP at
both ends

...
SNCP protected
connection with
...
1+1 SNCP at
both ends

GMRE Domain
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 162. SNCP Ring Closure in a GMRE Network

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 292 / 531

531
 SNCP ring closure handles a SNCP connection at client/drop side at source and destination side. The
feature itself can be divided into:

– Management plane handling:

Two source points and two destination points for these kind of connections are supported for set and
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

get operations.
not permitted without written authorization.

– Control plane handling:

Signaling messages are extended to carry two destination end points. The appearance of two
destination points triggers the setup of a domain external SNCP in the egress node.

13.7.5.9.5 Restoration

Restoration does not rely on an allocated protecting capacity: available resources are shared between
multiple connections within the network, leading to more optimized resource utilization.
Restoration actions require less additional network capacity, but they are typically slower.

13.7.5.9.6 Protection and Restoration

Overview

The reliability and availability performances of a network in terms of restoration times and of additional
network resources can be optimized by combining protection and restoration mechanisms.

Protection and Restoration combined provide very high reliable connections because a failed leg of the
1+1 SNCP protected connection is restored.

The Protection and Restoration process can be decomposed in 3 steps:

– Alarm detection and correlation

After a failure has occurred, failure point and failure type are propagated to the protection processor
(K1/K2 processor which handles the APS) or to the restoration processor (GMRE).

– Protection or restoration request

The protection resp. restoration processor correlates the actual failure situation with the actual state
of available resources, for a bidirectional route it overwrites the old cross connections with new one.
In case of protection the request is forwarded via the APS protocol, in case of restoration the request
is forwarded by means of signaling.

– Protection switch
A protection switch is completed when both sides of a failed route have switched to the available
resource and the traffic is restored.

Main Tasks and Characteristics

In correlation with the feature ’Protection and Restoration’ the following tasks are performed:

Nominal Route Handling

The nominal routes are calculated by a planning tool usually implemented in the centralized network
management system. The target is to optimize the utilization of the transport network, taking into account
the available network topology and resources, the scheduled maintenance actions and the equipment to
be installed. A nominal route is setup as a point to point connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 293 / 531

531
 Route setup and release is performed by exchanging signaling messages between nodes. A setup is
requested using a route message containing a unique connection ID, desired route and service scope.
Basing on this information the setup request is passed in a hop-by-hop manner along the explicit route
to the egress node. After reaching its destination the setup request is confirmed with a RESV message.
The RESV is passed in the reverse direction and each node along the route establishes the connection
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

on the transport plane.

not permitted without written authorization.

Definition of Shared Risk Groups (SRG)

The SRG is a mechanism implemented to face the failure diversity within the network.
E.g. it may happen, that a backup route cannot be established resp. activated because the nominal and
the backup routes share the same failure.
The SRG mechanism allows the modeling of single failures which affect multiple links (e.g. cable cut) and
nodes (e.g. equipment room flooded). Shared Risk Groups are defined and the TE links are assigned with
SRG identifiers. An SRG attribute may be empty, comprise a single identifier or a list of multiple identifiers.
Two entities are ’failure diverse’ if they do not share the same risk, hence if they do not belong to the same
SRG.

Source Based Restoration (SBR)

Source Based Restoration (SBR) is intended as last restoration escalation if other restoration action did
not succeed. SBR is also supported as service, however this service should be used only occasionally due
to the contention issues related to that restoration method detailed below. So SBR is applied under the
following conditions:

– One or more legs of a PRC failed

– Guarenteed Restoration was not able to find a backup and the route failed
– SBR was used as a service

The SBR mechanism where the source node calculates the new route after failure, is based on the network
information before failure and the failure notification which allows to locate the failed resource in the
network. SBR is a mechanism optimized for resource utilization and not for performance.

Guaranteed Restoration (GR)

One potential backup route is calculated and registered by the source node in advance. As the network
state changes dynamically each update requires a verification wether the pre-calculated route can be kept
or might be affected and must be re-calculated.
A backup route is registered in the control plane, but is not implemented in the transport plane. After a
failure occurs, the registered backup route is activated. When the nominal route is available again, the
traffic is moved back and the backup route is deactivated.

Computation of a Backup Route

The backup route computation is the process which calculates the shortest backup route for a nominal
route which fulfills a number of given diversity constraints.
The constraints can be the following:
– Exclusion of the entities belonging to a given list of SRGs
– Exclusion of a set of links (link diversity)
– Inclusion of entities belonging to a given list of links that should be reused for a new route
– Route verification if an explicit route is given by operator or NMS

The following restoration applications require the computation of a backup route:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– PRC

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 294 / 531

531
 The failed SNCP leg is restored like the post-calculated SBR. The new route must be diverse to the
redundant SNCP legs (actual and nominal) and to the failure of the actual failed leg.
– Source Based Restoration
The backup route is computed after a failure has occurred on the active route. Since the point of
failure is known, the backup route must be diverse to the point of failure, using the link diversity of
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

the failed link.

not permitted without written authorization.

– Guaranteed Restoration
In this case the backup route is computed at setup time of the nominal route and both nominal and
backup routes must be fully (link, node and SRG) diverse.

Reversion

A restoration route is usually longer and uses more ports than the optimized nominal route. For this reason
it is very important to switch back to the nominal route as soon as it is available again.
Reversion can be done in two modes:
– Automatically: After the nominal route becomes available, the traffic is moved back to the nominal
route as soon as the periodically end–to–end check is successful.
– Manually: After the nominal route becomes available the connection state changes to ’ready to
revert’. The operator triggers the reversion manually.
After all nodes have selected the nominal route, the backup route can be deactivated.
Reversion does not affect the traffic and is “hitless”.

Priority and Preemption Handling

As additional network resources for protection and restoration should be minimized, it might happen in
case of several network failures that there are no more resource to restore a failed connection. In this case
a high priority route can preempt a low priority route.
A priority number is assigned to each route. Up to 5 priority levels are supported.
Priority and preemption comprise the following functionalities:

– Priority based link resource handling:

The CTP label holds the priority of the link.
– Priority based link resource advertisement:
The available resources are grouped according to their priorities.
– Priority based route determination:
A route can be calculated for a given priority.
– Priority based preemption:
The lowest priority route is preempted first.
– Handling of preempted low priority traffic:
A preempted route must be torn down and the connection is removed from the HW. It is up to the
source node to verify and re-establish a nominal route once it has been preempted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 295 / 531

531
 13.7.5.9.7 Multicast Connections

Multicast connections provide a unidirectional service from one source node to multiple destination points.
This is achieved by setting up a multicast tree, whereby a single resource is used per hop.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The multicast tree is characterized by unidirectional resources per link and unidirectional connections per
not permitted without written authorization.

node. An example is shown in Figure 163.

The root of a multicast tree is the multicast source node. This is the node from which the multicast tree
is established to all destination nodes. The multicast destination nodes terminates the multicast tree
and provide traffic to the destination client nodes. A path between a multicast source node and a
destination node is called leaf.

Branch nodes are intermediate nodes that are not destination nodes, but have to provide one or more
branches to other nodes. Branch and destination nodes are a combination of both nodes: The incoming
multicast traffic must be ”dropped” towards the destination clients and ”continued” to other nodes.

Shared resource

Dedicated resource

Figure 163. Multicast connections (example)

Multicast connections are basically characterized by:

– Unidirectional connections without reverse direction

Support of unidirectional connections (here point–to–point) that are based on bidirectional

connections (SPCs), but the reverse direction cannot be used for other connections.

– Setup of a multicast tree

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• All leafs of a multicast tree have one common source node and must have the same service
type (e.g. VC4, VC4–4c, VC4–16c, VC4–64c, AU3) and the same priority.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 296 / 531

531
 • The protection types unprotected, SBR and GR are supported and can be mixed in a multicast
tree.

• The whole multicast tree has a single source node and a common multicast group id. That
means, that all leafs have two identifiers: a common id and a leaf specific id.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• For restoration and free routed purposes, the source node maintains the full list of links involved
in the multicast tree. This allows reuse of link resources for routing purposes. In effect the
minimum network resources are taken for adding new leafs or restoring connections to leafs.

– Maintenance actions on a multicast tree

Maintenance commands for individual paths (e.g. move (nominal or current), add leaf, remove leaf,
shutting down data bearer) are supported.

– Multicast restoration (SBR and GR)

• Only the leafs that are affected by the fault will be restored.

• Each leaf is restored separately, but multiple leafs are able to share resources with other leafs
of the same tree.

• The affected leafs are processed sequentially at the source node node for routing, while setting
up the restoration path is done in parallel. Thus, a leaf can use the resources already defined
for the previous leaf without additional cost.

• The restoration time of a single multicast tree can be considered as the sum of the leafs to be
restored. Compared to a restoration with the same amount of single connections this restoration
time can be slower, but is still in the same dimension. This effect is caused by the sequential
setup and correlation required to share common branches.

Refer to the Network Configuration Guide GMRE for network specific hints regarding multicast
connections. Refer to the CLI User Guide GMRE for the configuration of multicast connections via the
Command Line Interface.

13.7.5.10 Glossary

Backup Route
Protecting route between source and destination nodes.

Call
An association between end points that supports an instance of a service.
Also called SNC.

Client or user
Equipment that is connected to the transport network for utilizing transport services.
Example: IP routers, ATM switch, Ethernet switches.

Control Plane
Consists of IP Control Channels (IPCCs) over a Control Plane physical interface (e.g. Ethernet) plus the
GMPLS routing Engines (GMRE).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 297 / 531

531
 Compound Link

A serial compound link interconnects two 1678MCCs, that are involved in the ASON/GMPLS control
plane, via one or multiple intermediate nodes (e.g. one or more 1670SMs). These intermediate nodes do
not participate in the control plane. This means that the two 1678MCCs are immediate neighbors from the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

control plane perspective, but are not immediate neighbors in the data plane.
not permitted without written authorization.

Refer to the Network Configuration Guide GMRE for details and restrictions. Refer to the CLI User Guide
GMRE for the configuration of compound links using the Command Line Interface.

Data Plane
Other term for Transport Plane.

Destination node
Node that terminates a connection request.

Egress node
Border node where a route exits the network.

Graceful Deletion
SDH/SONET and OTH allow contiguous route monitoring at all points (client and network). A deletion at
one point of the route would cause alarm detection in the subsequent routes and potentially consequent
actions (protection switch or re-routing). In order to suppress that undesired consequent actions at
deletion time the deletion message sequence is pre-processed by a ’deletion-in-progress’ message
turning off the monitoring along the route.

Ingress node
Border node where a route enters the network.
Also called Source node.

In-Fiber / In-Band control plane traffic

Refers to the transport of control plane traffic over a communication channel embedded in the
data-bearing physical link.

IP Control Channel (IPCC)

Logical communication link between the node and its neighbor over which control plane messages are
sent.

Management Plane
Performs management functions for the transport plane, the control plane and the system as a whole. It
also provides coordination between all the planes.

Nominal Route
Route between source and destination nodes, as calculated by the planning tool.

Out-Of-Fiber /Out-Of-Band control plane traffic

Refers to the transport of control plane traffic over a dedicated communication link, separate from the
data-bearing link, between the control plane entities.

Route
Subnetwork connection between ingress and egress nodes.

Point to Point Connection

A typical active connection with a single leg. (against 2 legs for a SNCP connection).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Policy
The set of rules applied to interfaces at the system boundary, which filters messages into an allowed set.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 298 / 531

531
 Pre-calculated Restoration Connection (guaranteed restoration)
An optimized route restoration by which an active route can be restored by a pre-calculated
(pre-registered) but inactive backup route. As long as the nominal route is active the backup route exists
at control plane only. After failure the backup route is activated and the failed route is torn down. After
nominal route repair, an SNCP is established, the traffic is switched back to the nominal route and the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

backup route is deactivated. The backup route is fully diverse. If no backup is available at the failure time
not permitted without written authorization.

the connection is restored in SBR manner.

Protection and Restoration Combined (PRC) Connection

A combination of SNCP and SBR by which a connection is setup as an SNCP and once one leg fails the
failed leg is restored in SBR manner.

Shared Risk Group (SRG)

The route reliability depends of the diversity between working and protecting / restoration routes: the
maximum reliability is achieved when working and protection routes are completely diverse (no possible
common point of failure). The diversity level is given by defining the shared risk groups.

Soft Rerouting
Manual Switching Time

Soft Permanent Connection (SPC)

Initiated by the Management System and implemented like an end-to-end route for which a
protection/restoration scheme can be applied.
The ASON Manager has the responsibility to maintain the connection in the desired manner.

Source Based Restoration (SBR)

The source node is responsible for the restoration actions.
A typical route restoration by which a failed nominal route is restored by the source node in a flexible
manner. The restoration route is failure diverse only. The behavior and implementation is similar to the
guaranteed restoration with the difference that the restoration route is not registered before failure and
might be cranked back by any node.

Protected SBR
An MSP protected connection that is restored in SBR manner once both MSP legs failed at any
intermediate link. SBR restoration may also use unprotected MSP links.

SBR route
End-to-end connection across a restoration domain with source based restoration scheme.

Source node
Node that requests a connection.
Also called ingress node.

Switched Connection (SC)

Initiated by a client via signaling.
Maintenance is under the responsibility of the client itself.

Subnetwork Controller (SNC)

Element of the control plane which implements the GMPLS protocol. The Alcatel–Lucent SNC is the
GMRE.

Subnetwork Connection (SNC)

Dynamic relation between 2 subnetwork points at the boundary of the same subnetwork.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Also called ’Call’.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 299 / 531

531
 Traffic Engineering Link (TE Link)
For routing purposes, multiple data links may be combined to form a single TE-Link. This summarization
mechanism reduces the amount of routing information which have to be disseminated through the
network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Transport Network (Transport Plane, Data Plane)

not permitted without written authorization.

Abstract representation which is defined by a set of access points (ingress and egress) and a set of
network services.

Transport Network Element (TNE)

NE within the transport network.

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

A VPN is a set of virtually dedicated transport resources, supporting a closed user group, over transport
links that are shared between multiple users.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 300 / 531

531
 13.8 Performance Monitoring Subsystem

13.8.1 Overview
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Performance Monitoring process consists of three different steps:

not permitted without written authorization.

• performance monitoring primitives processing: it is performed by atomic functions (termination

functions) and provides the EBC (Errored Block Count) and DS (Defect Second) defect
indications;

• performance monitoring event processing: provides the following performance events:

– ES (Errored Second): one second period in which DS is set or there is at least one errored
block;
– SES (Severely Errored Second) one second period in which DS is set or the EBC is greater
or equal to Y% of the blocks in this second (Y=30 for the path);
– BBE (Background Block Errors) is the count of EBC events in one second not SES;

• performance monitoring Data collection & History processing: for each event, a count is
performed on a defined period (15 min or 24 h); the results of these counts are stored in
performance registers (current and historical registers).

If at least 10 consecutive seconds are SES, the period is said Unavailable Time (UAT) period.
In this time the events count is inhibited. During unavailable time, each second is counted as optional UAS
event.

The Performance Monitoring Process is performed for two different purposes:

• Maintenance:

– the monitoring is applied on the path or section layer

– events are counted (in the available period) by 15 min and 24 h counters
– trail is monitored in the two different directions independently (unidirectional counters)
– it is used a degradation monitoring by threshold crossing

• Quality of Service:

– the monitoring is applied only on the path layer

– events are counted (in the available period) only by 24 h counters
– trail is monitored at the same time in the two different directions (bidirectional counters)
– it is not used a degradation monitoring by threshold crossing

Types of counters are the following:

• Errored Second (ES)

• Severely Errored Second (SES)
• Out Of Frame Second (OFS)
• Background Block Error (BBE)
• Unavailable Second (UAS)
• Elapsed time

The 1678MCC supports the suspect interval flag.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

For more details about the list of PM counters supported for each 1678MCC board refer to the Operator’s
Handbook.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 301 / 531

531
 13.8.2 Monitoring Functions

Paths are often responsible of the end–to–end customer service, so they can be requested to provide
monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and, in addition, to cooperate with specific monitoring to the
network Maintenance applications.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 1678MCC equipment has the full set of Alcatel–Lucent OMSN Performance Monitoring capabilities,
not permitted without written authorization.

physically performed in the Matrix (HO &LO) and in the ports.

PM data collection can be individually activated on the LO–VC trail termination or on the HO–VC trail
termination of the structured VC4 afterwards groomed at LO–VC level.
PM processing is performed according to the standard G.784 recommendation: BBE, ES, SES and UAS
counters are collected.
NE–PM (near–end) monitoring on the incoming signal checks the BIP code violations using the B3 byte
(VC4, VC3) or the bits 1–2 of the V5 byte (VC12); in addition the VCn termination can provide FE–PM
(far–end) monitoring by REI&RDI information of G1 byte (VC4, VC3) or the V5 byte (VC12) processing.
On the same bi–directional VCn–TTP, the unidirectional PM collection for Maintenance application and
bi–directional collection for Quality of Service can simultaneously be activated.

In addiction the 1678MCC equipment performs the following monitoring functions:

• HTCT (Higher Order Tandem Connection Termination) which terminates the N1 byte for locally
terminated VC–4’s.

• HTCM (Higher Order Tandem Connection Monitoring) which performs the monitoring of the N1
byte for non–terminated VC–4’s.

• HSUT (Higher Order Supervisory Unequipped Termination) which performs the trail termination
and monitoring functions of unequipped VC–4’s by terminating and monitoring the path
overhead bytes (J1, G1, C2 and B3).

• HPOM (Higher Order Path Overhead Monitoring) which performs the non–intrusive monitoring
of the path overhead bytes (J1, G1, C2 and B3) for non–terminated VC–4’s.

• LPOM (Lower Order Path Overhead Monitoring) that performs the non–intrusive monitoring of
the path overhead bytes before matrix.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 302 / 531

531
 13.9 External Interfaces Subsystem

The following Table 42. on page 303 summarizes the External interfaces of FLCSERV, FLCCONGI,
MX160/320/640 and LAX20/40 boards.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Table 42. External Interfaces

not permitted without written authorization.

Number Logical Physical

of interfaces interfaces connector

FLCSERV/A board
2 Q3 8 pin RJ45 (for each Q3 interface)
1 F 8 pin RJ45
1 F USB mini–B
currently not supported!
2 2 MHz – 2 Mbit/s external output Sub–D 9 pin female
synchronization signal
2 2 Mbit/s AUX G.703
25 pin SCSI + 4 coaxial
2 64 Kbit/s AUX G.703
(2 input and 2 output)
2 V.11 – 64 Kbit/s currently not supported!
2 V.24 – 9600 bit/s
1 phone jack RJ11
currently not supported!
1 phonic extension tripolar jack female
currently not supported!
1 debug RJ45

FLCCONGI board
2 Q3 8 pin RJ45 (for each Q3 interface)
1 F 8 pin RJ45
1 F USB mini–B
currently not supported!
8 HouseKeeping Input
2 sub–D 15 pin female
4 HouseKeeping Output
7 Remote Alarms
5 Rack Alarms Sub–D 9 pin male
1 debug RJ45

MX160, MX320 (GA), MX640(GA) LAX20, LAX40, LAC40 board

1 debug RJ45
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

For more details about Housekeeping management refer to the CT Operator’s Handbook (chapter
“Station Alarms”).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 303 / 531

531
 13.10 Power Supply Subsystem

The architecture of the power subsystem is distributed.

The input battery power:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– –48 V (–40.5 V to –57 V) or

– –60 V (–50 V to –72 V)

is delivered without level translation to all boards in the shelf.

When two inputs are used (Battery A and Battery B) the highest voltage is selected.

Each board has an on–board DC/DC converter, which generates the required voltage.
Distribution of power supplies inherently provides protection against single converter failures.

13.10.1 1678MCC Main Shelf

13.10.1.1 New Generation Top Rack Unit (NGTRU)

The 1678MCC Rack is generally equipped with the New Generation Top Rack Unit (NGTRU) where are
also located the rack lamps. The NGTRU is connected to a separate so called service power supply
“VSERV” needed for the “Rack Lamp Alarm” board and dedicated shelf alarming boards. The station
power supplies are terminated into the NGTRU. The NGTRU performs the following functions:

– Delivers up to 6 Step-Up converter in the housed assemblies or up to 6 circuit breaker (bypass

modules)
– Delivers the service battery (VSERV) to the housed assemblies
– Sums up the alarms received from the shelves thus generating optical indications and transmitting
remote alarms towards an external target.
– Connects the assemblies (up to 3) to the supervisory network through connectors situated into the
NGTRU
– Provides up to 4 individual alarms per step up converter

There exist two types of modules using in the NGTRU:

– The Step-Up converter

DC/DC converter with a constant output voltage of –65 V  2 V

– The Bypass Battery module

Circuit Breaker

The NGTRU can house up to six step-up converter or bypass modules. Any mix of these parts is allowed,
but always as pair. That means branch A and branch B of the same shelf has to be fused with two step-up
converters or two bypass modules.

The circuit-breaker unit is part of the bypass module and is taken if the output voltage is equal to the input
voltage. In any case if the shelf consumption is more than 20 A (for UBattmin = –40.5 V) the Step-Up
converter will be used instead of a circuit breaker. In this case the constant output voltage of –65 V limits
the max. current (Imax).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 304 / 531

531
 13.10.1.2 Power Distribution

2–wire and 3–wire Functional Protection Earth (FPE) can be installed. Figure 165. shows the 1678MCC
power distribution with 3-wire FPE and Figure 166. shows the 1678MCC power distribution with 2-wire
FPE.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The delivery state of the step–up converters is 2–wire. A jumper is located on the rear panel of
the step–up converter (refer to Figure 164. ). In case of 3–wire systems the jumper have to be
removed!

have to be removed in
case of 3–wire systems

Figure 164. Step–up Converter – Location of Jumper

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 305 / 531

531
 2 Batt. ret.
Top access 2 Batt. ret.
–a 1 Batt. ret. is not
+a
shown
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

–b
+b Bottom access
not permitted without written authorization.

FPE/
GNDM

NGTRU
–a+a +b –b
NGTRU
GNDM
Rack

Rack

1 Batt. ret.
Top access
–a
+
–b

FPE/
GND M

FPE

–a+a +b –b –a
+a
NGTRU
GNDM –b
+b
Rack FPE/
3-wire FPE GNDM

Figure 165. 1678MCC Power Supply with 3-wire FPE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 306 / 531

531
 Top access
–a bottom access
–b
+/FPE/
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

GNDM
not permitted without written authorization.

FPE

–a +a +b–b NGTRU
NGTRU
GNDM

Top access Rack

Rack
–a
+a/FPE/GNDM
–b
+b/FPE/GNDM

FPE

–a +a +b–b Rack
NGTRU
GNDM FPE

–a
–b
+/FPE/
GNDM

2-wire FPE

Figure 166. 1678MCC Power Supply with 2-wire FPE

The distribution of the New Generation Top Rack Unit (NGTRU) battery voltage (65V) and the distribution
of the Service Battery voltage (3.6V) inside 1678MCC equipment are illustrated at high level in
Figure 167. on page 308.

The Power Supply Filter (PSF) board get the power from the NGTRU and distributes the power to all
boards inside the main shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 307 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Distribution of Top Rack Unit power

Distribution of Service Battery voltage

Figure 167. Power distribution

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
308 / 531
 13.10.2 OEDs

13.10.2.1 Top Rack Unit (TRU)

The OED Rack is generally equipped with the Top Rack Unit (TRU) where are also located the rack lamps.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The TRU is connected to a separate so called service power supply “VSERV” needed for the “Rack Lamp
not permitted without written authorization.

Alarm” board and dedicated shelf alarming boards. The TRU performs the following functions:

– Delivers up to 12 circuit breakers (bypass modules)

– Delivers the service battery (VSERV) to the housed assemblies
– Sums up the alarms received from the shelves thus generating optical indications and transmitting
remote alarms towards an external target.
– Connects the assemblies (up to 6) to the supervisory network through connectors situated into the
TRU

The TRU has been designed to distribute the Power supply voltage (A and B). All the outputs are protected
by circuit-breakers (1 to 12) having a max. of 30 A capacity. The total load amount must not exceed 60 A
for each battery. Should circuit-breakers having a capacity higher than 20 A, they have to be spaced as
most as possible inside the box to reduce over-temperature. If only one station battery is available, it is
possible to connect both Power blocks together thus utilizing a distributor with a max. of 12 outputs .The
whole current capacity must not exceed 60 A.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 309 / 531

531
 13.10.2.2 Power Distribution in the OEDs

Two separated power branches (branch A and branch B) supply the converters. Branch A and branch B
may be connected to two different sources or to a common source.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Two circuit breaker blocks, one for each branch, are located in the power distribution unit (Top Rack Unit
not permitted without written authorization.

– TRU) of each rack. The circuit breakers are of following types:

– FAN unit 1670SM: 4A

– 1670SM shelf: 25 A
– FAN unit 1662SMC: 4A
– 1662SMC shelf: 16 A
– LAN switch: 4A

Figure 168. on page 310 show the power distribution with 3-wire FPE.

2 Batt. ret.
2 Batt. ret. 1 Batt. ret. is not
Top access shown
–a Bottom access
+a
–b TRU FPE
+b
FPE/
GND Rack
M Rack
TRU
–a –b
+a +b
FPE

1 Batt. ret.
Top access
–a
+
–b
FPE/
GND
M FPE
Rack
–a
TRU +a
–a –b –b
+a +b
FPE +b
FPE/
GNDM
3-wire FPE

Figure 168. OED Shelf Power Supply with 3-wire FPE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 310 / 531

531
 Figure 169. on page 311 shows the power distribution with 2-wire FPE.

Top access
–a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

–b
not permitted without written authorization.

+/FPE/
GNDM Bottom access
Rack
TRU FPE
TRU
–a –b Rack
+a +b FPE

Top access
–a
+a /FPE/GNDM
–b
+b /FPE/GNDM

Rack

TRU
–a –b
+a +b FPE
FPE

–a
–b
+/FPE/
GNDM
2-wire FPE

Figure 169. OED Shelf Power Supply with 2-wire FPE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 311 / 531

531
 13.11 Equipment Alarms and Tests Subsystem

In this paragraph are described the following functionalities managed in the 1678MCC equipment:

• the Equipment Alarms (the alarms are referred to by the corresponding probable cause which
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

is visualized on OS);
not permitted without written authorization.

• the Tests (loops)

For more details about the list of all alarms and the list of all loops for each 1678MCC refer to the Operator’s
Handbook.

Refer to para. 13.10 on page 304 for details about Power Distribution.

13.11.1 Battery Failure

Battery Failure is raised only on PSF board when:

• the corresponding Top Rack Unit (TRU) battery voltage is missing

Note: This happens, for instance, when the cable between TRU battery and PSF board is
unplugged.

13.11.2 RUM, RUTM

Each considered 1678MCC item has got a Remote Inventory.

The management of the Remote Inventory results in providing the following equipment alarms:

• RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing): the slot is configured for an item with specific Remote
Inventory but no item is plugged in.

• RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch): the slot is configured for an item with specific
Remote Inventory but an item with different Remote Inventory is plugged in.

13.11.3 RUP

RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) alarm is raised on all items (except PSF board) when:

• Battery Voltage (65V) from both PSF boards are missing.

• At least one Service Battery voltage got by internal converter is failed.

Note: This condition takes into account double failure scenarios such as Battery Voltage (65 V)
from one PSF boards missing and the battery fuse on the item, corresponding to the other PSF
board, is broken.

• The FLC board is present and has got a power problem.

Note: this statement applies only to FLCCONGI and FLCSERV boards

• At least one of the three FANs in a FAN unit does not run.

On RUP occurrence, the information about its cause is provided by the alarm qualifier (i.e. “specific
problem” number).
In the RUP definition for the currently designed items of 1678MCC, the specific problem indicates the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

SPIDER pin on which the problem is detected.

When more equipment problems causing the alarm on an item are contemporarily present, the specific
problem shows the first one detected by SLC.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 312 / 531

531
 13.11.4 Fuse Failure

The alarm for reporting a Battery Fuse Broken is the Fuse Failure.
For describing the fuse failure alarm usage, it is worthwhile to differentiate the PSF board from the other
boards of the NE, as follow:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• In case of PSF board, the fuse failure alarm is raised when a battery fuse of the board is broken
and the corresponding TRU battery voltage (65V) is correctly received.
It means that fuse failure alarm cannot be raised on a PSF board, for which TRU battery voltage
is missing.
The information, about which fuse is broken inside the PSF board, is provided by the specific
problem number. The specific problem indicates the SPIDER pin on which problem is detected.

• In case of all other boards and FAN, the fuse failure alarm is raised when a battery fuse of the
board is broken and the battery voltage of the same branch of the broken fuse is correctly
received.
It means that fuse failure alarm cannot be raised on an item, for which battery voltage of the
same branch of the broken fuse is missing.

The information about the affected battery fuse is on branch of PSF A or on branch of PSF B is provided
by the specific problem number. The specific problem indicates the SPIDER pin on which problem is
detected.

When more equipment problems causing the alarm on an item are contemporarily present, the specific
problem shows the first one detected by SLC.

Note: The Fuse Failure alarm contributes to light the red led on the board frontpanel, like RUP alarm.

13.11.5 Test Management

The functions, described in this section, are used to control and monitor the test operation and returning
the system to the normal environment (i.e. the environment before the test was performed).

The Second Level Controller (SLC) is in charge to perform the following tests on the Optical STM–N ports:

• Line Loopback (external)

• Internal loopback

Each of these Loopbacks is performed driving ASICs on the port boards (Loop and Continue, i.e. the VC
is sent back and also continues its path).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 313 / 531

531
 13.12 Station Alarms

13.12.1 Description
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Station Alarm feature will provide the following main functions:
not permitted without written authorization.

– Rack lamps
– Housekeeping inputs/outputs (GPIs/GPOs)
– Rack reset button

The Station Alarms feature describes the concept of how the rack lamps and contacts either in the NGTRU
or TRU are driven.

Each NGTRU/TRU has 4 independent station alarms and corresponding alarm contacts which are
controlled by one shelf via the R/M–interface of the NGTRU.

There are two different TRUs in the 1678MCC. The main rack which contains the 1678MCC main shelf
(and/or the LO extension shelf) is equipped with the NGTRU (New Generation Top Rack Unit). The OED
racks are equipped with the TRU.

This chapter describes the general station alarm concept used in the 1678MCC for the main rack and OED
racks. In addition it describes the handling of the NGTRU alarms, using the housekeeping input contacts.

13.12.2 Features

The 1678 MCC has the following Station Alarm features:

– Each rack provides one reset push button which is connected to one housekeeping input contact.

– Each shelf has 4 outputs (Power, Lamp 1–3) to connect directly to the 4 station lamps.

– Each 1678MCC main shelf/LO extension shelf has 3 General Purpose Input contacts (GPI) and 4
General Purpose Output contacts (GPO) for operator defined usage.

– Each 1670SM OED shelf has 4 General Purpose Input contacts (GPI) and 2 General Purpose Output
contacts (GPO) for operator defined usage.

– Each 1662SMC OED shelf has 4 General Purpose Input contacts (GPI) and 2 General Purpose
Output contacts (GPO) for operator defined usage.

– It is possible to detect alarms of the equipment mounted in the NGTRU, e.g. Step up converters with
their FANs.

Only one shelf in a rack is connected to the TRU/NGTRU to control the rack lamps:

– In the 1678MCC rack

• the 1678MCC main shelf or
• the LO extension shelf (if only the LO extension shelf is mounted in a separate rack).
– In the OED rack is this generally the lower shelf (1670SM or 1662SMC).

The operator has to specify for the R/M and GPI/O interfaces which shelf is responsible to drive the rack
lamps.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 314 / 531

531
 13.12.3 Architectural Overview

In this section, an architectural overview is given. Figure 170. is more a physical view showing all the
components or subsystems which are necessary to implement this station alarm feature. It shows the
physical interfaces which are provided by each rack:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Internal communication
– Control system
– Craft Terminal (CT) or Element Manager which provides a user–friendly graphical user interface
towards the operator.

Remote Remote Remote Remote

alarming alarming alarming alarming
P L1 L2 L3 P L1 L2 L3 P L1 L2 L3 P L1 L2 L3

R/M R/M R/M R/M

TRU
HMU . Push
Button
TRU
HMU . Push
Button
3 x GPI
NGTRU
HMU
FAN
. Push
Button
3 x GPI
4 x GPO
NGTRU
HMU
FAN
. Push
Button

1662SMC 1662SMC 4 x GPO

ALM

FLC
LO 1678
FANs FANs
FAN FAN

FAN

1670SM OED shelf

1662SMC
4 x GPI or
2 x GPO FANs GPI–CTRL LO shelf
4 x GPI FANs
2 x GPO LAN
LAN FANs

internal LAN
GPO–CTRL
Rack #n Rack #3 Rack #2 Rack #1

CT/EML

Figure 170. Station Alarm System Architecture – Physical View

13.12.4 Control of the (NG)TRU

Only the 1678MCC main shelf/LO extension shelf of the 1678 rack is connected to the NGTRU and can
drive the station lamps. In the OED rack the 1670SM or the 1662SMC shelf can be connected to the TRU.
The shelf is selected according the cabling during equipment provisioning.

Each (NG)TRU is connected with cables either to

– the front panel connectors of the FLCCONGI board in case of 1678MCC main shelf,
– the front panel connectors of the Alarm board in case of LO extension shelf or
– the front panel connectors of the CONGI boards in case of 1670SM/1662SMC OED shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 315 / 531

531
 13.12.4.1 Control from the 1678MCC Main Shelf

On the FLCCONGI/ALM board the “Control and General Interface” (CGI) function is in charge of the
management of rack lamps and housekeeping interfaces for the 1678MCC Network Element. This
interface consists of a set of specialized parallel I/O with certain electrical properties and a DC/DC
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

converter to provide the local voltage (–12 V) for the housekeeping inputs.
not permitted without written authorization.

13.12.4.2 Control from an OED Shelf

The Remote Monitoring (R/M) and housekeeping (HK) interface in OED shelves can also be accessed
via the redundant shelf controllers in the OED shelves (CONGI boards).

13.12.5 NGTRU Alarm Supervision

The NGTRU contains step up converters with FANs which need to be supervised or bypass modules. Only
in case of a failure condition of the step–up converters the equipment has to be alarmed.

Because this granularity is not needed in the 1678MCC NGTRU supervision, some of the alarms of each
step –up converter are joined in the HMU. Voutput or FAN alarm or Intern alarm of the same step–up
converter = Internal alarm.
The NGTRU offers the following alarms at the 25–pin connector interface for each of the 6 step–up
converters (24 alarm pins + ground pin):

– Vinput (<38Veff)
– Internal alarm
• Voutput
• FAN alarm
• Intern alarm

The NGTRU Vinput alarms are mapped to fuse failures (FF), the NGTRU Internal alarms are mapped to
RUP alarms.

Only the alarms of the first step–up converter of each branch, belonging to the 1678MCC main shelf, are
wired to the housekeeping input contacts at the 1678MCC main shelf. For this a connection cable is
necessary. The challenge of this cable is the monitoring of the two step–up converter alarms for the
1678MCC main shelf via housekeeping input contacts (GPIs) by the FLCCONGI.
The first 4 GPI contacts of the main shelf are predefined. There are used to signal “Power failures” of the
4 Step–up converters which are used in the NGTRU. The alarms are VinputA, VinputB, InternalA and
InternalB. These GPI contacts can’t be assigned by the operator for other purposes.

13.12.6 Hardware Aspects

The physical interfaces like rack lamp interface (RM) towards NGTRU/TRU or Housekeeping Contacts
(GPI/GPO) are provided by:

– 1678MCC Main shelf (refer to Figure 171. )

• RM (FLCCONGI)
• GPs (FLCCONGI)

– 1678MCC LO extension shelf (refer to Figure 172. )

• RM (ALM)
• GPs (ALM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 316 / 531

531
 – OED shelf 1670SM (refer to Figure 173. )
• RM (CONGIHC_A)
• GP (CONGIHC_A)

– OED shelf 1662SMC (refer to Figure 174. )

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• RM (CONGI_A)
not permitted without written authorization.

• GP (CONGI_A)

Note:
The customer interface supporting Housekeeping contacts will be provided by the Housekeeping
Monitoring Unit (HMU).

Upper FAN RACK LAMPS

PSF PSF
R/M
FLCSERVICE

FLCCONGI
1678MCC

HK & RA

Push Button
HMU NGTRU
Step up
Alarms

Lower FAN
3xGPI
4xGPO

Figure 171. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1678MCC Shelf

Upper FAN RACK LAMPS

PSF PSF
R/M
dummy plate

1678MCC
ALM
HK & RA

Push Button
HMU NGTRU
Step up
Alarms

Lower FAN
3xGPI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

4xGPO

Figure 172. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of LO Extension Shelf

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 317 / 531

531
 RACK LAMPS

R/M

R/M
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

CONGIHC_A

CONGIHC_B
1670SM
HK & RA

HK & RA
Push Button
4xGPI HMU
2xGPO

AUX_HK

AUX_HK
FANs

Figure 173. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1670SM Shelf

RACK LAMPS
R/M

R/M
1662SMC
CONGI_A

CONGI_B
HK & RA

HK & RA

Push Button
4xGPI HMU
2xGPO FAN Alarms

Upper FAN
Lower FAN

Figure 174. Rack Lamp Interfaces including GP Contacts of 1662SMC Shelf

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 318 / 531

531
 13.12.6.1 Rack Lamp (RM) Interface

The rack lamp unit provides 4 alarm lamps with colors as defined in Table 43. The (P)ower lamp indicates
“power ok” only for the shelf, that drives the rack lamps, not for the whole rack. The (P)ower lamp lit during
normal operation.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The three station alarm lamps (L1, L2, L3) can be configured by customer.
not permitted without written authorization.

If an OED shelf drives the rack lamps, the power lamp is switched off when
both branches are OK. In case of a failed branch the power lamp is lit
(inverse behavior as normally)!

The three station alarm lamps are off in normal operation and on during dedicated alarm conditions.

Restriction if an OED shelf drives the rack lamps

There are the following restriction:

– In case of a failed branch the alarm lamp L3 (yellow) is switched on, independent of configured alarm
filters on software side.

Table 43. Rack Lamp Colors

Lamp position 1 2 3 4
Lamp label P L1 L2 L3
Color green red red yellow

13.12.6.2 Reset Push Button

The reset push button will be located on the HMU. The reset push button is controlled by SW and allows
to reset all GPO contacts and the rack lamps L1 to L3.

13.12.7 Supported Customer individual Housekeeping contacts

Depending on kind of used shelf different quantity of GPIs/GPOs are supported. In case of pure OED
shelves (1670/1662) CONGI 3–wire must be used only. With this boards each rack provides up to
4 housekeeping inputs and 2 housekeeping output contacts.
In case of 1678MCC shelf/LO extension shelf up to 3 GPIs and 4 GPOs are supported at rack level.

13.12.8 Housekeeping Monitoring Unit (HMU)

The HMU is part of the 1678MCC Main and OED racks with following applications:

– 1678MCC Main Rack:

• Monitoring of up to six Step–Up Converter Alarms

• Client Interface for Housekeeping Contacts (GPIs/GPOs)
• Rack Reset Push Button

– In case of OED Racks:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Rack Reset Push Button

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 319 / 531

531
 HMU

HK MS2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

NGTRU MS1
not permitted without written authorization.

Reset Push Button

COED
MS3 MON

HK Connector for Housekeeping

NGTRU Connector for NGTRU
MS1 Connector for Main Shelf No.1/LO Extension Shelf
MS2 Connector for Main Shelf No. 2
MS3 Connector for Main Shelf No. 3
COED Connector for OED Shelf
MON Connector for FAN of 1662SMC shelf

Figure 175. Schematic Drawing of HMU Architecture

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 320 / 531

531
 13.13 Remote Inventory Subsystem

The Remote Inventory functions permits the operator to retrieve information about any board or module
present on the equipment.
The available information is: construction date, code number, maker name, Board–type, etc. (refer to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

details in the Operator’s Handbook).

not permitted without written authorization.

The Remote Inventory function is present in all the boards and modules.

The relevant data are transported by a serial link (named RIBUS in Figure 176. on page 321) that connects
all boards or modules of the equipment.
The block ”RIBUS–I/F” of figure implements the interface of the serial link with the remote inventory device
(named RI in the figure). Further it manages the slot identifier (ID) and the board type (CType). The CType
information is contained on the RI device.
The RI can be also present on some sub–modules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
micro–controllers and so on).
This block can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O parallel
commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the RIBUS link.

If it is not possible to read the Remote Inventory information, a “Board Fail” alarm is declared.

RIBUS
RI I/F

SHELF RIBUS
CONTROLLER

Generic Board (or Module)

Board
X Indications

RIBUS Board
EQUIPMENT I/F
CONTROLLER RI
ID
...

Board I/O Intracard

RIBUS Module
RI I/F
Module
RI

...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 176. Remote Inventory Subsystem

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 321 / 531

531
 13.14 OED Integration

13.14.1 General
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter covers the introduction of the 1670SM and 1662SMC into the 1678MCC. The reasons for
not permitted without written authorization.

doing this are to provide external interfaces which are not offered by the 1678MCC main shelf, like 2Mbit/s,
and mainly to increment the matrix capacity which can be used for STM-1 and STM-4 interfaces.

13.14.2 System Requirements

This chapter presents the detailed requirements for the 1678 OED Integration feature. The OED
integration feature is driven by the motivation

– to provide I/O types which are not supported in the 1678MCC main shelf
– to reuse existing equipment as additional I/O ports
– to increase the number of possible I/O ports
– to allow a better usage of the HO matrix capacity in the 1678MCC main shelf by I/O types which would
be limited by the number of I/O slots in the 1678MCC main shelf.

The OED integration feature defines a complete integration of OEDs consisting of

– the mechanical OED integration and

– the SW OED integration.

13.14.3 Mechanical OED Integration Requirements

The following figure describes how the OEDs 1670SM and the 1662SMC are connected to the 1678MCC
main shelf and which hardware components are involved.

1670SM 1678MCC Main Shelf 1662SMC

VSR10G
1
16 x STM_16
LINK_W

2
4 x I–64

S16.1 SYNTH16_A
3
–

4
16 x STM_16

1P
LINK_P

4 x I–64

2P S16.1
SYNTH16_B
3P
–

EC 4P EC

CON_A CON_B FLCSERV FLCCONGI CON_A

LAN
Topology
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 177. Schematic drawing of OED Integration

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 322 / 531

531
 13.14.4 SW OED Integration Requirements

The 1678MCC main shelf and all integrated OEDs are seen as one network element from an external point
of view. The control of the OEDs has to be done via the 1678MCC control system.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The links from the OEDs to the 1678MCC main shelf are internal links of the network element and are to
not permitted without written authorization.

be managed internally. The SW supports the complete configuration of these internal links including the
required link protection.

The complete 1678MCC network element including all integrated OEDs runs with one selected clock
source. The SW supports the complete configuration of the synchronization mechanism in the OEDs and
main shelf.

13.14.5 Kinds of OEDs

The following OEDs are integrated into the 1678MCC:

– 1670SM
– 1662SMC

The number of OEDs which can be connected to the 1678MCC main shelf is limited on one side by the
I/O ports used as link ports in the 1678MCC main shelf and on the other side by the LO matrix capacity
offered by the 1678MCC main shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 323 / 531

531
 13.14.5.1 1670SM

General

The optical edge device 1670SM provides interfaces:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– which are also supported by the 1678MCC Main shelf (several HO interfaces)
– which are not supported by the 1678MCC Main shelf

Equipment

The mechanical integration is such that the 1670SM is housed in 600x300 mm racks. Back to back and
stand alone application of OED-Racks will be supported. The system is designed for 2 wire and 3 wire
application. EMC shielding is done on shelf level. The 1670SM shelves are indoor equipment and it is
recommended to be installed in a air conditioned location. The layout of the 1670SM shelf is shown in
Figure 178.

Figure 178. shows the basic equipment of a 1670SM shelf. Detailed information about basic equipment
are described in chapter 12.1 on page 147.

I/O Interfaces

The 1670SM integration offers the following interfaces:

– 140 Mbit/s
– STM-1e
– STM-1o
– STM-4.

Note: For the supported I/O interfaces refer to chapter 12.1.5.1 on page 150.

1670SM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415161718 19 20 21

Accesscards
CONGIHC copyB
CONGIHC copyA

AccessArea
empty
empty
empty

22 23 24
2425 26 27 28 2930 31 323334 35 36 3738 3940 41

PortCards
HCMATRIX copyB
I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

I/O slots assigned

HCMATRIX copyA

to USR LINKs 1

to USR LINKs 2

to USR LINKs 4
to USR LINKs 3

PortArea
EQUICO

empty

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
VSR LINK 1A

VSR LINK 1B

VSR LINK 2A

VSR LINK 2B

VSR LINK 3A

VSR LINK 3B

VSR LINK 4A

VSR LINK 4B

LINKArea
BTERM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 178. Layout of the 1670SM Shelf

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 324 / 531

531
 13.14.5.2 1662SMC

General

The 2 Mbit/s interfaces which are not supported by the 1678MCC Main shelf are provided by the optical
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

edge device 1662SMC.

not permitted without written authorization.

Equipment

The mechanical integration is such that the 1662SMC is housed in 600x300 mm racks. Back to back and
stand alone application of OED-Racks will be supported. The system is designed for 2 wire and 3 wire
application. EMC shielding is done on shelf level. The 1662SMC shelves are indoor equipment and it is
recommended to be installed in a air conditioned location. It must be noted that max 504x2 Mbit/s ports
can be equipped in one shelf. The layout of the 1662SMC shelf is shown in Figure 179.

Figure 179. shows the basic equipment of a 1662SMC shelf. Detailed information about basic
equipment are described in chapter 12.2 on page 179.

I/O Interfaces

The 1662SMC integration offers the following interfaces:

– 2 Mbit/s
– STM-16.

Note: For the supported I/O interfaces refer to chapter 12.2.4.1 on page 181.

1662SMC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SYNTH16 copyA

SYNTH16 copyB
A

B
Access
Access
Access
Access

Access
Access
Access
Access
CONGI

CONGI
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port

Figure 179. 1662SMC Shelf: Face Layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 325 / 531

531
 13.14.6 OED Synchronization

The System-Synchronization is part of the 1678MCC Main Shelf (refer to Figure 180. ). The
synchronization with possible extension shelves (eg. 1670SM or 1662SMC) will be done without special
clock cable through standard SDH interfaces by using SSM signalling. The synchronization subsystem
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

provides the timing reference and represents the SDH Equipment Clock (SEC). The subsystem performs
not permitted without written authorization.

the functionality identified by the ITU-T recommendation G.783 as SDH Equipment Timing Source
(SETS).

The OED subsystems are able to handle the Priority and Quality (SSM) synchronization algorithms
termination functionality. Source for the OED synchronization is either a customer signal or an internal
STM-n link provided by the main shelf. The synchronization information between OED and Main shelf is
done via internal standard STM-n link using SSM signalling.

1670

T1
1678
T1 1670 1662 T2

T3/T6

Figure 180. OED Synchronization for ETSI application

The interfaces provided by the OEDs can distribute the system clock with or without quality indication
(SSM in S1 byte) to neighbored network elements and can also be used for clock derivation (timing
sources). Each OED operates like a normal SDH network element concerning its clock system, but only
the selector B for the system clock is used. The selectors A and C for station clock outputs are not used
in OEDs. The station clock outputs of the OEDs can be configured permanently to T4 (2MHz) with a forced
squelch (AIS). A station clock output (T4 or T5) and 2 station clock inputs (T3 resp. T6) are supported in
the main shelf of the 1678 only. The selector A in the main shelf (providing station clock output) can be
configured with STM–N timing sources located in the main shelf only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 326 / 531

531
 13.15 1678MCC Network Requirements

A consistent time between the NEs of a network is a important requirement to a network. The same holds
for the distribution of the clock.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Time and Date Partsystem

not permitted without written authorization.

All hosts within 1678MCC refer to the FLC UNIX system time. This time is synchronized to an external time
source and is distributed to the Shelf Controllers, Equipment Controllers and User Boards. The Time and
Date Partsystem covers all the functionalities to retrieve the correct time and date from time sources in
order to have this time available for functions like time stamping etc.. .

Further the Time and Date Partsystem has to ensure that:

– No problems occur due to the switching of summer/winter time or to different interpretations of the
actual time base (e.g. LCT, GMT)
– The operation of a network by the OS is performed without ambiguity of the time base and time
accuracy: the OS performs an interpretation of the network availability and error status on the base
of alarms correlation. This function requires that the alarm time stamps in all the NEs of the network
are created on the same time base and with a limited offset error.

1678MCC fulfills these requirements in the following way:

– All hosts run under a common time base UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
(On the CT the local time offset against UTC can be set by the operator for presentation purposes)
– The control system supports the Network Time Protocol NTP:
The FLC and CT UNIX system time is synchronized to an external time source by application of
the NTP which is available on the external LAN.
– Date and time source is a NTP time server connected to the external LAN.

NTP Server Configuration

The configuration of NTP is provided via CT/MIB/VHM/CS-Server.

One main and one spare NTP server address can be configured via CT/MIB /VHM. Initial installation shall
not require to define an NTP server address. During initial installation, the system time is set to the time
of the install server.

Note:
IP addresses which are local to the NE cannot be configured as external NTP time server addresses.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 327 / 531

531
 13.16 Data Application and Layer 2 Switching

In typical Metro Networks, Ethernet services are becoming more and more important. Triple Play and
Business Ethernet services are driving the traffic requirements. From the transport network perspective,
this requires Ethernet connectivity and aggregation capability, sometimes even at several points in the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

network, in order to increase the network efficiency and utilization.

not permitted without written authorization.

In order to support the Core and Metro Core data applications, 1678 MCC supports different data boards.
The functionality of these boards and the services enabled are described in the following in more detail.

13.16.1 4/8/16xGigabit Ethernet Boards

With the GE cards Ethernet Private Line services (point–to–point, EPL Type 1) can be supported.

Traffic is entering the network from customer sites using separate physical GE interfaces. The complete
GE signal will be mapped into SDH/SONET via GFP in a dedicated Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG),
either transparently or with rate adaptation. The VCs of one VCGs can run in the same or different
STM–N/OC–x links through the network. On the other end of the network the VCGs will be terminated and
the traffic is mapped back on a dedicated GE interface. It is not possible that several customer GE
interfaces share the same VCG through the network, as EPL Type 1 is a dedicated and not a shared
service.

Ethernet frames are mapped in SDH/SONET containers via a GFP code according to G.7041 with any
possible adaptation ratios:

1:N – 1 x GE –> GFP –> VC–4–Nv (with N = 1 to 7) / AU3–Nv (with N = 1 to 21)

A further aggregation of the traffic is possible at the SDH/SONET layer on a VC–4/AU3 granularity.

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is supported, providing automatic rate adaptation from
VC–4/AU3 to VC–4–7v/AU3–21v depending on the incoming bit rate, and in case of failure of a single VC
(compliant with G.7042). If a VC fails, this failure will be signaled back to the source node to reduce the
Ethernet packet flow. The LCAS protocol ensures that the failing VC–4/AU3 will not be used anymore and
only working VC–4s/AU3s will be used for the transport of Ethernet frames. Flow control and Ethernet
performance counters are supported for quality of service purposes.

13.16.2 4x10 Gigabit Ethernet Boards

The 4x 10GE card is an Ethernet Aggregator and provides physical access of 4x 10GE interfaces. It can
be used in the same way as the GE interface described in the previous chapter (EPL Type 1).

In order to achieve an optimized interfacing to other Service Providers a 10GE interface should have a
cost advantage over several times GE. In this case a multiplexed access is required, as several customer
services (VLANs) with different end–points will be carried over one physical 10 GE interface. The 4x 10GE
card addresses this requirement and provides VLAN aggregation capabilities using Ethernet Virtual
Private Line Service (EVPL Type 1, logical point–to–point).

In case several client signals are transported over the same 10 GE interface, the different VLAN tags of
the aggregation link are evaluated. The Ethernet frames will be mapped per VLAN into separate VCGs,
using GFP. So each VLAN is connected individually over the network. For each VLAN a dedicated VCG
is used. On the destination side the signal is terminated and can be handed over to the customer via
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

another multiplexed 10 GE interface or via a dedicated physical interface.

EVPL Type 1 functionality is supported in any kind of topology, e.g. point–to–point, hub & spoke or mesh.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 328 / 531

531
 The 10GE board can be used amongst others for IP Backbone, Metro Ethernet interconnect and
point–to–point Ethernet private line applications. The 10GE board is the optimized board to provide EVPL
Type 1 and EVPL Type 1a.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

13.16.3 ISA–ES64 Data Board

not permitted without written authorization.

The ISA–ES64 board complements the data portfolio of the 1678 MCC. It is an advanced 20Gbit/s L2
switch and enables cost–effective Carrier Class Ethernet for Metro.

1678 MCC provides two different hardware variants of the ISA–ES64 board:

– A pure L2 server board without any physical ports,

– A board with an integrated 10GE physical front access (future releases).

It represents the next step of the ISA family and increases further the support of Metro Ethernet Services
for the Alcatel–Lucent transmission portfolio. The board can be used as well in IP Core applications within
the 1678MCC to provide L2 Ethernet aggregation between Core–, Service– and Edge Routers on one side
and Optical Switches on the other side. In addition to the data functionality the ISA–ES64 is optimized for
more advanced L2 switching mechanisms, beyond what is provided by the 1GE and 10GE boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 329 / 531

531
 14 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS MAIN SHELF

14.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The following Table 44. on page 330 up to Table 46. on page 332 sums up the units managed in the
not permitted without written authorization.

1678MCC Main Shelf Equipment.

Table 44. Units involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf

Type / Class Description Acronym Width Q.ty

(TE)
Control / Common FLCCONGI ENH. FLCCONGI 4 1

FLCSERVICE ENH. FLCSERV

FLCSERVICE ENH. ANSI FLCSERVA

Power Supply and Filter PSF 2

Bus Termination BUSTERM

HO Matrix Matrix 640 Gbit/s MX640 8 2

Matrix 640 Gbit/s ANSI MX640GA

Matrix 320 Gbit/s MX320

Matrix 320 Gbit/s ANSI MX320GA

Matrix 160 Gbit/s MX160

LO Matrix LO Adaptation/Matrix Board 40G LAX40 4.5 2

LO Adaptation/Matrix Board 20G LAX20

Lower Order Matrix Link 40G LAC40 5

SDH Port 1 x STM–64 S–64.2 Optical port S–642M 4.5 16
STM–64
1 x STM–64 L–64.2 Optical port L–642M

1 x STM–64 V–64.2 Optical port V–642M

1 x STM–64 U–64.2 Optical port U–642M

1 x STM–64 I–64.1 Optical port I–642M

2 x STM–64 S–64.2 Optical port P2S64M

2 x STM–64 I–64.1 Optical port P2I64M

2 x STM–64 S–64.2 Optical XFP port P2S64X

4 x STM–64 I–64.1 Optical port P4I64

4 x STM–64 S–64.2 Optical port P4S64

4 x STM–64 S–64.2 Optical XFP port P4S64X

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 330 / 531

531
 Type / Class Description Acronym Width Q.ty
(TE)
SDH Port 16 x STM–16 Optical port P16S16 4.5 16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

STM–16
document, use and communication of its contents

8 x STM–16 Optical port P8S16

not permitted without written authorization.

4 x STM–16 Optical port P4S16

SDH Port 16 x STM–1/4 Optical port P16S1S4 4.5 16
STM–1/4
16 x STM–1 Optical/Electrical port P16S1S
SDH Port 16 x GE Optical port P16GE 4.5 16
GE
8 x GE Optical port P8GE

4 x GE Optical port P4GE

2 x 10GE Optical port P2XGE

4 x 10GE Optical port P4XGE 4.5 *

SERVER CARD ISA–ES64 Server Board ES64SC 4.5 2

FAN System FAN FAN –– 2

* Max number of boards is limited because of the power consumption of around 140 W per board. The
maximum shelf load (of around 1.5 kW for the sum of all 16 I/O slots) mustn’t be violated (refer also to chap-
ter 10.1.2 on page 85.

Notes: Q.ty = max number allowed in the 1678MCC Main Shelf equipment
Acronym = label shown on CT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 331 / 531

531
 Table 45. Electrical Modules involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf

Type Description Acronym Q.ty

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

STM–1e TRX SFP STM–1e SES1 16

not permitted without written authorization.

Table 46. Optical Modules involved in 1678MCC Main Shelf

Type Description Acronym Q.ty

STM–1 S–1.1 SFP – Short Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SS–1.1 16

L–1.1 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SL–1.1

L–1.2 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1550 nm) SL–1.2

STM–4 S–4.1 SFP – Short Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SS–4.1 16

L–4.1 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SL–4.1

L–4.2 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1550 nm) SL–4.2

STM–16 I–16.1 SFP – Intra–office (wl = 1310 nm) SI–16.1 16

S–16.1 SFP – Short Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SS–16.1

L–16.1 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1310 nm) SL–16.1

L–16.2 SFP – Long Haul (wl = 1550 nm) SL–16.2

Opto Transc. Module 1470nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1490nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1510nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1530nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1550nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1570nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1590nm CWP

Opto Transc. Module 1610nm CWP

Opto Tr. Module 1470nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1490nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1510nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1530nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1550nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1570nm APD CWA

Opto Tr. Module 1590nm APD CWA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Opto Tr. Module 1610nm APD CWA

Opto TRX SFP L–16.2 DWDM CH620 ... CH170 DWA

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 332 / 531

531
 Type Description Acronym Q.ty

STM–64 S–64.2b (nb1) MS642 1, 2, 4

I–64.1 (nb2) MI641 1, 2, 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

L–64.2 (nb3) ML642 1

V–64.2 (nb3) MV642 1

U–64.2 (nb3) MU642 1

S–64.2 b (nb4) XS642B 2, 4

S–64.2 b Ext (nb4) XS642E 2, 4

L–64.2 (nb4) XP1L12D2 2, 4

I–64.1 (nb4) XI641 2, 4

GE OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP–SX (nb5) SGESX 4, 8, 16

OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP–LX (nb5) SGELX

GE OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP–ZX (nb5) SGEZX

GE OPTO TRX XFP 10GBASE–S (nb6) XGES 2, 4

OPTO TRX XFP 10GBASE–E (nb6) XS642B 2, 4

OPTO TRX XFP 10GBASE–L (nb6) XI641 2, 4

Notes: Q.ty = max number allowed in a single system

Acronym = label shown on CT
(nb1) = hosted in S–642M, P2S64 and P4S64 boards
(nb2) = hosted in I–64.1M, P2I64M and P4I64 board
(nb3) = hosted in L–642M
(nb4) = hosted in P2S64X and P4S64X
(nb5) = hosted in P(4, 8, 16)GE boards
(nb6) = hosted in P2XGE/P4XGE boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 333 / 531

531
 14.2 First Level Controller and Control & General Interface (FLCCONGI)

The FLCCONGI board is designed as the hardware platform supporting the First Level Controller (FLC),
the Control and General Interface (CGI) and the Data Communication Channel (DCC) functions for the
1678 MCC Network Element (NE).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

These functions are performed by one or two on–board microprocessors (DCR and EM), by a Multi High–
Level Data Link Controller (MHDLC) for the DCC processing and by a Complex Programmable Logic De-
vice (CPLD) which manages the station alarms and signalling (part of the CGI function).

The FLCCONGI board is composed of the following blocks (refer to Figure 181. ):

– First Level Controller (FLC) function

– Control and General Interface (CGI) function (comprises also the synchronization reference inter-
face)
– DCC function.

Frontpanel interfaces Backpanel interfaces

Qecc 17
RL FLCCONGI
Qecccmx 16
RA

HK
DCC Function PIO
SY_REF
SY_FR

LAN_A

DBG_DCR CGI Function ISSB_1

LCI
F
SYS_ID
USB
FLC Function

LAN_B
LAN switch IPL

IPL_LAN
DBG_EM
SYNC
DCR EM
HDD ISSB_2

SPI_A

SPI_B

Figure 181. Block Diagram and external Interfaces of FLCCONGI enhanced

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 334 / 531

531
 14.2.1 First Level Controller Function

The first level controller function is in charge of the processing activities concerning the “Virtual Equipment
Control Element” (VECE) function for the 1678 MCC network element, consisting of:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

not permitted without written authorization.

– Message Communication Function (MCF).

The basic element of the FLC function in the FLCCONGI/FLCSERV(A) board is the “DCR Processor Mod-
ule” daughterboard. On the processor board are several basic hardware components available, as re-
quired by the FLC function:

– Microprocessor (CPU)
– System memory (Flash EPROM, RAM)
– I/O parallel bus (PCI)
– Serial communication channels
– General Purpose Parallel I/O.

GMRE Function

The GMRE function is in charge of providing the hardware support for the GMRE software.

The basic element of the GMRE function is a Embedded Module (EM) used as a daughterboard in the
FLCCONGI/FLCSERV(A) board.
This board supplies several basic hardware components required by the function:

• Microprocessor (CPU) with L2 cache

• System memory (Boot Flash EPROM, RAM)
• Serial communication channels
• I/O parallel bus bridge interface (PCI).

Additional components related to the GMRE function are present on the motherboard: the physical
interface circuitry supporting the DBG_EM serial communication channels, which is used for debug, and
the interface toward an ATA socket, capable of hosting mass storage devices as hard disks.

The main components related to the GMRE function are:

• Parallel Bus Interface (PCI)

The FLCCONGI motherboard supports the PCI bus interface as the I/O parallel bus used by
both the OAM and the FLC processors present on the daughterboards to access local
peripheral devices.

• Ethernet interface
The Ethernet interface of the GMRE daughterboard is used to support the QB_A, QB_B and
IPL interfaces of the FLCCONGI board. The daughterboard interface is a a IEEE 802.3 Fast
Ethernet serial communication channel, suitable for operation at both 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.

• Asynchronous Serial interface

The asynchronous serial interface available from the GMRE daughterboard is used to support
the DBG_EM interface of the FLCSERV(A) board.
It provides a RS–232 asynchronous communication channel for connection to a console, mainly
used for support to software debug activity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 335 / 531

531
 14.2.2 Control and General Interface Function

The Control and General Interface (CGI) function is in charge of the management of remote alarms, rack
lamps and housekeeping interfaces for the 1678 MCC network element. These interface consist of a set
of specialized parallel (I/O) with certain electrical properties, which are standardized for all NE equipment.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The equipment synchronization is here considered part of the CGI function.

not permitted without written authorization.

All the circuitry related to the CGI functions hosted on the FLC motherboard. This includes the physical
interfaces toward the front panel connectors. The DC/DC converter provides the –12 V local voltage for
the housekeeping inputs.

14.2.3 DCC Function

The task of the DCC Partsystem is to access and route the information encoded in the DCCs.

The DCC partsystem consists of the DCCs servers (which terminate and insert the D1...D3 and D4...D12
bytes) and of their connection to the I/O boards on one side and to the external LAN on the other side.

The FLCCONGI/FLCSERV(A) is dimensioned to handle the number of DCCR and DCCM as described
in chapter 13.5 ’Controller Subsystem’ on page 224.

14.2.4 External Interfaces

The FLCCONGI supports the serial and parallel external I/O interfaces shown in Figure 181. on page 334.
These interfaces are generally used to support external or system–internal communication as required
by the FLC and CGI functions.

F Interface

The F interface is defined at the equipment level as a local interface to support the craft terminal function
for maintenance and control activities, normally provided by a PC. The physical layer (hardware) of this
interface is implemented as a point to point asynchronous serial channel (UART) with an RS–232 electrical
interface, complying with the F–LTS Alcatel–Lucent standardization requirements.
The main characteristics and operating modes of the F interface protocol, as supported by the FLCSERV
card, are:

– Asynchronous full duplex communication protocol with NRZ data encoding;

– 8 bits character, 1 stop bit, odd parity;
– TX and RX clocks internally generated
– Supported baud–rate up to 38400 b/s (9600 b/s specified for F–LTS)
– Simplified DCE configuration of the RS–232 control signals set (null modem connection).

The physical access to this interface is provided through a RJ45 on the board front panel.

DBG_DCR and DBG_EM Interfaces

These interfaces are related to the DCR and EM processors, respectively and are intended to support the
communication interface of high level run time SW debug tools.

Both consist of a RS–232 asynchronous serial channel (UART) suitable for local connection to an external
debug terminal (e.g. PC or Work Station) at a data rate of 38.4 kbit/s maximum.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Signals related to these interfaces are available with RS–232 electrical levels on a single 8–pin RJ–45
connector (i.e. the connector is shared between the two interfaces) mounted on the motherboard and
placed in the board’s front panel area.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 336 / 531

531
 USB Interface (currently not supported!)

This interface is planed to be connected to a local craft terminal. It consists of a serial interface compliant
with the Universal Serial Bus specification 1.1, able to support both the 12 Mbit/s (full speed) and the
1.5 Mbit/s (low speed) modes. The physical access to this interface is provided through a standard USB
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

mini–B receptacle on the board front panel.

not permitted without written authorization.

LAN_A and LAN_B Interfaces

These interfaces provide a redundant high speed communication channel able to support the Ethernet
protocol IEEE 802.3. They are both used for connection to an external Operation System (OS) station and
are functionally equivalent. The layer–2 protocol functions (MAC controller) for these interface are pro-
vided by one on–board LAN switch, which is configured to support either 10BaseT or 100BaseTX connec-
tions (automatic selection); the physical layer circuitry (transceivers, line transformers, etc.) is placed on
the motherboard. The physical access to these interfaces is provided through two (one for each interface)
RJ45 on the board front panel.

SY_REF Interface

The ”1678 MCC” Network Element accepts two external timing reference signals; physical access for
these interfaces is placed on the front panel of the FLCSERV and FLCCONGI boards, to provide the re-
dundancy required for this functionality. Timing signals can be a 2.048 MHz clock or a 2.048 Mb/s frame
(E1) in an ETSI environment, or a 1.544 MHz clock or 1.544 Mb/s frame (DS1) in a SONET architecture.
A Sub–D 9–pin female connector, as required for SONET equipments, is used as balanced physical inter-
face for the input/output reference clocks. In ETSI environments, timing references have usually unbal-
anced (coaxial) connections; this makes necessary to have an external ”adapter” to support also this kind
of physical interfaces. The presence of this adapter is sensed by means of a parallel I/O of ”Spider”. The
different line impedances for both the receiver and the transmitter in the different environments are
matched by the internal circuitry of Line Interface Unit (LIU) itself, which must be configured accordingly
through its SPI interface. The possible configurations are:

– 100 Ω (T1/J1) balanced interface (on the Sub–D 9–pin female connector)
– 120 Ω (E1) balanced interface (on the Sub–D 9–pin female connector)
– 75 Ω (E1) unbalanced interface (a pair of coaxial connectors on the adapter plugged on the
Sub–D connector).

The physical access to this interface is provided through a Sub–D 9 poles female connector (DB9), acces-
sible on the board front panel. Signal levels on this interface are compliant with ANSI T1.102 (FLCSERVA
only) and ITU–T G703 standards.

RL Interface

This interface is intended to drive a number of rack lamps showing a summary of the equipment shelves
status. It provides a standard set of galvanically insulated contacts which can be closed toward the Rack
Lamps ground, or opened, under control of the active FLC. The physical access to this interface is provided
through one Sub–D 9–poles male connector (DB9) on the board front panel.

HK and RA Interfaces

The Housekeeping (HK) interface provides a number of galvanically insulated general purpose inputs and
outputs, whose meaning can be defined by the customer, while the Rack Alarms (RA) interface provides
a number of galvanically insulated output contacts, reporting the status of some equipment–related
alarms. The outputs are realized with electronic switches, which can close or open a contact toward the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

independent Housekeeping Output grounds; similarly, the inputs can sense the closure of an external
switch toward the Housekeeping Input ground.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 337 / 531

531
 The physical access to these interfaces is provided through a Sub–D 25 poles female connector (DB25),
accessible on the board front panel. The on–board ”Teroldego” CPLD device provides a set of parallel out-
puts dedicated to the management of the signals belonging the afore mentioned RL, HK and RA inter-
faces.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

14.2.5 Reset Key

The FLC reset key has a multiple functionality, in that:

– when pressed once resets the DCR processor,

– when pressed twice in a short time resets the EM processor and
– when keep pressed (> 3 s) it resets both processors.

The front panel is shown in Figure 58. on page 120.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 338 / 531

531
 14.3 First Level Controller and Service Interface (FLCSERV)

There are two types of FLCSERV:

– FLCSERV enhanced (for SDH applications)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– FLCSERVA enhanced ANSI (for SONET applications).

not permitted without written authorization.

The FLCSERV(A) board is designed as the hardware platform supporting the First Level Controller (FLC),
the Control and General Interface (CGI) and the Data Communication Channel (DCC) functions for the
1678 MCC Network Element (NE).

These functions are performed by one or two on–board microprocessors (DCR and EM), by a Multi High–
Level Data Link Controller (MHDLC) for the DCC processing and by a Complex Programmable Logic De-
vice (CPLD) which manages the station alarms and signalling (part of the CGI function).

The FLCSERV(A) board is composed of the following blocks (refer to Figure 182. ):

– First Level Controller (FLC) function

– Service and General Interface (SGI) function (comprises also the synchronization reference inter-
face)
– DCC function.

Frontpanel interfaces Backpanel interfaces

SERV FLCSERVICE AUX 16

PH
Qecc 17
PH_EXT
Qecccmx 16
SY_REF DCC Function
PIO

SY_FR
LAN_A

DBG_DCR
SGI Function ISSB_1

F LCI

USB SYS_ID
FLC Function
IPL
LAN_B LAN switch
IPL_LAN
DBG_EM
SYNC

DCR EM ISSB_2
HDD
SPI_A

SPI_B

Figure 182. Block Diagram and external Interfaces of FLCSERV(A) enhanced

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 339 / 531

531
 14.3.1 Equipment Controller Function

This function is the same of the FLCCONGI board: refer to para. 14.2.1 on page 335.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

14.3.2 Service and General Interface Function

not permitted without written authorization.

The Service and General Interface (SGI) function is in charge of the management of the phone, phone
extension and service channels interfaces for the 1678 MCC network element. The equipment synchro-
nization is here considered part of the SGI function.
All the circuitry related to the SGI functions hosted on the FLCSERV(A) motherboard. This includes the
physical interfaces toward the front panel connectors.

14.3.3 DCC Function

This function is the same of the FLCCONGI board: refer to para. 14.2.3 on page 336.

14.3.4 External Interfaces

The FLCSERV(A) supports the serial and parallel external I/O interfaces shown in Figure 182. on page
339. These interfaces are generally used to support external or system–internal communication as re-
quired by the FLC and CGI functions.

F Interface

The F interface is defined at the equipment level as a local interface to support the craft terminal function
for maintenance and control activities, normally provided by a PC. The physical layer (hardware) of this
interface is implemented as a point to point asynchronous serial channel (UART) with an RS–232 electrical
interface, complying with the F–LTS Alcatel–Lucent standardization requirements.
The main characteristics and operating modes of the F interface protocol, as supported by the FLCSERV
card, are:

– Asynchronous full duplex communication protocol with NRZ data encoding;

– 8 bits character, 1 stop bit, odd parity;
– TX and RX clocks internally generated
– Supported baud–rate up to 38400 b/s (9600 b/s specified for F–LTS)
– Simplified DCE configuration of the RS–232 control signals set (null modem connection).

The physical access to this interface is provided through a RJ45 on the board front panel.

DBG_DCR and DBG_EM Interfaces

These interfaces are related to the DCR and EM processors, respectively and are intended to support the
communication interface of high level run time SW debug tools.
Both consist of a RS–232 asynchronous serial channel (UART) suitable for local connection to an external
debug terminal (e.g. PC or Work Station) at a data rate of 38.4 kbit/s maximum.
Signals related to these interfaces are available with RS–232 electrical levels on a single 8–pin RJ–45
connector (i.e. the connector is shared between the two interfaces) mounted on the motherboard and
placed in the board’s front panel area.

USB Interface (currently not supported!)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

This interface is planed to be connected to a local craft terminal. It consists of a serial interface compliant
with the Universal Serial Bus specification 1.1, able to support both the 12 Mbit/s (full speed) and the
1.5 Mbit/s (low speed) modes. The physical access to this interface is provided through a standard USB
mini–B receptacle on the board front panel.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 340 / 531

531
 LAN_A and LAN_B Interfaces

These interfaces provide a redundant high speed communication channel able to support the Ethernet
protocol IEEE 802.3. They are both used for connection to an external Operation System (OS) station and
are functionally equivalent. The layer–2 protocol functions (MAC controller) for these interface are pro-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

vided by one on–board LAN switch, which is configured to support either 10BaseT or 100BaseTX connec-
not permitted without written authorization.

tions (automatic selection); the physical layer circuitry (transceivers, line transformers, etc.) is placed on
the motherboard. The physical access to these interfaces is provided through two (one for each interface)
RJ45 on the board front panel.

SY_REF Interface

The ”1678 MCC” Network Element accepts two external timing reference signals; physical access for
these interfaces is placed on the front panel of the FLCSERV and FLCCONGI boards, to provide the re-
dundancy required for this functionality. Timing signals can be a 2.048 MHz clock or a 2.048 Mb/s frame
(E1) in an ETSI environment, or a 1.544 MHz clock or 1.544 Mb/s frame (DS1) in a SONET architecture.
A Sub–D 9–pin female connector, as required for SONET equipments, is used as balanced physical inter-
face for the input/output reference clocks. In ETSI environments, timing references have usually unbal-
anced (coaxial) connections; this makes necessary to have an external ”adapter” to support also this kind
of physical interfaces. The presence of this adapter is sensed by means of a parallel I/O of ”Spider”. The
different line impedances for both the receiver and the transmitter in the different environments are
matched by the internal circuitry of Line Interface Unit (LIU) itself, which must be configured accordingly
through its SPI interface. The possible configurations are:

– 100 Ω (T1/J1) balanced interface (on the Sub–D 9–pin female connector)
– 120 Ω (E1) balanced interface (on the Sub–D 9–pin female connector)
– 75 Ω (E1) unbalanced interface (a pair of coaxial connectors on the adapter plugged on the
Sub–D connector).

The physical access to this interface is provided through a Sub–D 9 poles female connector (DB9), acces-
sible on the board front panel. Signal levels on this interface are compliant with ANSI T1.102 (FLCSERVA
only) and ITU–T G703 standards.

PH Interface (not supported)

The PH interface allows to connect an external telephone handset, which will receive both the power sup-
ply (about 12 V, internally limited to 18 mA max.) and the analog audio, on a two–wire interface with an
impedance of 600 Ω. The receive (from the unit toward the external phone) and transmit audio (from the
phone toward the equipment) are internally separated by an on–board hybrid circuit which routes the two
audio channels to a dedicated audio processor for the analog/digital conversion. This latter is controlled
by the AUX manager FPGA ”Aton”, which selects the AUX channels bytes that will be used for the EOW.
The audio volume, both in the TX and in the RX directions, can be varied in a range of about 20 dB by
means of a digital potentiometer connected as a slave device to the on–board SPI manager ”Spider”.
Physical access to this interface is provided through a Bantam jack on the unit front panel.

PH_EXT Interface (not supported)

For applications needing separate access for the transmit and receive audio of the EOW, the FLCSERV
unit supplies the PH_EXT four–wire interface. On this interface no DC power is available for the external
devices, being it galvanically insulated from the motherboard by means of transformers; both the TX and
RX audio connections have a nominal impedance of 600 Ω and, like for the PH interface, are connected
to a dedicated audio processor for the analog to digital conversion, controlled by the ”Aton” FPGA. The
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

audio volume, both in the TX and in the RX directions, can be varied in a range of about 20 dB by means
of a digital potentiometer connected as a slave device to the on–board SPI manager ”Spider”. The physical
access to this interface is provided through a RJ11 connector on the unit front panel.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 341 / 531

531
 SERV Interface (not supported)

The AUX channels data going through the ”ATON” FPGA can be made available at the front panel SERV
interface as general digital streams, having various bit rates and reference standards. On the FLCSERV
unit there are two 64 kb/s V.11, two RS–232, two 2 Mb/s and two 64 kb/s G.703 interfaces, managed by
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

the ”ATON” FPGA.

not permitted without written authorization.

The physical access to the SERV interface is provided through a front panel SCSI 26–pin female connector
and two couples of 1.0/2.3 75 coaxial connectors carrying the 2 Mb/s interfaces.

14.3.5 Reset Key

The FLC reset key has a multiple functionality, in that:

– when pressed once resets the DCR processor,

– when pressed twice in a short time resets the EM processor and
– when keep pressed (> 3 s) it resets both processors.

The front panel is shown in Figure 57. on page 119.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 342 / 531

531
 14.4 Power Supply and Filter Board (PSF)

In the 1678MCC equipment two PSF boards are mandatory.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

14.4.1 Main Characteristics

not permitted without written authorization.

The main function of this board is to carry the Battery Voltage from the TRU (Top Rack Unit) to the
backplane thus guaranteeing the main power supply (voltage) to the boards making up the subrack.
It also supplies the Service Voltage (3.6 V) to all the boards.
The board block diagram is illustrated in Figure 183. on page 345 where are shown the following
functionalities (two sub–boards are assembled to obtain a PSF board):

• the sub–board 1 provided with the following circuits:

– EMI Filter: it is necessary to reduce the battery noises; the noises are rejected by the
DC/DC converters present on all the boards.
– OC and OV protections: each battery wire is protected against overcurrents and
short–circuits by means of a fuse, while the protection against overvoltage is realized by
means of varistors.
– Fuse Fault Detectors: it is realized with circuits situated after the fuses detecting the
battery voltage failure.
– Battery Failure Detector: it is realized with a circuit situated before the fuses.
– Input Power Stage: this circuit is used to power supply the DC/DC converter that
generates the service voltage for the whole subrack; it consists of a filter to reduce the
noises, a protection fuse against short–circuits with relevant fault detector and of an inrush
current limiting circuit.

• the sub–board 2 provided with the following circuits:

– 48 V to 3.6 V DC/DC Converter
– Service Voltage Undervoltage Detector
– SPIDER block
– Remote Inventory block

14.4.2 Electrical Interfaces

The main electrical interfaces are:

• Battery Voltage on the front panel: it can be received through the 3–pin power male connector;
the female pole is dedicated to the mechanical ground; the battery can absorb a max of 30 A.

• Backplane Battery Voltage: it is received through a 8–pin female connector; three battery
branches are available (10 A per branch), each branch is protected with a 30 A fuse.

• Incoming 3.6 V Service Voltage: it is received (V3V_A_IN) from the other PSF board present
in the 1678MCC equipment; the typical absorbed current is 25 mA.

• Alarms and signaling: the following signaling are available:

– Lamp Test (output), through a switch on the front panel:
switch pressed=GND, switch released=high impedance.
Note: a pull–up resistor is provided at the input on the FLCCONGI.
– Converter Synchronization (input, ALMSYNC): TTL compatible levels.
– Slot ID (input, SLOT_ID_0): TTL compatible levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Alarm indicating 3.6 output voltage failure or voltage lower then 3.6 V (output,
V3V_A_OUT):
Alarm status: it is activated when the output voltage is lower than 3 V.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 343 / 531

531
 Alarm Absence status: it is activated when the output voltage is higher than 3 V.
– Board Missing (output): it indicates the circuit presence by means of a GND contact; one
contact indicates the presence/absence of this board to the Matrix and another contact
indicates the presence/absence of this board to the FLC.
– Battery Voltage Failure alarm (output, BATT_FAIL):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Alarm status: it is activated when the Battery voltage is lower than 37 V.

not permitted without written authorization.

Alarm Absence status: it is activated when the Battery voltage is higher than 37 V.
Note: a pull–up resistance has to be provided towards a positive voltage (3.3 V).
– Broken Fuse Alarm (output, BROKEN_FUSE):
Alarm status: it is activated when at least one of the six fuses situated in series of wires
leading the battery to the backplane is broken.
Alarm Absence status: no fuse is broken.
Note: a pull–up resistance has to be provided towards a positive voltage (3.3 V).
– SPI Bus: four wires are envisaged for path A and four for path B.

On board a bicolor LED is present to show:

• Green: board in service

• Red: internal fault (board out of service)

The front panel is shown in Figure 61. on page 123.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 344 / 531

531
 PSF
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Sub_unit 1
OC and OV
not permitted without written authorization.

Protections

EMI Filter

GNDM

Battery Fuses Fault

Failure Detectors
INPUT POWER Detector
STAGE (60W) GNDM

Sub_unit 2

48Vcc

3,6V SPIDER

R.I. Slot ID

UV Detector

Figure 183. PSF Functional Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 345 / 531

531
 14.5 Bus Termination Board (BUSTERM)

This board gives the electrical termination to buses routed on the backplane and also to provide the LCI
interface.
In the 1678MCC equipment two BUSTERM boards are mandatory.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

They are allocated behind the FLCSERV(A) and FLCCONGI boards (they are inserted into the backpanel
not permitted without written authorization.

directly; these two boards are not visible on shelf front–panel).

14.5.1 Functional Description

The board takes on board networks to adapt all the signal buses of 1678MCC backplane, that are:

• ISPB bus
• ISSB/ISSB2 bus
• JTAG chain.

It also gives adaption to six 2 MHz lines (CK2M_x), two 1 Hz lines (1HzSYNC) and the power sync line
(ALMSYNC).
Furthermore, a LCI interface is present: this is the serial link between the FLC function and a serial
non–volatile memory (EEPROM) where the equipment local configuration and the MAC address data are
stored.
The bus termination board is powered by V3VA, V3VB lines coming from backpanel; these are used to
create all needed voltages within the board.

Spider and alarm control circuits are supplied by 3.3VS; data information concerning the board is stored
in a remote inventory EEPROM, while another roomier EEPROM contains the MAC address data and the
equipment local configuration.

Figure 184. on page 347 displays the block diagram of the board.

ISPB bus is the communication way between uP and the ASICs of equipment, while ISSB/ISSB2 buses
are used to connect the main FLC with the SLC hosted in the matrix board. All buses, JTAG chain included,
need double termination, one at each end: this goal is reached by inserting in the backpanel two
BUSTERM boards.

On the BUSTERM is placed a FPGA called Spider to manage SPI buses. SPI is a low speed serial
communication channel used by SC to transfer data to/from serial devices on different boards in the shelf.
Spider is connected to two SPI buses, one connected to matrix–A and one to matrix–B: it reads the
identification (ID) slot from backplane, manages remote inventory and collects power supply alarms.

On the board is mounted an EEPROM with a serial protocol called remote inventory interfaced to Spider.
This memory stores data information regarding the board as code, version, series and so on.

LCI interface
It is the serial link between the FLC function and a serial EEPROM, placed on this board, where the
equipment local configuration and the MAC address data are stored.
The buffer before memory acts as MUX, since lines FLC_ACT_A and FLC_ACT_B enable control lines
toward FLCSERV(A) board or control lines toward FLCCONGI board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 346 / 531

531
 14.5.2 Power Supply Control and Alarms

Dedicated circuits check the presence of voltages on the board. This part generates internal alarms to FLC
(CFAIL and CMISS).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

On board a bicolor LED is present to show:

not permitted without written authorization.

• green: unit in service

• red: internal fault (unit out of service)

BUSTERM
6

ID
E
3+1 SPIDER E
P
SPIA R
O
SPIB M
3+1

TRESHOLD
OSC (4 MHz) VOLTAGE
GENERATOR
(1.5V)

ISPB 25
ISSB 2 TERMINATIONS
ISSB2 2
JTAG 4

2 MHz CLK 6
1 Hz SYNC 2 ADAPTION
ALMSYNC
10
LCI I/F EEPROM

POWER LINES AND ALARMS

V3VA,V3VB CFAIL_BT CMISS CMISS_BT

Figure 184. BUSTERM Functional Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 347 / 531

531
 14.6 Matrix 640 Gbit/s Board

There are two types of Matrix 640Gbit/s:

– Matrix 640Gbit/s enhanced (MX640)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This board is used for SDH applications.

not permitted without written authorization.

– Matrix 640Gbit/s advanced (MX640GA)

This board is used for SONET applications.

14.6.1 Functional description

14.6.1.1 Overview

The board MATRIX 640 Gbit/s provides SONET/SDH switching capabilities, implementing MSPC
(Multiplex Section Protection Connection) and HPC (Higher Order Path Connection) switching functions.
The 1678MCC equipment can host up to two Matrix boards; in this case, only one Matrix board at a time
is active, the other one is standing by.

The Matrix board supports the following functionalities:

• Cross–connection with STS–1 granularity of up to 4096 STM–1 signals (12288 signals at AU3
level), non blocking
• Synchronization (Clock Reference Unit)
• Shelf Controller (SC)
• 1+1 EPS protection scheme (when two MX640 boards are present)

14.6.1.2 Features

The Matrix board address the following functional requirements:

• Management of 256 bi–directional links @ 2.5/2.7 Gbit/s (for an overall capacity of 640 Gbit/s)
• Forward Error Coding (FEC) protection of the 256 links through the backpanel
• Payload Performance Monitoring (PM)
• Traffic SubNetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)
• Clock Reference Unit (CRU) of SDH quality – MX640
• Clock Reference Unit (CRU) of SONET STRATUM 3 quality – MX640GA
• Shelf Controller (SC)

A functional block diagram with indication of main internal and external interfaces is shown in
Figure 185. on page 349.
For further details about how the MSPC and HPC functions are implemented from a logical point of view
to fulfil the ITU–T G.783 functional model.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 348 / 531

531
 Port Payload Links
MX640
High

Control Signals
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Order
not permitted without written authorization.

Matrix
Shelf
Controller
Synchronization
Signals

SDH/SONET
Equipment Power
Clock Supply

Figure 185. Matrix Board Functional Block Diagram

14.6.2 Physical Description

14.6.2.1 Overview

The board is made up of a main board and a daughter board, the PQ2/SCM (PowerQUICC2 / Shelf
Controller Module), which hosts the Shelf Controller and the ISPB bus master.
The front panel of the board provides access to the debug interface of the PQ2/SCM, to the Shelf Control-
ler, to the PQ2/SCM processor reset button, and is provided with one multicolor LED. This LED can emit
light of three different colors, with the following meanings:

• Red color: internal failure (board out of service)

• Green color: board in–service
• Orange color: board stand–by

In following paragraphs, details of different subsystems implementation will be provided.

14.6.2.2 Payload Subsystem Description

Payload Subsystem Logical and Physical High–level Description

The logical flow of traffic signals is shown in Figure 186. on page 349.

MX640(GA)

MSnP + Sn
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 186. Payload Subsystem Logical Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 349 / 531

531
 The physical flow of traffic signals is shown in Figure 187. on page 350.

The board hosts four ASICs (GA #0 to GA#3). Each GA is capable to interface 66 2.5 Gbit/s links. Of these
66 links, only 64 are used in the board. Therefore, each of the four GA, as implemented on the board, is
capable to process 1024 STM–1 equivalent signals, to the required total of 4096 STM–1 equivalent
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

capacity.
not permitted without written authorization.

Since the GAs (GA #0 to GA #3) work in bit slice mode, each GA process 2 out of 8 bits of the payload;
therefore, no payload interfaces between the GAs are needed.
The GA is able to protect the traffic coming from/going to the Port boards using FEC. In this case, because
of the redundancy the frequency of the signal is 10/9 of the SDH standard STM–16, that is 2.7 Gbit/s.

Each GA (GA #0 to GA #3) extracts/inserts some overhead information from/into the backpanel links. This
information is then transmitted/received by the GA #5 and GA #6 through two bi–directional 622 Gbit/s
links for each GA #0 to GA #3, as shown in Figure 187. on page 350.
The information is then processed by GA #5 regarding path criteria, alarms, PM and remote criteria and
by GA #6 concerning section and path protection.

MX640(GA)

GA #0
PQ2/SCM

GA #4
(PM collection)
2.5 Gb/s links to /from Backpanel

GA #1

GA #5
(Path criteria,
alarms, PM and
remote criteria)
GA #2

GA #6
(Section and
Path protection)

GA #3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 187. Payload Subsystem Physical Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 350 / 531

531
 14.6.2.3 Power Subsystem Description

The power subsystem is shown in Figure 188. on page 351.

The main power characteristics (actual currents and efficiencies) are reported in Table 47. on page 352.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1.2 V To GA#0
DC/DC

On

1.2 V To GA#1
DC/DC

On

48 V Battery A
1.2 V To GA#2
Inrush DC/DC
Current
Limiter On

48 V Battery B
1.2 V To GA#3
DC/DC
Delay
On

1.8 V To GA#0,#1,#2,#3 and

FPGAs
DC/DC

On
1.5 V To FPGAs

To FPGAs and
2.5 V other logic
DC/DC

On
3.3 V VREG To FPGAs Hi –
To Spider, LEDs
1.8 V Speed macros
and other Service
Service 3.6 V A powered logic

VREG To FPGAs Hi –
2.5 V Speed macros
To on –board
logic
Service 3.6 V B

VREG To GTL buffers

1.5 V
To OCXO

VTT for GTL

terminations

Note: GAs in Payload subsystem

Figure 188. Power Subsystem Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 351 / 531

531
 Table 47. Power characteristics

DC/DC voltages, current and power

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Voltage [V] Current [A] Power [W]

not permitted without written authorization.

3.3 5 18
2.5 1.3 3.25
1.8 1.8 3.24
1.5 4 6
1.2 11.6 13.92
Regulators voltages, current and power

Voltage [V] Current [A] Power [W]

2.5 1.4 3.5
1.8 0.2 0.36
Power consumption and overall efficiency

Voltage [V] Current [A] Power [W]

38.4 2.8 108
48 2.2 108
72 1.53 111

14.6.2.4 Timing Subsystem Description

The Matrix board has two main synchronization sources.

One is the Clock Reference Unit (CRU), which provides the main SDH/SONET timing reference for the
whole equipment. The second is the PQ2/SCM Shelf Controller module, which provides the clocks for the
control interfaces.
In the following, each timing subsystem will be specified.

Clock Reference Unit

For SDH applications (MX640) the CRU is implemented in the GA #7 with the aid of an external OCXO.
For SONET applications (MX640GA) the CRU is implemented in the GA #8 with the aid of an external
OCXO.
The GA #8 is specific for the MX640GA (SONET applications) and has the following SONET specific func-
tions:
• Select a reference clock (from the T1 and DS–1 inputs) as configured by SC
• Alarm handling for DS–1 inputs
• Hold off time handling
• SSM extraction on DS–1 inputs.

When the equipment hosts two Matrix boards, one CRU is master and the other is slave. The slave CRU
must closely track the master CRU both in frequency and in phase. To this goal, the two CRUs must
exchange some synchronization signals.
The connections of the CRU on the board are shown in Figure 189. on page 353 for SDH and in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 190. on page 354 for SONET applications.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 352 / 531

531
 BACKPANEL
MATRIX A MATRIX B
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

VCXO
not permitted without written authorization.

622 MHz
To other on on–board logic 622 MHz

FLCCONGI
Clocks to
2 Mb/s
2 MHz
F(s)

FLCSERV(A)
Clocks to

2 MHz
2 Mb/s
OUTSD_P_10S

CKOUT_ES

DTOUT_ES
CKOUT_EC
DTOUT_EC
OUTSD_N_10S
PHOFSIN PHOFSIN
∆ϕ PHOFSOUT PHOFSOUT

SY_1HZIN SY1HZ_IN
CK622

CK38CRU CK_77S
:8 SY_1HZOUT SY_1HZOUT

FAN Units
And lower
To Upper
CKOUT1 CK51CRU

FR2MIN FR2MIN
CK38A,
FR2MOUT FR2MOUT
GA #3 SYNCA
CK_H O_IN CK_HO_IN
CK38,
To other on on–board logic SYNC38 CK_HO_BIDIR CK_HO_BIDIR
To Backpanel
Ports
Clocks from

OCXO CK10S CK_2EXT Six 2 MHz CK_2EXT

10 MHz
Clocks from Clocks from
FLCCONGI FLCSERV(A)

2 MHz
2 Mb/s

IRQ6_SY1SEC CKINEC CKINEC

To GA #5 on PQ2/SCM
DIN_EC DIN_EC
VIOL_EC VIOL_EC
2 MHz
2 Mb/s

CKINES CKINES
DIN_ES DIN_ES GA #7
GA #7 VIOL_ES VIOL_ES

Figure 189. CRU, On– and Off– Board Connections in SDH Applications

The CRU T0 and T4 PLL can lock either on the local OCXO, on any of the 2 MHz clocks coming from the
port boards, on the 2 MHz / 2 Mbit/s or 1.544 Mb/s clocks coming from the FLCSERV(A) and FLCCONGI
or on the second CRU, if present.
Then the clock system:

• Locks a 622 MHz VCXO on the chosen primary reference. This 622 MHz clock is then
distributed on board to all SDH processing logic.
• Derives from the 622 MHz clock a 38 MHz clock and 125 ms synchronism signal to be
distributed on board to all SDH processing logic and through the backpanel to every payload
processing board as the main synchronism reference.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Provides the T4 2 MHz / 2 Mbit/s (or 1.544 Mb/s) reference clocks to the FLCSERV(A) and
FLCCONGI.
• Provides the 1 second synchronization signal to GA #4 on PQ2/SCM.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 353 / 531

531
 The GA #3 is included in the 622 MHz loop because the FPGA in which GA #7/GA #8 is implemented does
not provide high–frequency interfaces. Therefore, the GA #3 divides the clock by 8 before feeding it to
GA #7/GA #8.
The GA #3 then requires a complex clock system, also comprising a second PLL at a frequency of
691 MHz to support FEC.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

PQ2/SCM Module
The PQ2/SCM module provides the timing references (clocks and signals) necessary to the Control sub-
system.

BACKPANEL
MATRIX A MATRIXB
VCXO
622 MHz
622 MHz
To other on on–board logic

FLCCONGI
1.544 MHz
1.544 Mb/s
Clocks to
F(s)

FLCSERVA
1.544 MHz
1.544 Mb/s
Clocks to
CKOUT_EC
DTOUT_EC
CKOUT_ES
DTOUT_ES
OUTSD_N_10S
OUTSD_P_10S
CK622

PHOFSIN PHOFSIN
CK38CRU CK_77S
:8 ∆ϕ PHOFSOUT PHOFSOUT
SY_1HZIN SY1HZ_IN

SY_1HZOUT SY_1HZOUT
And lower
Fan Units
To Upper

CKOUT1 CK51CRU

CK38A, CK_HO_IN spare CK_HO_IN

GA #3 SYNCA
CK_HO_BIDIR CK_HO_BIDIR
FLCCOPNGI

CK38, Fr
Clocks from

To other on on–board logic

1.544 MHz
1.544 Mb/s

SYNC38 CKINEC
CKINEC
To Backpanel DIN_EC DIN_EC
+2 VIOL_EC VIOL_EC
2x77.76MHz
Div
Clocks from
FLCSERVA

TO3, TO5
1.544 MHz
1.544 Mb/s

CKINES
2x1.544MHz CKINES
DIN_ES DIN_ES
Sel & Div TO2, TO9
VIOL_ES VIOL_ES
I13
I12
Clocks from

T4 PLL
Six 2 MHz

CK_2EXT CK_2EXT
Ports

T0 PLL
I11 FR2MIN
FR2MIN
TO10 FR2MOUT
Div FR2MOUT

SONET/SDH GA #8 IRQ6_SY1SEC GA #8
MASTER/SLV
OCXO
12.8 MHz To FALCO on PQ2/SCM

Figure 190. CRU, On– and Off– Board Connections in SONET Applications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 354 / 531

531
 14.6.2.5 Control Subsystem Description

PQ2/SCM Module
The PQ2/SCM module provides the control interfaces and Figure 191. on page 356 shows their connec-
tions. They are detailed in the following paragraphs:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

• Spider SPI Bus

The Spider block on the board can be controlled both via the local Spider bus driven by the
PQ2/SCM or via the remote Spider bus coming from the second Matrix board.
• Remote Inventory: the Remote Inventory EEPROM can be accessed via SPI through
Spider in transparent mode; the EEPROM is connected to Spider Chip Select #0.
• SPI Temperature Sensor: the SPI Temperature Sensor EEPROM can be accessed
via SPI through Spider in transparent mode; the Temperature Sensor is connected
to Spider Chip Select #1.

• GA #9 CMISS and ID Bus

The GA #9 is used to serialize the Board Missing (CMISS) and local board Identification codes
(ID) towards the PQ2/SCM, to reduce the pin count of the PQ2/SCM connectors. The CMISS
data is used by the microprocessor to know which boards are present in the shelf. The ID data
is used by the microprocessor to know the Matrix board board version, the equipment type, the
shelf ID, etc.

• FPGA Download Bus & Hardware Configuration Bus

This bus is used to download the local GA #5, GA #6 and GA #7/#8 on the board and to down-
load/upgrade the remote FPGA on the other boards. This is a serial bus; the local signal levels
are CMOS, while the GTL electrical standard is used to communicate with the other boards in
the shelf.

• ISSB Bus
This bus is multi–master backplane serial bus providing the physical connection between
boards in the same shelf. The bus uses the GTL electrical standard.

• ISPB Bus
This bus is a parallel bus through which the microprocessor on the PQ2/SCM module can ac-
cess the internal registers of ASIC or FPGA devices placed on the various boards in the shelf
which provide ISPB access.

• I2C Bus
This is a serial bus used locally on the board to read the temperature sensors and to control the
on / off status of the outputs of the ISPB clock distribution logic.

• IPL Bus
This bus is a 2 wire serial communication channel communication channel used by the
PQ2/SCM of a protected pair of Matrix boards to keep their configuration and status data
aligned each other.

• ACT / OPE Active / Operative Status Management Logic

The two Matrix boards exchange some signals to decide which board is the active master.

• Debug Interface
The PQ2/SCM provides a standard serial interface for debugging purposes. The interface is
accessible from a connector on the front panel (only for Alcatel–Lucent service persons).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 355 / 531

531
 • LAN Interface.
Two LAN interfaces of the PQ2 are transformed on the main board with transceivers to Ethernet
standard.
In case of LX160 (LO matrix of the LO extension shelf) the software image download and the
controlling from the main shelf (FLCSERVICE and FLCCONGI) will be done by using this con-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

nections. The interfaces support 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps Ethernet standard (10/100BASE–T).
not permitted without written authorization.

• Reset Management.

• Interrupt Management.

From / To all
boards
From / To SPIB SPIA
other Matrix SPIDER
BUFFER

T Sensor T Sensor
SPI bus
From / To 2 x LAN
other Matrix I2C bus

IPL bus
To/From other Debug
Matrix and to
GTL BUFFER

FLCCONGI and ISSB bus

FLCSERV(A)
To / From CFG bus
Ports and
FLCSERV(A)
DMUX MUX
PQ2/SCM
GTL BUFFER

To / From
Ports and
ISPB bus

ACT / OPE

CMISS bus
other Matrix

ID bus
From / To
other Matrix

GA #0

GA #7/#8 GA #9

GA #1

GA #5

GA #2
GA #6

GA #3

MX640 (GA)

Figure 191. PQ2/SCM Control Interfaces

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 356 / 531

531
 14.6.2.6 Self Diagnosis Subsystem Description

Fuse, Battery and Undervoltage Alarms

The board has the capability to monitor the presence of both batteries A and B, the fuse status and to detect
a DC/DC or voltage regulator output undervoltage condition.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

These alarms are all collected by Spider block. However, there is also a visual indication through 16 LEDs
not permitted without written authorization.

on the back of the board, under the shield.

The undervoltage alarms are also collected.

Temperature Sensors
The board hosts three temperature sensors.
One is controlled via SPI bus and is able to give only its temperature. The other two are controlled via I2C
bus and are able to read their own temperature as well as the temperature of some remote components.

14.6.2.7 Parallel I/O description

Board LEDs
The board has a one front panel light. The light is generated by a dual LED. The color can be green, red
or a combination of the two (orange).

Spider ASIC Parallel I/Os

The Spider ASIC is used to control several board I/Os (four lines)

PQ2/SCM Parallel I/Os

The other board I/Os are controlled by PQ2/SCM general purpose I/Os.

14.6.2.8 External Interfaces Description

The external interfaces are splitted in:

• High–Frequency Backpanel Signals

• Low–Frequency Backpanel Signals and Power Supply Lines
• Debug Front Panel Connector Signals
• LAN Front Panel Connector Signals

14.6.2.9 Mechanical Design Description

The Matrix board is 8TE wide, 440 mm x 210 mm.

The front panel is shown in Figure 59. on page 121.

14.7 Matrix 320/160 Gbit/s Enhanced Board (MX320 / MX160)

The functional and physical descriptions of the MX320 and MX160 boards are similar to the MX640 board.
Only the switching capacity is different.

The following types exists:

– Matrix 320Gbit/s enhanced (MX320)

This board is used for SDH applications.

– Matrix 320Gbit/s advanced (MX320GA)

This board is used for SONET applications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Matrix 160Gbit/s enhanced (MX160)

This board is used for SDH applications.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 357 / 531

531
 14.8 Lower Order Adaptation and Matrix 40G and 20G (LAX40 and LAX20)

The LAX board is used in the 1678MCC Main Shelf partsystem which is introduced in 1678MCC. The main
purpose of this new partsystem is to build a 4/3/1 Crossconnect designed for the ETSI and ANSI Market.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The LAX board implements the lower order matrix together with the so called adaptation function (higher
not permitted without written authorization.

order path termination and adaptation function), refer to Figure 192.

14.8.1 Lower Order Matrix

The lower order matrix is a square matrix. Switching is performed at VC–3 and VC–12 level in SDH applica-
tion and VC–11 for SONET applications.
One LAX40 board has a capacity of 40Gb/s and is always 1+1 protected.
One LAX20 board has a capacity of 20Gb/s and is always 1+1 protected.

14.8.2 Lower Order Adaption Function

The lower order adaption function is located between the interface to HO subsystem and the matrix func-
tion (refer to Figure 192. ). In other words these chips terminate the administrative units AU4 of an STM–64
byte serial stream in receive direction into lower order VC–n and multiplexes lower order VC–n in transmit
direction into the administrative units AU4 of an STM–64 byte serial stream.

The lower order adaption function supports fault detection, alarm generation and performance monitoring
for higher and lower order.
The chip set of this function is furthermore SONET compliant. For instance the chips are capable to termi-
nate administrative units AU3 and to process virtual tributaries VT1.5. The chips additionally support
AU3/AU4 conversion. These functionalities are used for SONET and SDH/SONET interworking.

LAX40
LO Adaptation
and Monitoring
Backplane

Interface
to HO Matrix
Subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 192. LAX40 Functional Overview

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 358 / 531

531
 Data Connections

The data connections between higher order matrix and the lower order matrix board are done via differen-
tial signal lines over the backplane at 2.5 Gb/s .
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Synchronization and Clock Distribution

not permitted without written authorization.

The LAX board receives two 38 MHz clock signals (Copy_A and Copy_B) and two 38MBit/s data signals
(Copy_A and Copy_B). These synchronization signals are led to VIVALDI ASIC, which performs the syn-
chronization function. The data signal comprises frame and multiframe information (1Hz/8kHz) to syn-
chronize the board to the 1678MCC internal framing. The data signal is read by the 38 MHz clock. The
38 MHz clock is also used to generate the 622 MHz system clock by means of a VCO.
A frame generator provides the required 1 Hz, 2 kHz and 8 kHz frame and synchronization signals for the
LAX board.

Power Subsystem

There are two independent power interface inputs, each coming from a PSF board.
On the LAX board there are four central DC/DC converters (48 V to 1.2/5 V) and four point of load (POL)
converters (5 V to 1.5/1.8/2.5/3.3 V). An inrush current limitation circuit and a filter are provided in front
of the central DC/DC converters for current limitation when the board is plugged in. A central DC/DC power
converter provides a galvanically isolated power (5 V) to the POL converters. The POL converters deliver
the various voltages:

– 1.5 V
– 1.8 V
– 2.5 V
– 3.3 V

used by the ASICs and FPGAs on the LAX board.

The front panel is shown in Figure 60. on page 122.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 359 / 531

531
 Cardpresent SlotID
CLK 155 1.2 V, 2.5 V
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

#4 [#2 (LAX20)]
not permitted without written authorization.

#1
TUPP
32 x 2.5 GBPS
Matrix VIVALDI 16x2.5GBPS
STM−16 AdaptationF unction
Copy A/B

Sync. A+B Clock VCXO

622MHz MOT Int Sync. Ctrl
Clk A+B

CLK 155 1.2 V, 2.5 V

1/4
Divider
ISPB
CF WSE−40
from HO
WSE−20 (LAX20)
SLC A/B
CLK 155 MatrixF unction
Sync.

16x2.5GBPS
OHBus STM−16

MOT Ctrl
Int Sync.

Slot_ID
Sync. MOT Int. CPLD
[5..0]
SYSID
Sync.
Spare PMIF PQ2/SCM
links ISSB_1
ISPBlocalbus ISSB_2
AMSEL1
PS interface RAM LAN
to Partner Debug
LAX40
(LAX20)
HW_CFG

3.3 V A, B +
HW_CFG GOBLIN FEPROM Power
2.5 V
&
1.8 V
Filter
A, B −
SPI A RI Ctrl 1.5 V
DC/
SPI B & GPIO 1.2 V DC
Service FPE
Temp.
3.3 V

Power
Ctrl Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 193. LAX40 (LAX20) Board Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 360 / 531

531
 14.9 STM–64 traffic Port Boards with not pluggable MSA Modules

14.9.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In the 1678MCC equipment several types of STM–64 interfaces are available with different
not permitted without written authorization.

implementation on board (one, two or four optical interfaces). The optical MSA modules are not pluggable,
they are fixed on the board.
The following description covers all different items equipped. The same motherboard can support the
following modes using different equipping options:

• 4 x I64.1 optical interfaces (P4I64)

• 2 x I64.1 optical interfaces (P2I64M)
• 1 x I64.1 optical interface (I–64.1M)
• 4 x S64.2 optical interfaces (P4S64)
• 2 x S64.2 optical interfaces (P2S64)
• 1 x S64.2 optical interface (S–642M)
• 1 x L64.2 optical interface (L–642M)
• 1 x V64.2 optical interface (V–642M)
• 1 x U64.2 optical interface (U–642M).

14.9.2 Functional Description

14.9.2.1 Overview

The STM–64 board provides optical interface for one, two or four tributaries at STM–64 rate for Short, VSR
(Intra–office), Long, Very Long and Ultra Long connections. It also contains circuitry for management,
configuration, and control of on–board devices through backplane SPI, ISPB and Hardware &
Configuration buses.

14.9.2.2 Main Features

The main features of STM–64 board are shown in the following.

The STM–64 boards are composed of a single PCB supporting various modes based on the mounting
options. Depending on the optical devices, there are different modes as mentioned.
The board has always GA #1, GA #2 and GA #3 (and GA #4 when are mounted four optical interfaces)
as common devices in the data path, for all the modes (refer to Figure 194. on page 362):

• The P4S64M board

– 4 x S–64.2 (P4S64) has four S–64.2b optical modules and its associated circuitry.
– 4 x I–64.1 (P4I64) has four I–64.1 optical modules and its associated circuitry.

• The P2S64M board

– 2 x S–64.2 (P2S64) has two S–64.2b optical modules and its associated circuitry.
– 2 x I–64.1 (P2I64M) has two I–64.1 optical modules and its associated circuitry.

• The S64M board

– 1 x S–64.2 (S–642M) has one S–64.2b optical module and its associated circuitry.
– 1 x L–64.2 (L–642M) has one L–64.2 optical module and its associated circuitry.
– 1 x V–64.2 (V–642M) has one V–64.2 optical module and its associated circuitry.
– 1 x U–64.2 (U–642M) has one U–64.2 optical module and its associated circuitry.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– 1 x I–64.1 (I–64.1M) has one I–64.1 optical module and its associated circuitry.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 361 / 531

531
 S64.2
I64.1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

GA #3
not permitted without written authorization.

S64.2
I64.1

GA #2 GA #1

S64.2
I64.1
GA #4
S64.2
I64.1

Equipping option of P4S64M

S64.2
I64.1

GA #3
S64.2
I64.1

GA #2 GA #1

Equipping option of P2S64M

S64.2
L64.2
V64.2 GA #3
U64.2
I64.1

GA #2 GA #1
Equipping option of S64M

Figure 194. Equipping Options of STM–64 Boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 362 / 531

531
 14.9.3 Physical Description

Main components of STM–64 boards are the following (refer to Figure 195. on page 364):

• The STM–64 board provides GA #1 device for interface with the backplane. This is a CMOS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ASIC with 2.5 Gbit/s I/O, 2 x 40 Gbit/s throughput.

not permitted without written authorization.

• The STM–64 board provides GA #3 (and GA #4) device as an STM–64 Framer .This is a CMOS
ASIC with 2.5 Gbit/s I/O, 2 x10 Gbit/s throughput.

• The STM–64 board provides GA #2 device and associated SRAM for overhead management.
This is a CMOS FPGA.

• The STM–64 board provides GA #5 device for following functions:

– Monitor and generate various status and control signals through its ports.
– Interface on–board temperatures sensors.
– Interface to on–board SEEPROM for Remote Inventory information through board internal
SPI bus.
– Generate signals for board status LED for board status reporting.
– Provide I2C like protocol for the on–board interfacing devices.
– Interface to flash EEPROM for on board FPGA code.
– Provide HW&CFG bus for remote code change inside flash EEPROM.

• The STM–64 board provides DC–DC converters to generate all the required voltages from input
48 V DC.

• The STM–64 board provides in–rush current limiting circuitry on input 48 V DC.

• The STM–64 board provides VCXOs and associated circuitry for external clock Generation and
PLL function.

• The STM–64 board provides back plane interface using press–fit connectors, for following:

– Incoming and outgoing DCC channels.

– Timing information and Data flow from both switch matrices.
– SPI links A and B for power up status /configuration.
– ISPB bus.
– Reading the slot identification.
– 48 V DC and 3.3 V service voltage.

• The STM–64 board provides circuitry on board to:

– Distribute clock / timing information coming from the back plane to different on–board
components.
– Indication of programming status of GA #2.
– Provide access to GA #1. GA #2 internal registers through ISPB bus and associated GTL
buffers, and their enabling circuitry.
– Other miscellaneous circuitry.

The 1xSTM–64 board front panel is shown Figure 45. on page 107.
The 2xSTM–64 board front panel is shown Figure 46. on page 108.
The 4xSTM–64 board front panel is shown Figure 47. on page 109.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 363 / 531

531
 MSA
transponder
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

GA #2
not permitted without written authorization.

GA #3

MSA
POWER
from / to line

transponder SUPPLY

ÍÍÍÍÍ

backplane
MSA
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
transponder

ÍÍÍÍÍ
GA #4 GA #1

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
MSA Temperature
transponder sensors

ÍÍÍÍÍ
TIMING LOGIC
GA #5

Figure 195. STM–64 Board Functional Block Diagram

In following paragraphs, details of different subsystems implementation will be provided.

14.9.3.1 Payload Subsystem Description

The data flow on the STM–64 boards is shown in Figure 196. on page 365.
The MSA transponders connect to GA #3 which further interfaces with the backplane through GA #1. Only
GA #3 is shown in the picture as the second one (GA #4) is connected in the same way to GA #1.

MSA – GA #3 interface
The MSA transponders interface with the GA #3 (and GA #4) through 622 Mbit/s data signal lines.

GA #3 – GA #1 interface
The GA #3 (and GA #4) interfaces with GA #1 through 2488 Mbit/s data signal lines. It provides a
bandwidth of 19904 Mbit/s so eight differential pair (for each direction) are used to connect GA #3 (and
GA #4) to GA #1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 364 / 531

531
 16 x 622 Mbit/s

from / to Matrices A and B

4 x 2.5 Gbit/s
MSA
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1 16 x 2.5 Gbit/s
not permitted without written authorization.

from / to line

backplane
GA #3 GA #1

MSA 16 x 2.5 Gbit/s

2
16 x 622 Mbit/s
4 x 2.5 Gbit/s

Figure 196. STM–64 Board Payload Subsystem Block Diagram

14.9.3.2 Power Subsystem Description

The STM–64 board gets a supply voltage of 48 V from the back panel and uses this to generate the
voltages of 3.3 V, 5.0 V, –5.0 V, 1.2 V, 1.5 V, 1.8 V on the board.
There is an in–rush current protection circuitry provided on the board. The power scheme is summarized
in Figure 197.

+48 V
+ BATT DC/DC conv. +1.2 V
From #1
Backplane –48 V

– BATT +48 V
DC/DC conv. +3.3 V
In rush #2
current –48 V
limiting
+48 V –5 V
circuitry DC/DC conv.
#3 +5 V
–48 V

+48 V
DC/DC conv. 1.5 V
#4
–48 V 1.8 V
3.3 VA
From
Backplane VS GA #5

3.3 VB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 197. STM–64 Board Power Supply Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 365 / 531

531
 14.9.3.3 Timing Subsystem Description

The timing and clock circuitry is shown in Figure 198. on page 366.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

622MHz
not permitted without written authorization.

VCXO
622MHz 622MHz

Phase
MFSYA, B
from / to line

38MHz
MSA 622MHz 77.76MHz GA #1
CLK
GA #3
155MHz
155MHz
77.76MHz

VCXO GA #2

155MHz

Figure 198. STM–64 Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram

14.9.3.4 Miscellaneous Subsystems Description

Control subsystem
The GA #5 drives the GA #2 for configuration purposes.

Parallel I/O and self–diagnosis subsystems

The Parallel I/O subsystem manages Alarms, commands, LEDs present in the boards and mapping to
parallel I/O registers of the control interface, indicating meanings and activation levels.

The Self–diagnosis subsystem monitors the temperature sensor that are placed on the board.

Main alarms are related to LOS, LASER_OFF, FUSES, BATT.

On board a bicolor LED is present to show:

• green: board in service

• red: internal fault (board out of service).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 366 / 531

531
 14.10 STM–64 traffic Port Boards with pluggable XFP MSA Modules

Two SDH I/O boards with pluggable XFP modules are supported:

– 1..4x STM–64 board with XFP/XFP–E type pluggable modules

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– 1..2x STM–64 board with XFP/XFP–E type pluggable modules

not permitted without written authorization.

The types of introduced modules are (according to ITU–T G.691, G959):

– I–64.1 (2 km)
– S–64.2b (40 km)
– L–64.2 (80 km) – XP1L12D2

From a functional point of view this board is compatible to the 4xSTM–64 MSA port board supported al-
ready in Rel. 3.0. Main difference is that the board has in service pluggable optical modules. A serializer/
deserializer (SERDES) device is needed for each XFP/XFP–E module to adapt the 10 Gbit/s serial XFI
interface to the 16bit wide SFI–4.1 interface of DAFFODIL.

14.10.1 4xSTM–64 XFP Port Board

This is a 1 to 4 interface port board supporting the following pluggable optical modules:

– XFP formfactor optical modules:

• OPT TRX S–64.2B XFP
• OPT TRX I–64.2B XFP
• OE – TRX XFP 80 KM STD SIZE (XP1L12D2 – L–64.2)
– XFP–E formfactor optical modules:
• OPT TRX XFP S–64.2B Ext

The board supports:

– Fully equipped module configuration (4 XFP/XFP–E modules are plugged in)

– Partly equipped module configuration (configuration with 1 to 4 XFP/XFP–E modules is possible)
– Mixed module type configuration (any mix of different XFP/XFP–E modules is supported)
– In service changeable configuration.

Figure 199. shows a block diagram of the 4xSTM–64 board.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 367 / 531

531
 4xSTM–64 4xSTM–64 16xSTM–16 like 4xSTM–64 XFP
(XFI) (SFI 4.1)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

STM–64 SerDes
XFP/–E 16:1
not permitted without written authorization.

#1

GA #3
STM–64 SerDes
XFP/–E
16:1
#2

GA #1
GA #2
STM–64 SerDes
XFP/–E 16:1
#3
GA #4
STM–64 SerDes
XFP/–E
16:1
#4

Figure 199. Functional Blocks of the 4xSTM–64 Port Board

14.10.2 2xSTM–64 XFP Port Board

This is a de–populated 4xSTM–64 XFP port board as described in 14.10.1. It is cut down to 1x Daffodil,
2x SERDES and max. 2x XFP/XFP–E modules.

The 1 to 2 interface port board supports the following pluggable optical modules:

– XFP formfactor optical modules:

• OPT TRX S–64.2B XFP
• OPT TRX I–64.2B XFP
• OE – TRX XFP 80 KM STD SIZE (XP1L12D2 – L–64.2)
– XFP–E formfactor optical modules:
• OPT TRX XFP S–64.2B Ext

The board supports:

– Fully equipped module configuration (2 XFP/XFP–E modules are plugged in)

– Partly equipped module configuration (configuration with 1 to 2 XFP/XFP–E modules is possible)
– Mixed module type configuration (any mix of different XFP/XFP–E modules is supported)
– In service changeable configuration.

Figure 200. shows a block diagram of the 2xSTM–64 board.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 368 / 531

531
 2xSTM–64 2xSTM–64 2xSTM–64 XFP
8xSTM–16 like
(XFI) (SFI 4.1)

STM–64
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

XFP/–E SerDes
16:1
not permitted without written authorization.

#1

GA #3
STM–64
XFP/–E SerDes
#2 16:1 GA #1

GA #2

Figure 200. Functional Blocks of the 2xSTM–64 Port Board

14.10.3 Timing Subsystem

The timing and clock circuitry is shown in Figure 201.

622MHz

VCXO
VCXO 622MHz 622MHz

622MHz
Phase
MFSYA, B
from / to line

Phase
GA #1
38MHz
XFP/–E SerDes 622MHz GA #3 77.76MHz
CLK

155MHz 155MHz 155MHz

77.76MHz

VCXO
GA #2
155MHz

Figure 201. STM–64 XFP Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 369 / 531

531
 14.11 STM–16 traffic Port Board (P16S16)

14.11.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In the 1678MCC equipment several types of STM–16 interfaces are available with the same
not permitted without written authorization.

implementation on board (up to sixteen STM–16 optical interfaces).

The following description covers all different items (S–16.1, L–16.1 and L–16.2) equipped on the P16S16
board.
The STM–16 interfaces are composed by SFP plug–in modules.

14.11.2 Functional Description

14.11.2.1 Overview

The STM–16 board provides optical interface for sixteen tributaries at STM–16 rate for Short and Long
connections. It also contains circuitry for management, configuration, and control of on–board devices
through backplane SPI, ISPB and Hardware&Configuration buses.

14.11.2.2 Main Features

The main features of STM–16 board are shown in the following.

The STM–16 boards are composed of a single PCB supporting various modes based on the mounting
options. The board has always GA #1, GA #2 and GA #3 as common devices in the data path (refer to
Figure 202. on page 371).

14.11.3 Physical Description

Main components of STM–16 boards are the following (refer to Figure 202. on page 371):

• The STM–16 board provides GA #1 device for interface with the backplane. This is a CMOS
ASIC with 2.5 Gbit/s I/O, 2 x 40 Gbit/s throughput.

• The STM–16 board provides GA #3 device as an STM–64 Framer .This is a CMOS ASIC with
2.5 Gbit/s I/O, 2 x10 Gbit/s throughput.

• The STM–16 board provides GA #2 device and associated SRAM for overhead management.
This is a CMOS FPGA.

• The STM–16 board provides GA #5 device for following functions:

– Monitor and generate various status and control signals through its ports.
– Interface on–board temperatures sensors.
– Interface to on–board SEEPROM for Remote Inventory information through board internal
SPI bus.
– Generate signals for board status LED for board status reporting.
– Provide I2C like protocol for the on–board interfacing devices.
– Interface to flash EEPROM for on board FPGA code.
– Provide HW&CFG bus for remote code change inside flash EEPROM.

• The STM–16 board provides DC–DC converters to generate all the required voltages from input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

48 V DC.

• The STM–16 board provides in–rush current limiting circuitry on input 48 V DC.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 370 / 531

531
 • The STM–16 board provides VCXOs and associated circuitry for external clock Generation and
PLL function.

• The STM–16 board provides back plane interface using press–fit connectors, for following:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Incoming and outgoing DCC channels.

not permitted without written authorization.

– Timing information and Data flow from both switch matrices.

– SPI links A and B for power up status /configuration.
– ISPB bus.
– Reading the slot identification.
– 48 V DC and 3.3 V service voltage.

• The STM–16 board provides circuitry on board to:

– Distribute clock / timing information coming from the back plane to different on–board
components.
– Indication of programming status of GA #2.
– Provide access to GA #1. GA #2 internal registers through ISPB bus and associated GTL
buffers, and their enabling circuitry.
– Other miscellaneous circuitry.

SFP
module
GA #2
1

POWER
from / to line

SUPPLY

GA #3

backplane
GA #1
SFP
module Temperature
16 sensors

TIMING LOGIC
GA #5

Figure 202. STM–16 board Functional Block Diagram

14.11.3.1 Payload Subsystem Description

The data flow on the STM–16 boards is shown in Figure 203. on page 372.
The MSA transponders connect to GA #3 which further interfaces with the backplane through GA #1.

MSA – GA #3 interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The MSA transponders interface with the GA #3 (and GA #4) through 2.5 Gbit/s data signal lines.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 371 / 531

531
 GA #3 – GA #1 interface
The GA #3 interfaces with GA #1 through 2488 Mbit/s data signal lines. It provides a bandwidth of
19904 Mbit/s so eight differential pair (for each direction) are used to connect GA #3 to GA #1.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1 x 2.5 Gbit/s

from / to Matrices A and B

8 x 2.5 Gbit/s
SFP
1 16 x 2.5 Gbit/s
from / to line

backplane
GA #3 GA #1

SFP 16 x 2.5 Gbit/s

16
1 x 2.5 Gbit/s
8 x 2.5 Gbit/s

Figure 203. STM–16 Board Payload Subsystem Block Diagram

14.11.3.2 Power Subsystem Description

The STM–64 board gets a supply voltage of 48V from the back panel and uses this to generate the voltages
of 3.3 V, 1.2 V, 1.5 V, 1.8 V on the board. There is an in–rush current protection circuitry provided on the
board. The power scheme is summarized in Figure 204.

+48 V
+ BATT DC/DC conv.
+1.2 V
From #1
Backplane –48 V

– BATT +48 V
DC/DC conv. +3.3 V
In rush #2
current –48 V

limiting
circuitry REG.
1.8 V

+48 V
DC/DC conv. 1.5 V
#4
–48 V
1.2 V

3.3 VA
From GA #5
Backplane VS
3.3 VB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 204. STM–16 Board Power Supply Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 372 / 531

531
 14.11.3.3 Timing Subsystem Description

The timing and clock circuitry is shown in Figure 205. on page 373.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

622MHz
not permitted without written authorization.

VCXO
622MHz 622MHz

Phase
MFSYA, B
from / to line

SFP 77.76MHz
622MHz
38MHz
GA #3 GA #1
155MHz CLK

155MHz
77.76MHz

VCXO

GA #2
155MHz

Figure 205. STM–16 Board Timing and Clock Block Diagram

14.11.3.4 Miscellaneous Subsystems Description

Control subsystem
The GA #5 drives the GA #2 for configuration purposes.

Parallel I/O and self–diagnosis subsystems

The Parallel I/O subsystem manages Alarms, commands, LEDs present in the boards and mapping to
parallel I/O registers of the control interface, indicating meanings and activation levels.
The Self–diagnosis subsystem monitors the temperature sensor that are placed on the board.
Main alarms are related to LOS, LASER_OFF, FUSES, BATT.

On board a bicolor LED is present to show:

• green: board in service
• red: internal fault (board out of service).

The front panel is shown in Figure 44. on page 106.

14.12 STM–16 Traffic Port Board (P4S16, P8S16)

The functional and physical descriptions of the P4S16 and P8S16 boards are similar to the P16S16 board.
Only the number of interfaces is different.

The front panel of P4S16 is shown in Figure 42. on page 104.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The front panel of P8S16 is shown in Figure 43. on page 105.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 373 / 531

531
 14.13 16xSTM–1/4 Traffic Port Board (P16S1–4)

14.13.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In the 1678MCC equipment several types of STM–1 and STM–4 interfaces are available with the same
not permitted without written authorization.

implementation on board (up to sixteen STM–1 electrical interfaces, up to sixteen STM–1 optical
interfaces, up to sixteen STM–4 or a mix of STM–1 and STM–4).

For the “mixed configuration” is provided the “quartet rule”: the sixteen interfaces are managed in four
blocks (quartet) and the interfaces within the same quartet must be STM–1e/o or STM–4 (for example:
if the first interface provisioned in the same quartet is STM–1, also the other three interfaces of the quartet
have to be STM–1).
Within the quartet a mix of electrical, short haul or long haul modules is possible.
EPS for STM–1 electrical is not supported.

The following description covers all different items equipped on the P16S1–4 board:

• for STM–1e: SES1

• for STM–1o: S–1.1, L–1.1 and L–1.2
• for STM–4: S–4.1, L–4.1 and L–4.2

The STM–1 and STM–4 interfaces are composed by SFP plug–in modules.

14.13.2 Functional and Physical Descriptions

The functional and physical descriptions of the P16S1–4 board are similar to P16S16 board.

For the functional description refer to para. 14.11.2 on page 370.

For the physical description refer to para. 14.11.3 on page 370.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 374 / 531

531
 14.14 16xSTM–1 Traffic Port Board (P16S1S)

14.14.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In the 1678MCC equipment several types of STM–1 interfaces are available with the same implementation
not permitted without written authorization.

on board (up to sixteen STM–1 electrical interfaces, up to sixteen STM–1 optical or a mix of both). Any
mix of the supported interfaces is allowed.
EPS for STM–1 electrical is not supported.

The following description covers all different items equipped on the P16S1S board:

• for STM–1e: SES1

• for STM–1o: S–1.1, L–1.1 and L–1.2

The STM–1e and STM–1o interfaces are composed by SFP plug–in modules.

14.14.2 Functional and Physical Descriptions

The functional and physical descriptions of the P16S1S board are similar to P16S16 board.

For the functional description refer to para. 14.11.2 on page 370.

For the physical description refer to para. 14.11.3 on page 370.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 375 / 531

531
 14.15 4/8/16xGigabit Ethernet Port Board

14.15.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Gigabit Ethernet (GE) board exists in three variants:

not permitted without written authorization.

– 16xGE
– 8xGE
– 4xGE.

It can provides up to 16 SFP modules, which support the following types of interfaces:

– Opto TRX 1.25GBE SFP–SX

– Opto TRX 1.25GBE SFP–LX
– Opto TRX 1.25GBE SFP–ZX.

The GE ports can be mixed in a flexible way. The optical SFP modules can be equipped in flexible way:

– flexible mix of short range (1000Base–SX) and long range (1000Base–LX) optics
– flexible equipment of ports from:
• 1 to 4 SFP modules (4xGE)
• 1 to 8 SFP modules (8xGE)
• 1 to 16 SFP modules (16xGE).

14.15.2 HW Functionality

The main features of the GE board are:

– Ethernet point to point transport only (no L2 switch functions)

• VC4/AU4 in SDH
• VC3/AU3 in SONET
– GE mappings
• frame mapping according to G.7041 (GFP–F) over VC–4–Xv (X=1... 7) – SDH
• frame mapping according to G.7041 (GFP–F) over VC–3–Xv (X=1... 21) – SONET
• client flow control according to 802.3x, 10km client distance
– 15 ms differential delay compensation for virtual concatenated VC–4/VC–3 (HO VCGs only)
– Support of Jumbo Frames (MTU = 9796 bytes)

The front panel of the 4xGE board is shown in Figure 42. on page 104.
The front panel of the 8xGE board is shown in Figure 43. on page 105.
The front panel of the 16xGE board is shown in Figure 44. on page 106.

The GE boards have the following capacity:

– 16xGE has max. 112 STM–1 equivalents

– 8xGE has max. 56 STM–1 equivalents
– 4xGE has max. 28 STM–1 equivalents.

14.15.3 Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)

Defined by the G.7042 specification, LCAS is a means for the source and the sink to synchronize during
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

addition or deletion of members to a Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) such that payload de–adaptation
at the sink end may be done hitless under non–defect conditions. LCAS functionality can also restore tem-
porarily unavailable members hitless. The synchronization mechanism is necessary because of the vary-
ing delays that each member of a VCG may incur.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 376 / 531

531
 Under the LCAS scheme, the management layer issues add/remove commands for a given member sepa-
rately to the source and sink ends of a VCG. The LCAS state machine at the source end then signals to
the sink end that it is ready to add a particular member to the VCG.
The LCAS sink end state machine then checks the “to be added” member for trail failures and signals to
the source end that it is ready via an acknowledgement signal. The source end then signals the start of
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

the payload change and initiates the actual change. This entire “handshaking” process between the two
not permitted without written authorization.

ends takes place via the H4 byte for higher order VC.
Again, the LCAS state machine operation is identical for both higher and lower order VC. Note that for
lower–order VC the LCAS handshaking process takes place via the K4 byte.
The importance of LCAS is pretty simple in a system architecture. By dynamically altering the bandwidth
of Sonet/SDH transport pipes, LCAS allows designers to adjust bandwidth based on Quality of Service
(QoS) or other priority considerations.

14.15.4 Functional Descriptions

Refer to schematic block diagram (Figure 206. on page 378) it is possible to see that the client signal (Gi-
gabit Ethernet) is an optical signal that is converted from Optical to Electrical using an SFP module.

After the conversion the signal enters into VOLTA ASIC, which map the data signal (GE or FC) into SDH.
Every VOLTA can support up to 10 clients (but we use 8 interfaces) and is able to map transparently or
rate adaptive into a 10 Gbit SDH (STM64). Every VOLTA needs 8 SDRAM memories to support the Flow
Control and the Virtual Concatenation differential delay compensation up to 15 ms.

The 10 Gbit signal from VOLTA is passed to VIVALDI ASIC which double the signal and add a FEC to adapt
the STM64 to a proprietary backpanel format.

IACO FPGA is another block which mainly manages the microprocessor interface of VOLTA, receiving the
data from ISPB bus and translating the commands to VOLTA. Other use of IACO is to implement the SDH
Performance Monitoring.

The last important block is represented by GOBLIN which is an EPLD with many uses: read and write the
remote inventory, read some board alarms and activate some commands. GOBLIN communicates with
the external controller via SPI bus (protected A and B). GOBLIN is also used as an hardware configuration
manager to load external devices (FPGA) interfacing with a flash memory.

The power supply of the board are:

– 1.2 V
– 1.5 V
– 1.8 V
– 2.5 V
– 3.3 V.

All of them are obtained using four DC/DC converter which are driven by a Battery (after an OR between
BATT A and BATT B) coming from Backpanel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 377 / 531

531
 GE
RAM 8 RAM 8
1 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Cx 622 MHz

Cx 77 MHz
Matrix A

VOLTA
VIVALDI
Data
Optical SFP Matrix B
Module 16
1 2
1
Commands
Alarms

Micro ISPB
Interface ISPB

Backpanel
Buffer GTLP
to/from IACO

IACO

Power Alarm

Flash LED Control

Memory GOBLIN
SPI Bus

RI
1.2 V

1.5 V BATT A
OR
1.8 V DC/DC BATT B
3.3 V
2.5 V

Figure 206. GE Board Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 378 / 531

531
 14.15.4.1 Board Functionality

The GE board has the following functionalities:

– Board and module management (plug–in, plug–out, Laser on/off)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Configuration of fixed concatenation for all interfaces (GFP–F–7v)

– Crossconnections of VC4vTTPs, incl. SNCP support

– Mapping and demapping of GE signal to/from VC4s, incl. ’far end’ signalling (RDI, REI) within VC4
POH

– LOS alarm for GE interfaces

– SSF (summary) alarm for the (16) VCAT groups in case of underlying SDH problems

– Configuration of VC4s (TTI, alarm mask, DEG threshold)

– Alarming of VC4s (SSF, UNEQ, RDI, DEG, TIM and LOM, LOA, SQM)

– HO PM for VC4vTTPs

– Modification of number of VC4s per interface

– Configuration of ’idle’ VC4s (only used for SDH–Termination, not for mapping/demapping)

– GE PM (Rx, Tx)

– Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS), refer to next chapter 14.15.4.2 for details

14.15.4.2 LCAS Management

– Enable / disable LCAS protocol per VC–group (per port)

– Configuration of hold–off (0..10 000 ms) and wait–to–restore (0..900 s) times.

– Configuration of ’idle’ VC4s at individual positions, if LCAS is enabled (without LCAS, all the VC4s
with the lower IDs have to be active and only the VC4s with the upper IDs can be idle).

– Retrieval of status information per VC–group and for each member/channel (VC4) on management
request:

• number of working channels in receive and transmit direction per group.

• status (fail or ok), sequence number and control packet (FIXED, ADD, NORM, EOS, IDLE,
DNU) in receive and transmit direction per channel.

– All the management is done via the Q3 interface.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 379 / 531

531
 A detailed description of the 4 main chips follows:

ASIC VOLTA

Features are:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Multiprotocol mapper which optimize transport of GEthernet/Fibre Channel client Data Sig-
nals over SDH using VC
– 8B/10B Performance Monitoring
– Transparent GFP
– Frame based GFP
– Supports Virtual Concatenation VC4–Xv and VC3–Xv
– Provides up to 15 ms of inter tributary de–skew for VC groups using external DDR Ram
– Supports LCAS functionality as for ITU–T G.7042.

ASIC VIVALDI

Features are:

– Interfaces between Commercial Framer and Backplane

– Proprietary frame building to backpanel with Slice/Deslice function
– FEC and DEFEC for proprietary backpanel frame
– Overhead drop/insert and interface for external device(s)
– EPS protections.

FPGA IACO

Features are:

– Some HPT management accessing Volta Registers

– Automatic Laser Shutdown Manager
– Controller of Volta Mapper
– ISPB2 Interface
– ISPB2/Motorola Bridge
– SDH Performance Monitoring.

FPGA GOBLIN

Features are:

– Hardware Configuration Bus Manager

– Local I2C bus controller via backplane SPI bus
– SPIDER–like SPI functionalities.

14.15.4.3 GE Services

The GE provides the following services:

– Bidirectional Link Pass Through (LPT)

The GE emulates a bidirectional point–to–point cable between two client devices. Failures in any di-
rection at any point (GE line or TDM) will cause a service down notification to both ends.

– Static Link Aggregation Group (S–LAG)

Equivalent to the bidirectional LPT service with the difference that one end is the ES64 (client) device.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 380 / 531

531
 – Unidirectional broadcast
The GE emulates a unidirectional point–to–multipoint cable between a sender and a number of re-
ceivers. As the sender always requires a valid GE line for broadcasting, the GE laser is constantly
forced on.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Unidirectional Link Pass Through (LPT)

not permitted without written authorization.

The GE emulates a unidirectional point–to–point cable between two client devices. Near end failures
(LOS, GFP errors) are propagated in the same direction, but far end failure (RDI, auto–negotiation
remote faults) are not. Therefore, the clients must notify service interruptions by other means (e.g.
bidirectional fault propagation or protocol hello).

These services can be configured via CT/NM. Refer to the Operator’s Handbook for the related configura-
tion procedures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 381 / 531

531
 14.16 2x/4x10 Gigabit Ethernet Port Board

14.16.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The 10GE LAN card supports point to point Ethernet Private Line (EPL) transport of 10GE LAN and Ether-
not permitted without written authorization.

net Virtual Private Line (EVPL) transport of multiple sub–rate services of 10GE via SDH/SONET network.

The 10GE EPL service is equivalent to the service provided for the 4/8/16xGE card except for the extended
range of Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)–Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG). In this case there is a
one to one relationship between the ethernet port and the GFP–VCG.

The GE services described in chapter 14.15.4.3 on page 380 are also supported for 10GE, except the
“Unidirectional Link Pass Through” service, that is supported for 1GE only.

14.16.2 HW Functionality

The main features of the board are:

– 2x/4x10GE LAN ports per board

– XFP optical modules:

• 10GE–SR
• 10GE–LR (equivalent with I–64.1)
• 10GE–ER (equivalent with S–64.2b)

– Board and port management via Q3

– 10GE Services
• Ethernet Private Line (EPL), point to point transport
• Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) according to G.8011.2 type 1
– Ethernet port is used as a multiplexed access where traffic is separated by VLAN tags,
there is one EPL (VCG) per VLAN.
– Up to 61 services (VCG) per 10GE Port
– VLAN processing at line side allowing to:
• ’pop’ received VLAN tag on receive side
• ’push’ a VLAN tag with ethernet type and priority bits on transmit side
– IA complete port (ethernet or VCG) can be used in transparent mode, e.g. for EPL services
or VLAN ignored EVPL services.

– 10GE mappings
• frame mapping according to G.7041 (GFP–F)
(VC4 and STS1 mode cannot be mixed on a 10GE port)
– into VC–4–nv (n= 1...64) for SDH or
– into STS–1–nc (n= 1...192) or STS–3c–xv (x=1 to 64) for SONET
• client flow control according to 802.3x (PAUSE frames) – only for EPL mode

– Support of Jumbo Frames (MTU = 10240 bytes)

– 32 ms differential delay compensation for virtual concatenated VC/STS

– PM on Ethernet
• Interface counters
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Aggregate counters (per VCG)

• Service flow counters (per gMauCTP)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 382 / 531

531
 – SDH/SONET functions: VC–4/STS–3c/STS–1 TTP incl. PM

– CSF insertion in case of Ethernet link failures and SSF/CSF detection on VCAT sink side.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

14.16.3 Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL)

not permitted without written authorization.

The EVPL service introduces a new level of hierarchy between the ethernet port and the VCG using VLAN
tags to provide multiple services at subrates of the 10GE up to the port capacity. The sub–rate services
are identified by the VLAN tag carried within the ethernet frames. Each EVPL service is mapped to a
unique VCG. The demultiplexing from one 10GE port to multiple VCGs is done on ingress side, while multi-
plexing of multiple EVPL services into a 10GE port must be provided on egress side.

Figure 207. shows a typical EVPL service application for the GE. The source client want to have two sepa-
rate Ethernet services over the same Ethernet port to different clients. Each Ethernet frame is tagged with
an VLAN identifier to which service it belongs. The data traffic enters the SDH domain at the GE board.
For each incoming frame the VLAN identifier identifies to which VCAT group the frame belongs. If the rout-
er sends more data than the VCAT group is able to transport the traffic is dropped as no VLAN Flow Control
is defined yet. For a short traffic burst the GE is able to receive data with the full Gigabit Ethernet data rate
because the input is buffered (in the meaning of ’store and forward’).

Customer A
VCG Port
Port
V Customer A
VCG C
G
Port VCG
Customer B
Port

Port

Customer B

Figure 207. Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service

Figure 207. shows 4 individual EVPL services each of them marked in different color or dashed. Some
of the EVPL services enters and leaves the network in a shared manner with other services but each EVPL
is transported over a dedicated VCG.
The receiving GE is responsible to de–map the VCAT group and to multiplex the packets from different
VCAT groups to a single Gigabit interface. VCAT de–mapping includes compensation of the differential
delay between the fractions.
In order to decouple VLAN identifier assignment for each customer side the VLAN swap functions are pro-
vided at the edge of network. This allows individual assignment per customer side and avoids unique
VLAN assignment over all customer interfaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Required NE functions:

– GFP,
– VCAT,

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 383 / 531

531
 – LCAS,
– L1 aggregation,
– VLAN based L2 aggregation on access link

Services:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– Ethernet leased line,

– IP Backbone,
– Storage Area Network (SAN),
– Metro Ethernet network interconnection,
– Mobile backhaul.

14.16.4 Functional Description

Figure 208. shows the basic constellation for the 2x/4x10GE. At max there are two or four 10 Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces available. The board has a maximum back–panel capacity of 128/256 VC4s
(768 STS1)s. Each port is handled by a separate NEWTON FPGA.
Optical interfaces are provided as drawers which are inserted in the main board. Four different sub–mod-
ules are available:

– XS642B
– XI641
– XGESR.
Mixed interface variants are allowed on the same board. The expected 10GE card is named P2XGE/
P4XGE.

SPI A/B
FPGA download Goblin4G
HW_CFG
Local SPI

I2C, ALS
Port #1 QDR2RAM RLDRAM
72M 288M MAZINGA4G
LED
FPGA
LED control NEWTON FPGA
LOS ISPB
GAUSS SFI
10GE_LAN SERDES XSBI
XFI SFI4.1
XSBI 10GE 10GE VLAN Core
E/O e.g Vitesse 4.1
1x VCS8479 16x IF PCS MAC MUX GFP–F, VCAT, LCAS 16x
XFP 10.3G IF
644M 622M
OH IF
I2C I2C
V
OH OH I To matrix
V A/B
Port #2 A
L
Port #3 * D
I Clk38MHz
sync38Mb
Port #3 *

DC/DC –48V A/B

* in case of 4x10GE board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 208. 10GE LAN Board Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 384 / 531

531
 The board uses the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) with null extension header for the mapping. Option-
al a payload Frame Check Sequence (FCS) can be chosen.
The back–panel bandwidth can be assigned with a granularity of one VC4 (STS1) separately to the two/
four 10Gigabit interfaces (1...64 VC4 or 1..192 STS1 per port). As there is sufficient back–panel capacity
available each port can be used with full capacity (64 VC4 or 192 STS1) without any limitation. It is possible
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

to change the number of virtually concatenated VC4s/STS1s for any interface that is in use. The concept
not permitted without written authorization.

is very similar to the 4/8/16xGE port whereby the back–panel capacity is group in 64 VC4/192 STS1
blocks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 385 / 531

531
 14.16.5 Power Subsystem

The P2XGE/P4XGE board gets its power supply of 48/60 V from the back panel and generates the follow-
ing voltages by DC/DC converters (refer to Figure 209. ):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– –5.2 V_XFP,
not permitted without written authorization.

– +5 V_XFP,
– 3.3 V,
– 3.3 V_GTL,
– 2.5 V,
– 1.8 V and
– 1.2 V.

There is an inrush current limitation circuit to limit the current when the board is plugged in. A 3.3 V service
voltage is used to supply GOBLIN and the power manager, which do the controlling and supervision of
the converters. All battery voltages from the back panel are fused on board, and there is a fuse supervision.
After the power converters there are various LC–filter circuits for ASICs, FPGAs, XFP modules etc.
Power failures are visualized by LED, and a power fail signal to GOBLIN is generated.

Back Panel

DC/DC OB −5.2 V_XFP

+BATT_A

DC/DC HB +5 V_XFP
−BATT_A

DC/DC POL 3.3 V

Inrush current limitation

3.3 V_GTL

DC/DC POL 2.5 V

+BATT_B 1...4

DC/DC POL 1.8 V

−BATT_B

1...2

DC/DC QB 1.2 V

3.6 V_A
3.3 V_Service
Power
Manager
1A Control
GOBLIN
3.6 V_B

Figure 209. Power Subsystem Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 386 / 531

531
 14.17 ES64 Server Card

14.17.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The ES64 card is part of the ISA–ES family of boards. The ISA–ES series modules provide Ethernet con-
not permitted without written authorization.

nectivity for LAN based clients by mapping of Ethernet flows directly onto the SDH network by means of
standard mechanism (e.g. GFP, LCAS, VCAT). In future also MPLS connectivity is provided where MPLS
flows can be transported via GFP/LAPS over SDH connections. They introduce wire speed classifying,
policing and scheduling capability using a carrier class packet switch engine for Ethernet and MPLS traffic.

14.17.2 HW Functionality

The ISA–ES cards offer specific SDH trunks (connected to SDH matrix via backplane). A simple block dia-
gram of the ES card architecture is given in Figure 210. The ES card has a Ethernet switching function.
Ethernet frames are then mapped for example via GFP–F and LCAS into virtual concatenated Virtual Con-
tainer (VC–12, VC–3 and VC–4–xv). This is implemented by the so called Multi Service Function.

Datapartunder TDMpartunderQ3management
SNMPmanagement

Eth Multi
Switch Service
Function SDH

Ports
ISA−ES64 64=cardtrunking
capacityinSTM−1eq.
TDM
Matrix

Figure 210. ISA ES64 Trunks

The ES64 has the following features:

– HO virtual concatenation is supported only.

SDH (VC–4–Xv and SONET application (STS–1–xv and STS–3c–Xv) is provided.
– DS3 termination is supported for STS1 termination.
No virtual concatenation is supported. DS3 Management is required for TL1 only.
– 20G Server Card
This card has a 20G capacity of Multi Service Function (128 VC–4 equivalents).
– Interworking with remote Ethernet ports through the multi service function.
Remote Ethernet ports can be located in the same shelf (16/8/4x GE card and 4/2x 10GE LAN card)
or even in a different NE connected through the SDH network.
– Support of Jumbo Frames (MTU = 9242 bytes for port 1..30 and 129..158, and MTU = 2026 bytes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(Baby Jumbo Frames) for all other ports)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 387 / 531

531
 14.17.3 Functional Description

The ES64 card can interwork with remote Ethernet ports through GFP/VCAT. These ports may be located
in the same shelf (applies to 16x/8xGE card) or even can be located in a different NE connected through
the SDH network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A block diagram of the ES64 board is shown in Figure 211.

10GMultiService
Function
Back−
plane
20G
20G
Traffic
Network
Manager
Processor +
Switch
Driver
10GMultiService
Function

LocalDataController

Figure 211. Block Diagram of the ES64 Board

The ES64 is split into a data part (data engine) and a TDM part.

14.17.3.1 Data Engine

The so called Data Engine consist of the following main functions:

– Network processor unit including peripherals

– Traffic Manager/Switch including peripherals
– Local Data Controller

The Network processor unit (NPU) has 20G throughput (bidirectional) and provides two SPI4.2 inter-
faces towards TDM part. Each SPI4.2 interface is able to handle 10G of traffic. Inside the NPU the data
packets are classified, headers are stripped off and internal headers are added and forwarded through
2x SPI4.2 interfaces to the Traffic Manager.

The Traffic Manager (TM) provides unicast, multicast and broadcast frame switching and various shaping
and scheduling algorithms taking into account buffer capacity, frame priority and number of queues.

The Local Data Controller (LDC) acts as a single network element providing management agents (via
SNMP and 1678MCC SC interfaces), protocol engines (R/MSTP for Ethernet, RSVP–TE, LDP, OSPF for
MPLS) and control of the data functions down to the HW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 388 / 531

531
 14.17.3.2 TDM Part

The TDM part of the ES64 is composed of the following functions:

– Backplane driver
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The backplane driver is compatible with the 160G/320G/640G TDM matrix of the 1678 MCC.
not permitted without written authorization.

– 1x or 2x10 Gb/s DATA/TDM mapper functions

Mapper functions are used to map data packets coming from the data engine into GFP frames which
then are mapped into TDM signals, or to provide POS mapping (with or without PPP). Mapping op-
tions are:

• GFP–F into VC–4–xv (x= 1...64) for SDH

• GFP–F into STS–1–xv (x= 1...192) for SONET
• GFP–F/LAPS into DS–3 into STS–1 for SONET
Up to 128 logical ports of either SDH (VC4/STS3c) or SONET (STS1/DS3) types can be used
on each Data/TDM mapper. Up to 120 DS3 termination points can be used. Separate TP pool
handling for each Data/TDM mapper is required.

– Control IF

• Remote inventory
• EPS and status link via SPI
• SPI bus
• Control of XFP optical module
• SYS_ID generation for LDC.

14.17.4 Power Subsystem

The ES64 board gets its power supply of 48/60 V from the back panel and generates the following voltages
by DC/DC converters (refer to Figure 212. ):

– 1.2 V,
– 1.8 V,
– 2.5 V,
– 3.3 V,
– 5 V,
– 1 V and
– 1.5 V.

There is an inrush current limitation circuit to limit the current when the board is plugged in. All battery volt-
ages from the back panel are fused on board, and there is a fuse supervision. After the power converters
there are various LC–filter circuits for ASICs, FPGAs, XFP modules etc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 389 / 531

531
 Back Panel

DC/DC 60 A 1.2 V
+BATT_A
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Inrush Current
−BATT_A Limiter DC/DC 25 A
not permitted without written authorization.

1.8 V

Power Se9
quencing
Logic DC/DC 25 A 2.5 V

DC/DC 15 A 3.3 V

DC/DC 10 A

3.6 V_A 5V

VREG 16 A 1V
3.6 V_B 3.3 V_Service

VREG 5 A
1.5 V

Figure 212. Power Subsystem Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 390 / 531

531
 14.18 FAN Unit (FAN)

In the 1678MCC equipment two FAN units are mandatory.

The unit can be simply plugged into the backpanel as any other board of the 1678MCC, in one of the two
slots present for the purpose, at the top and at the bottom of the shelf.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

FAN speeds are monitored through Spider block, that also collects alarms rising when FANs revolve below
30% of their maximum speed allowed.

The FAN unit is set up with a basic assembled PCB on which FANs are screwed on; on the same PCB
the FAN controller is also hosted.

14.18.1 Functional description

The FAN controller is the PCB dedicated to providing FANs with power, managing the speed of each of
them and monitoring speeds through Spider block, that also collects alarms rising when FANs revolve
below 30% of their maximum speed allowed.
Each FAN is powered by 48VDC voltage, supplied through a 38V–75V input acceptable range DC/DC
converter.

On the power supply of each FAN a fuse has been inserted, so that if a rotor had to be blocked for any
reason, the current absorbed from it would rise and then the fuse would break, protecting the motor from
damages.

In reality, this caution is not strictly necessary, since FANs mounted on the unit have themselves a locked
rotor protection: if the rotor is prevented from rotating and power is applied to the unit, the motor will
self–protect. When the locked rotor condition is removed the FAN will automatically restart. The motor can
sustain locked rotor conditions indefinitely throughout the full specification range of voltage and
temperature.
Figure 213. on page 393 shows the block diagram of unit.

As we can see, Spider can individually interrupt the 48V power supply of each FAN, detects temperatures
from three sensors spread across the controller board and can adjust FAN speeds by means of three
potentiometers, which provide through potential dividers variable voltages to FAN speed control pins.

The speeds of three brushless DC motors are also monitored. Is available an output signal that switches
at a frequency of 2 cycles per revolution of the FAN: when the FAN is not rotating, the output is either a
steady High or a steady Low. This signal enters a monostable that detects the presence of it and refers
to Spider. At the same time, it enters a counter triggered by a 1 Hz sync (SY1Hz) coming either from matrix
A or B (and selected by ACT lines): information about revolutions is so collected every 1 sec and read by
Spider by means of an enable command.

On board a bicolor LED is present to show:

• green: unit in service

• red: internal fault (unit out of service).

The FAN unit front panel is shown Figure 62. on page 123.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 391 / 531

531
 14.18.2 Performance

Each FAN provide a flow of 167 m3/hr against a pressure of 82 Pa when running at maximum speed and
with 1.2 kg/m3 inlet air density.
In 40ºC environment at full speed condition, the grease in the bearings has an L10 life of 100,000 hours.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In 75ºC environment, the grease in the bearings has an L10 life of 40,000 hours.
not permitted without written authorization.

14.18.3 Power Supply

The maximum current drawn by one single FAN is 0.35 A at full speed condition on 48 VDC supply,
corresponding to 16.8 W of power consumption.
With all FANs at full speed condition, the board absorbs 0.9 A when powered through battery A by a voltage
of 65 V, i.e. it has a total power consumption of 58.2 W.

14.18.4 FAN Failure

In case of a FAN failure the following instructions are very important.

No effect on transmission yet, but the FAN unit does not work properly. There is the danger of system
overheat.

If the FAN unit does not work properly, immediately replace the FAN unit.

If the operation temperature is more than 35 5C it is necessary to replace the damaged

FAN unit in max. 24 hours.

For FAN unit replacement refer to Operator’s Troubleshooting and Maintenance Handbook.

14.18.5 FAN Unit in SONET Applications

The lower FAN unit is equipped with a dust filter and the upper FAN unit with a safety plate (finger guard).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 392 / 531

531
 SPI SPI ID
A B
FAN
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

EEPROM

ON/OFF 1
ON/OFF 2 SPIDER
ON/OFF 3

speed ADJ 1
speed ADJ 2 DIG
POT SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3
speed ADJ 3

speed MON 1 mon 1

speed MON 2
mon 2

speed MON 3
mon 3

counter 1 buffer 1

buffer 2
counter 2

counter 3 buffer 3

act_A SY1Hz_B
act_B SY1Hz_A

Figure 213. FAN Functional Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 393 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
394 / 531
 15 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS LOWER ORDER EXTENSION SHELF

15.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The following Table 48. on page 395 and Table 49. on page 395 sums up the units managed in the
not permitted without written authorization.

1678MCC LO Extension Shelf Equipment.

Table 48. Units involved in 1678MCC LO Extension Shelf

Type / Class Description Acronym Width Q.ty

(TE)
Control / Common Alarm Board ALM 4 1

Power Supply and Filter PSF 2

Bus Termination BUSTERM

LO Matrix LO Centerstage Matrix 160GBIT/S LX160 8 2

Lower Order Adaptation 20G LA20 4.5 10

FAN System FAN FAN –– 2

Notes: Q.ty = max number allowed in the 1678MCC LO Extension Shelf equipment
Acronym = label shown on CT

Table 49. Optical Modules involved in 1678MCC LO Extension Shelf

Type Description Acronym Q.ty

STM–16 I–16.1 SFP – Intra–office (wl = 1310 nm) SI161 8

Notes: Q.ty = max number allowed per LA20 board

Acronym = label shown on CT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 395 / 531

531
 15.2 Lower Order Adaptation Board 20G (LA20)

The LA20 board is used in the 1678MCC LO Shelf 160G partsystem which is introduced in 1678 Metro
Core Connect. The main purpose of this new partsystem is to build a 4/3/1 cross connect designed for the
ETSI and ANSI Market.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The LA20 board implement the first and third stage of low order matrix together with the so called adapta-
tion function (High Order path termination and adaptation function). One LA20 board has a capacity of
20Gb/s and is 1:n (1<n<7) protected.
Two LA20 groups are possible.

15.2.1 Lower Order Matrix

The lower order matrix is a three stage matrix which is distributed over 2 types of boards.

– Low Order Adaptation and endstage matrix board (LA20)

– Low Order CS Matrix Boards (LX160, LO functionality)

The effective switching capacity amounts to 20 Gbit/s per LA20 board.

The LA20 supports the following switching entities.

– VC–3, VC–12, in SDH application

– VC–11, STS–1, STS–3c, STS–12c in SONET application

Protection capabilities: SNCP/I and SNCP/N

15.2.2 Lower Order Adaption Function

The lower order adaption function is located between the interface to HO subsystem and the matrix func-
tion (refer to Figure 214. ). In other words these chips terminate the administrative units AU4 of an STM–64
byte serial stream in receive direction into lower order VC–n and multiplexes lower order VC–n in transmit
direction into the administrative units AU4 of an STM–64 byte serial stream.

The lower order adaption function supports fault detection, alarm generation and performance monitoring
for higher and lower order.
The chip set of this function is furthermore SONET compliant. For instance the chips are capable to termi-
nate administrative units AU3 and to process virtual tributaries VT1.5. The chips additionally support
AU3/AU4 conversion. These functionalities are used for SONET and SDH/SONET interworking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 396 / 531

531
 LA20

LO Adaptation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

and Monitoring
not permitted without written authorization.

Backplane

Interface
to HO Matrix
Subsystem

Figure 214. LA20 Functional Overview

Data Connections

The data connections between higher order matrix and the lower order matrix board are done via differen-
tial signal lines over the backplane at 2.5 Gb/s .

Synchronization and Clock Distribution

The LA20 board receives two 38 MHz clock signals (Copy_A and Copy_B) and two 38MBit/s data signals
(Copy_A and Copy_B). These synchronization signals are led to VIVALDI ASIC, which performs the syn-
chronization function. The data signal comprises frame and multiframe information (1Hz/8kHz) to syn-
chronize the board to the 1678MCC internal framing. The data signal is read by the 38 MHz clock. The
38 MHz clock is also used to generate the 622 MHz system clock by means of a VCO.

Power Subsystem

There are two independent power interface inputs, each coming from a PSF board.
On the LA20 board there are four central DC/DC converters (48V to 1.2/5V) and four point of load (POL)
converters (5 V to 1.5/1.8/2.5/3.3 V). An inrush current limitation circuit and a filter are provided in front
of the central DC/DC converters for current limitation when the board is plugged in. A central DC/DC power
converter provides a galvanically isolated power (5 V) to the POL converters. The POL converters deliver
the various voltages:

– 1.5 V
– 1.8 V
– 2.5 V
– 3.3 V

used by the ASICs and FPGAs on the LA20 board.

The front panel is shown in Figure 74. on page 141.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 397 / 531

531
 STM 16

16 4
2.5 Gb/s 1 opt.
32
WSE TUPP SFP
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

4 2.5 Gb/s
#1
2MHz ref clk bus

IS STM 16
not permitted without written authorization.

M M

6 DAFFODIL
CLK
Rx Clocks
Center
Stage STM 16
4
2.5 Gb/s 1 opt.
4
WSE TUPP SFP
32 VIVALDI 16 2.5 Gb/s
OS
#8 STM 16

M M M OH

OH link
OH link

HAWK DOVE
OH link

DCC

HW cfg
SPI A
GOBLIN −48v/60v A+B
SPI B
DC/DC 0v A+B
Service OBPS GND (FPE)
voltage
3,3v

M=MotorolaBus
ISPB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 215. LA20 Board Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 398 / 531

531
 15.3 Lower Order Matrix 160 Gbit/s Board

15.3.1 Functional description

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

15.3.1.1 Overview
not permitted without written authorization.

The Unit ’LO Centerstage Matrix 160GBIT/S’ provides SONET/SDH switching capabilities, implementing
MSPC (Multiplex Section Protection Connection) and HPC (Higher Order Path Connection) switching
functions.
The unit will be used in the 1678 Metro Core Connect (1678MCC). The 1678MCC equipment can host
up to two ’LO CENTERSTAGE MATRIX 160GBIT/S’ Units; in this case, only one ’LO CENTERSTAGE MA-
TRIX 160GBIT/S’ Unit at a time is active, the other one is standing by.

The Matrix board supports the following functionalities:

• Cross–connection with STS–1 granularity of up to 1024 STM–1 signals (3072 signals at AU3
level), non blocking
• Synchronization (Clock Reference Unit)
• Shelf Controller (SC)
• 1+1 EPS protection scheme (when two LX160 boards are present)

15.3.1.2 Features

The Matrix board address the following functional requirements:

• Management of 256 bi–directional links @ 2.5/2.7 Gbit/s

• Forward Error Coding (FEC) protection of the 256 links through the backpanel
• Payload Performance Monitoring (PM)
• Traffic SubNetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)
• Clock Reference Unit (CRU) of SDH quality
• Shelf Controller (SC)

A functional block diagram with indication of main internal and external interfaces is shown in Figure 216.
For further details about how the MSPC and HPC functions are implemented from a logical point of view
to fulfil the ITU–T G.783 functional model.
Port Payload Links

LO Centerstage Matrix 160G

High
Control Signals

Order
Matrix
Shelf
Controller
Synchronization
Signals

SDH
Equipment Power
Clock Supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 216. LO Centerstage Matrix Board Functional Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 399 / 531

531
 15.3.2 Physical Description

The physical description of the LX160 board is similar to the MX640 board. Only the switching capacity
is different (refer to chapter 14.6.2 on page 349).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 400 / 531

531
 15.4 Alarm Board (ALM)

15.4.1 Functional description

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

15.4.1.1 Overview
not permitted without written authorization.

The Alarm board is used in the 1678MCC LO Shelf 160G partsystem. One Alarm board per LO shelf is
necessary. The ALM board is mandatory because it has to provide the supervision of the step–up convert-
ers for the LO shelf. Also the service voltage have to be supervised via a backplane signal from PSF boards
like on the FLC. The ALM board functionality is a subset of the FLCCONGI board.

The ALM provides the following functionalities:

– Rack alarm interface

– Housekeeping inputs and outputs
– Alarm lamps interface
– Power supervision.

15.4.1.2 Rack Alarms Interface

The Rack Alarms (RA) interface provides a number of galvanically insulated output contacts, reporting the
status of some equipment–related alarms. The outputs are realized with electronic switches which can
close or open a contact toward the independent housekeeping output ground similarly. The physical ac-
cess to the interface is provided through a Sub–D 25 poles female connector, accessible on the unit front
panel.

15.4.1.3 Housekeeping Interface

The ALM board provides a set of generic, programmable, parallel I/O contacts, physically available from
the same Sub–D 25–poles female connector used also for the rack alarms interface.
There are 8 housekeeping inputs and 4 housekeeping outputs available from the ALM board.

15.4.1.4 Rack Lamp Interface

The rack lamps interface provides a set of galvanically insulated contacts which allows to control a number
of rack lamps . these contacts are controlled by the SPIDER device parallel ports according to the main
internal alarms status of the equipment contained in a rack thus showing a summary of the shelves status.
The lamps are controlled by closing or opening the related contacts toward the separate rack lamps
ground.

The main electrical characteristics are summarized below:

– Normally open contacts

– Voltage polarity independent ;can accept either AC or DC signals
– Maximum load current 120 mA
– Open contact resistance > 50 MΩ
– Closed contact < 1 Ω
– X_RCH : Is not active of the ALM board

Note: The rack lamp interface functionality is done under SW control.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 401 / 531

531
 15.4.1.5 Features

The Alarm board address the following functional requirements:

– Battery supervision , Input from the PSF board

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Battery fail displayed ( Batt_A and Batt_B fail ) via X_TAND/X_GND_RA contact
not permitted without written authorization.

– 3.6V service voltage for SPI devices and glue logic

– Housekeeping I/O (with internal galvanic isolated power supply):
• 8 inputs
• 4 outputs
– Alarm lamps
– Alarm contacts
– House keeping (HK) I/O and alarm contacts (RA) connector on front side
– Rack lamps connector (RL) on front side
– Supervision of all internal voltages

A functional block diagram with indication of main internal and external interfaces is shown in Figure 217.

15.4.1.6 Power Subsystem

The Alarm board gets its power supply of 48/60 V from the back panel and generates the 3.6 V service
voltage for SPI devices.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 402 / 531

531
 Fuses
− 48/60V

Input Power
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

+ 48/60V
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Inrush Current Limitation & EMC

48/60V
POWER_LAMP
+12V
Rack URG_LAMP
CMISS Lamp NURG_LAMP
M_LAMP

from PSF
Lamptest

Rack RA
Alarm RA_GND
POWER
V3V_A
V3V_B FAIL
Fuse House HK_OUT
Keeping HK _IN
In/Out HK_GND
3
TS RIM
2 STATUS_LED
2
Spider
MRXDA
A 3 SPI bus
SPI bus 3 MRXDB
B

URG_LED
NURG_LED
Board_ID ATTD_LED
ABN_LED
IND_LED
Quit push button

BATFAIL_A1..3
BATFAIL_B1..3
V3VAKO
V3VBKO

Figure 217. ALM Board Functional Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 403 / 531

531
 15.5 Power Supply and Filter Board (PSF)

This board is already described in chapter 14.4 on page 343.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

15.6 Bus Termination Board (BUSTERM)

not permitted without written authorization.

This board is already described in chapter 14.5 on page 346.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 404 / 531

531
 16 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS OED SHELF 1670SM

16.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The following Table 50. on page 405 and Table 51. on page 405 sums up the units managed in the
not permitted without written authorization.

1670SM Shelf Equipment.

Table 50. Units involved in 1670SM

Type / Class Description Acronym Width (mm) Q.ty

Control / Common Control and General Interfaces CONGIHC 40 2

Equipment Controller EQUICO 20 1

Bus Termination BTERM 40 1

Matrix Matrix HiCap HCMATRIX 52 2

LINK Optical Link Enh HCLINKE 40 8

SDH Port 4xSTM–4 P4S4N 20 16

STM–4
SDH Port 16xSTM–1 optical P16OS1 20 16
STM–1
16xSTM–1 electrical P16S1N

4xSTM–1 electrical P4ES1N

SDH Port 4x140 MBit/s P4E4N 20 16

SDH Access 2xSTM-4 A2S4 20 16

SDH Access 12xSTM-1 optical A12OS1 20 16

STM–1
16xSTM-1 electrical A16ES1

4xSTM-1 electrical A4ES1

SDH Access 2x140 MBit/s A2S1 20 16

FAN Unit FAN FAN –– 2

Table 51. Pluggable Modules involved in 1670SM

Type Description Acronym Q.ty

140 MBit/s 140/155 electrical interface ICMI 64

STM–1 S–1.1 OPTIC – Short Haul (wl = 1310 nm) IS–1.1 256

L–1.2 OPTIC – Long Haul (wl = 1550 nm) IL–1.2

STM–4 S–4.1 OPTIC– Short Haul (wl = 1310 nm) IS–4.1 64
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

L–4.1 OPTIC – Long Haul (wl = 1310 nm) IL–4.1

L–4.2 OPTIC – Long Haul (wl = 1550 nm) IL–4.2

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 405 / 531

531
 16.2 STM-1 Electrical I/O Interface

16.2.1 4xSTM-1Electrical I/O Interface

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The I/O Port board 4xSTM-1 electrical (P4ES1N) manages up to four STM-1 data signals. The physical
not permitted without written authorization.

access points to the four STM-1 signals are available on the related Access board (A4ES1).

16.2.1.1 Port Board P4ES1N

The SDH functions required to process the STM-1 signals are implemented by an Interface ASIC (refer
to Figure 218. ). It interfaces the two HiCap Matrix boards via the backpanel. The Interface ASIC sends
and receives four STM-1 signals (data + clock) at 155 Mbit/s to/from each SPI. An external LOS is received
from each input line interface.

Complying with the ITU-T G.783 Recommendation, the Interface ASIC performs the TTF function. The
TTF block is connected to the two HiCap Matrix boards (main and spare) by means of a bidirectional link
at 622 Mbit/s (STM-4 equivalent capacity) in 1+1 configuration. It performs the sink on Rx side and source
on Tx side for the termination of the STM-1 signals. In addition, the TTF block provides the T1 timing refer-
ences at 2 MHz, derived from the STM-1 input signals.

The backpanel interface supplies redundant system clocks (SYST CK, a, b) to the internal circuits of the
Interface ASIC.

The PISO blocks provide the board interface to the backpanel at a bit rate of 622 Mbit/s.

The DC/DC Converter converts the 48/60 V power supply to the following voltages:

– +2.5 V (to supply all components on the board)

– +3.3 V (to supply all components on the board).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 406 / 531

531
 ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
System–clock a
Interface ASIC

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
System–clock b

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

Main and spare

HiCap Matrix
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

from/to
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
1st INTERFACE

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ T1

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TTF

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Electrical
Input/ STM–1

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Output RST MST MSA P
I
SPI LOS (3) S

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
1 O

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
DCCR DCCM
RSOH MSOH
(4)

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
P DCC
I
S

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
O

ÌÌÌ
Electrical
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Input/
Output

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
SPI (3)
2 2nd INTERFACE
(4)

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
T1

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Electrical
Input/

Main and spare

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Output

HiCap Matrix
(3)
SPI 3 rd INTERFACE (4)
3

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
T1

to
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Electrical
Input/

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Output (3)
4 th INTERFACE (4)
SPI

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
4 T1

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Config. &
Status Management

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
622 MHz Bus
OSC M-bus

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Driver
Main and spare
HiCap Matrix

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
from/to

Bus–OFF

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Remote
Inventory

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ RIBUS RIBUS

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Power I/F
Sync

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ Unit ID

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Failure
3.3 V 48/60 V
CONGIHC

DC/DC

ÌÌÌ ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
from

2.5 V CONVERTERS

ÌÌÌ A4ES1
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ P4ES1N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 218. Block Diagram 4xSTM-1 Electrical I/O Interface

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 407 / 531

531
 16.2.1.2 Access Board A4ES1

The Access board 4xSTM-1 Electrical (A4ES1) is located in the Access area and provides the connection
to the line by a coaxial cable for the electrical STM-1 I/O Port board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 219. depicts the block diagram of the Access board A4ES1.
not permitted without written authorization.

Input Side

On the input side, the CMI coded signal coming from the coaxial cable is equalized, decoded into NRZ
code and forwarded to the electrical Port board.

The command criteria SWITCH from the RIBUS I/F block selects the MUX in order to send the local
streams towards the protection Port board.

LOS alarm, if detected, is sent to the Port board. It can also be sent through a MUX towards the protection
Port board if the SWITCH command is active.

Output Side

On the output side, the signal from the Port board is coded into CMI code and then sent toward the coaxial
cable.

When EPS is active, the RIBUS I/F block sends the SWITCH command to the MUX. In this case, the sig-
nals from the protection Port board are selected and sent toward the encoder NRZ/CMI.

Control Section

RI data, such as code, series number and construction data, can be read/written via the RIBUS I/F. It also
sends the following commands:

– FSEL for frequency selection (not used)

– CLOP for loopback facility
– SWITCH for EPS facility.

A red/green LED is provided for board fail alarm indication on the front cover plate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 408 / 531

531
 CMI CMI LOS
Input PLL NRZ toP ortboard
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

NRZ
not permitted without written authorization.

MUX NRZ toprotection

Portboard

SWITCH
NRZ fromprevious
LOS Accessboard

MUX LOS toprotection

Portboard
ACCESS1−Inputside
SWITCH

Mask CMI NRZ fromP ortboard

CMI PLL MUX fromprotection
Output Adapter NRZ NRZ
Portboard
SWITCH NRZtonextAccessboard
FSEL

CLOP
ACCESS1−Outputside

CMI
Input

CMI ACCESS2
Output
CMI
Input
ACCESS3
CMI
Output
CMI
Input
ACCESS4
CMI
Output
SWITCH
CLOP
FSEL
FAIL

RIBUS to/from
Remote RIBUS
Inventory I/F HiCapMatrixboard

A4ES1

Figure 219. Block Diagram Access Board 4xSTM-1 Electrical (A4ES1)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 409 / 531

531
 16.2.2 16xSTM-1Electrical I/O Interface

The I/O 16xSTM-1e boards increase the I/O port board density by factor 4 and the I/O shelf density by
factor 2.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Similar to the I/O 4xSTM-1e used up to now, the I/O 16xSTM-1e interface functionality is implemented in
not permitted without written authorization.

two boards:

– Port board (P16S1N)

– Access board (A16ES1).

Port Board P16S1N

The Port board P16S1N performs signal processing. A block diagram of this board is shown in Figure 221.

The port boards are located in the port area. The access boards are located in the corresponding access
area. Port and access boards are connected over the backpanel.

Both boards Access and Port are one slot wide (4TE).

Access Board Port Board

1 16xSTM91 16xSTM91 16xSTM91equiv.

16
16xSTM91electrical
16 (P16ES1)
(A16S1)

Figure 220. Relation between Port Boards/Access Boards

Two configurations are supported:

– EPS N+1 (with N=1 to 15) protected configuration

The protection is ensured by a protection board HPROT16 located in the access area and a protec-
tion port board 16xSTM-1e located in the port area.

– Unprotected configuration
In this case, the protection boards HPROT16 and the I/O board 16xSTM-1e (P) are not equipped.

Access Board A16ES1

The access board A16ES1 provides 16xSTM-1e interfaces.

The A16ES1 is located in the access area and provides the connection to the 16xSTM-1 electrical I/O port
board.

The description of the functionalities is similar to 4xSTM-1 electrical access board (A4ES1) described in
section 16.2.1 on page 406.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 410 / 531

531
 System–clock a

System–clock b
Interface #1 HPOM
HSUT
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Buffer
not permitted without written authorization.

TTF
4x

MAIN AND SPARE

STM–1
RST MST MSA . P
I
S
O
from/to Access board

DCCR DCCM
RSOH MSOH

(1)

MATRIX
4x
STM–1
Interface #2
4x
STM–1
Interface #3
4x
STM–1
Interface #4

622 MHz DCC

OSC (1)
FPGA

Config. &
Status

MATRIX MAIN AND SPARE

Management
Bus
M–BUS
Driver
from/to
Bus–OFF
Remote
Inventory
RIBUS RIBUS
Power I/F
Sync
Unit ID
Failure
3.3 V
CONGIHC

DC/DC 48/60 V
from

2.5 V CONVERTERS

P16S1N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 221. Block Diagram 16xSTM-1 Electrical I/O Interface

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 411 / 531

531
 16.3 STM-1 Optical I/O Interface

16.3.1 4xSTM-1Optical I/O Interface

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The I/O Port board 4xSTM-1 optical (P4S1N) manages up to four STM-1 data signals. The physical access
not permitted without written authorization.

to the four STM-1 signals is performed by optical I/F modules. Two modules are inserted in the related
Access board (A4S1), two in the Port board itself.

16.3.1.1 Port Board P4S1N

The SDH functions required to process the STM-1 signals are implemented by an Interface ASIC (refer
to Figure 222. ). It interfaces the two HiCap Matrix boards via the backpanel. The Interface ASIC sends
and receives four STM-1 signals (data + clock) at 155 Mbit/s to/from each SPI. An external LOS is received
from each input line interface.

Complying with the ITU-T G.783 Recommendation, the Interface ASIC performs the TTF function. The
TTF block is connected to the two HiCap Matrix boards (main and spare) by means of a bidirectional link
at 622 Mbit/s (STM-4 equivalent capacity) in 1+1 configuration. It performs the sink on Rx side and source
on Tx side for the termination of the STM-1 signals. In addition, the TTF block provides the T1 timing refer-
ences at 2 MHz, derived from the STM-1 input signals.

The backpanel interface supplies redundant system clocks (SYST CK, a, b) to the internal circuits of the
Interface ASIC.

The PISO blocks provide the board interface to the backpanel at a bit rate of 622 Mbit/s.

Each optical transmitter reports its status to the Interface ASIC by means of the two input signals “Laser
Degrade” and “Laser Failure”.

The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) algorithm is implemented by the hardware and provides the laser
shutdown command “Laser OFF” to the Interface ASIC.

The DC/DC Converter converts the 48/60 V power supply to the voltages +2.5 V and +3.3 V to supply all
components on the board. It is synchronized with a synchronization clock at 300 kHz (signal “Power Sync”,
generated by the Interface ASIC) in order to prevent EMI problems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 412 / 531

531
 ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ Interface ASIC System clock a

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
System clock b

Main and spare

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

HiCap Matrix
1st INTERFACE

from/to
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
T1

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Optical TTF
Input/

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Output STM–1
RST MST MSA P

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
(3) I
1 SPI LOS S
O

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
LASER D.
LASER F. DCCR DCCM

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Optical RSOH MSOH
module LASER OFF (4) P DCC

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
I
S
O

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Optical
Input/

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Output 2ndINTERFACE
2nd INTERFACE (3)
Optical
2 module (4)

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
T1

Optical
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ

Main and spare

HiCap Matrix
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Input/ (3)
Output 3 rd INTERFACE
(4)

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Optical T1

to
3 module

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Optical
Input/

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
4 th INTERFACE (3)
Output (4)
Optical T1

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
4 module

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Config. &
Status Management

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
622 MHz Bus
OSC M-bus

Main and spare

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Driver

HiCap Matrix
from/to
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Bus–OFF
Remote

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Inventory

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
RIBUS RIBUS
Power I/F

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Sync
ID

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Unit
CONGIHC

Failure
3.3 V

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
48/60 V
from

DC/DC
2.5 V CONVERTERS

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌA2S1 P4S1N

Figure 222. Block Diagram 4xSTM-1 Optical I/O Interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 413 / 531

531
 16.3.1.2 Access Board A2S1

The Access board 2xSTM-1 Optical (A2S1) is located in the Access area and provides the connection to
the line by a fiber cable for the optical STM-1 I/O Port board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Figure 223. depicts the block diagram of the Access board A2S1.
not permitted without written authorization.

CLOP

INPUT LOS
LASER DEG

OPTICAL LASER FAIL

LINE1
MODULE
SHUT DOWN
OUTPUT DATA AND CLOCK
to/from
Port board

CLOP
INPUT LOS
LASER DEG

LINE2 OPTICAL LASER FAIL

MODULE SHUT DOWN
OUTPUT DATA AND CLOCK
to/from
Port board
CLOP
FAIL

to/from
HiCapMatrixboard
REMOTE RIBUS
RIBUS
INVENTORY I/F

A2S1

Figure 223. Block Diagram Access Board 2xSTM-1 Optical (A2S1)

The Access board A2S1 houses up to two independent optical modules.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 414 / 531

531
 Control Section

RI data, such as code, series number and construction data, can be read/written via the RIBUS I/F. It also
sends the following command:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– CLOP for loopback facility.

not permitted without written authorization.

A red/green LED is provided for board fail alarm indication on the front cover plate.

16.3.1.3 STM-1 Optical Module

The STM-1 Optical module represents the physical access for the optical I/O Port board STM-1. Each
module provides the optical RX and TX module with level adapter, Remote Inventory and Laser Restart
button. Different Optical modules are available according to the connector type and wavelength.

EDR
Data in
Optical Rx optical module Level
Input ECKR Adapter Clock in

LOS

EDT Data out

ECT Level
Adapter Clock out
Optical Tx optical module
Output

Laser Failure
LaserRestart Laser Degrade

Shutdown

Remote toRIBUSI/F
Optical Module Inventory

Figure 224. Block Diagram STM-1 Optical Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 415 / 531

531
 16.3.2 16xSTM-1 Optical I/O Interface

The I/O 16xSTM-1o boards increase the I/O port board density by factor 4 and the I/O shelf density by
factor 2.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Similar to the I/O 4xSTM-1o used up to now, the I/O 16xSTM-1o interface functionality is implemented in
not permitted without written authorization.

two boards:

– Port board (P16OS1)

– Access board (A12OS1).

Port Board P16OS1

The port board P16OS1 which provides 4 STM-1o interfaces performs signal processing of all the 16 sig-
nals.
The port boards are located in the port area. The access boards are located in the corresponding access
area. Port and access boards are connected over the backpanel.
Both boards (access and port) are one slot wide (4TE).

All optical modules are Small Form Pluggable (SFP) modules. They are different of those used in the
4xSTM-1o boards. These optical modules can be equipped in a flexible way (1 to 4 optical modules).

Only the S-1.1 interface is supported. The connectors are LC.

Otherwise the description of the functionalities is similar to 4xSTM-1o port board (P4S1N) described in
section 16.3.1 on page 412.
The relation between port board (P16OS1) and access board (A12OS1) is shown in Figure 225.

Access board Port board

1 slot 1 slot
1
. . 16xSTM–1o
. .
. 12xSTM–1o . 16xSTM–1equiv.
16xSTM–1o . 12 .
interfaces (A12SO1)
1
.
. (P16OS1)
4
SFP module S–1.1

Figure 225. Relation between Port Boards/Access Boards

Access Board A12OS1

The access board A12OS1 provides 12xSTM-1o interfaces (SFP modules).

The A12OS1 is located in the access area and provides the connection to the 16xSTM-1o I/O port board.

The description of the functionalities is similar to 4xSTM-1o access board (A2S1) described in sec-
tion 16.3.1 on page 412. But the A12OS1 supports up to 12 optical modules (compared to two). These
optical modules are Small Form Pluggables (SFPs) and can be equipped in a flexible way (1 to 12 optical
modules).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 416 / 531

531
 16.4 I/O Port Board STM-4

The I/O Port board STM-4 (S4) manages one optical STM-4 data signal. The physical access is performed
by an optical module on the board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Port board S4 is available in variants S-4.1 (Short haul, 1300 nm), L-4.1 (Long haul, 1300 nm) and
not permitted without written authorization.

L-4.2 (Long haul, 1500 nm), all with FC/PC or SC/PC connectors. The variants identified by JE (Joint Engi-
neering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the dispersion values and sensitivity.

The SDH functions required to process the STM-4 signals are implemented by an Interface ASIC (refer
to Figure 226. ). It interfaces the two HiCap matrix boards via the backpanel.

Complying with the ITU-T G.783 Recommendation, the Interface ASIC performs the TTF function. The
TTF block is connected to the two HiCap matrix boards (A and B) by means of a bidirectional link at
622 Mbit/s (STM-4 equivalent capacity) in 1+1 configuration. It performs the sink on Rx side and source
on Tx side for the termination of the STM-4 signal. In addition, the TTF block provides the T1 timing refer-
ences at 2 MHz, derived from the STM-4 input signal.

The backpanel interface supplies redundant system clocks (SYST CK, a, b) to the internal circuits of the
Interface ASIC.

The Interface ASIC sends and receives one STM-4 signal (data + clock) at 622 Mbit/s to/from the SPI. The
SPI is able to detect an external LOS from the input line. The optical transmitter reports its status to the
Interface ASIC by means of the two input signals “Laser Degrade” and “Laser Failure”. The ALS algorithm
is implemented by the hardware on the O/E block and provides the Laser shut down command “Laser
OFF” to the Interface ASIC. A push-button is provided for manual laser restart on the board’s front panel.

The DC/DC Converter converts the 48/60 V power supply to the following voltages:

– +2.5 V (to supply all components on the board)

– +3.3 V (to supply all components on the board)
– –5.2 V (to supply the optical module).

The DC/DC converter is synchronized with a synchronization clock at 300 kHz (signal ’Power Sync’, gen-
erated by the Interface ASIC) in order to prevent EMI problems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 417 / 531

531
 System–clock a
System–clock b

Matrix board A and B

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

from/to
Interface ASIC

TTF
Optical
Input/ K1,K2
Output STM–4
O/E SPI Tx side RST MST K1,K2,TP
MSA
LOS Insertion Rx side
Optical LASER D. Insertion
module LASER F. DCCR DCCM
RSOH MSOH

DCC

Config. & Status

Management
M-bus Bus
622 MHz
Laser Restart Driver

Matrix board A and B

OSC

from/to
Bus–OFF

Remote
Inventory RIBUS
RIBUS
I/F

Unit ID
Power Failure
Sync

–5.2 V

CONGIHC
3.3 V 48/60 V

from
DC/DC
2.5 V CONVERTERS

S4

Figure 226. Block Diagram Optical STM-4 I/O Port Board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 418 / 531

531
 16.5 I/O Port Board 4xSTM-4

The description of the 4xSTM-4 Port board is similar to I/O STM-4 Port board, refer to sec-
tion 16.4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The I/O Port board 4xSTM-4 (P4S4N) manages four optical STM-4 data signals. The physical access to
the four STM-4 signals is performed by optical IF modules. Two modules are inserted in the related Access
board (A2S4), two in the Port board itself.

The I/O Port board 4xSTM-4 (P4S4N) is available in variants S-4.1 (Short haul, 1300 nm), L-4.1 (Long
haul, 1300 nm) and L-4.2 (Long haul, 1500 nm), all with FC/PC or SC/PC connectors. The variants identi-
fied by JE (Joint Engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the dispersion values and
sensitivity.

16.5.1 Port Board P4S4N

The SDH functions required to process the STM-4 signals are implemented by the GAs mounted on the
board. They interfaces the two HiCap matrix boards via the backpanel.

16.5.1.1 Access Board A2S4

The Access board 2xSTM-4 optical is located in the Access area and provides two additional connections
to the line.

The Access board A2S4 houses up to two independent optical modules. Figure 227. depicts the block
diagram of the Access board A2S4.

CLOP
A2S4

INPUT LOS

STM94 LASER DEG

OPTICAL LASER FAIL
LINE1
MODULE
SHUT DOWN
OUTPUT DATA AND CLOCK
to/from
Port board

CLOP
INPUT LOS
LASER DEG
STM94
LINE2 LASER FAIL
OPTICAL
MODULE SHUT DOWN
OUTPUT DATA AND CLOCK
to/from
Port board
CLOP
FAIL

to/from
Matrix board
REMOTE RIBUS
RIBUS
INVENTORY I/F
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 227. Block Diagram Access Board 2xSTM-4 Optical (A2S4)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 419 / 531

531
 16.5.2 STM-4 Optical Modules

The STM-4 optical modules represent the optical physical accesses for the 4xSTM-4 Port board (P4S4N),
refer to Figure 228.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The optical module houses in the Access board A2S4 and in the Port board P4S4N.
not permitted without written authorization.

Up to two optical modules houses in the Access board A2S4 and in the Port board P4S4N.

Each module provides the optical RX and TX module with level adapter, Remote Inventory and Laser Re-
start button. Different optical modules are available according to the connector type and wavelength.

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
OPTICAL EDR
INPUT Level Data

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
RX Optical Module
ECKR in
Adapter
Clock in

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
LOS

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ EDT
Data out

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ECT Level

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
OPTICAL Adapter Clock out
TX Optical Module

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
OUTPUT

Laser Failure
Laser Restart
Laser Degrade

Shutdown

Remote to RIBUS IF bus

Inventory

Optical Module

Figure 228. Block Diagram STM-4 Optical Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 420 / 531

531
 16.6 4x140 Mbit/s Port Board (P4E4N)

The 4x140 Mbit/s Port board is a bidirectional unit which interfaces up to four plesiochronous 140 Mbit/s
(E4).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The choice among the two possible different interfaces is flexible and mixed configuration are allowed.
not permitted without written authorization.

For each P4E4N Port board there are four electrical (75 Ohm) or optical module (Short and Long Haul);
two of the four module are hosted directly on the port board, the other two are hosted in the relevant access
board (A2S1).

The functions required to manage 140 Mbit/s PDH signals are implemented by the “Mapper/Demapper
140-PDH/155-STM-1” block and GA mounted on the board. The GA interfaces the two matrix on the HiCap
matrix boards via backpanel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 421 / 531

531
 System–clock a
G.A. System–clock b
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HiCap Matrix
not permitted without written authorization.

A and B
1st INTERFACE
Int.
Loop
Line
Loop
EN 140/155 HPOM T1
HSUT(*)
O/E (3a)
Input/ O/E LOS LOS TTF (3b) PISO
Output Module (3c) &
MAPPER/DEMAPPER Data SIPO
1 Data 140–PDH/155–STM1 (3d)
SPI RST MST MSA
or
PPI DCCR DCCM (4a)
LASER D. RSOH MSOH (4b)
PISO
& DCC
LASER F. (4c) SIPO
LASER OFF (4d)

O/E
Input/
Output
2
2nd INTERFACE (3b)
O/E EN 140/155 (4b)
Input/ T1
Output
3
SPI 3 rd INTERFACE

Hicap Matrix
( ) (3c)

A and B
O/E (4c)
Input/ EN 140/155 T1
Output
4
SPI
( ) 4 th INTERFACE (3d)
EN 140/155 (4d)
T1

Config. &
Status

FROM CONGI HC HiCap Matrix A and B

622 MHz Management
Bus
OSC M–BUS
Power Driver FROM/TO
Sync.
Remote CMISS
Inventory Bus–OFF

RIBUS
EN 140/155 1–4 RIBUS
I/F ID
Line Loop 1–4
1.8 V F +3.3 Vdc
Int. Loop 1–4
5V
DC/DC Unit failure 48/60 V
3.3 V
A2S1 CONVERTERS
ACCESS 2.5 V
CARD
P4E4N
Notes:
The SPI associated to the 3rd and 4th interfacees are physically on the Access board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 229. P4E4N Port Board Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 422 / 531

531
 16.6.1 2x140 Mbit/s Access Board (A2S1)

The 2x140 Mbit/s A2S1 Access board is placed in the Access area of Main Shelf (MS).

The Access board A2S1 can house two independent modules that can be both electrical, both optical or
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

a mix of the two.

not permitted without written authorization.

The Access board houses also the RIBUS I/F block function.

CLOP

INPUT LOS
LASER DEG
ELECTRICAL LASER FAIL to/from
LINE1
PORT CARD
SHUT DOWN
MODULE
OUTPUT
DATA AND
ICMI CLOCK

CLOP
INPUT LOS
LASER DEG
ELECTRICAL LASER FAIL
LINE2 to/from
SHUT DOWN PORT CARD
MODULE
OUTPUT
DATA AND
ICMI
CLOCK
CLOP
FAIL

to/from
MATRIX

REMOTE RIBUS
RIBUS
INVENTORY I/F

A2S1 Access Board

Figure 230. A2S1 Access Board Block Diagram

16.6.2 140 Mbit/s Electrical Module (ICMI)

The electrical modules are housed in the Access board A2S1 and in the Port board P4E4N.

Up to two modules can be housed in A2S1 and P4E4N.

The module contains:

– a CMI interface (CMI/NRZ decoder and NRZ/CMI encoder)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– a Remote Inventory block.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 423 / 531

531
 LOS

RX side DATA RX
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Coax Input CMI/NRZ

not permitted without written authorization.

DECODER CLOCK RX

TX side DATA TX
Coax Output
NRZ/CMI
CLOCK TX
ENCODER

Remote
to RIBUS I/F block
Inventory

ICMI Module

Figure 231. ICMI Module Block Diagram

OMI Interface

INPUT side : the CMI electrical signal coming from the line is NRZ decoded (clock + data). The LOS alarm
is revealed.

OUTPUT side : the NRZ signal coming from the port (data + clock) is CMI coded to be sent to the line.

Remote Inventory

The Remote Inventory is implemented on an E2PROM. Inventory data as code, series number, construc-
tion date are stored inside the E2PROM and can be read through the RIBUS I/F block.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 424 / 531

531
 16.7 High Speed Port Protection Using HPROT and HPROT16 Boards

The High speed Protection (HPROT) board is located in the Access area and provides EPS protection for
electrical high speed ports. It realizes the connection between the Access boards and protection Port
board (electrical) if protection is requested.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

There are available two protection access boards:

– HPROT
It is used in conjunction to A4ES1 access board + P4ES1N port board. It is needed for EPS protection
on 4xSTM-1 electrical board.
– HPROT16
It is used in conjunction to A16ES1 access board + P16S1N port board. It is needed for EPS protec-
tion on 16xSTM-1 board.

These modules have to be placed in correspondence of spare port board. The general functionality of
HPROT and HPROT16 is the same. Figure 232. shows the HPROT board. The HPROT16 is similar, it
has got 16 blocks instead of 4.

The next chapters describe only the HPROT board.

The HPROT board connects up to four electrical high speed data streams from/to the neighbored last Ac-
cess board related to the protected Port board group.

NRZ NRZ
from/to the last CK CK from/to
Access board related to the NRZ NRZ protection Port board
protected Port board group CK CK
LOS LOS

NRZ NRZ
from/to the last CK CK
Access board related to the NRZ NRZ from/to
protected Port board group CK CK protection Port board
LOS LOS

NRZ NRZ
from/to the last CK CK
Access board related to the from/to
NRZ NRZ
protected Port board group CK CK protection Port board
LOS LOS

NRZ NRZ
from/to the last CK CK from/to
Access board related to the NRZ NRZ protection Port board
protected Port board group CK CK
LOS LOS

to/from
FAIL

HiCap Matrix board

Remote
Inventory RIBUSI/F RIBUS

HPROT

Figure 232. Block Diagram HPROT Board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 425 / 531

531
 Control Section

RI data, such as code, series number and construction data, can be read/written via the RIBUS I/F. A red/
green LED is equipped for board fail alarm indication on the front cover plate.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

High Speed (HS) Port Protection

not permitted without written authorization.

The 1670SM shelf is designed to handle STM-1 electrical Ports (High Speed Ports) with N+1 (N = up to
15) Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) or no protection of the STM-1 Port boards. Up to 16 HS Port
boards can be housed in the Port area. There are 4 High Speed Ports per STM-1 Port board. It supports
up to 60 STM-1 ports (working ports per shelf) plus 4 STM-1 protection ports in case of EPS. This leads
to a maximum of 15 working boards and one protection board per 1670SM shelf (15+1 protection).

In the 1670SM shelf, the protection Port board needs to be a related High-speed Protection (HPROT)
board in the Access area (slot 4). In case of no EPS, the protection board and the HPROT board have to
be omitted.

The constraints for the main/protection Port boards are the following:

– The Access board corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT Access board
– The HPROT board has to be plugged at the left side of the Access board group (A4ES1)
– The protection Port board has to be plugged in at the left side adjacent to the protected Port board
group (P4ES1N).
– The protection Port board and the Port boards of the protected group have to be of the same type.

Note that no protection is planned for the Access boards, and note also that the type of protection can not
be changed (i.e. it isn’t possible to change the protection scheme from N+1 to 1+1).

Manual Switch and force switch commands can be given via software by the user to activate the protection
boards. The protections status is reported to the EC.

High Speed Connections

Each Access board is connected also with the previous one and next one in both the receive and transmit
direction; this way, N+1 protection is provided using the HPROT board in last position at the left side of
the Access boards pertaining to the protected Port board group.

The Port boards P4ES1N manage up to 4 HS signals. Protection is always enabled for all HS signals of
the switched Port board.

Input Side (from the Access Module Point of View)

The CMI encoded STM-1 signals coming from the line and connected to the Access board are NRZ de-
coded. The clock CK is extracted from the data. By means of the back panel connections, NRZ data and
CK are forwarded to both the pertaining main Port board and to the next Access board in the direction to
the protection Port board.

Output Side (from the Access Module Point of View)

The signal, coming from main and protection ports via back panel connections, is coded into the line format
(CMI).

The protection port is not devoted to a specific main port, therefore the signal transmitted from the protec-
tion Port board is distributed to all Access boards involved in the protection scheme. The connections are
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

functionally point-to-multipoint but physically every Access board realizes a point-to-point connection to-
wards the previous and the next Access board using a buffer to decouple and regenerate the signal.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 426 / 531

531
 EPS Switching Causes

The hardware failures causing automatic EPS protection switch can be grouped as:

– failures causing the internal equipment link loss as powering, Clock loss, board missing (referred as
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

LOS/LOF);
not permitted without written authorization.

– failures causing traffic loss (the internal link is preserved) as for instance unlocked oscillator, optical
module defective, electrical interface defective and so on;
– failures not causing traffic loss nor internal link loss but causing loss of management as RIBUS failure
or M-bus failure.

Moreover some failures can cause equipment malfunctioning (as remote inventory fault, loss of DC/DC
synchronism).

These hardware faults are signalled to the management system and do not provokes an automatic switch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 427 / 531

531
 16.8 Optical Link Enhanced (HCLINKE)

Main functions and configuration

The HCLINKE board is a 10 Gbit/s interface port aimed at connecting together a 1670SM to the 1678MCC
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

main shelf.
not permitted without written authorization.

The HCLINKE is hosted in a dedicated section of the 1670SM, located in the lower row, named Link Area.
Up to eight HCLINKE can be hosted in one 1670SM (four “main” and four “spare”).

The HCLINKE board can be put in the link area of the 1670SM: the roles of the main and the spare boards
and their positions are fixed (refer to chapter 12.1.2 on page 148).

Two GA (#1 to #2) are used and they provide the following capabilities:

• 1xSTM–64 sections (with full SDH functionalities) is generated and terminated

• manage ALS

The connection between 1670SM and 1678MCC is MSP protected:

• a Multiplex Section Protection (in according to the K1–K2 APS standard protocol) dual–ended
is implemented.

The MSP protection scheme is automatically created at the board configuration, but the following simple
rule has to be followed: the board HCLINKE spare has to be created after (and deleted before) the corre-
sponding HCLINKE main.

Description

The main functions are: regenerator section termination, multiplex section termination and section adapta-
tion. The GA directly interface the backplane and the optical devices. The two GA are connected to ISPB
bus via a common GTLP to TTL level converter interface.

Each HCLINKE is connected to HCMATRIX/A and HCMATRIX/B. The throughput of each interconnection
is 10 Gbit/s, obtained via 16 differential LVDS connections at 622 Mbit/s. Each HCLINKE receives from
each matrix a dedicated 622 MHz clock in LVDS format.

Each HCLINKE is connected also to the control subsystem of the 1670SM equipment, i.e.:

• Intra Shelf Parallel Bus (ISPB), mastered by the active HCMATRIX

• Serial Peripheral Bus (SPI) A and B, mastered by HCMATRIX/A and /B

The ISPB allows for the access to the contents of the internal registers of the ASICs hosted on the
HCLINKE board.

The SPI busses are terminated on the board via a ’Spider’ device which allows for the read and write of
some provisioning and alarms available on the board.

Each LINK slot has a ’board presence’ pin which allows the HCMATRIX boards to detect the presence of
the board.

The HCLINKE board has an optical interface which has an aggregate bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s bi–directional
for the connection to the 1678MCC main shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 428 / 531

531
 Transmission resources

The following transmission features are supported:

• All transmission features at the VC–4 path layer are supported for the HCLINKE board (HPOM,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HSUT, HTCM/HTCT);
not permitted without written authorization.

• J0 management;
• Linear MSP 1+1 bi–directional is supported between a HCLINKE–A and HCLINKE–B (fixed
scheme created with the configuration of the main/spare boards like an EPS 1+1 for HCMA-
TRIX);
• AU4–4c and AU4–16c signals can be transported.

The following limitations apply about transmission:

• HCLINKE does not support the transport of AU4–64c signal;

• no bidirectional transmission on single fiber (this is not a functional limitation).

Synchronization, auxiliary channel and loopback

No limitation applies to synchronization, so HCLINKE can be used as synchronization sources and they
can carry SSM messages.
Each HCLINKE is connected to the 6–wires synchronization bus aimed at collecting the synchronization
sources for the CRU, which is hosted on both matrices. Each of the six wires can be loaded with a 2 MHz
clock by any port of the 1670SM: this rule applies also for the HCLINKE board.

Power supply and optical characteristics

This board hosts on it the circuitry for the DC/DC converter 48V/+5V, 48/–5V and one 10 Gbit/s optical
module.

The HCLINKE board receives the battery voltage and generates through DC/DC converters following volt-
ages:

– +3.3 V
– +1.8 V
– +5 V
– –5 V.

Also HCLINKE board receives the spider voltage +3.3 VS by backpanel.

The main optical characteristics are:

wavelength: 1290 to 1330 nm (second window)

launched average power per fiber: min. –6.0 dBm max. –1.0 dBm
sensitivity: –11.0 dBm (@ BER =10 –12)
saturation: –1.0 dBm (@ BER =10 –12)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 429 / 531

531
 16.9 Bus Termination (BTERM)

Refer to Figure 233. on page 430.

The main function of this board is to give the electrical termination to the buses routed on the backplane
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

and to supply the reference voltages of ISPB bus located on the other boards housed in the shelf.
not permitted without written authorization.

The signal buses are:

• ISPB (communication way between the microprocessor and the GA of the equipment)
• ISSB (connection way between EQUICO and SC on HCMATRIX)
• CK2M (reference clocks T1/T2 between port and synchronization function on HCMATRIX)
• SPIDER (connection way between all boards and SC on HCMATRIX)

These buses are routed on the backplane as a ring structure; therefore it is necessary to have a double
termination, one at each end of line.
The BTERM is powered by –48 V by CONGIHC board; it generates a 3.3 V and a 1.5 V used on board
(a VTT voltage for terminations on other units).
The Bus Termination houses also the RIBUS I/F block the function of which is described on para. 13.13
on page 321 and the Remote Inventory.
On the front cover plate a green/red LED is available for board fail alarm indication.
This board is not managed by CT. It is very important to check its presence (it is mandatory) and its correct
functionality.

all all
buses buses
TERMINATIONS

3.3V 1.5V
–48V DC – DC Regulator to other units
from VTT
Converter
CONGIHC
FAIL

REMOTE RIBUS to/from

RIBUS
INVENTORY I/F MATRIX

BTERM

Figure 233. BTERM Board Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 430 / 531

531
 16.10 Control and General Interface Board (CONGIHC)

Each 1670SM shelf houses two Control and General Interface High-Capacity (CONGIHC) boards, re-
ferred as CONGIHC A (slot 1) and CONGIHC B (slot 21).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The CONGIHC boards are not intended as redundant (only for power and internal LAN). Each board pro-
not permitted without written authorization.

vides a set of functions. Both boards are necessary to provide the complete set.

Table 52. lists the interfaces provided on each CONGIHC board.

CONGIHC/A CONGIHC/B

POWER A POWER B

Housekeeping & Remote Alarms (a subset) Housekeeping & Remote Alarms (a subset)

Rack lamps (R/M), not used Not used

QMD (Q2), not used Shelf ID connector

Ext. LAN 10 base 2 not used

Ext. LAN 10 base T not used

INT LED INT LED

Internal LAN (10 Base T) A1 Internal LAN (10 Base T) B1

Auxiliary Housekeeping (connector for FAN Auxiliary Housekeeping (connector for FAN
alarm cable) alarm cable)

Remote Alarms

Internal LAN (10 base T) A2 Internal LAN (10 Base T) B2

Table 52. Interfaces on the Boards CONGIHC A and B

The Shelf ID connector which provides shelf identification within the Internal LAN is connected
to the front panel of the CONGIHC B board (Slot 21).

The main functions performed by the CONGIHC board are (refer to Figure 234. ) :

– Input power stage

– AND/OR and Remote Alarms (not used)
– Housekeeping interface
– R/M interface
– QMD interface
– External LAN interface
– Remote Inventory
– Auxiliary Housekeeping interface
– Internal LAN interface (LINK 1+2)
– Remote Alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 431 / 531

531
 ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ Input Power Stage

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Batt
+ Batt_A
not permitted without written authorization.

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
MAIN +Batt TO ALL
Station POWER EMI BOARDS

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
battery – Batt_A BLOCK FILTER
TO

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
RIBUS
Service PROTECTION I/F +3V
DC/DC TO ALL

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
battery POLARITY CICUIT 3.3 V
48V BLOCK BOARDS
INVERSION

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
PROTECTION

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
–9V STEP UP
CONVERTER

RACK
LAMPS BAT FAIL
R/M
20%
AND/OR URG, NURG, IND

HOUSEKEEPING 6
AND REMOTE HK–IN
ALARM not used
2 HK–OUT

AUXILIARY to/from
8+8 AUX–HK (in&out)
HOUSEKEEPING HiCap Matrix
(connector for Board
FAN alarm
cable)

NON SDH
EQUIPMENT not used
QMD M
INTERFACE TRANSCEIVER U
X not used
(shelf ID is connected
on CONGIHC B in
Slot 21)
–9V
COAX
TRANSCEIVER
BNC INTERFACE
External LAN (CTI) UNIVERSAL
ETHERNET M not used
RJ45 INTERFACE U
ADAPTER X not used
Q3 (AUI)
INTERFACE

Link#1 BNC
FAIL

to/from
HiCap Matrix
RJ45 Board
InternalLAN Remote RIBUS RIBUS
Inventory I/F
RJ45 CMISS
Link#2 LAN
DXC
INTERFACE CONGIHC

Figure 234. CONGIHC Board Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 432 / 531

531
 Input Power Stage

The input power stage decouples the power station battery. It contains the Main Power Block with EMI
input filters, a Protection Circuit Block, a Step up converter to provide –9 V and a DC/DC converter to pro-
vide the +3.3 V to the RIBUS I/F block.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

QMD Interface

Interface is not used (shelf ID on CONGIHC B).

Internal LAN Interface

This interface links the 1670SM shelves via the Internal LAN to the Control partsystem. Redundant inter-
faces (LINK #1, #2) are provided:

– LINK #1:
• two BNC for 10Base2 connection type (not used)
• RJ45 for 10BaseT connection type.

– LINK #2:
• RJ45 for 10Base T connection type.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 433 / 531

531
 16.11 Matrix Board (HCMATRIX)

The 1670SM equipment hosts up two HCMATRIX boards (referred HCMATRIX/A in the slot 22 and
HCMATRIX/B in the slot 41); only one board is active, the other one is standby.
As the HCMATRIX is in 1+1 redundant configuration, all the functions realized by the board are redundant
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

as well.
not permitted without written authorization.

The HCMATRIX performs different functions:

• connections between ports

• equipment synchronization (Clock Reference Unit)
• Shelf Controller
• performance monitoring collection
• power supply
• remote inventory.

The HCMATRIX board has two boards: MATRIX SUPPLY (DC/DC converters) and MATRIX MOTHER-
BOARDS (all other functionalities).

The HCMATRIX can handle up to 512 STM–1 signals of which 256 from Port boards (and the other from
LINK boards).

MATRIX CONNECTIONS

The connections between HCMATRIX and ports are realized by means of links at 622 Mbit/s (refer to
Figure 235. on page 437).

EQUIPMENT SYNCHRONIZATION

The equipment synchronization is realized by the SETS function (Synchronous Equipment Timing
Source) that distributes to each port the pertaining synchronization signals.

A high stability oscillator at 10 MHz (VCXO – 0,37 ppm) is present to guarantee an holdover or free running
working mode compliant to the ITU–T Recs.

The clock reference (CRU) working modes can be: locked, hold over and free running.

When working in locked mode, the SETS block can select its reference signal among (the selection is ac-
complished by means of the software and craft terminal):

• timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1)

• 2 MHz clocks coming from the SERVICE board (T3)

The SETG block (Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation) generates:

• a system clock T0 (at 622.08 MHz) locked to the selected reference (T1 or T3) and distributed
to the equipment;
• CK38Mhz : it is derived from the system clock (T0) and is distributed to all the ports; ts frequency
is 38.88 MHz;
• MFSY : it is the multiframe synchronism at 500 Hz, obtained from the ck38 MHz; it is distributed
to all the ports and boards;
• a 2 MHz clock T4 used as synchronization clock towards the external, accessible from the SER-
VICE board;
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

SY1S : it is the 1 second synchronism that is sent to a GA for the managing of the Performance
Monitoring Data.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 434 / 531

531
 The synchronization system is able to guarantee the hitless switching functionality in case of CRU switch
only if the two CRUs are locked. In order to work in ’locked mode’ the two CRUs exchange some signals.

For a detailed description of the synchronization subsystem refer to para. 13.6 on page 236.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SHELF CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

not permitted without written authorization.

The HCMATRIX houses the circuitry necessary to realize the Shelf Controller.

The SC provide the resources to support the SW functions related to the control and management opera-
tion of the boards. To perform its functions, the SC directly interfaces the ASICs on the board implementing
the SDH functions for data collection (faults or alarm event detections, performance monitoring data) and
configuration provisioning.
As the SC is involved in critical activities (for instance EPS), is 1+1 protected.

The internal interfaces supporting SC element for communication tasks are:

– Management –Bus (ISPB) : it is a parallel bus connecting the SC processor to all the transport ASICs
located on the traffic boards to provide communications among the boards and the Controller, for
management of the boards (management of payload processing functions).

– ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus is a serial bus for communication among SC, EC (on the EQUICO board)
and, if present, other processor in the Shelf.

– RIBUS (SPI): it is a serial bus connecting the SC processor to the serially interfaced devices called
RIBUS–I/F, located on each board for simple read or write operations, for communications about Re-
mote Inventory, boards failure, bus releasing.

– IPL : it is a channel between the two SC (active and standby).

A push–button is present to reset the SC.

The ’Board Missing’ signals of all the boards are connected with a GA.

For a detailed description of the Controller refer to para. 13.5 on page 224, where the control subsystem
is described.

PERFORMANCE MONITORING COLLECTION

The “Performance Monitoring Management” block housed on the HCMATRIX board realizes Performance
Monitoring functionalities; it collects and stores the data (Defect seconds and Errored blocks) coming from
all the flows.

The Performance Monitoring Controller is managed by a GA and can be made at:

• Adaptation and Regeneration section

• Multiplex section
• Multiplex section adaptation
• HSUT
• HPOM
• HPT
• TCT and TCM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 435 / 531

531
 POWER SUPPLY

The board receives via backpanel connectors the –48 V coming from CONGIHC boards and extracts the
main power supply via dedicated DC/DC Converters hosted on the ’MATRIX SUPPLY’ board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The power supplies used in the HCMATRIX are the following:

not permitted without written authorization.

• +3.3 V (it is obtained by 8 DC/DC conv. –48/+3.3 V–5 A; it is the main power supply of the board)
• +2.5 V (it is obtained from the +3.3 V with 7 Step Down +3.3 V/+2.5 V–5 A)
• +1.7 V (it is obtained from the +3.3 V with a Step Down +3.3 V/+1.7 V–5 A)
• +0.8 V (it is obtained from the +3.3 V with a Step Down +3.3 V/+0.8 V–5 A).

The Remote–Inventory and RIBUS–I/F blocks are powered by the 3.3 V power service coming from the
CONGIHC boards.

REMOTE INVENTORY

It is the memory used to maintain the board history and data.

For more details about the Remote Inventory function refer to para. 13.13 on page 321.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 436 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

PERFORMANCE
MONITORING
MANAGEMENT

MATRIX
MSP

SNCP AU4 HPC HVC

622 Mb/s from/to all
Squelcing port cards

Timing &
T0 Synchronization T1
10MHz (SETS) from SDH ports
OSC
SETG T3
T4 (ck–ext)

Reset MFSY
T0 CK38 to ports
T0

SC Management bus Management bus

M–BUS
Driver
FLASH Bus From/to
OFF
EPROM spare MATRIX
(1 Mb)
Remote and ports
Inventory
RIBUS RIBUS
I/F
Unit
Failure ID
RIBUS
ISSB From/to
spare HCMATRIX

3.3 V
48/60 V
2.5 V DC/DC from
CONGIHC
1.7 V CONVERTERS
0.8 V GROUP

HCMATRIX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 235. HCMATRIX Board Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 437 / 531

531
 16.12 FANs Unit

Refer to Figure 236. on page 439.

In the FANs subrack can be housed two FANs units that works together in order to avoid high temperature
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

inside the 1670SM subrack.

not permitted without written authorization.

Each FANS unit is composed by seven FANs and some electronic circuits necessary to:

• FANs alarm management

• Send remote alarms to the Top Rack Unit (TRU)
• Power supply

In the following a description of the unit is given; more in details Figure 236. on page 439 shows how the
two FAN units work together.

FANS ALARM MANAGEMENT

Each FAN on the unit can generate an alarm signal in case of faulty (AL1A, AL1B, AL2, AL3 ... etc.): this
function actually is not used.
The “FANs alarm management” block process all this signal in order to:

• generate FANs urgent alarm (URG_V)

• turn on the relevant red on the unit front

One FAN faulty is enough to generate an URG_V alarm and turn on the relevant red LED on the unit.

The state of the FANs unit can be supervised by the 1670SM Craft Terminal application if the remote alarm
URG_V are connected to the Housekeeping contact on the CONGIHC board.

Note: in case of one broken FAN in one of the two FANs unit, the following indication will be display:

FANs unit with al least one broken FAN FANs unit without broken FAN
URG_V red LED ON URG_V red LED OFF
URG red LED ON URG red LED ON

REMOTE ALARMS

This block process the alarms detected on the board in order to generate remote alarms towards the Top
Rack Unit:

• URG: urgent alarm generated in case of at least one broken FAN or loss of station battery.
When active the relevant red LED on the front of the unit is turned on.
• NURG: not used.
• ATT: attended alarm. By pressing the push–button present on the board it is possible to
store an URG alarm. This action will turn off the URG LED alarm and will light up the
yellow LED on the board; the attended command is also sent to the rack lamps.

Note: on the CT and on the OS application the URG and ATT remote alarm are named in a different way;
the relation between this two terminology is explained in Table 68. on page 494.

POWER SUPPLY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The FANs unit are powered by a DC/DC converter that starting from the station battery (–48/–60 V) derive
a 12 VDC voltage. Each FAN is protected by a fuse.
Another voltage is generated (VSERVin) in order to power supply the FANS ALARMS MANAGEMENT
block if no external service battery (VSERVext) is available.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 438 / 531

531
 In case of station battery faulty an alarm is generated (PWAL); as consequence the URG LED and the
relevant remote alarm will be activated (T–URG).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

FANs UNIT (Board 2)

not permitted without written authorization.

FANS
1A 5A

2 3 4

1B 5B

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
NOT USED

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
&
AND5
&

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL4

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL3

Housekeeping
CONGIHC
AL2

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AND1 URG_V

to
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
BAT_B
48/60 V T–URG

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL5A NOT USED
AND5
AL5B
& FANs UNIT (Board 1)

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL4
AL3 not used

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL2 NURG_V
AL1B not used

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AL1A & AND1 R A

Housekeeping
E L

CONGIHC
M A
O R URG_V
T M URG_V
FANS

to
1A 5A E S

2 3 4
URG
1B 5B FANS
ALARMS
MANAGEMENT

RM

Top Rack Unit

URG_V

from/to
AL5A
>
=1
AL5B L A ATT
AL4 O L URG
AL3 C A
AL2 A R
L M
AL1B S
AL1A

BAT_A VSERVext
F1
48/60 V DC/DC
Converter
F7 to fans

VSERVin
Housekeeping
CONGIHC

VSERVin ALARMS
DC/DC
Converter STORING
to

PWAL T–URG

Figure 236. FANs Unit Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 439 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
440 / 531
 17 UNITS DESCRIPTIONS OED SHELF 1662SMC

17.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The following Table 53. on page 441 sums up the units managed in the 1662SMC Shelf Equipment.
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 53. Units involved in 1662SMC

Type / Class Description Acronym Width (mm) Q.ty

Control / Common Control and General I/F CONGI 20 2

Common / LINK Compact STM–16 SYNTH16 40 2

Control / Common Termination Bus BUSTERM 2

PDH Port 63x2 Mbit/s Port P63E1 20 8

63x2 Mbit/s Port with retiming P63E1N

PDH Access 63x2 Mbit/s Prot. (75 Ohm) A63E1A 20 8

63x2 Mbit/s Prot. (120 Ohm) A63E1B

63x2 Mbit/s Prot. (120 Ohm/K20) A63E1B

Low Speed Protection LPROT 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 441 / 531

531
 17.2 63x2 Mbit/s Access Board

Refer to Figure 237. on page 443.

The 63x2 Mbit/s access board provides the connections from back panel to the external line and vice versa
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

for 63 PDH signals. According to the type of line impedance (75 Ohm or 120 Ohm) and electrical character-
not permitted without written authorization.

istics different types of access board are available.

In the following a generic description of the access board is given:
INPUT side
Under normal operating condition, the signal received from the line is sent to the 63x2 Mbit/s “main” port
board.
Under alarm condition, the signal received from the line is switched towards the LSPROT board. The
switching command SEL is received from the RIBUS I/F block.
A protection block is present to protect the incoming signal against spikes ( G.703).
OUTPUT side
The two signals received from the port and LSPROT port boards 63x2 Mbit/s are sent to a selector.
The SEL command, received from the RIBUS I/F block, select the signal to sent to the line.
Remote inventory
The RIBUS I/F is present to read/write inventory data as code, series number, construction data present
on the RI (refer to para. 13.13 on page 321 for details).
Power supply

The access board receive the +3.3 VDC provided by the CONGI boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 442 / 531

531
 Input–1
INPUT SPIKE
TO PORT CARD
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

FROM LINE PROTECTION

TO LSPROT CARD
not permitted without written authorization.

SEL

Output–1
OUTPUT SPIKE FROM PORT CARD
TO LINE PROTECTION FROM LSPROT CARD

SEL

Input–63 TO PORT CARD

INPUT SPIKE
FROM LINE PROTECTION
TO LSPROT CARD

SEL

Output–63
OUTPUT SPIKE FROM PORT CARD
TO LINE PROTECTION FROM LSPROT CARD

SEL

SEL
FAIL

REMOTE RIBUS RIBUS

INVENTORY IF TO/FROM
CMISS SYNTH16

+3.3 Vdc F
FROM CONGI

63x2 MBit/s Access

Figure 237. 63x2 Access Board – Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 443 / 531

531
 17.3 Low Speed Protection

Refer to Figure 237. on page 443.

The LSPROT board is used to realize EPS protection for low speed ports. It realizes the connection be-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

tween the port board and the LS protection bus if protection is requested.
not permitted without written authorization.

The LSPROT board receives the signals coming from the port board via back panel.

Control Section
The RIBUS I/F block is present to read/write inventory data as code, series number, construction data
present on the RI (refer to para. 13.13 on page 321 for details).
Power supply

The access board receive the +3.3 VDC provided by the CONGI boards. On the front cover plate a red/
green LED is available for board failure alarm indication.

1 1
FROM LS TO PORT CARD
Protection Bus

FROM LS 63 63
TO PORT CARD
Protection Bus
FAIL

REMOTE RIBUS RIBUS

INVENTORY IF TO/FROM
CMISS SYNTH16

+3.3 Vdc F
FROM CONGI

LSPROT

Figure 238. LSPROT Board – Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 444 / 531

531
 17.4 63x2 Mbit/s Port Board (P63E1)

Refer to Figure 239. on page 447.

The P63E1 is a bidirectional board which interfaces 63 plesiochronous 2048 kbit/s signals and the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

STM4–BPF signal (BPF=backpanel format).

not permitted without written authorization.

Due to the backpanel format (STM4–BPF or STM4*), the 63 plesiochronous 2 Mbit/s signals that can be
housed in an STM–1 frame, are dropped / inserted in the AU4#1 of the STM–4* frame.
The board is composed by the following blocks:

– (G.A.)
G.A. is an ASIC (or Gate Array) that maps 63x2 Mbit/s streams into an STM–1 frame as required
by ITU–T G.783 Rec.
As the backpanel format for data exchange between 63x2 Mbit/s and Matrix board is STM–4*, the
2 Mbit/s streams are inserted/extracted on the AU4 #1 of the STM–4* frame.

INPUT side

• PPI (E12_TT_Sk and E12/P12x_A_Sk): This block provides the electrical interface between
the physical transmission medium and the internal board format. The received 2048 kbit/s line
signal is HDB3 coded. A decoder on the physical interface decodes the signal to NRZ (non re-
turn–to–zero) format.

• LPA (S12/P12x_A_So) : This block adapts user data for transport in the synchronous do-
main. For asynchronous user data, lower order path adaptation involves bit justification. The
2.048 Mbit/s is inserted into a C–12 container (by means of asynchronous mapping), which is
synchronized (stuffing) with the correspondent TU–12.
• V5[5–7]: Signal label insertion in the byte V5[5–7].

• LPT (S12_TT_So) : The LPT function creates a VC–12 by generating and adding POH to a
C–12. The POH formats are defined in Recommendations G.708 and G.709.
• J2: trail trace identifier is generated.
• V5[1,2]: BIP–2 is calculated and transmitted.
• V5[3]: the number of errors is encoded in REI.
• V5[8]: RDI indication is inserted.

• LTCT So : This block performs Tandem Connection Termination and Adaptation Source
functions, according to ITU and ETSI standards, on Low Path tributaries. It inserts into incoming
Low order VC the N2 byte, and performs BIP–2 parity compensation for that byte insertion. The
inserted N2 is composed by remote signalling, incoming error count, APId.

• STM4–BPF I/F () :
The STM–1 equivalent signal is multiplexed into the Back–Panel STM4* equivalent signal.
The signal is sent to the ”Main” and ”Spare” MATRIX boards .

OUTPUT side

• EPS :
This block select one of the two signal source provided by the MATRIX boards ”Main” and
”Spare”

•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

STM4–BPF I/F () :
The STM–1 equivalent signal is demultiplexed from the Back–Panel STM4* equivalent signal.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 445 / 531

531
 • LTCT Sk : This block performs Tandem Connection Monitoring / Termination and Adapta-
tion Sink functions, according to ITU and ETSI standards, on Low Path tributaries (configuration
choice between Monitoring and Termination is by preset). It extracts from incoming Low order
VC the BIP–2 parity and N2 byte, and then operates alignment, detection and correlation of
alarms, error check. When Termination function is configured, it also modifies data flow by N2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

byte overriding, AIS insertion, generation of remote signalling.

not permitted without written authorization.

• LPT (S12_TT_Sk): The LPT function terminates and processes the POH to determine the sta-
tus of the defined path attributes.
• J2: trail trace identifier is recovered ––> TIM detection.
• V5[1,2]: BIP–2 is recovered ––> Ex–BER, Signal Degrade alarm
• V5[3]: REI bit is recovered and the derived performance primitives is reported.
• V5[8]: RDI information is recovered and reported.
• AIS or SSF detection ––> SSF alarm

• LPA (S12/P12x_A_Sk): It extracts the VC12–POH and processes the TU12 pointer.
• V5[5–7]: Signal label detection in the byte V5[5–7] ––> Signal label Mismatch
detection
• AIS or SSF is applied if Signal label Mismatch is detected

• PPI (E12/P12x_A_So and E12_TT_So):This block provides the interface between the inter-
nal board format and the physical transmission medium. It encodes into HDB3 code the signal
to be sent on line.

Other functions implemented are :

• Clock Reference Selection Block (on G.A): provides six 2 MHz clock links towards the MA-
TRIX boards for synchronization purposes. The selection among the 63 flows is made via soft-
ware.

• TIMING (on G.A): receives the reference clock (38.88 MHz) and synchronism pulse (500 Hz)
from the MATRIX boards and extracts the local clocks used by the G.A.
The Tx clock is locked, by means of a PLL to the system clock or, when in free running, to a local
oscillator with a +–50 ppm drift: (51 MHz OSC) block.

• RIBUS I/F
This block is used to read/write from/to the ”RIBUS” stream, to control the LED on the board,
to release the Management–bus in case of power failure, and to use the remote inventory. It is
powered by the + 3.3 VDC supply by CONGI boards.

• REMOTE INVENTORY
It is the memory containing the board information, for identification purposes.

• M–BUS Driver
It drives the input–output gates of the Management–bus. These drivers can be disabled (by
the Bus–OFF signal) in case of power failure.

• DC/DC CONVERTER
It converts the 48/60 V power supply to the 3.3 V used to supply all the components in the board.
The DC/DC converter is synchronized with a synchronization clock at 288 MHz (signal Power–
Sync, generated by G.A.) in order to avoid EMI problems.

•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

STEP DOWN
It uses the 3.3 V power supply from DC/DC Converter block to obtain the 2.5 V used to power
the Gate Array (G.A.).

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 446 / 531

531
 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
2Mb/s
inputs Input side

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2Mb/s #1
not permitted without written authorization.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
PPI LPA LPT LTCT
#1 sink source source source

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
..
.. ckr1 ckrx
Access Card

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
.. .. STM4
..

Main and Spare

..
from

BPF

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
..
ÏÏÏÏÏ
I/F

MATRIX
..
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ

to
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
2Mb/s #63 ckr1 Clock
#63 Reference 6x

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
ckr63
ckr63 ckrx Selection

2Mb/s
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output side

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
outputs 2Mb/s #1

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
PPI LPA LPT LTCT
#1 source sink sink sink

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Access Card

cktx ckt1

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
..
..
to

.. STM4

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
.. . BPF EPS
.. I/F

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
.

Main and Spare

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
2Mb/s #63

MATRIX
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

from
#63
cktx ckt63
ckt1 ckt63
Local Clocks
ck–system a
ckrx TIMING ck–system b
G.A. cktx

Config. & Status

Power 2.5 V 51MHz
Sync
STEP OSC M–BUS
DOWN Driver
Management
48/60 V DC/DC Bus
CONGI A & B

CONV.
3.3 V
from

Bus–OFF CMISS
MATRIX
to/from

F + 3.3 Vdc

Remote
Inventory
RIBUS RIBUS
I/F

Unit ID
Failure

63x2 MBit/s Port

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 239. 63x2 Mbit/s Board – Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 447 / 531

531
 17.5 63x2 Mbit/s / G703 / ISDN–PRA Port Board (P63E1N)

Refer to Figure 240. on page 451.

Note: The ISDN–PRA functionality is not supported by the 1678MCC up to now!

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The 63x2 Mbit/s /G.703/ISDN–PRA port is similar to the basic 63x2 Mbit/s port, described in the previous
paragraph 17.4 on page 445, with the difference that the present board implements also the NT functional-
ity on ISDN Primary Rate Access (PRA) and the “Retiming function” on the 2 Mbit/s interfaces.

The Retiming function applies the Equipment Clock to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal that therefore becomes
synchronized with the SDH network synchronization reference .

The additional circuit that allows this implementation consists in an elastic buffer that is able to absorb the
jitter and wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occurs.

This feature is programmable via SW, in order to include or exclude the Retiming for each single port. The
same P63E1N board can mix ports that apply or not the retiming.

In this paragraph is reported the description of the NT ISDN–PRA function, all the other blocks functional-
ities are described in the previous paragraph 17.4 on page 445.

The ISDN–PRA (Integrated Services Digital Network – Primary Rate Access) is a facility to carry a number
of synchronous digital communication channels to the user over a 2048 kbit/s structured signal; the ISDN–
PRA structure is defined in recommendation ETS 300 233.
The 2048 kbit/s signals can be structured or non–structured: in this latter case, the PRA functionality must
be disabled from Craft–Terminal. The selection among structured/non–structured and basic–frame/multi-
frame options is achieved by means of Craft–Terminal, for individual signals.
It performs standard PRA functionality as well as some custom Leased Line functions (settings from CT.).

Figure 241. on page 452 illustrates the NT ISDN–PRA block, that performs the following functions:

UPSTREAM DIRECTION
(from user to SDH network: incoming signal SY2Min, outgoing signal UP2Mout)

– Loopback2: by means of command LB2, sent by the controller, or detected in the Sa6 message com-
ing from the SDH network (UP2Min signal); this command sends back to the source the upstream
signal.

– AIS Detection: the AIS alarm (AIS2M) is detected after the reception of 512 bits containing less than
3 zeroes.

– Frame Alignment (FA): it performs basic–frame and multi–frame alignment according to ITU–T
G.706, presettable from the controller (commands BF and MF); the LOF2M alarm is declared in case
of non alignment .

– Failure Condition: the Failure Condition FC2M alarm is the “OR” of LOS2M, LOF2M , AIS2M alarms.

– REI alarm detection (E): the REI2M alarm is detected if E=0.

– RAI alarm detection (A): the RAI2M alarm is detected if active for 5 consecutive frames.

– Data Error detection (CRC–4): errors integrity check on the incoming data, according to CRC–4
procedure (Cyclic Redundancy Check), as defined in G.706. In case of errors, the alarm ERR2M is
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

indicated.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 448 / 531

531
 – E bit insertion (E): the outgoing E bit is set to 0 when
• a failure condition (FCU) is detected on signal from SDH network (UP2Min);
• errors (ERRU) are detected on data from SDH network (UP2Min);
• the E insertion may be inhibited from controller, in this case E=1.
• E=1 in other cases.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

– A bit insertion (A): the outgoing A bit is set to

• ’0’ when a failure condition (FC2M) is detected on signal from user (SY2Min);
• ’1’ when Loopback2 (LB2) is activated;
• passed transparently in other cases;
• the A bit may be forced from controller.
• set to ’1’ (*) when a failure condition (FCU) is detected on signal from SDH network (UP2Min);
N.B. (*): this option is enabled only in case of Leased Line applications;

– Sa5, Sa6 Messages:

• the outgoing Sa6 message is inserted in 4 Sa6 bits of 4 consecutive frames, with the following
significance (listed in order of their priority/severity):
– 1000 ––> power fail
– 1111 ––> SSF or AUXPU/AISU on signal from SDH network (UP2Min);
– 1110 ––> LOFU on signal from SDH network (UP2Min);
– 1100 ––> FC2M on signal from user (SY2Min);
– 0000 ––> loopback2 (LB2) activated
– 0001 ––> alarm REI2M from user
– 0010 ––> CRC–4 errors (ERR2M) from user
– 0011 ––> simultaneous occurrence of both previous (REI2M and ERR2M)
– 0011 ––> only basic–frame alignment on SY2Min signal, when in automatic search
– 0000 ––> normal operations.
• the outgoing Sa5 bit is set to:
– ’0’ ––> when loopback2 (LB2) is activated
– ’1’ ––> in other cases.

– CRC–4 bits insertion: the CRC–4 on data is performed and the result is inserted on bits C1 to C4,
according to G.706.

– Frame Word insertion (FW): the basic–frame and multi–frame alignment words are inserted on the
frame.

– Substituted Frames insertion: the substituted frames are inserted, in case of occurrence of a failure
condition (FC2M) on incoming signal from user.
N.B. Substituted frame is a frame with Sa4, Sa5, Sa7, Sa8 as well as all the bits in time slots
1 to 31 set to ’1’, and with A bit set to ’0’.

DOWNSTREAM DIRECTION
(from SDH network to user: incoming signal UP2Min, outgoing signal SY2Mout)

– Loopback–RX: by means of command LB–RX, sent by the controller; this command sends back to
the source the downstream signal.

– AIS Detection: the AIS alarm (AISU) is detected after the reception of 512 bits containing less than
3 zeroes.

– AUXP Detection: the AUXPU alarm is detected after the reception of 512 bits containing the pattern
...010101... with less than 3 deviation from the pattern itself. It can be enabled from the controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Frame Alignment (FA): it performs basic–frame and multi–frame alignment according to ITU–T
G.706, presettable from the controller (commands BF and MF); the LOFU alarm is declared in case
of non alignment.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 449 / 531

531
 – Failure Condition: the Failure Condition FCU alarm is the “OR” of SSF, LOFU , AISU, AUXPU alarms.
N.B. SSF =Server Signal Fail, from upstream.

– REI alarm detection (E): the REIU alarm is detected if E=0.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– RAI alarm detection (A): the RAIU alarm is detected if active for 5 consecutive frames.
not permitted without written authorization.

– Sa6: the Sa6 bit is read for every 4 consecutive frames, to check the presence of the loopback2 com-
mand, when 4XSa6=1010, for 8 consecutive times.

– Data Error detection (CRC–4): errors integrity check on the incoming data, according to CRC–4
procedure (Cyclic Redundancy Check), as defined in G.706. In case of errors, the alarm ERRU is
indicated.

– A* insertion: the A bit is

• passed transparently in standard applications
• set to ’1’ (*) when a failure condition (FC2M) is detected on signal from user (SY2Min);
• set to ’1’ (*) when forced from the controller;
N.B. (*): this option is enabled only in case of Leased Line applications.

– E bit insertion (E): the outgoing E bit is set to 0 when

• a failure condition (FC2M) is detected on signal from user (SY2Min);
• errors (ERR2M) are detected on data from user (SY2Min);
• the E insertion may be inhibited from controller, in this case E=1.
• E=1 in other cases.
• set to ’0’ (*) when Power Fail alarm (PWF) is active;
N.B. (*): this option is enabled only in case of Leased Line applications.

– Sa4* insertion: the bits Sa4 to Sa8 are passed transparently in standard applications,
• Sa4 is set to ’0’ (*) when Power Fail alarm (PWF) is active, passed transparently otherwise.
N.B. (*): this option is enabled only in case of Leased Line applications.

– CRC–4 bits insertion: the CRC–4 on data is performed and the result is inserted on bits C1 to C4,
according to G.706.

– Frame Word insertion (FW): the basic–frame and multi–frame alignment words are inserted on the
frame.

– AIS insertion: a continuous bitstream of all ’ONES’ is inserted, in case of occurrence of

• force command from the controller;
• a failure condition (FCU) on signal from SDH network (UP2Min);
• (*) a failure condition (FC2M) on signal from user (SY2Min).
N.B. (*): this option is enabled only in case of Leased Line applications.

ALARMS, STATUS AND COMMANDS CONVEYED FROM/TO CONTROLLER

Every alarm, status and errors counting results are reported to the controller, for monitoring purposes:

– LOS, REI, RAI, FC, ERR(CRC–4), SSF detected either in upstream and in downstream signal direc-
tions
N.B. LOS = Loss of user Signal; SSF= upstream Server Signal Fail.

The controller sends the following commands, in order to enable the relevant functions:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– LB–2, LB–RX, BF, MF, ForceA, InhibitE, etc.

N.B. BF= Basic Frame; MF = Multi Frame.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 450 / 531

531
 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Input side
2Mb/s #1
2Mb/s

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2 Mb/s
inputs POM
not permitted without written authorization.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ..
PPI
NT
LPA LPT LTCT

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ISDN
#1 sink PRA source source source
source

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Access Card

.. .
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
STM4
..

Main and Spare

ckr1 ckrx
.
from

BPF
..
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
I/F

MATRIX
..
.

to
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ckr1

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
2Mb/s #63 Clock
#63 Reference 6x
ckr63

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ
ckr63 ckrx Selection

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output side

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
2Mb/s #1 2 Mb/s
2Mb/s POM
outputs

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
NT
PPI ISDN LPA LPT LTCT

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
PRA sink
Access Card

#1 source sink sink

sink

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ..
to

STM4
.. . BPF EPS
..
cktx ckt1 I/F
..
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

Main and Spare

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

MATRIX
2Mb/s #63

from
#63
cktx ckt63
ckt1 ckt63
Local Clocks
ck–system a
ckrx TIMING
G.A. cktx
ck–system b

Config. & Status

Power 2.5 V 51MHz
Sync
STEP OSC M–BUS
DOWN Driver
Management
DC/DC
CONGI A & B

48/60 V Bus
CONV.
3.3 V
from

Bus–OFF CMISS
MATRIX
to/from

F + 3.3 Vdc

Remote
Inventory
RIBUS RIBUS
I/F

Unit ID
Failure

63x2 MBit/s Port Board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 240. 63x2 Mbit/s G.703/ISDN–PRA, Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 451 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
To User (downstream)
To SDH Network (upstream)

03
BF MF
SY2Min
FA CRC–4 + + + + + UP2Mout

AIS E A ERR2M
LOF2M E A Sa5, Sa6 CRC–4 FW
Messages FC2M
AIS 2M (*)
LB 2 REI 2M RAI2M
FCU FCU SUBST
FRAMES
FC 2M ERR U FC2M
LOS2M

FC U
PWF

ERR2M
FCU (*) LOFu SSF
FC2M
PWF PWF FC 2M FC 2M LB2 RAIU REIU AUXPu
(*) (*) (*)
AISu
AIS FW CRC–4 Sa4* E A* Sa6 A E AUXP AIS
LBRX
ERR U
SY2Mout
+ + + + + CRC–4 FA UP2Min

BF MF

FC2M REI 2M RAI2M ERR

2M FC U REI U RAIU ERR U LB BF MF

ALARMS & STATUS

CONVEYED FROM/TO CONTROLLER

531
FROM/TO

Figure 241. Functional Diagram of the NT ISDN–PRA Block

CONTROLLER
EQUICO

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA

452 / 531
 17.6 CONGI Board

Refer to Figure 242. on page 456.

The 1662SMC equipment can house two CONGI boards, referred as CONGI A main (slot 1) and CONGI
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

B (slot 20).
not permitted without written authorization.

They are not intended as main and spare : each board provides a set of functions . Both boards are neces-
sary to provide the complete set.

CONGI A can be used as stand alone but in this case only a subset of interfaces can be used .

Table 54. reports the interfaces present on each CONGI board.

Table 54. CONGI A and CONGI B interfaces

CONGI A (slot 1) CONGI B (slot 20)

POWER POWER

Housekeeping & Remote Alarms (a subset) Housekeeping & Remote Alarms ( a subset)

Rack lamps (R/M) Not used

QMD (Q2) – FAN Alarm QMD (Q2) – Shelf ID

Q3 10 base 2 Not used

Q3 10 base T (LAN) Not used

INT LED INT LED

The main functions performed by the board are:

[1] Input power stage

[2] AND/OR and Remote Alarms

[3] Housekeeping interface (only on CONGI in slot 1)

[4] R/M interface

[5] QMD interface (only on CONGI in slot 1)

[6] RIMMEL interface

[7] Q3/QB3 interface (only on CONGI in slot 1)

[8] Temperature sensor

[9] Remote inventory.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 453 / 531

531
 [1] Input power stage

This circuit decouples the power station battery .

It contains the ”Main Power block” with two fuses, EMI input filters, a ”protection circuit block” , a ”step
up converter” to provide –9 V and a DC/DC converter to provide the +3.3 V to the RIBUS I/F block. In case
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

of fuse broken an alarm is generated (FUSE).

not permitted without written authorization.

A solder strap is present to provide the main power (48 V) in modality “two wires” (if +Vbatt is connected
to ground or “three wire” (if + Vbatt is not connected to ground) in order to obtain a DC/I decoupling system.

[2] AND/OR and Remote Alarms

The circuit generates the remote alarms and lights up the the Rack lamps in case of station battery fault.

It is powered from the 3.3 VDC power from the service battery and uses it to control the station battery. In
case of loss of 3.3 VDC a PWANDOR alarm is generated.

The AND/OR circuit monitors the station battery and provides an alarm (BAT FAIL) in case the voltage
level decreases more than 20 % of the nominal value. If BAT FAIL alarm of the CONGI in slot 1 or the same
alarm of the CONGI in slot 20 are present , the ORALIM alarm is generated and set to the EQUICO board.

[3] Housekeeping interface

The CONGI board (3 wire) provides 4 inputs and 2 outputs contacts suitable for customer purpose.

[4] R/M interface

It is used to connect the rack lamps and incoming call signal.
Table 55. Rack lamps signals

ACRONYM FUNCTION
T*RATTD alarms storing
T*RURG urgent alarm
T*RNURG not urgent alarm
T*CH incoming call
T*TOR absence of one battery
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (CT) and on the Operation System (OS). application the T*RURG, and
T* RNURG remote alarm sent toward the rack lamp are named in a different way; the relation
between this two terminology is explained in Table 68. on page 494.

[5] QMD interface

It is a RS–485 interface that allows the dialogue between the NE (EC function) and a non SDH equipment.
In this case the NE acts as a mediation device.
CONGI in slot 1: FAN alarm
CONGI in slot 2: Shelf ID
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 454 / 531

531
 [6] RIMMEL interface

This block provide a serial communication interface with the FANs Shelf in order to receive information
like presence of FANs unit, FAN alarms, FANs unit remote inventory etc. (for details about connection with
FANs Shelf refer to Installation Handbook).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

“Rimmel block” is also connected with the Shelf Controller (housed on the MATRIX) and Equipment Con-
not permitted without written authorization.

troller (housed on the EQUICO) in order to:

– manage the HOUSEKEEPING contact

– provisioning remote alarm
– read the 2/3 wire operating mode
– detect an over–temperature inside the equipment.

[7] Q3/QB3 interface

The Q3/QB3 interface on CONGI is used for OS connection. Two connectors are available :

– 2 BNC for 10 Base 2 connection type

– RJ45 for 10 base T connection type.

The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) circuit performs the driver/receiver interface between the Q3/QB3
coaxial cable ( BNC) and the universal ethernet adapter (AUI).
The purpose of the AUI adapter is to adapt the signal, coming from the Equipment Controller on the EQUI-
CO, to the LAN interface. It is directly connected to the RJ45 connector or through CTI to BNC connector.
The LAN interface is only used on CONGI in slot 1.

[8] Temperature sensor

The mentioned sensor provide an alarm when the temperature inside the equipment is over 55 degree
Celsius; the alarm is than sent to the RIMMEL block.
[9] Remote inventory
It is the memory used to maintain the board history and communication and routing data relevant to the
NE ; Remote Inventory activity is managed by the RIBUS I/F block.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 455 / 531

531
 2/3 wire mode Input Power Stage

+ Batt_A Fuse MAIN – Batt

EMI
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Station POWER TO ALL

+Batt
battery – Batt_A Fuse BLOCK FILTER BOARDS
not permitted without written authorization.

STEP UP
–9V CONVERTER

PROTECTION +3.3Vdc
DC/DC TO ALL
CICUIT 3.3 V
BLOCK BOARDS
to
RIBUS I/F
Fuse
To SYNTH16
48V BAT FAIL
To other CONGI

20% PWANDOR To SYNTH16

OR ALIM
RACK LAMPS OR To SYNTH16
R/M BAT FAIL From
other CONGI
AND/OR alarms from
URG, NURG, LOSQ2, INT, UP
SYNTH16

HOUSEKEEPING REMOTE ALARM

AND REMOTE 6/4 HOUSKEEPING_IN HK–IN
ALARM
2 HOUSKEEPING_OUT HK–OUT to/from
RIMMEL SYNTH16
FANS unit

FANS management
Serial Link
Temperature
sensor

NON SDH
EQUIPMENT QMD to/from
M
INTERFACE TRANSCEIVER U SYNTH16
(Q2) X not used

OPERATION –9V
SYSTEM COAX
TRANSCEIVER
10BASE2 INTERFACE
(CTI) UNIVERSAL to/from
ETHERNET M SYNTH16
10BASET INTERFACE U
ADAPTER X not used
Q3 (AUI)
INTERFACE

+3.3 Vdc
FAIL

Remote RIBUS to/from

RIBUS SYNTH16
Inventory I/F
CMISS
CONGI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 242. CONGI – Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 456 / 531

531
 17.7 SYNTH16 Board

Refer to Figure 243. on page 464.

This board use SFP optical modules,the optical module can be distinguished by letters L and S defining
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

their dependance on optical components used for Long distance or Short distance.
not permitted without written authorization.

The SDH functions required to manage STM–16 signal are implemented by four G.A.(G.A. #1 to G.A..#4
in Figure 243. on page 464) mounted on the board. They interface the matrix module and a special ASIC
mounted on the SYNTH16 board.

Another G.A. (G.A.5 in Figure 243. on page 464) is present with MUX/DEMUX and loop functions. This
G.A. interface the line side with one stream at 2488 Mbit/s and the equipment side with four stream at
622 Mbit/s.

Two types of loops are possible inside this G.A.:

– Line loop
– Internal loop.

Referring to the ITU–T G.783 recommendation, the four G.A. performs the following functions :

– TTF (only the CRISTALLO #1 )

– HOA (all CRISTALLO from 1 to 4)
– LPOM /LSUT (all CRISTALLO from 1 to 4)
– HPOM /HSUT ( only the CRISTALLO#1).

Cross connection functions (MSP, HPC and LPC) are performed by the MATRIX H and MATRIX L modules
mounted on two SYNTH16 boards (working in 1+1 configuration).

The TTF block is connected to the MATRIX H module and G.A.#7 mounted on the SYNTH16 board
through four bidirectional links at 622 Mbit/s in 1+1 configuration (H link).

HOA block is connected both to the MATRIX modules(HPC matrices and the LPC matrices) and a special
ASIC mounted on the SYNTH16 board through two bidirectional link at 622 MBit/s each in 1+1 configura-
tion (”X link” and “L link” respectively)

G.A.#7 are used to establish three bidirectional links at 2.5 Gbit/s between two SYNTH16 in the backpan-
el. This G.A. interface the matrix or G.A.#1 to #4 side with four stream at 622 Mbit/s and interface the back-
panel side with one stream at 2488 Mbit/s.

The G.A.#1 send and receive four 622 Mbit/s signal (data + clock) to/from the G.A.#5.

The SPI can detect an external LOS from the input line .

The SFP optical module provides to the G.A.#1 its status by means of two input signals: Laser Degrade
and Laser Failure.

The ALS algorithm is hardware implemented and the G.A.#1 provides the Laser shut Down command (LA-
SER OFF).

TTF BLOCK (SPI, RST, MST, MSA)

This block performs the Transport Terminal Functions (sink on Input side, source on Output side) for the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

STM–16 signal.

TTF block provides the T1 timing references at 2 MHz , derived from the STM–16 input signals.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 457 / 531

531
 INPUT side : from line to MSP MATRIX H Module (in SYNTH16)

SPI (OSn/RSn_A_Sk): it descrambles the incoming signal , counts the OOF and reveals the LOF alarm.

RST (RSn_TT_Sk): performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2) , regenerator section trace recovery (J0)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

and mismatch detection, BIP–8 Errored Block count.

not permitted without written authorization.

MST (MSn_TT_Sk): performs BIP–24 errored block count, MS–REI recovery, MS–RDI and MS–AIS
detection. TSD is applied in case of MS–DEG (signal degrade), TSF is applied if MS–AIS is detected.

MSA (MSn/Sn_A_Sk): performs AU4’s pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS detection, pointer justification.
Sixteen MSA blocks are present.

Moreover the following functions are performed on the Input side :

TP byte insertion (Rx side): since the cross connection functions are centralized , for protection purpose
TSD (Trail Signal Degrade) and TSF (Trail Signal Failure) are transmitted towards the two SYNTH16
boards.

K BYTES insertion and extraction (Rx side): this block provides the in–band transmission of K1, K2,
bytes towards the G.A.#8 mounted on SYNTH16 board. The bytes are extracted from the line when a TSF
is received and they are transmitted towards G.A.#8 mounted on SYNTH16 board.

OUTPUT side: from MATRIX H MODULE(in SYNTH16) to line

MSA (Ms/Sn_A_So): it performs AUG assembly, AU–4 pointer generation, AU–AIS generation. The six-
teen AU4 structure are byte interleaved in the STM–16 structure with fixed phase relationship vs. the same
multiple signal.

MST (MSn_TT_So): it performs BIP–24 calculation and insertion, MS–REI MS–RDI and MS–AIS inser-
tion.

RST (RSn_TT_So): it performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path trace insertion, BIP–8
calculation and insertion.

K BYTES insertion and extraction (Tx side): K1, K2 bytes are extracted from the frame coming from
backpanel and re–inserted on the same output line frame.

HOA BLOCK (HPT, HPA)

From HPC matrix (MATRIX H) to LPC matrix (MATRIX L)

HPT (Sn_TT_Sk): path trace information is recovered, REI information is recovered, HP–RDI and UNEQ
are detected, VC4 BIP–8 errored count block. TSF is applied if SSF or UNEQ or TIM or AIS is detected.
TSD is applied if a condition of signal degrade is detected.

Moreover:

N1 byte extraction (Rx side): for the network Tandem Connection Termination & Monitoring function
(TCT/TCM).

HPA (Sn/Sm_A_Sk): VC–4 disassembly, TU pointer interpretation, LOP and TU–AIS detection,HP–SLM
and LOM detection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 458 / 531

531
 From LPC matrix(MATRIX L) to HPC matrix(MATRIX H)

HPA (Sn/Sm_A_So): VC4 assembly, TU pointer generation, TU–AIS generation , signal label insertion.

HPT (Sn_TT_So): path trace identification insertion, RDI and REI indications insertion, VC–4 BIP–8 cal-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

culation and insertion.

not permitted without written authorization.

Moreover:

N1 byte insertion (Tx side): for the network Tandem Connection Termination & Monitoring function (TCT/
TCM).

The Cristallo provides also the HSUT, HPOM (alternative) and LSUT, LPOM functions (alternative) both
in Rx and Tx side.

The main task of HSUT are:

RX side (from MSA to HPC matrix):

• Path trace information recovery

• REI recovery
• HP–RDI detection (path status monitoring
• UNEQ and VC–AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
• VC4 BIP–8 Errored Block count.

Tx side: (from HPC matrix to MSA)

• Generation of an unequipped container

• ”unequipped” insertion, trail trace identifier generation
• RDI and /or REI information generation
• VC–4 BIP–8 calculation and insertion.

The main task of HPOM are:

RX and TX side:

• Signal termination
• J1 path recovering
• REI information recovering
• HP–RDI detection (path status monitoring
• UNEQ and VC–AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
• VC4 BIP–8 Errored Block count
• TSF is generated in case of SSF , UNEQ, TIM , AIS . TSD is generated in case of SD.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 459 / 531

531
 The main tasks of LSUT are :

RX side (from HPA to LPC matrix):

• Recovering of VC–m unequipped signal label

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Path trace recovering

not permitted without written authorization.

• BIP–2 recovery
• REI and RDI recovery.

Tx side (from LPC matrix to HPA ):

• Insertion of VC–m unequipped signal label

• Path trace insertion
• BIP–2 insertion
• REI and RDI insertion.

LSUT is used to monitor unequipped path trails.

The main tasks of LPOM are :

– Trace identifier monitoring

– RDI and REI recovering and deriving for performance primitives
– Signal label monitoring
– VC–m BIP–2 errored block count.

LPOM is used for performance monitoring purposes.

There is a module named Cesconx mounted on SYNTH16 board. The Cesconx module is the hardware
platform designed to support both the Equipment Controller (EC) and Shelf Controller (SC) functions for
the 1662SMC and equipment.

The Cesconx module through the Equipment Controller (EC) manage:

– Local dialog with a personal computer (F interface)

– Dialog with a remote Operation System for Network Management operation through interface QAUX.
– Dialog with the external equipment for Network Management operations through Interface Q2
(Mediation Device Function)
– Remote alarms (RE) , alarms criteria towards the rack lamps (RA), housekeeping alarms (HK) and
front cover LED
– ISSB bus.

The EC performs as well all the SW functions related to the control and management activities like info–
model processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base management, SW downloading and
management, etc.

To support its activities the EC function requires a boot memory (FEPROM) and RAM memory. The EC
and SC software is loaded from the FLC in the main shelf.

F interface:

It is used for connection to a local Craft Terminal; The standard implementation of the physical layer for
the F interface consists of an RS–232 UART port accessible from the EQUICO board front panel.

Q3 interface:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

It is dedicated to an OS station connection through Local Access Network (LAN); QB3 requires a 10BASE2
or a 10BaseT interface that is physical provided by CONGI board.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 460 / 531

531
 Q2 interface:

A mediation function interface is provided to connect the 1662SMC to non–SDH network element The
RS–485 interface and the cable connector are provided on the CONGI board.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

RE, RA, HK and LEDs interface:

not permitted without written authorization.

RE consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms that can be accessed on the CONGI board

RA is dedicated to send commands toward the rack to light up the relevant lamps.; the physical interface
is available on the CONGI board.
By pressing a push button is possible to store an alarm.

HK consist of parallel I/O signals used to handle housekeeping signals (for example alarms received from
FANs Subrack, open door etc.); In this way they can be supervised by Craft Terminal. The physical inter-
face is available on the CONGI board.
The Equipment Controller also drive the LEDs present on the front cover to display alarms or status indica-
tion concerning the equipment.
By pressing a push button present on the SYNTH16 front cover is possible to check the efficiency of the
LEDs.

ISSB bus:

It is an high performance bus supporting communication among the EC function, the SC function on the
SYNTH16.

SHELF CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

The SYNTH16 houses the circuitry necessary to realize the Shelf Controller.

The SC provide the resources to support the SW functions related to the control and management opera-
tion of the boards. To perform its functions, the SC directly interfaces the ASICs on the board implementing
the SDH functions for data collection (faults or alarm event detections, performance monitoring data) and
configuration provisioning.

As the SC is involved in critical activities ( for instance EPS ) , is 1+1 protected.

The internal interfaces supporting SC element for communication tasks are:

SPI interface
On the ”CESCONX” module the SC processor is master of the ”SPI” interface that uses this bus to
access the inventory memory devices and the parallel I/O functions that are available on board each
controlled board in the equipment for control of board’s alarm led, board status or static alarms collec-
tion. The Saby chip on board ”CESCONX” is accessible as a slave device by the SC processor
through this interface.
Signals required for this interface are available on the mother board connectors with LVTTL levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 461 / 531

531
 ISPB interface
The ”ISPB” interface is supported by the SC processor and consists of a backplane parallel bus
through which the processor can access memory mapped devices (SDH ASICs) placed on board
the controlled boards (in the 1662SMC: SDH or PDH port boards, SYNTH16 boards).
The ISPB bus is effectively an out board extension of the SC processor bus, controlled through a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

bridge device.
not permitted without written authorization.

All the related signals are available on the mother board(SYNTH16) connectors with LVTTL electrical
levels; the transceivers required for the LVTTL top GTLP signal conversion must be placed on the
mother board the ”CESCONX” module is plugged on.

MATRIX module also are mounted on the SYNTH16 board,the module performs different functions:

• connections between ports

• equipment synchronization functions
• performance monitoring collection.

As the MATRIX module is in 1+1 redundant configuration, all the functions realized by the board are
redundant as well.

CONNECTIONS

The connections between MATRIX and ports are realized by means of links at 622 Mbit/s (link X, link L
and link H in Figure 243. on page 464)

On the MATRIX are implemented the following SDH functions to realize the connections :

MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)

It performs the Multiplex Section Protection (linear and MS–PRING) according to the MSP algorithm re-
sult.
Refer to para 13.7 on page 239 for details on MSP.

AU4 squelching
It is used to avoid mis–connections when the MS–SPRING protection is active. For each incoming and
outgoing AU4 , should be possible to insert AIS.

SNCP (Sub–Network Connection Protection)

It performs the Sub–Network Connection Protections, in case of SNCP–ring network configuration,switch-
ing from A to B path signals (A and B are two generic transmission side).
SNCP is of types HO–SNCP (for VC–4 path signals) and LO–SNCP (for VC–3 ,VC–12, etc. path signals).
It can be SNCP/I and SNCP/N.
Refer to para 13.7 on page 239 for details on SNCP protection.

HPC (High order Path Connection)

This block acts as connection matrix, supporting cross–connection for a max of 96x96 STM1 equivalent
signals at VC–4 level.

LPC (Low order Path Connection)

This block acts as connection matrix, supporting cross–connection for a max of 64x64 STM1 equivalent
signals at VC–12 level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 462 / 531

531
 EQUIPMENT SYNCHRONIZATION

The equipment synchronization is realized by the SETS function (Synchronous Equipment Timing
Source) that distributes to each equipment port the pertaining synchronization signals.
A high stability oscillator at 10 MHz is present to guarantee an holdover or free running working mode com-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

pliant to the ITU–T Recs.

not permitted without written authorization.

The clock reference working modes can be: locked, hold over and free running.
When working in locked mode, the SETS block can select its reference signal among (the selection is ac-
complished by means of the software and craft terminal):

– Timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1)

– 2 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2)
– 2 MHz clocks (T3) or 2 Mbit/s signals (T6) coming from the SERVICE board
The T3/T6 clocks are two (i.e. T3a, T3b or T6a, T6b).

The SETG block (Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation) generates :

– A system clock T0 (at 622.08 MHz) locked to the selected reference (T1, T2, T3/T6) and distributed
to the equipment.
– CK38Mhz: it is derived from the system clock (T0) and is distributed to all the ports. Its frequency
is 38.88 MHz.
– MFSY: it is the multiframe synchronism at 500 Hz, obtained from the ck38 MHz. It is distributed to
all the ports.
– a 2 MHz clock T4 or a 2 Mbit/s signal T5 used as synchronization clock.
The T4/T5 clocks are two (T4a, T4b and T5a, T5b).

Other functions implemented are:

RIBUS. It is a serial bus connecting the SC processor to the serially interfaced devices called RIBUS–I/F,
located on each board for simple read or write operations, for communications about Remote Inventory,
boards failure, bus releasing.
RIBUS I/F is powered by the +3.3 VDC supply by CONGI boards.
A push–button is present to reset the SC.

PERFORMANCE MONITORING COLLECTION

The “Performance Monitoring Management” block housed on the SYNTH16 board realizes Performance
Monitoring functionalities; it collects and stores the data ( Defect seconds and Errored blocks) coming from
all the flows.

The Performance monitoring can be made at:

– Adaptation and Regeneration section

– Multiplex section
– Multiplex section adaptation
– HSUT and LSUT
– HPOM and LPOM
– HPT and LPT.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 463 / 531

531
 POWER SUPPLY

The board receives via backpanel connectors the –48 V coming from CONGI boards.
The DC/DC converter present on the board generates the following voltage:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– +3.3 V
not permitted without written authorization.

– +2.5 V
– +1.8 V
– +1.7 V
– +1.5 V
– +1.2 V
– +0.6 V.

The Remote–Inventory and RIBUS–I/F blocks are powered by the 3.3 V power service coming from the
CONGI boards.

REMOTE INVENTORY

It is the memory used to maintain the board history and data.

For more details about the Remote Inventory function refer to para 13.13 on page 321.

To/from CONGI
SYNTH16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 243. SYNTH16 – Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 464 / 531

531
 17.7.1 FAN Unit for FAN Shelf

The FANs shelf is composed by a mechanical structure and a back–plane. The FAN Shelf is used to pre-
vent high temperature inside the 1662SMC equipment and must be equipped with four FAN units and two
Metallic FAN grids in the rack.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Each FANs unit is composed by four FANs and some electronic circuits necessary to:
not permitted without written authorization.

– FANs and alarms management

– Metallic FAN grid management
– Remote inventory
– Power supply.

FUNCTION SPECIFICATION:

One FAN unit controller manages the power and FAN’s alarm and controls the FAN on/off. At the same
time this controller communicate with CONGI by serial interface.

FANS ALARM MANAGEMENT

The core of the FAN unit for FAN shelf is the “FAN Controller” that perform the following functionality:

– FAN power supply: at the start up the control of FANs is distributed in sharing mode, so the max cur-
rent value is reduced at only one FAN at a time.

– FAN control: the sensing criteria is integrated in order to have an alarm if almost one FAN is out of
order.
If an alarm is present (FAN AL1, FAN AL2, FAN AL3, FAN AL4) because a FAN is temporary out of
order, the FAN controller try every 8 sec. to restart the FAN.

– Temperature sensor: an external sensor generate an alarm (TEMP AL) when the temperature ex-
ceed 55_ C.

– Remote inventory: through this interface the FAN controller read the information stored in the flash
EPROM.

– LED control: the meaning of the LED is reported in Figure 113. on page 195.

– Serial Alarms Interface: the FAN controller reports the alarm on a serial link toward the CONGI board
in order to transfer the information to the Shelf Controller on the SYNTH16.

The FANs controller generate an alarm called ALM_URG B #n if at least one FAN is faulty or the 12 VDC
is not present.

METALLIC FAN GRID

Two metallic FAN grids are present at the bottom of the FAN shelf in order to prevent dusty problem at
cooled circuit. These FAN grid could not be removed permanently because it performs also the function
of anti–fire protection.
If the FAN grid have been removed from the shelf an electro–mechanical sensor generate the alarm signal
FILTER AL.

REMOTE INVENTORY

It is a flash EPROM where are stored information about the unit like construction date, code number, maker
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

name, Board–type, etc.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 465 / 531

531
 POWER SUPPLY

The main power supply is coming from two connectors: power supply “A” and power supply “B” coming
from station battery.
The voltage value for both batteries is: 48 VDC, 3 A max; in case of failure an alarm is generated (AL BAT_A,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

AL BAT_B)
not permitted without written authorization.

A DC/DC converter on the unit provides the 12 V necessary to power the FANs. Another DC/DC converter
provides the 3.3 V power supply voltage from which through a serial regulator is derived a 2.5 V.
If one of the above secondary voltage are not present, is generated an alarm (PSU ALM #n).

ATTENTION:

When insert the FAN unit into the FAN shelf, extract the FAN unit from the FAN shelf or do any operation
on the FAN unit, be sure to wear ESD protective wrist.

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
BATTERY A PSU ALM #3
SLOT ID

PSU ALM

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
PSU ALM #2
BATTERY B >

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
_ 1
PSU ALM #1
FAN UNIT

Housekeeping
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
PSU ALM #0
BATTERY A FOR FAN SHELF 19”

CONGI
to
ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
BATTERY B
#0
ALM_URG_B #0

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL1
ALM_URG_B #1

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL2 ALM_URG
>
_ 1
ALM_URG_B #2

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ALM_URG_B #3
Metallic FAN Grid 1

SLOT ID

ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
PSU ALM #1
FAN UNIT

ÑÑÌÌ
SENSOR

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL1
BATTERY A
FOR FAN SHELF 19” ALM_URG_B #1

ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
BATTERY B
#1

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL1

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL2

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
SLOT ID

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FAN UNIT

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
PSU ALM #2
BATTERY A FOR FAN SHELF 19”

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
BATTERY B ALM_URG_B #2
#2

ÑÑ FILTER AL1

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Metallic FAN Grid 2

FILTER AL2

ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
SLOT ID

ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
SENSOR

FILTER AL2

ÑÑÌÌ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FAN UNIT PSU ALM #3

FOR FAN SHELF 19”

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
BATTERY A
BATTERY B ALM_URG_B #3
#3

ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL1
FILTER AL2

FAN SHELF 19”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 244. FANs Shelf 19” General Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 466 / 531

531
 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
AL_12V
ALBAT_A +12 V

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
DC/DC
BATTERY A Converter +12 V
+3.3 V P A

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
O L PSU ALM
DC/DC +3.3 V W A
BATTERY B Converter +2.5 V E R

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
+2.5 V R M
SERIAL
REGULATOR

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ALBAT_B

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FANS1 FANS2 FANS3 FANS4

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FAN AL1 FAN AL2 FAN AL3 FAN AL4

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
+ 12 V + 12 V + 12 V + 12 V

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ TEMP_AL
TEMPERATURE

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ALBAT_A

ALBAT_B

SENSOR
AL_12V
FAN AL2

FAN AL3
FAN AL4
FAN AL1
control 1

control 2

control 3

control 4

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FAN

FAN

FAN

FAN

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ REMOTE

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
INVENTORY
SLOT ID

FANS CONTROL FAULTY FANS POWER

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
SENSOR ALARM
LED

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL1 FILTER
FANS CONTROLLER ALM_URG_A NOT USED

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FILTER AL2 ALARM
AL_12V

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ALM_URG_B
>
_ 1
AL_FAN

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
SERIAL SERIAL NOT USED
ALARM ALARM AL_FAN

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
INTERFACE INTERFACE
A B

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
NOT USED
FANS MANAGEMENT

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
to
CONGI unit

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
FAN UNIT FOR FAN SHELF19”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 245. FANs Unit for FAN Shelf 19” Block Diagram

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 467 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
468 / 531
 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values.

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

18.1 General Characteristics

General
Optical Line bit rate SDH: 155.520 Mbit/s (STM–1)
622.080 Mbit/s (STM–4)
2,488.320 Mbit/s (STM–16)
9,953.280 Mbit/s (STM–64)
SONET: 155.520 Mbit/s (OC–3)
622.080 Mbit/s (OC12)
Type of optical fiber Single mode, according to ITU–T G.652, G.653 and G.654.
Wavelength Refer to Table 56. on page 476 up to Table 63. on page 485.
Span length Depending on fibre type and optical power budget reported in
Table 56. on page 476 up to Table 63. on page 485.
Application types Metro Core Connect in protected and unprotected linear links
and rings, DXC (up to 4096 STM–1 equivalent ports).
Interface types Optical interface: STM–1, STM–4, STM–16, STM–64 and GE.

Applied standards
ITU–T G.703 for electrical interfaces
ITU–T G.707 for SDH frame and multiplexing structure
ITU–T G.957, G.958 and G.691 for optical interfaces
ITU–T G.821 and G.826 for transmission quality
ITU–T G.813 for synchronization
ITU–T G.783 for SDH equipment specification
ITU–T G.841 for network protection architectures
ITU–T G.704 and G.774 for system management functions
ITU–T G.662 and G.663 for optical amplification
ITU–T G784/G.774 for system management functions
ITU–T G.8080F for architecture of GASON
ITU–T G.828/829 for error performances
ITU–T G.798 for OTN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 469 / 531

531
 Add–Drop and Cross connect features
Cross–Connections capacity 4096 x 4096 STM–1 equivalent ports at VC–4 level (640 Gb/s)
Connectivity Aggregate–to–tributary time slot assignment.
Aggregate–to–aggregate time slot interchange.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Tributary–to–tributary time slot assignment.

not permitted without written authorization.

Drop&continue.
Loopbacks.
Broadcast.
Cross connect features 1678MCC has a symmetrical architecture. All traffic port
(PDH, SDH) of the same type have the same functionality and
behavior and there is no inherent split between tributaries and
aggregates. This means that it is possible the allocation of the
PDH and VCi signals into every port.

Transmission delay
For each type of cross–connection 125 µs maximum for any traffic pathway

Protections
Network protection Linear 1+1, single and dual ended MSP.
SNC–P/I, SNC–P/N.
Collapsed single and dual node interconnection.
Centralized Restoration.
MS–SPRing: 2F @STM–16 and 2F @STM–64.
Equipment protection (EPS) Centralized Matrix: 1+1.
Equipment Controller: 1+1.
Shelf Controller: 1+1.

Management interface
Local: Craft Interface RS232 PC compatible SUB–D 9 pins at 38 Kbit/s *
(PC)
Remote: Craft Interface RS232 PC compatible SUB–D 9 pins at 38 Kbit/s;
(PC) it handles up to 32 NEs via DCC (D1 ÷ D3 and/or D4 ÷ D12) *

* The maximum allowable length of the serial cable for RS232 is 15 m.

This is valid if:
– Data speed is max. 38 Kbit/s
– Cables of category CAT–5 are used (CAT–5 is what Alcatel–Lucent is using and is requesting for
this interface)

Remote: Transmission G.773 QB3 10 base–2 and 10 base–T connectors

Management
Network (TMN)
interface
Information According to ITU–T (G.774) and ETSI specifications
Model
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Dual addressing It allows OS redundancy

to OS

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 470 / 531

531
 Operation processes
Configuration and provisioning Equipment, ports, add–drop, cross–connect,synchronization,
protection, MCF, SEMF, OH connection.
Software download It is made locally as well as remotely on non volatile memories
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

without traffic interruption.

not permitted without written authorization.

Performance monitoring According to G.784, G.826 and G.821.

Remote inventory At board and sub–board level.
Non volatile database Yes.
Unit and Equipment acknowledge- Through Remote Inventory
ment (Company id, Unit Type, Unit Part Number, Serial Part Num-
ber, Software Part Number etc.).
For details refer to Operator’s Handbook.
Security Password, categories (operator profile), back–up for programs
and data.

OW interface
Type 64 kbit/s G.703 co–directional or telephone front jack
Engineering OW E1 and E2 access, DTMF in band signalling

Unit substitution characteristics (hot replacement)

For traffic boards without interfering on other channels
For central units (redundant) without interfering on traffic

Housekeeping
8 inputs + 4 outputs (max)
System alarms One LED on each board, Central LEDs
(URG, NURG, ABN, IND, ATTD)
Output Housekeeping signals (CPO) and Remote Alarms
By electronic relay contacts to be connected
to external negative voltage:
Max. guaranteed current with closed condition 50 mA
Voltage drops vs ground with closed condition –2 V ÷ 0 V
Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
Input Housekeeping signals (CPI)
Max. guaranteed current with closed condition 3 mA
Voltage drops vs ground with closed condition –2 V ÷ 0 V
Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 471 / 531

531
 Clock characteristics (synchronization)
Selectable input clock 2048 kHz external from 2 Mbit/s port (T2).
2048 kHz external synch clock (T3).
2.048 Mbit/s or 1.544 Mbit/s signal from FLCSERV /
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

FLCCONGI board without data (T6)

not permitted without written authorization.

STM–N sync clock interface (T1).

No. of selected clock (normal mode) 6 max.
Synchronization output 2048 kHz G.703 (2 output, T4a and T4b) or 2.048
Mbit/s (2 output, T5a and T5b).
Operational modes Locked to reference.
Free–run mode ± 4.6 ppm (PLL without reference).
Holdover mode drift 0.37 ppm max./day (PLL with
stored frequency for more than half an hour,with no
selected input frequency).
Synchronization selection Priority and SSM algorithm.
Equipment timing source options Free–run accuracy ±4.6 ppm.
Holdover drift 0.37 ppm per day maximum.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 472 / 531

531
 18.2 Electrical Interface Characteristics

18.2.1 Electrical Transmission Interfaces

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 75 W 2 Mbit/s 120 W

not permitted without written authorization.

Bitrate 2 048 kBit/s  50 ppm

Code HDB3
Electrical interface according to ITU–T G.703
Output voltage (peak to peak) 2.37 V  0.237 V 3 V  0.3 V
Return loss w12 dB 51 – 102 kHz
w18 dB 102 – 2048 kHz
w14 dB 2048 – 3072 kHz
Type of line coaxial pair, 75 Ω symmetrical 120 Ω
Supported signal structure Framed and unframed

140 Mbit/s
Bitrate 139 264 kBit/s  15 ppm
Code CMI
Electrical interface according to ITU–T G.703
Output voltage (peak to peak) 1 V  0.1 V
Return loss w15 dB over frequency range 7 to 210 MHz
Type of line coaxial pair, 75 Ω
Supported signal structure Framed and unframed

STM-1e
Bitrate 155 520 kBit/s  20 ppm
Code CMI
Electrical interface according to ITU–T G.703
Output voltage (peak to peak) 1 V  0.1 V
Return loss w15 dB over frequency range 8 to 240 MHz
Type of line coaxial pair, 75 Ω
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 473 / 531

531
 V.11 64Kbit/s contradirectional interface
Type electrical, according to ITU–T Rec. V.11
Receivers:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Input impedance > 6 KΩ

not permitted without written authorization.

Rx levels ”1” or ”OFF” < –0.3 V

”0” or ”ON” > +0.3 V
Drivers:
Differential output 2 V (min.)
Use: intrabuilding connections

RS–232 oversampled interface 9600 Kbit/s

Bit rate 9600 kbit/s
Mode RS–232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels 24 Vpp
Use: intrabuilding connections

18.2.2 Electrical Safety

Electrical Safety
Safety status of the connections with other TNV2 (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for
equipments Remote Alarms, Housekeeping Alarms (CPO, CPI),
Rack Lamp (RM).
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 474 / 531

531
 18.3 Optical Interface Characteristics

18.3.1 STM–N Optical Characteristics

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

STM–1 optical characteristics

Types of optical interfaces S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2 (alternative modules).
Characteristics are given in Table 56. on page 476.

Optical connectors SFP plug–in

Pulse shape refer to ITU–T G.957

STM–4 optical characteristics

Types of optical interfaces S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2 (alternative modules).
Characteristics are given in Table 57. on page 477.

Optical connectors SFP plug–in

Pulse shape refer to ITU–T G.957

STM–16 optical characteristics

Types of optical interfaces I–16.1, S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2 (alternative modules).
Characteristics are given in Table 58. on page 478.

Optical connectors SFP plug–in

Pulse shape refer to ITU–T G.957

STM–64 optical characteristics

Types of optical interfaces I–64.1, S–64.2, L–64.2, V–64.2, U–64.2
Characteristics are given in Table 59. on page 479.

Optical connectors FC/PC or SC/PC (alternative units)

1 GE optical characteristics
Types of optical interfaces 1000B–LX, 1000B–SX
Characteristics are given in Table 62. on page 484 and
Table 63. on page 485.

Optical connectors LC–Duplex SFP (Small Formfactor Pluggable)

10 GE optical characteristics
Types of optical interfaces 10GBASE–S, 10GBASE–L, 10GBASE–E, 10GBASE–Z
Characteristics are given in Table 64. on page 486 and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Table 65. on page 487.

Optical connectors FC/PC or SC/PC (alternative units)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 475 / 531

531
 Table 56. Parameters specified for STM–1 optical interface

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

STM–1 according to G.707,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

DIGITAL SIGNAL
G.958
not permitted without written authorization.

Nominal bit rate

Kbit/s 155,520
Application code S–1.1 L–1.1 L–1.2
1261 1280 1480
Operating wavelength range nm ÷ ÷ ÷
1360 1335 1580
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type MLM MLM SLM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum RMS width nm 7.7 4 –
– maximum –20 dB width nm – – 1
– min. side mode suppression ratio dB – – 30
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm –8 0 0
– minimum dBm –15 –5 –5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 0÷12 10÷28 10÷28
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 100 250 1900
Minimum optical return loss (ORL) at S
(including connectors) dB n.a. n.a. 20
Maximum discrete reflectance
between S and R dB n.a. n.a. –25
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector In Ga As In Ga As In Ga As
PIN PIN PIN
Main received power (@ BER=10–10):
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –28 –34 –34
– maximum (overload) dBm –8 –10 –10
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1
Maximum reflectance of receiver
measured at R dB –14 –14 –25

n.a. = not applicable

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 476 / 531

531
 Table 57. Parameters specified for STM–4 optical interface

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–4 according to G.707, G.958
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 622,080

not permitted without written authorization.

L–4.1
Application code S–4.1 L–4.2
(nb1)
Operating wavelength range nm 1274÷1356 1280÷1335 1480÷1580
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type MLM SLM SLM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum RMS width nm 2.5 – –
– maximum –20 dB width nm – 1 1
– minimum side mode suppression ratio dB – 30 30
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm –8 +2 +2
– minimum dBm –15 –3 –3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 0÷12 10÷24 10÷24
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 84 250 1900
Minimum optical return loss (ORL) at S
dB 14 20 24
(including connectors)
Maximum discrete reflectance between S
dB –20 –25 –27
and R
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector In Ga As In Ga As In Ga As
PIN PIN PIN
Main received power (@ BER=10–10):
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –28 –28 –28
– maximum (overload) dBm –8 –8 –8
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1
Maximum reflectance of receiver mea-
dB –20 –20 –27
sured at R

(nb1) : suitable for interworking with the L–4.1 of the ADM product family; in this application the power
budget is 10÷24 dB, 250 ps/nm dispersion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 477 / 531

531
 Table 58. Parameters specified for STM–16 optical interfaces

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–16 according to G.707,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s G.958

not permitted without written authorization.

2,488,320
Application code I–16.1 S–16.1 L–16.1 L–16.2
1270 1270 1280 1500
Operating wavelength range nm ÷ ÷ ÷ ÷
1360 1360 1335 1580
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type MLM SLM SLM SLM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum RMS width nm 4 – – –
– maximum –20 dB width nm – 1 1 1
– minimum side mode dB – 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm –3 0 +2 +2
– minimum dBm –10 –5 –2 –2
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 0÷7 0÷12 10÷24 10÷24
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12 100 250 1600
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) dB 24 24 24 24
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R dB –27 –27 –27 –27
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs
PIN PIN APD APD
Mean received power
(@ BER=10–10):
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –18 –18 –27 –28
– maximum (overload) dBm –3 0 –8 –8
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 2
Maximum reflectance of receiver measured at R dB –27 –27 –27 –27
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 478 / 531

531
 Table 59. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interfaces

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–64 according to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

G.707, G.958, G.691

not permitted without written authorization.

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 9,953,280

Application code I–64.1 S–64.2b L–64.2b
Operating wavelength range nm 1290÷1330 1530÷1565 1530÷1565
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type SLM EA–ILM EA–ILM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum spectral power density mW/MHz t.b.d. t.b.d. t.b.d.
– maximum –20 dB width nm 1 t.b.d. t.b.d.
– minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 30 t.b.d.
– chirp parameter radians t.b.d. t.b.d. t.b.d.
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm –1 +2 12
– minimum dBm –6 –1 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 8.2 8.2
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 0÷4 3÷11 13÷22
Chromatic dispersion:
– maximum ps/nm 6.6 800 1600
– minimum ps/nm n.a. n.a. t.b.d.
Maximum DGD ps/nm 30 30 30
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) dB 14 24 24
Maxim. discrete reflectance between S and R dB –27 –27 –27
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector PIN PIN PIN
Mean received power:
(@ BER= 10–12 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1 nm)
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –11 –14 –14
– maximum (overload) dBm –1 –1 –1
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 2 2 *)
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at R dB –14 –27 –27

t.b.d.= to be defined
n.a. = not applicable
*) = with 10dB attenuation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 479 / 531

531
 Table 60. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interface – P1L1–2D2 long–haul application

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–64 according to

not permitted without written authorization.

G.959
Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 9,953,280
Signal class NRZ 10G long–haul
Application code P1L1–2D2
Operating wavelength range nm 1530÷1565
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type SLM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum spectral power density mW/MHz t.b.d.
– maximum –20 dB width nm t.b.d.
– minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
– chirp parameter radians t.b.d.
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm +4
– minimum dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 11÷22
Chromatic dispersion:
– maximum ps/nm 1600
– minimum ps/nm t.b.d.
Maximum DGD ps/nm 30
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) dB 24
Maxim. discrete reflectance between S and R dB –27
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector PIN
Mean received power:
(@ BER= 10–12 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1 nm)
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –24
– maximum (overload) dBm –7
Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at R dB –27

t.b.d.= to be defined
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 480 / 531

531
 18.3.1.1 L–64.2 Application (Long Haul)

This is a single port board supporting the long haul application L–64.2. The optical components are not
pluggable, they are fixed on the board. A booster is integrated on the board, the booster is connected with
an optical cable on the front panel. No external booster is required.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

An external 10dB attenuator has to be used between the ILM output and the input of the booster.
not permitted without written authorization.

The L–64.2 board can be used for distances up to 80 km.

Figure 246. on page 481 shows the network block diagram for implementing L–64.2 application.

E/O 10dB
Tx Attenuator Booster

Framer externalpart

O/E
Rx

Figure 246. Long Haul Application (L–64.2)

18.3.1.2 V–64.2 Application (Very Long Haul)

V–64.2 Alcatel–Lucent solution is based on usage of interfaces with Forward Error Correction (FEC), Dis-
persion Compensation Module (DCM) and preamplifier. The DCM is a passive component without any
control functions. Up to two DCMs are located in a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). The DCU is an
external component, which is mounted as separate unit in the rack (refer to chapter 9.4 on page 77).
The V–64.2 board can be used for distances up to 120 km.

Figure 247. on page 481 shows the network block diagram for implementing V–64.2 application.

E/O
Tx

Framer FEC externalpart

O/E DCM Pre−

Rx ampl.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 247. Very Long Haul Application (V–64.2)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 481 / 531

531
 18.3.1.3 U–64.2 Application (Ultra Long Haul)

U–64.2 Alcatel–Lucent solution is based on usage of interfaces with FEC, DCMs, booster and preamplifi-
er. The board has the same function as the V–64.2 board with the addition of a booster and an additional
DCM.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The U–64.2 board can be used for distances up to 160 km.

not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 248. on page 482 shows the network block diagram for implementing U–64.2 application.

pumpfailure(PF)−>HWError
inputPowerLoss(IPL)−>notreported

E/O DCM Booster

Tx

Framer FEC
externalparts pumpfailure(PF)−>HWError
inputPowerLoss(IPL)−>notreported
LOS

O/E DCM Pre−

Rx ampl.

Figure 248. Ultra Long Haul Application (U–64.2)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 482 / 531

531
 Table 61. Parameters specified for STM–64 optical interfaces

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–64 according to

not permitted without written authorization.

Alcatel–Lucent proprietary
Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 9,953,280
Application code V–64.2 U–64.2
Operating wavelength range nm 1550.12 1550.12
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum spectral power density mW/MHz t.b.d. t.b.d.
– maximum –20 dB width nm t.b.d. t.b.d.
– minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 30
– chirp parameter radians 00.1 00.1
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm 3 12
– minimum dBm 0 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 20÷35 25÷44
Chromatic dispersion:
– maximum ps/nm 1000 1000
– minimum ps/nm –560 –560
Maximum DGD ps/nm t.b.d. t.b.d.
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) dB 24 24
Maxim. discrete reflectance between S and R dB –27 –27
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector PIN PIN
Mean received power:
(@ BER= 10–12 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1 nm)
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –33 –34
– maximum (overload) dBm –13.5 –13
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at R dB –27 –27

t.b.d.= to be defined
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 483 / 531

531
 Table 62. Parameters specified for 1000B–SX Optical Interface

CHARACTERISTICS VALUES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

DIGITAL SIGNAL GE interface according to IEEE 802.3

Nominal bit rate Gbps 1.250 Gbps
not permitted without written authorization.

Application code 1000B–SX

TX SIDE UNIT CONDITIONS MIN MAX
Output optical power dBm – –9.5 –4.0
Output optical power BOL
dBm – –8.5 –4.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
Operating wavelength range nm – 820 860
∆λ rms nm – – 0.85
Relative Intensity Noise dB/Hz – – –117
RX SIDE
Type of detector IN Ga As PIN
Sensitivity dBm * – –18.0
Sensitivity BOL
dBm * – –19.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
–12.5 (62.5µm)
Stressed Receiver Sensitivity dBm See IEEE 802.3 –
–13.5 (50µm)
Maximum input optical power dBm – – 0
Maximum input optical power BOL
dBm – – +1.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
Operating wavelength range nm – 770 860
Loss of signal – Assert Pin dBm – –30 –18.0
Loss of signal – Deassert Pin dBm – –30 –17.0
LOS Hysteresis dB – 1 4.0
Data Output Rise/Fall time ps – – 250
* With fiber: 550 m MMF 50 µm (500 MHz Km @ 850nm)
500 m MMF 50 µm (400 MHz Km @ 850nm)
275 m MMF 62.5 µm (200 MHz Km @ 850nm)
220 m MMF 62.5 µm (160 MHz Km @ 850nm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 484 / 531

531
 Table 63. Parameters specified for 1000B–LX Optical Interface

CHARACTERISTICS VALUES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

DIGITAL SIGNAL GE interface according to IEEE 802.3

Nominal bit rate Gbps 1.250 Gbps
not permitted without written authorization.

Application code 1000B–LX

TX SIDE UNIT CONDITIONS MIN MAX
Output optical power (SMF) dBm – –11.0 –3.0
Output optical power BOL (SMF)
dBm – –10.0 –3.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
Output optical power on MMF 50 &
dBm – –11.5 –3.0
62.5µm
Output optical power BOL on MMF
50 & 62.5µm (25ºC, nominal power dBm – –10.5 –3.0
supply)
Operating wavelength range nm – 1270 1355
∆λ rms nm – – 4.0
Relative Intensity Noise dB/Hz – – –120
RX SIDE
Type of detector IN Ga As PIN
Sensitivity dBm * – –20.0
Sensitivity BOL
dBm * – –21.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
Stressed Receiver Sensitivity dBm See IEEE 802.3 – –14.4
Maximum input optical power dBm – – –3.0
Maximum input optical power BOL
dBm – – –2.0
(25ºC, nominal power supply)
Operating wavelength range nm – 1270 1355
Loss of signal – Assert Pin dBm – –30 –21.0
Loss of signal – Deassert Pin dBm – –30 –20.0
LOS Hysteresis dB – 1 4.0
Data Output Rise/Fall time ps – – 175
* With fiber: 550 m MMF 50 µm (400 MHz Km @ 1300nm)
550 m MMF 62.5 µm (500 MHz Km @ 1300nm)
5000 m SMF 10 µm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 485 / 531

531
 Table 64. Parameters specified for 10GE–SR

PARAMETER UNIT MIN TYP MAX

Digital Signal 10GE according to IEEE 802.3ae
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Nominal bit rate (Kbit/s) 10,312,5

not permitted without written authorization.

Application code 10GBASE–SR

Optical Transmitter Data Output
Laser Safety Class Class 1 according to IEC 60825
Center wavelength nm 840 860
Optical average output power (Pout) dBm –7.3 > –6.3 –1
Pout in shut–down (Pout_sd) dBm –30
Optical modulation amplitude (OMA) dBm Note 1
Spectral width RMS nm Note 1
Extinction ratio dB 3
Eye mask IEEE 802.3ae–2002
ORL at MPI–S interface dB 12
RIN12OMA (Note 2) dB/Hz –128
Link power budget Note 4
Optical Receiver Data Input
Operating wavelength nm 840 860
Sensitivity @ BER=1e–12 (Note 3) dBm < –11.9 –9.9
Receiver Sensitivity in OMA dBm < –13.1 –11.1
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (Note 2) dBm –7.5
Receiver reflectance dB –14
Jitter tolerance IEEE 802.3ae–2002

Note 1: Conforms to IEEE 802.3ae–2002: Triple Tradeoff Curves (TTC) figure 52–3 and table 52–8
Note 2: Test pattern and procedure according to IEEE 802.3ae–2002
Note 3: Sensitivity in average power measured in back–to–back conditions
Note 4: Conforms to IEEE 802.3ae–2002, table 52–10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 486 / 531

531
 Table 65. Parameters specified for 10GE–LR,–ER,–ZR

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL 10GE according to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

IEEE 802.3ae
not permitted without written authorization.

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 10,312,5

Application code 10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-ZR
Operating wavelength range nm 1290÷1330 1530÷1565 1530÷1565
TRANSMITTER at reference point S
Source type SLM EA–ILM EA–ILM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum spectral power density mW/MHz t.b.d. t.b.d. t.b.d.
– maximum –20 dB width nm 1 t.b.d. t.b.d.
– minimum side mode suppression
dB 30 30 t.b.d.
ratio
– chirp parameter radians t.b.d. t.b.d. t.b.d.
Mean launch power:
– maximum dBm –1 +2 12
– minimum dBm –6 –1 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 8.2 8.2
OPTICAL PATH between S and R
Attenuation range dB 0÷4 3÷11 13÷22
Chromatic dispersion:
– maximum ps/nm 6.6 800 1600
– minimum ps/nm n.a. n.a. t.b.d.
Maximum DGD ps/nm 30 30 30
Minimum ORL at S (including connec-
dB 14 24 24
tors)
Maxim. discrete reflectance between S
dB –27 –27 –27
and R
RECEIVER at reference point R
Type of detector PIN PIN PIN
Mean received power:
(@ BER= 10–12 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1
nm)
– minimum (sensitivity) dBm –11 –14 –14
– maximum (overload) dBm –1 –1 –1
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 2 2
Maxim. reflectance of receiver mea-
dB –14 –27 –27
sured at R
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 487 / 531

531
 18.3.2 Optical Safety

18.3.2.1 Hazard Level classification

The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces is given in Table 66. on page 488.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60825–1 (1998) + Am. 2
(2001) and IEC 60825–2 (2000) or IEC 60825–1 (1998) and IEC 60825–2 (2000).

Table 66. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces

MODULE or PORT OPTICAL INTERFACE HAZARD LEVEL

STM–1 S–1.1 (short haul) 1
STM–1 L–1.1 (long haul) 1M
STM–1 L–1.2 (long haul) 1M
STM–4 S–4.1 (short haul) 1
STM–4 L–4.1 (long haul) 1M
STM–4 L–4.2 (long haul) 1M
STM–16 I–16.1 (intra–office) 1
STM–16 S–16.1 (short haul) 1
STM–16 L–16.1 (long haul) 1M
STM–16 L–16.2 (long haul) 1M
STM–64 I–64.1 (intra–office) 1
STM–64 S–64.2 (short haul) 1M
STM–64 L–64.2 (long haul) 1M
STM–64 V–64.2 (very long haul) 1M
STM–64 U–64.2 (ultra long haul) 1M
STM–64 L–64.2CF colored port (multi channel) 1M
GE 1000B–SX 1
GE 1000B–LX 1
GE 10GBASE–S 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 488 / 531

531
 18.3.2.2 Incorporated Laser Sources Characteristics

Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in Table 67. on page 489.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Table 67. Incorporated laser sources characteristics

not permitted without written authorization.

MODULE or OPTICAL WAVELENGTH MAX. OPT. POWER

PORT INTERFACE [nm] [mW]
STM–1 S–1.1 (short haul) 1261 ÷ 1360 0.16
STM–1 L–1.1 (long haul) 1280 ÷ 1335 1
STM–1 L–1.2 (long haul) 1480 ÷ 1580 1
STM–4 S–4.1 (short haul) 1274 ÷ 1356 0.16
STM–4 L–4.1 (long haul) 1280 ÷ 1335 1.6
STM–4 L–4.2 (long haul) 1480 ÷ 1580 1.6
STM–16 I–16.1 (intra–office) 1270 ÷ 1360 1
STM–16 S–16.1 (short haul) 1270 ÷ 1360 1
STM–16 L–16.1 (long haul) 1280 ÷ 1335 1.6
STM–16 L–16.2 (long haul) 1500 ÷ 1580 1.6
STM–64 I–64.1 (intra–office) 1290 ÷ 1330 0.8
STM–64 S–64.2 (short haul) 1530 ÷ 1565 1.6
STM–64 L–64.2 (long haul) 1530 ÷ 1565 16
STM–64 V–64.2 (very long haul) 1550.12 4.5
STM–64 U–64.2 (ultra long haul) 1550.12 16
GE 1000B–SX 820 ÷ 860 0.4
GE 1000B–LX 1270 ÷ 1355 0.5
GE 10GBASE–LX 840 ÷ 860 0.4

Note: the maximum optical power at the interfaces is in normal operating conditions and depends on set-
ting and calibration carried out during the factory test or installation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 489 / 531

531
 18.3.2.3 Location Type

The equipment shall be installed in “restricted locations” (industrial and commercial premises) or “con-
trolled locations” (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

18.3.2.4 Labelling
not permitted without written authorization.

The label are affixed in factory on this cover protection fibre.

Only the labels corresponding to the worst case at 2nd and 3rd window are put on the cover.

In the following description it is specified when the label shall be affixed by the customer.

The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1 (refer to Table 66. on page 488) carry the following
explanatory label (a multilingual label kit is also provided):

The label is put on the fibre protection cover of the following parts:

• STM–1 port with S–1.1 interface

• STM–4 port with S–4.1 interface
• STM–16 port with I–16.1 interface
• STM–16 port with S–16.1 interface
• STM–64 port with I–64.1 interface
• GE port with 1000Base SX
• GE port with 1000Base LX.

The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M (refer to Table 66. on page 488) carry the hazard
symbol label:

The label is affixed near the optical connectors on the front plate of the following interfaces:

• L–1.1 (STM–1 port)

• L–1.2 (STM–1 port)
• L–4.1 (STM–4 port)
• L–4.2 (STM–4 port)
• L–16.1 (STM–16 port)
• L–16.2 (STM–16 port)
• S–64.2 (STM–64 port)
• L–64.2 (STM–64 port)
• L–64.2 CF (colored STM–64 port multi channel)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• V–64.2 (STM–64 port)

• U–64.2 (STM–64 port)

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 490 / 531

531
 The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M and operate at 2nd window (refer to Table 66. on
page 488), carry the following explanatory label (a multilingual label kit is also provided):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The label is affixed on the fibre protection cover of the following parts:

• STM–1 port with L–1.1 interface

• STM–4 port with L–4.1 interface
• STM–16 port with L–16.1 interface.

The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M and operate at 3rd window (refer to Table 66. on
page 488), carry the following explanatory label (a multilingual label kit is also provided):

The label is affixed on the fibre protection cover of the following parts:

• STM–1 port with L–1.2 interface

• STM–4 port with L–4.2 interface
• STM–16 port with L–16.2 interface
• STM–64 port with S–64.2 interface
• STM–64 port with L–64.2 colored interface (multi channel)
• STM–64 port with V–64.2 interface
• STM–64 port with U–64.2 interface.

The multilingual label kit, for STM–1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with the
module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.

For all other units the multilingual label kit is inserted in the pre–package.

The multilingual label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above depicted in
the following languages:
• Italian
• French
• Spanish
• German.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 491 / 531

531
 18.3.2.5 Apertures and Fibre Connectors

The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
in para. 10.3 on page 103.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

18.3.2.6 Engineering Design Features

not permitted without written authorization.

In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.

The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.

In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITU–T G.958 Rec.
is implemented on STM–N ports.

The shutdown timing is 550 ± 50 ms; the reactivation timing is less than 850 ms.

18.3.2.7 Safety Instructions

The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning concern-
ing precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in the handbook
“Safety Instructions”.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 492 / 531

531
 18.4 Power Supply Characteristics

Input Voltage (Battery): –48/–60 VDC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

in according to ETSI EN 300 132–2 V2.1.2 (2003–09)

not permitted without written authorization.

Functional Protection Earth: FPE–2 wire or FPE–3 wire

Max. power consumption: 1678MCC Shelf: 2000 W maximum

1670SM Shelf: 1000 W maximum
1662SMC Shelf: 500 W maximum
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 493 / 531

531
 18.5 Alarm Characteristics

18.5.1 Units Alarms

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Each port board or access board of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) on the front
not permitted without written authorization.

coverplate.

This LED indicates:

• when red, internal failure

• when green, in service unit.

18.5.2 Centralized Equipment Alarms

All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the First Level Controller (FLC) board which will
deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate).
Specifically:

• Red LED (4): detection of an URGENT alarm (MAJOR)

• Red LED (5): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm (MINOR)
• Yellow LED (7): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forc-
ing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS.
• Yellow LED (8): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm (WARNING)
• Yellow LED (6): alarm condition ATTENDED.

Refer to para. 10.3 on page 103, where the front view of each unit and the LED locations are illustrated.

Note:
On the Craft Terminal (CT) and on the Operation System (OS) application the URGENT (URG), NOT UR-
GENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the relation between this two ter-
minology is explained in Table 68. on page 494.

Table 68. Relation between Alarm severity terminology

Alarm severity terminology Alarm severity terminology

on CT and OS used for EC
CRITICAL or MAJOR URG , T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR NURG, , T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used) ––

18.5.3 Trouble–shooting

The 1678MCC equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to service,
activate and trouble–shoot the equipment.
Trouble–shoot procedure for the equipment and details of the alarms for each board and relevant indica-
tions are described in the Operator’s Troubleshooting and Maintenance Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Connection with the PC is achieved through connector available on Equipment Controller board.

The board can be connected to an Operations System associated to the Transmission Management Net-
work in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 494 / 531

531
 18.6 Mechanical Characteristics

18.6.1 1678MCC Rack

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

H
Equipment practice 1678MCC rack according to
D
(mechanical compatibility) ETS 300 119 – 2
W

Rack size (mm) 600 W x 300 D x 2200 H

Rack cabling Vertical between rack and subrack – Front access

Back–to–back installation Yes

18.6.2 OED Rack

Equipment practice Optinex rack according to

(mechanical compatibility) ETS 300 119 – 2

Rack size (mm) 600 W x 300 D x 2200 H

Rack cabling Vertical between rack and subrack – Front access

Back–to–back installation Yes

18.6.3 1678MCC Main Shelf

Shelf size (mm) 533 W x 294 D x 674 H

(including cable channel)

Board size (mm) Traffic Port board: 217.5 D x 475 H

Cooling Forced, heat pipe technique

Electrical Connectors IEC 807 (Sub–D)

IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 495 / 531

531
 18.6.4 1678MCC Main Shelf (SONET)

Shelf size (mm) 533 W x 294 D x 684 H

(including cable channel and Dust filter)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Board size (mm) Traffic Port board: 217.5 D x 475 H

Cooling Forced, heat pipe technique

Electrical Connectors IEC 807 (Sub–D)

IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)

18.6.5 1670SM Shelf

Shelf size (mm) Main Shelf 533 W x 280 D x 875 H

FANs Subrack 533 W x 280 D x 75 H

Board size (mm) Port board: 213 D x 265 H

Access board: 92 D x 265 H
FANs Unit: 495 W x 268.5 D x 28.5 H

Cooling Forced

Electrical Connectors IEC 807 (Sub–D)

IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)

18.6.6 1662SMC Shelf

Shelf size (mm) Main Shelf 470 W x 250 D x 390 H

FANs Subrack 533 W x 280 D x 110 H

Board size (mm) 213 D x 265 H

Cooling Forced

Electrical Connectors IEC 603/DIN 41612

IEC 807 (Sub–D)
IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)
BNC 50 Ω
RJ11
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 496 / 531

531
 18.7 Environmental Conditions

Main environmental aspects of Alcatel–Lucent products are:

– Energy consumption during manufacturing and use,

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Materials harmfulness and recyclability,

not permitted without written authorization.

– Emissions to air, water or soil related to the manufacturing and the use of the product,
– Electromagnetic (EM) emissions,
– Value recovery at the product end of life.

18.7.1 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

The marking printed on the shelf (refer to Figure 1. on page 28 and Table 7. on page 27) denotes
compliancy with the Directive 2002/96/EC On Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

The general principle is the producer responsibility in the management of the products he puts on the mar-
ket when discarded by the owner. The producer responsibility now covers the end of life of the products
sold.

The European directive is effective in a country once transposed. The starting date for the producer re-
sponsibility for the European text is August 13, 2005.

All Alcatel–Lucent products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/
EC) i.e. ”IT and Telecommunication equipment” under item ”other products transmitting sound, images
or other information by telecommunications.”

Alcatel–Lucent products fall under WEEE directive name: ”Other product or equipment of transmitting
sound, images or other information by telecommunications” in Annex 1B.

This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.

18.7.2 Acoustical noise

The acoustical noise level of the product complies with:

– ETS 300 753 Environmental Class 3.1 for attended telecommunication equipment rooms (maximum
sound level 7.2 bels)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 497 / 531

531
 18.7.3 Climatic for Operating Conditions

The 1678MCC Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Standards.

It uses FAN units.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The functionality of the 1678MCC Equipment, vs. Temperature, is in compliance with:

not permitted without written authorization.

ETS 300 019–1–3 : February 1992 , class 3.1

Class 3.1 : Temperature–controlled locations.

This class applies to a weather protected location having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e. may be only partially weather protected. The
effect of direct solar radiation and heat trap conditions exist.
The climatogram is shown in Figure 249. on page 499.

This class applies to locations:

• where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not sub-
jected to condensed water, precipitation, water from sources other than rain or icing;

• without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special
product design, or installations at locations of such construction that mould growth and attacks
by animals, etc. are not probable;

• with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scat-
tered over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;

• without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated
in proximity to sources of sand or dust;

• with insignificant vibration and shock.

The conditions of this class may be found in:

• normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
• offices;
• shops;
• workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
• telecommunication centers;
• storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 498 / 531

531
 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

absolute air humidity [ g/m 3 ]

not permitted without written authorization.

air temperature [ o C ]
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
25

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Normal Conditions
Exceptional Conditions

ÄÄÄ relative air humidity [ % ]

ÄÄÄ Values outside this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10 %.

Exceptional climatic limits.

Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits have a probability of occurrence of less then 1 %.

Figure 249. Climatogram for Class 3.1

Table 69. Climate parameters for environmental class 3.1

Environmental parameter Unit 3.1

(A) Low air temperature °C +5

(B) High air temperature °C + 40
(C) Low relative humidity % 5
(D) High relative humidity % 85
(E) Low absolute humidity g/m3 1
(F) High absolute humidity g/m3 25
(G) Rate of change of temperature (Note 1) °C/min 0.5
(H) Low air pressure kPa 70
(I) High air pressure (Note 2) kPa 106
(J) Solar radiation W/m2 700
(K) Heat radiation W/m2 600
(L) Movement of the surrounding air (Note 3) m/s 5
(M) Conditions of condensation none no
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(N) Conditions of winddriven rain, snow, hail, etc. none no

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 499 / 531

531
 Environmental parameter Unit 3.1

(O) Conditions of water from sources other than rain none no

(P) Conditions of icing none no
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Note 1 : Averaged over a period of 5 minutes.

Note 2 : Conditions in mines are not considered.
Note 3 : A cooling system based on non–assisted convection may be disturbed by adverse
movement of the surrounding air.

18.7.4 Storage

The 1678MCC equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:

ETS 300 019–1–1 : February 1992, class 1.2

Class 1.2 : weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage locations.

This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control.
The location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed.
The climatogram is shown on Figure 250. on page 501.

This class applies to storage locations:

• where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation. They may
also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, win-
dows or other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to ic-
ing. They may also be subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
• where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
• with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scat-
tered over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
• in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
• with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.

The conditions of this class may occur in:

• unattended buildings
• some entrances of buildings
• some garages and shacks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 500 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

absolute air humidity [ g/m 3 ]

29
air temperature [ o C ]

0.5

relative air humidity [ % ]

Figure 250. Climatogram for Class 1.2

Table 70. Climate parameters for environmental class 1.2

Environmental parameter Unit 1.2

(A) Low air temperature (Note 1) °C – 25

(B) High air temperature (Note 1) °C + 55
(C) Low relative humidity (Note 1) % 10
(D) High relative humidity (Note 1) % 100
(E) Low absolute humidity (Note 1) g/m3 0.5
(F) High absolute humidity (Note 1) g/m3 29
(G) Rain intensity mm/min no
(H) Rate of change of temperature (Note 2) °C/min 0.5
(I) Low air pressure (Note 3) kPa 70
(J) High air pressure (Note 4) kPa 106
(K) Solar radiation W/m2 1120
(L) Heat radiation W/m2 (Note 7)
(M) Movement of the surrounding air m/s 30
(N) Conditions of condensation none yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(O) Conditions of precipitation (rain, snow, hail, etc.) none yes (Note 6)
(P) Low rain temperature (Note 5) °C no

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 501 / 531

531
 Environmental parameter Unit 1.2

(Q) Conditions of water from sources other than rain none dripping water
(R) Conditions of icing and frosting none yes
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Note 1 : For simultaneous occurrence of parameters (A) to (F) see Figure 250.
Note 2 : Averaged over a period of 5 minutes.
Note 3 : 70 kPa represent a limit value for open–air storage, normally at about 3 000 m.
Note 4 : Conditions in mines are not considered.
Note 5 : This rain temperature should be considered together with high air temperature (B) and
solar radiation (K). The cooling effect of the rain has to be considered in connection with
the surface temperature of the equipment.
Note 6 : Applies to wind–driven precipitation.
Note 7 : Conditions of heat radiation, e.g. in the vicinity of room heating systems.

18.7.5 Transportation

The 1678MCC equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation:

ETS 300 019–1–2 : February 1992, class 2.2

Class 2.2 : Careful transportation (refer to Table 71. on page 503).

This class applies to transportation where special cars has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.

Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shock–reducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.

Extension of extreme low temperature during transportation is permitted for the 1678MCC equipment in
its standard packing:

at –40° C for 72 hours maximum

without damaging the optical interfaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 502 / 531

531
 Table 71. Climatic conditions for environmental classes 2.1/2.2

Environmental parameter Unit 2.1 and 2.2

°C
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

(A) low temperature air – 25

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

High temperature, air in

(B) °C + 70
unventilated enclosures (Note 1)
High temperature, air in
(C) °C + 40
ventilated enclosures or outdoor air (Note 2)
(D) Change of temperature air/air (Note 3) °C –25 / +30
(E) Change of temperature air/water (Note 3) °C +40 / +5
Relative humidity, not combined with rapid % 95
(F)
temperature changes °C +40
Relative humidity, combined with rapid % 95
(G) temperature changes air/air, at high relative
humidity (Note 3, 6) °C –25 / +30
Absolute humidity, combined with rapid g/m3 60
(H) temperature changes: air/air at high water
content (Note 4) °C +70 / +15
(I) Low air pressure kPa 70
(J) Change of air pressure kPa/min no
(K) Movement of the surrounding medium, air m/s 20
(L) Precipitation rain mm/min 6 (Note 7)
(M) Radiation, solar W/m2 1120
(N) Radiation, heat W/m2 600
(O) Water from sources other than rain (Note 5) m/s 1 (Note 7)
(P) Wetness none conditions of wet surfaces

Note 1 : The high temperature of the surfaces of a product may be influenced by both the
surrounding air temperature, given here, and the solar radiation through a window or
another opening.
Note 2 : The high temperature of the surface of a product is influenced by the surrounding air
temperature, given here, and the solar radiation defined below.
Note 3 : A direct transfer of the product between the two given temperature is presumed.
Note 4 : The product is assumed to be subjected to a rapid decrease of temperature only (no
rapid increase). The figures of water content apply to temperatures down to the
dew–point; at lower temperatures the relative humidity is assumed to be approximately
100 %.
Note 5 : The figure indicates the velocity of water and not the height of water accumulated.
Note 6 : Occurrence of condensation.
Note 7 : For short duration only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

18.7.6 EMI/EMC Condition

For the EMI/EMC condition refer to para. 2.1 on page 23 and para. 4.1 on page 25.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 503 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING

504 / 531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
505 / 531
 19 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING

19.1 WEEE general Information

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

According to the European directive (2002/96/EC) Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment, from August
not permitted without written authorization.

13, 2005 the ”producer” of the equipment being sold, unless otherwise specified in the contract with the
Customer, is responsible for collecting and treating Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Equipment put on the market after August 13, 2005 have a label (refer to paragraph 4.4 on page 27) affixed
on the product. The presence of the black label indicates the product has been put on the market after
after August 13, 2005.

In next paragraphs is given a description example of how to disassemble an equipment; the same principle
can be applied to all the shelves and units composing the equipment.

The unit chosen for disassembly is one of the most complex.

– Paragraph 19.2 describes the equipment disassembly; in detail:

• paragraph 19.2.1 on page 507 lists the tools necessary for disassembly

• paragraph 19.2.2 on page 508 describes the shelf disassembly

• paragraph 19.2.3 on page 515 describes the unit disassembly

• paragraph 19.2.4 on page 525 describes the procedure to apply in order to manage Hazardous
materials and components (example battery)

– Paragraph 19.3 on page 527 reports the ECO declaration info.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 506 / 531

531
 19.2 How to disassembly equipment

This equipment is designed for easy disassembly, by using screws and rivets for mechanical assembly
of shelves and modules. The variety of screw types is minimized.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Tools necessary for shelf and units disassembly are reported in paragraph 19.2.1 on page 507.
not permitted without written authorization.

The disassembly process depends on the respective recycling methods and can be derived from the
delivered assembly instructions of the product.

19.2.1 Tools necessary for Disassembly

The following tools are necessary for unit disassembly:

– # T9 TORX screw driver

– # T20 TORX screw driver
– Crosshead screw driver
– Wrench #
– Scissors
– Protection gloves
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 507 / 531

531
 19.2.2 Shelf Disassembly

In Figure 251. on page 508 is shown an example of shelf. The same rules can be applied to the specific
equipment to be dismantled.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In order to disassemble the shelf first remove the boards eventually present, included termination bus.
not permitted without written authorization.

Shelf Front View Shelf Rear View

Figure 251. Shelf Front and Rear View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 508 / 531

531
 Procedure:

– Remove the two screws (A) in order to disassemble the handle as reported in Figure 252. on
page 509
– Repeat the same procedure on the other handle.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Separate the two plastic blocks of the handle as reported in Figure 252. on page 509.
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 252. Handle Removal and Disassembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 509 / 531

531
 – Unscrew all the screws present on rear cover as reported in Figure 253. (dashed lines) on page 510.

– Remove the rear cover in order to access the shelf Back Panel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 253. Rear Cover Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 510 / 531

531
 – Unscrew all the screws fastening the Back Panel to the mechanical structure of the shelf as indicated
in Figure 254. on page 511 (dashed line).

– Remove the Back Panel from the shelf mechanical structure.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 254. Back Panel Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 511 / 531

531
 – Remove the upper and lower guides from the shelf access area by unscrewing the relevant screws
as indicated in Figure 255. on page 512.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 255. Upper and Lower Guides Plane Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 512 / 531

531
 – Remove the side wall by unscrewing the relevant screw as indicated in Figure 256. on page 513.

– Remove the two contact springs from the side wall as indicated in Figure 257. on page 514 (refer to
chapter 19.2.4 on page 525 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 256. Side Wall Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 513 / 531

531
 – Remove the two guides of the “basic area” and the two optical fiber ducts by pulling them out as
indicated in Figure 257. on page 514.

– Unscrew all the screws present on the other “side wall” in order to complete the shelf disassembly.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 257. Optical Fiber Duct, Guides and Contact Spring Removal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 514 / 531

531
 19.2.3 Unit Disassembly

In the following figures is shown an example of unit. The same rules can be applied to the specific units
to be dismantled.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Procedure:
not permitted without written authorization.

– Remove the two screws (A) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 258. on page 515.

Figure 258. Side Coverplate Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 515 / 531

531
 – Remove the screws (B) that fix the two levers and subsequently pull out them from the front plate
as indicated in Figure 259. on page 516.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 259. Levers Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 516 / 531

531
 – Unscrew and extract the two optical connectors (C) as indicated Figure 260. on page 517.

– Remove the screw (D) fixing the connectors support as indicated in Figure 260. on page 517.

– Rotate the connectors support (E) and pull it sideways to be removed as indicated Figure 260. on
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

page 517.
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 260. Optical Connectors Support Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 517 / 531

531
 – Remove the two screws (F) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 261. on page 518.

– Extract from the top the contact spring (G) as indicated in Figure 261. on page 518 (refer to
chapter 19.2.4 on page 525 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Extract the fibers from the cavity (H) as indicated in Figure 261. on page 518.
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 261. Side Coverplate and Contact Spring Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 518 / 531

531
 – Disconnect the two flat cables (M) as indicated in Figure 262. on page 519.

– Unscrew (L) connectors with the aid of a wrench as indicated Figure 262. on page 519.

– Remove the fibers (N) from supports pulling them out Figure 262. on page 519.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 262. Internal Connectors Removal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 519 / 531

531
 – Remove the two screws (O) on the other side of the board that fixes the dissipator to the Printed
Circuit Board (PCB) as indicated in Figure 263. on page 520.

– The dissipator can now be removed (refer to Figure 264. on page 521).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 263. Dissipator Removal

– Remove the screws (P) from dissipator as indicated in Figure 264. on page 521.

– Now the two modules on the other side of the dissipator are free to be removed (refer to
Figure 266. on page 522);

Pay attention during modules removal because of white conductive paste (refer to chapter
19.2.4 on page 525 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).

– Remove the plastic part (X) in Figure 265. on page 521 by unscrewing the screw present on the rear
side of the dissipator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 520 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 264. Modules Removal from Dissipator

– Remove the screws (Q) and (R) that fix the daughter board and pull it out from the mother board (refer
to Figure 265. on page 521).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Figure 265. Daughter Board Removal

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 521 / 531

531
 – Cutaway gold plated connector (S) from daughter board (refer to Figure 266. on page 522).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 266. Gold Connector Removal

– Remove all internal cables as indicated in Figure 267. on page 523. To remove cables it is enough
to pull them out from their support.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 522 / 531

531
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 267. Internal Cables Removal

– Remove screws (T) that fix the metal support to the mother board as indicated in Figure 268. on
page 524.

– Remove the metal support.

– Cutaway the gold plated connector (U) from mother board.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 523 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Figure 268. Connector metal Support Removal

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
524 / 531
 19.2.4 Hazardous Materials and Components

Table 72. on page 525 lists the presence or not of hazardous substance/components.

Note: The system cabling is designed for reduced halogen content. All the traffic cabling is fully PVC free.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 72. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment

Materials/Substances Presence Where

in the
Equipment
Batteries External
NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Batteries Internal
NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Mercury NO
Cadmium NO
Capacitors with PCBs NO
Capacitors with substance of concern +
height > 25 mm, diameter > 25 mm or NO
proportionately similar volume
Gas discharge lamps NO
Mercury containing Backlighting lamps NO
Plastic containing brominated flame retar- NO
dants other than in Printed Circuit Assem-
blies
Liquid Crystal Displays with a surface
NO
greater than 100 cm2
Asbestos NO
Refractory ceramic fibres NO
In all units where dissipators are present a
withe thermal conductive paste is used in
between mechanical parts.
In Figure 265. on page 521 an example is
shown.
Thermal conductive paste YES
Note: Protective plastic gloves must be
used in order to avoid contact between
hands and thermal conductive paste. Pay
attention to avoid contact of thermal con-
ductive paste with eyes.
Radio–active substances NO
Beryllium Oxide NO
Refer to Figure 257. on page 514 and
Figure 261. on page 518 point G.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Note: Copper–beryllium contact spring

Other forms of Beryllium YES
must be separated from other material
and must be fused in a specific regulated
environment.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 525 / 531

531
 Materials/Substances Presence Where
in the
Equipment
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Pressure volume NO
not permitted without written authorization.

Liquids volume NO
Gasses volume NO
“Hidden” mechanical springs or other
NO
equivalent parts
Ozone depleting substances, according to
those categories that are already banned NO
in the Montreal protocol.
Chloroparaffins with chain length 10–13 C
atoms, chlorination greater than 50% con-
NO
tained in mechanical plastic parts heavier
than 25g,
Lead contained in mechanical parts heavi-
NO
er than 25 g.
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or po-
NO
lychlorinated terphenyls (PCT).
Polybrominated biphenyls and their ethers
(CAS no. 32534–81–9, CAS no.
32536–52–0, CAS no. 1163–19–5, CAS
NO
no.13554–09–6) contained in mechanical
parts heavier than 25 g, in concentrations
exceeding the natural background levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 526 / 531

531
 19.3 ECO Declaration

The 1678 MCC is the next generation Broadband and Wideband Cross Connect. Addressing transmission
Metro & Core networks, it combines unmatched density and high capacity together with data–aware
capabilities.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Thanks to its density, it allows for a modernization of Central Offices and concentrate in one single node
not permitted without written authorization.

multi–ring features (evolution of 1670SM), cross–connect functionalities like restoration and GMPLS
(evolution of 1674 Lambda Gate), as well as data functionality (along the lines of OMSN ISA features).
All Central Office required transport functions are integrated in one node. This provides operators with full
network flexibility at a minimum cost.

Weight and Dimensional Characteristics

Equipment Type No Dimensions Weight

depth x width x height
[in mm]
Rack 300 D x 600 W x 2200 H 49 kg
1
inclusive TRU
OED 1662SMC 250 D x 470 W x 390 H 27 kg
1
fully equipped
OED 1670SM 280 D x 533 W x 850 H 65 kg
1
fully equipped
Main 1678MCC/LO 294 D x 533 W x 575 H 60 kg
1
fully equipped
Rack (Optinex) 300 D x 600 W x 2200 H 49 kg
1
inclusive NGTRU

EXTENSION OF SYSTEM LIFETIME

The product is designed to ensure an outstanding quality of service through very high traffic transmission,
connection and protection performances and minimum service interruption.
The life utility is at least 5 years. This means that maintenance will be assured for at least 5 years.

The system architecture facilitates future extendibility and upgradeability:

– On–site configuration changes as e.g. extension of the node traffic capacity without re–cabling of
interconnections.

– Implementation of new features and functionalities by remote Software download.

The terms and conditions of warranty, service availability and spare parts availability are individually
agreed between Alcatel–Lucent and the customer and are part of the relevant contractual commitments.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 527 / 531

531
 POWER CONSUMPTION

The product is designed for low power consumption. Developing new components with very high
integration density and low voltage supply leads to a significant reduction of power consumption.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Depending on the number and type of I/O ports the power consumption may vary in a wide range. The
not permitted without written authorization.

power consumption of the several boards is shown in the following table.

Table 73. Power Consumption

Power con-
Main LO ext. OED OED
Configuration of PBAs sumption
1678MCC Shelf 1670SM 1662SMC
[W] (per item)
1678MCC Shelf 0 x x
Matrix 640 Gbit/s 130 x
Matrix 320 Gbit/s 130 x
Matrix 160 Gbit/s 130 x
LAX40 70 x
LAX20 52 x
FLCCONGI 30 x
FLCCONGI enhanced 37 x
FLCSERVICE 30 x
FLCSERVICE enhanced 37 x
Power Supply Filter 18 x x
Termination Bus 3 x x
16xSTM–1 72 x
16xSTM–1/4 72 x
4xSTM–16 60 x
8xSTM–16 60 x
16xSTM–16 76 x
LAC40 76 x
Opto TRX SFP I/S/L–16 1.5 x
1xL–64.2 46 x
1xV–64.2 48 x
1xU–64.2 53 x
4xSTM–64 XFP 95 x
2xSTM–64 XFP 70 x
Opto TRX I64.2 XFP 3.5 x
Opto TRX S64.2 XFP 3.5 x
Opto TRX S64.2 XFP Ext. 6.5 x
4xGE 58 x
8xGE 58 x
16xGE 70 x
2x10GE 107 x
4x10GE 157 x
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Step–up Converter in NGTRU 21

Bypass module in NGTRU 1

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 528 / 531

531
 Power con-
Main LO ext. OED OED
Configuration of PBAs sumption
1678MCC Shelf 1670SM 1662SMC
[W] (per item)
1678MCC FAN 80 x x
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LAN switch (separate shelf) 35

LA20 116 x
LX160 106 x
ALM 3 x
1670SM Shelf 0 x
CONGIHC 12 x
Matrix Hi–Cap 100 x
Termination Bus 1670 2 x
HCLINKE 24 x
2x140/STM–1 opt./elect. Adapter 0.5 x
4x140/STM–1 opt./elect. Adapter 12 x
16xSTM–1 opt./elect. Adapter 25 x
16xSTM–1 electrical Access 24 x
2xSTM–4 Access 9 x
4xSTM–4 Port 24 x
HPROT16 0.5 x
12xSTM–1 opt. Access compact 22 x
16xSTM–1 opt. Port compact 12 x
1670 FAN Unit 30 x
1662SMC Shelf 0 x
CONGI 6 x
T_Bus 2 x
Access 63x2Mbit/s 2 x
63x2Mbit/s PORT 12 x
LPROT 1 x
SYNTH16 51 x
FAN Shelf 0 x
FAN Unit 20 x

RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION

Regarding conformance with radio frequency emission requirements, the product complies with:

– European directive 89/336/EEC (EMC–directive)

– ETS 300 386 V1.3.2 (Ed05/2003)

ACOUSTICAL NOISE

The acoustical noise level of the product measured according to ISO 7779 and ISO 3745 was 7.93 bels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 529 / 531

531
 MATERIALS

The product does not contain:

– Asbestos,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Cadmium,
not permitted without written authorization.

– Mercury,
– Ozone depleting substances, according to those categories that are already banned in the Montreal
protocol,
– Chloroparaffins with chain length 10–13 C atoms, chlorination greater than 50% contained in
mechanical plastic parts heavier than 25g,
– Lead contained in mechanical parts heavier than 25g,
– Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or polychlorinated terphenyls (PCT),
– Polybrominated biphenyls and their ethers (CAS no. 32534–81–9, CAS no. 32536–52–0, CAS no
1163–19–5, CAS no. 13654–09–6) contained in mechanical parts heavier than 25g,

in concentrations exceeding the natural background levels.

The system cabling is designed for reduced halogen content.

DISASSEMBLY

The product is designed for easy disassembly, by using screws and rivets for mechanical assembly of
racks and modules. The variety of types of screws is minimized. No particular tools are needed for the
disassembly of the racks and shelves/subracks. The disassembly process depends on the respective
recycling methods and can be derived from the delivered assembly instructions of the product.

BATTERIES

The product requires no backup batteries.

PACKAGING

The packaging of the product complies with the directive 94/62/EEC concerning packaging and packaging
waste. Depending on the means of transportation the racks are packed in a cardboard or wooden box,
which can easily be recycled after use. Environmentally harmful materials are not used for packaging. The
packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11 469. If required by the customer and agreed by both
parties, Alcatel–Lucent can take care of the proper disposal of all packaging materials.

TAKE BACK INFORMATION

On request of customers, Alcatel–Lucent can take care of the take back of depreciated equipment and
of the ecological safe and appropriate disposal under conditions to be agreed.
For that purpose Alcatel–Lucent co–operates with qualified companies.

DOCUMENTATION

In order to reduce paper consumption for Customer Documentation, Alcatel–Lucent delivers the Generic
Customer Documentation as a CD–ROM. The CD–ROM contains interactive HW Descriptions, SW
Descriptions, Functional Descriptions, Maintenance Manuals and User Guides. This allows the operator
to put the documentation on a server accessible by all relevant people in the organization without any
additional paper copies.

Additionally more specific documentations as e.g. information about products and solutions, services and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

support, training events etc. will be provided by means of Alcatel–Lucent website accessible by all
customers. This will allow distribution of up–to–date information very quickly and without wasting natural
resources.

ED 03

3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA 530 / 531

531
 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
END OF DOCUMENT

531
3AG 24163 BEAA PCZZA
531 / 531